Civil Specification PDF

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST
GENERAL SPECIFICATION SECTION INDEX 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. (See end of Specification for Detailed Index) 02 - 05 06 - 07 08 - 17 18 - 56 57 - 63 64 - 70 71 - 78 79 - 191 192 - 198 199 - 205 206 - 208 209 - 215 216 - 223 224 - 228 229 - 237 238 - 256 257 - 272 273 - 306 307 - 312 313 - 315 316 - 329 330 - 351 352 - 364 365 - 367 368 - 371 372 - 373 374 375 376 - 403
General Requirements Demolitions and Alterations Excavation and Earthwork Concrete Work Block work Protection of Substructure Roofing Wood Work / Carpentry and Joinery Structural Steelwork and Metalwork Floor Wall and Ceiling Finishings Glazing Painting and Decorating Specialist Painting & Decorating & Gold Plating Marble & Granite Works External Works Building Services - General Air Conditioning and Ventilation Piped Services Thermal and Acoustic Insulation Electrical Services H.V.Distribution and Sub-Station L.V.Distribution Lighting Distribution and Fittings Telephone System Fire Alarm System TV Central Antenna and Sound System Call Bell System Lightning Protection System Detailed Index
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 Specifications & Drawings a) This Specification shall be read in conjunction with the drawings and Standard Contract Document and they should be taken as mutually explanatory of one another. Where detail drawings are provided these should be taken in preference to small scale drawings. Where further information is required the Contractor shall refer this to the Engineer. This Specification should be read in conjunction with the Bills of Quantities where attached which may refer to special items not covered by this Specification and any other matters pertaining to the specific project. Where there is a variance between the Specification and the drawings, such differences shall be referred to the Engineer who shall issue instructions thereon as set out in Clause 5 (2) of the Conditions of Contract. The importance of reading this Specification in its entirety is emphasized. Some items/operations are included in the Specification, but may not have been shown on drawings. No claim will be entertained for lack of knowledge or non-awareness of items contained within this document.
b)
c)
d)
e)
1.1.2 Abbreviations a) The following abbreviations used within these contract documents are defined as follows: BSS CP ASTM CIF IEE CIBSE DOE British Standard Specification. British Standard Code of Practice. American Standard for Testing Materials. Cost Insurance and Freight. Institution of Electrical Engineers. Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Directorate of Electricity.
1.1.3 Standard of Workmanship & Materials a) All work shall be executed with the best Workmanship and to standard practice. Relevant BS's and CP's shall be followed unless otherwise indicated in accompanying drawings/Specifications or where otherwise directed by the Engineer. b) Reference to BS which shall refer to the edition current at the time, shall not preclude the use of materials from sources where other standards apply, but no
GENERAL SPECIFICATION AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST materials to be incorporated in the works shall be in any respect inferior to those which specifically comply with the BS. c) Should the Engineer discover on the works any materials other than those approved, he may order their removal from the site, including the demolition of any works already built with these materials. 1.1.4 Proprietary Materials a) All proprietary materials incorporated in the Works shall be fixed or applied strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. Where proprietary materials are referred to in this Specification the intention is to establish the type and quality of materials required. Similar materials of equal and alternative manufacture may be offered in substitution for prior approval of the Engineer.
b)
1.1.5 Local Materials All naturally occurring local materials used in the Works shall be from sources approved by the Government of Sultanate of Oman. 1.1.6 Storage of Materials All materials to be used in the permanent works shall be stored on racks or supports, in bins, under cover, etc., as appropriate to prevent deterioration or damage from any cause whatsoever, Storage arrangements for specific materials shall be as approved by the Engineer. 1.1.7 Materials Generally Where materials, products and workmanship are not fully specified they shall be suitable for the purpose of the works stated in or reasonably to be inferred from the Contract Documents, and in accordance with good building practice, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.1.8 Approval of Materials and Samples a) Where approval of products or materials is specified, the Contractor shall submit samples or other evidence of suitability. The Contractor shall not confirm orders or use materials until approval has been obtained. Approved samples shall be retained on site for comparison with products and materials used in the works and shall only be removed when no longer required. Where samples of finished work are specified, the Contractor shall obtain approval of stated characteristic(s) before proceeding with the Works and shall retain approved samples on site for comparison with the works.
AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
b)
c)
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Samples, which are not part of the finished works, shall be removed when no longer required. d) Submission of samples shall be made at such times as to allow sufficient time for approval to be given and on no account will delays to the work be accepted where caused by failure in obtaining approval by the Engineer.
1.1.9 Single Source Where a choice of manufacturer or source of supply is allowed for any particular product or material, the whole quantity required to complete the work must be of the same type, manufacturer and/or source. Do not change without approval. 1.1.10 Inspection and Testing a) Whenever considered desirable Inspectors may be sent to the source of supply or Manufacturer's works to test the materials or supervise their production. Materials shall be tested before leaving the supplier's premises or Manufacturer's works as well as after delivery to the works. Should it be decided not to send an Inspector to the source of supply or Manufacturer's works, the Contractor shall obtain from the Supplier or Manufacturer, Certificates of Tests etc., showing that the materials have been tested in accordance with the requirements of this Specification but neither the omission to send an Inspector nor the production of Certificates of Tests as aforesaid, shall effect the power of the Engineer to reject after delivery materials found not to be suitable or not in accordance with the Specification. The Contractor shall allow reasonable time for the Engineer to make arrangements for inspection and give permission for despatch to the site. Delay to the Works arising from late notification of such details will not be accepted as reason for delay in completion of the works.
b)
c)
1.1.11 Test Certificates All Manufacturer's certificates of test, proof sheets, mill sheets, etc., (in the English Language) showing that the materials have been tested in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate BS, other relevant standard or this Specification, shall be supplied free of charge, if required by the Engineer. 1.1.12 Name of Manufacturers and Copies of Orders Before ordering materials of any description for the permanent Works, the Contractor shall if required by the Engineer submit to him for approval the names and addresses of the Manufacturers and Suppliers proposed and source of material, and shall afterwards provide copy of the orders given by the Contractor for the materials, if and when asked for.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 1.1.13 Spare Parts and As Built Drawings a) The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive list of all proprietary articles and materials used in the works containing catalogue reference numbers, colour shades etc., and the manufacturers and or suppliers' names, addresses, and where appropriate, local agents names and addresses including a price list CIF to the site of works. This list shall be complete in all respects and shall be submitted together with the "As-built" drawings and operation and maintenance manuals. The number of As-built drawings shall be as follows: i) ii) One set on CD Rom. One set on 3.25 HD diskette (Compression may be used to achieve a fit). Four sets of prints. Each set of drawings shall be properly bound and presented in a suitable manner acceptable to the Engineer. One set of negatives.
b)
iii)
iv) c)
The Contractor shall provide FIVE copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manual and shall hand them over to the Engineer on completion of the work and before the issue of the Completion Certificate. Failure to submit the above list and the "As-built" drawings will delay issue of the 'Completion Certificate'.
d)
1.1.14 Fire Protection a) Building materials used for fire protection shall have been tested to one or more of the parts of BS 476 and shall have achieved an appropriate rating for the purpose for which they are to be used. Fire protection boards shall be shall not support combustion or generate toxic fumes when exposed to heat. Handling, cutting, drilling and fixing shall be strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on Engineer's drawings. Where possible each floor of a building shall be compartmented into zones to limit the spread of fire or smoke. Each floor, plant rooms and kitchens/serveries shall always be separated. Fire stopping shall be carried out using proprietary systems approved by the Fire Officer and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
b)
c)
d)
e)
End of Section
2.0 DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS 2.1.1. Temporary Work and Protection of Works a) The Contractor must provide all requisite temporary works necessary for the protection and safety of the existing buildings. The Contractor shall alter, adapt, and maintain all temporary works as may be necessary from time to time and finally clear away and make good where disturbed. He will be held solely responsible for the safety of existing buildings and the sufficiency of all temporary works. The Contractor is to provide for all necessary tarpaulins and other means of covering up for the protection of new and existing works against inclement weather and make good all damage done. The Contractor is responsible for providing all necessary temporary pinning, shoring, needling and strutting required to existing works, whilst carrying out any works to the existing structure, and he shall be responsible for maintaining the safety of all structures whilst carrying out these works.
b)
2.1.2 Plant and Equipment a) All cutting and demolition Plant and Equipment are to be of suitable types and standards for the location and type of work. Noise from construction or demolition on site shall not exceed the level at which conversation in the nearest adjoining building would be difficult with the windows closed. Illuminate and protect 'dangerous openings' as necessary.
b)
c) 2.1.3 Dust
Reduce dust by periodically spraying demolition work with water. 2.1.4 Demolition Materials a) All materials arising from the pulling down not described to be refixed or stored and all rubbish and debris are to be basketed out if necessary and removed from the site to an approved licenced tip provided by the Contractor who shall pay all fees in connection therewith. Where materials are directed to be set aside for re-use they shall be classified, stored and stacked as directed and properly protected. The Contractor shall take all risk of damages during removal and shall, at his own expense, make good any damaged, defective work or missing parts.
b)
2.1.5 Making Good a) When cutting new or enlarging existing openings work shall include for building up jambs solid in block work in cement mortar, properly toothed and bonded to old, for making good all work disturbed. When building up existing openings work shall include for block work in cement mortar, the full thickness of the wall properly toothed and bonded to existing work, and the making good of all finished surfaces. Unless otherwise described, materials and workmanship are to comply with the Specifications of the following sections, which will be deemed to have been read in conjunction with this section.
b)
c)
2.1.6 Services Locate and mark the positions of services affected by the work. Arrange with the appropriate Authorities for the location and marking of the positions of mains services.
End of Section
3.0 3.1
EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK General 3.1.1 Nature of the Ground The Contractor shall judge for himself the nature of the ground and shall be fully responsible for ascertaining all necessary information concerning permanent water table, periods of rainfall, flooding of the site and all matters affecting the excavations and foundation work.
3.2
Material 3.2.1 Backfill Material Foundation trenches, column bases and the like shall be backfilled with selected excavated materials as described for imported fill, if approved by the Engineer. 3.2.2 Imported Fill Material for backfill shall be selected graded granular fill free from clay and deleterious matter. The material shall be of high shear strength and be unaffected by changes in moisture content. Excavated material may only be used after obtaining the engineers approval. The properties of the material shall be in accordance with the limits mentioned below, when tested in accordance with BS 1377: 1990. The extent and the depth of fill shall be shown in the drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator. The fill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding twice the average size of larger fragments. The degree of compaction achieved shall be verified on site by appropriate testing as detailed in the specifications. In general fill materials should have the following chemical composition: Element Total Soluble Salts Total Chloride and Soluble Sulphate Total Soluble Sulphate SO3 Total Chloride Organic matter % by Mass 2% max 1.5% max 0.17% max 0.05% max 4% max
3.2.2.1 Types of Fill (a) Fill Type A
Location to be used Type of soil
Particle size
Fines content Gradation Liquid Limit Size of each compacted layer Compaction (1% of Dry Density as determined by Modified Proctor Test) Frequency of Test
Under foundations Inorganic and free draining with no more than trace amounts of organic matter, gypsum or other salts 50mm max, 0-50% (by mass) passes 5mm sieve, 0-10% (by mass) passes 0.06mm sieve 15% max Well graded 25 max 150mm max
97% One test per 300-400m2 per layer
(b) Fill Type B
Location to be used
Type of soil
Particle size
Fines content Gradation Liquid Limit Size of each compacted layer Compaction (1% of Dry Density as
Roadways, Sub-grade for ground bearing slabs and pavings, embankments, and areas to be used by construction or plant operation Inorganic and free draining with no more than trace amounts of organic matter, gypsum or other salts 75mm max, 0-65% (by mass) passes 5mm sieve, 0-20% (by mass) passes 0.06mm sieve 30% max Well graded 40 max 250mm max
95%
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST determined by Modified Proctor Test) Frequency of Test (c) Fill Type C
One test per 400-500m2 per layer
Location to be used
Type of soil Particle size Fines content Gradation Liquid Limit Size of each compacted layer Compaction (1% of Dry Density as determined by Modified Proctor Test) Frequency of Test 3.2.3 Hardcore
Locations where installations of structure or equipment is not planned and in open areas where only grading is required. Inorganic granular, or silty, soil with a low to negligible gypsum/salt content. 100mm max 50% max Well graded 50 max 500 max
80% One test per 500-750m2 per layer
Hardcore shall consist of naturally occurring gravel stones or other approved material, capable of being compacted to the specified requirements. It shall not contain particles exceeding 50 mm and not more than 5% shall pass through a 20mm sieve. Total soluble salts Total sulphates as SO3 Total chlorides C1Organic matter 3.2.4 Stone Pitching / Mortared Rip Rap The composition of the Stone Pitching shall be naturally occurring gravel stones blinded with concrete and, wherever necessary, set over PCC. There shall be continuous protection at the top and bottom of the slope with similar material and with sizes as shown below. If the overall stability of the slope is in doubt then this should be reported to the engineer.
max. 2% max. 0.17 0.05% max. 4%
Stones shall be laid in a homogenous manner without voids and with sufficient concrete to ensure proper cohesion and adhesion of all the constituents. The surface shall be straight without protrusions or pockets. The receiving slope shall be dressed adequately, straightened, then thoroughly watered and compacted. Work should commence from top to bottom evenly at all sides. The following thickness shall be adopted (for a maximum slope height of 4m): Maximum Slope (Vertical: Horizontal) 1:1.5 (Normal) 1:1.5 (Wadi Embankment) 1:1 1:>1 Stone Pitching Thickness (mm) 150 200-300 150 PCC Thickness (mm) N/A 50 50 Obtain Engineers Advice Protection at Top & Bottom of Slop 300x300 300x300 Top, 600x600 with Dry Rip Rap Bottom 300x300
The size of the stones shall not exceed 100mm and not more than 10% shall pass through a 20mm sieve. The stones shall be set in concrete grade 20N/mm2 with nominal aggregate size of 10mm. PCC, wherever used, shall be grade 15N/mm2. Expansion Joints to be 20mm with Joint Filler and 20x20mm hot poured Joint sealant, provided at approximately every 6m c/c throughout the entire width of the slope from top to bottom. In cases where protection against active water pressure should be considered, Weepholes are to be provided. These shall be in the form of 20mm PVC pipes each having a 300x300x300mm stones inlet chamber wrapped with a nondegrading Geotextile. The spacing of the Weepholes shall be 1.5-2.0m Vertical and 3-4m Horizontal. 3.2.5 Crusher Dust Fines Crusher dust fines shall be finely graded crushed stone to pass a 5mm mesh sieve and shall be free from deleterious matter, clay, silt, earth and organic matter. 3.2.6 Anti Termite Treatment a) Anti Termite Treatment shall be carried out by a specialist sub-contractor as approved and a guarantee of 10 years for material and workmanship shall be provided. 1% emulsion strength of Fenvalerate, Permethrin or Chlordane equivalent chemicals as approved by the (a) Council for Conservation of
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Environment & Prevention of Pollution (b) Pesticides Regulation Committee, Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries (c) Ministry of Environment and (d) Director of Environmental Health, Ministry of Health. The termicide chemical should show 100% efficacy for a minimum period of 10 years when tested in environment akin to Sultanate of Oman. The rate of application of the chemical and various stages of application shall be as per the supplier's Specification and as approved by the Engineer. Workmanship 3.3.1 Earthworks Method The Contractor shall not undertake any earthworks, including the operation of any borrow area or quarry, without having obtained the Engineer's prior approval to the methods which he proposes to employ. He shall not thereafter modify such methods without the Engineer's consent. 3.3.2 Correct Widths and Depths of Excavations In the event of excavations being made larger than the sizes directed by the Engineer or as shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall fill in the excavated void to the correct profile with plain concrete grade 1:3:6 as described under "Concrete Work" hereinafter or with approved selected fill compacted to a dry density not less than 97% of its maximum dry density as determined in the tests to BS 1377:1990, as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor's own cost. 3.3.3 Method of Excavation a) Excavation may be carried out by machine or any other method approved by the Engineer. In soil, excavations shall be taken to within 150mm of the formation or foundation level and all subsequent excavation in any section must be carried out by hand not more than 24 hours before the commencement of construction in that section unless agreed otherwise by the Engineer. As soon as possible after inspection by the Engineer the bottom level of the excavation shall be sealed with blinding if specified and the required construction shall commence. No concrete shall be placed prior to the Engineer approving the excavation. c)
3.3
b)
3.3.4 Shoring Excavations a) The Contractor shall, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, shore the sides of excavations for structures, trenches, and pits to prevent them from slipping or falling. Should any slips, falls or settlement nevertheless occur they shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense with selected fill or with mass concrete as may be directed by the Engineer.
b)
In removing shoring from the sides of excavations, care shall be taken to avoid bringing loads on to any concrete until it has hardened sufficiently to carry such loads. Timber or other materials used for shoring the sides of excavations shall be removed as the work proceeds except when ordered to be left in by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, not later than four weeks before commencing any excavation, submit to the Engineer for inspection calculations and working drawings for the proposed scheme of strutting and retaining the sides of the excavations and shall not proceed with the appropriate section of the works until receipt of the Engineer's written consent. The receipt of such consent shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his duties and responsibilities under the Contract.
c)
d)
e)
3.3.5 Moisture Content of Backfilling Material or Imported Fill a) During compacting the backfilling material or imported fill shall have a uniform moisture content within 2 percent of the optimum for the compaction plant employed or as may be directed by the Engineer after tests. Where necessary the Contractor shall adjust the moisture content of the backfill either by drying out or by adding water. After such drying out or adding of water the backfill shall be thoroughly mixed until the moisture content is uniform. Should the material being placed as filling or as backfilling, while acceptable at the time of selection, become unacceptable to the Engineer due to exposure to weather conditions or due to flooding or have become puddled, soft or segregated during the progress of the works, the Contractor shall at his own expense remove such damaged, softened or segregated material and replace it with fresh approved material. When placing the filling or backfilling the Contractor shall make due allowance for any settlement that may occur before the end of the Period of Maintenance. Where necessary, the Contractor shall at the end of the Period of Maintenance remove any excess material or make up any deficiency or backfilling to the specified levels.
b)
3.3.6 Compaction of Backfilling Material or Imported Fill Backfilling material or imported fill shall be placed in layers not exceeding those limits stated in Section 3.2.2.1. Each layer being well compacted by a 5 ton roller before the next layer is placed. The density after compacting shall not be less than the maximum dry density obtained in test 12 of BS 1377-4:1990. 3.3.7 Trimming of Slope a) The slopes of cuttings and embankments shall be trimmed by hand or by approved mechanical means to uniform batters as shown on the drawings
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST or as directed by the Engineer. A tolerance of plus or minus 100mm measured at right angles to the batter will be permitted. Any rock or boulder appearing in the face of a cutting shall be trimmed back to within the tolerance specified above and in addition any such rock or boulder which in the opinion of the Engineer is unstable shall be completely removed and the resulting void filled with compacted material to the approval of the Engineer. 3.3.8 Draining of Excavation a) All excavations shall be kept free of water at all times and the Contractor shall provide efficient appliances and drains for dealing with water to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Particular care shall be taken to keep dry, rock and other surfaces against or upon which concrete may be deposited, and proper precautions shall be taken to prevent the leaching out of cement or otherwise damaging unset concrete. Should any existing drains or ditches be disturbed during the Contractor's operations they shall either be made good or diverted. b)
b)
c)
3.3.9 Excavation in Rock and Boulder Rock The Contractor shall notify the Engineer on each occasion he considers that he is entitled to payment for excavation in rock and boulder rock and shall not fill any excavation concerned until it has been inspected by the Engineer. No payment for excavation in rock or boulder rock shall be made unless the Engineer has inspected the excavation and certified in writing the quantity involved. 3.3.10 Explosives and Blasting a) The Engineer shall be notified by the Contractor in advance of all sections of the works where it is proposed to use explosives, and the Engineer shall have power to prohibit or restrict their use where, in his opinion, it is necessary to do so to safeguard persons, property, existing or new work or strata on which it is proposed to found new work. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary licences and permission covering the purchase and use of explosives, and shall meticulously observe the requirements of Government and local authorities. The Contractor shall have no claim against the Employer arising from any restriction or prohibition on the use of explosives by the Engineer or the Authorities. The Contractor shall provide a proper secure magazine for the storage of explosives to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and they shall be handled only by men experienced and trained in their use, and strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) When using explosives in excavation, should the rock be shattered or disturbed outside the limits of excavation shown on the drawings, the contractor shall cut out such disturbed sections to a depth approved by the Engineer and make good with mass concrete. Such further excavation shall be held to be "Excess Excavation" and the Contractor shall supply mass concrete at his own expense.
3.3.11 Unsuitable Material a) When the specified levels or limits of excavation are reached the Engineer will inspect the ground exposed and if he considers that any part of the ground is by its nature unsuitable he may direct the Contractor to excavate further and refill to the specified levels or limits with mass material. Such further excavation shall be held to be extra excavation and shall be measured as such. Should the material forming the bottom of any excavation, while acceptable to the Engineer at the time of his inspection, subsequently become unacceptable to him due to exposure to weather conditions or due to flooding or have become puddled, soft or loose during the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall remove such damaged, softened or loosened material and excavate further by hand. Such excavation shall be held to be excess excavation and carried out at the Contractor's own expense.
b)
3.3.12 Disposal of Surplus Excavated Material All excavated material not required for backfilling and unless otherwise stated shall be removed from site to a suitable tip, to be provided by the Contractor who is to include in his prices for all charges and temporary spoil heaps that may be required. 3.3.13 Trench Excavation In Existing Roads or Well Used Tracks Where trench excavation is required across existing surfaced roads or well used tracks the Contractor shall provide and maintain a suitable graded diversion complete with adequate signing all to the approval of the Engineer. Such excavations shall be backfilled with backfilling material or imported fill. Where the road has a sealed surface this shall be replaced after the backfill has been suitably consolidated. 3.3.14 Protection of Services The Contractor shall ascertain for himself the location of all permanent main services, and shall maintain and protect these where affected by the Works and shall in no way interfere with these permanent services without receiving the written permission of the Engineer. 3.3.15 Trenches Not To Be Left Open
Trench excavation shall be carried out expeditiously and, subject to any specific requirements of the contract the backfilling and surface reinstatement of the trench shall be commenced and completed as soon as reasonably practicable after the pipes have been laid and jointed.
3.3.16 Compaction of Hardcore Hardcore shall be laid in layers not exceeding 200mm including watering and compacting each layer to the approval of the Engineer. The surface of hardcore shall be blinded with clean wadi sand by sweeping into the hardcore and lightly tamping. 3.3.17 Anti Termite Spray Stage 1: Treatment to Soil under Slabs at Plinth Level. After earth filling and before the dry rubble or hard core packing the entire surface of the filled earth shall be treated with a chemical emulsion at a rate of 5 litres per square metre for ordinary soil and 1.5 litres per square metre if the fill is gravel or coarse sand. Light rodding may be necessary to facilitate spraying and absorption. Stage 2: Treatment to Junction of Walls and Floors Rodding shall be carried out along the junction of plinth walls and earth filling at 150mm intervals and chemical emulsion sprayed at a rate of 2 litres per linear metre so as to mix intimately with the soil. In the case of load bearing block walls, treatment to soil along internal walls will be carried out for the full depth down to foundation. At expansion joints running through ground floor slab chemical emulsion shall be applied @ 2 litres per linear metre. This has to be carried out before the joint filler is placed in position Both the stages 1 and 2 shall be carried out simultaneously to establish the chemical barrier. Stage 3: Treatment to Soil along the External Wall Perimeter After levelling, but before paving or plinth protection is laid, soil along the external wall perimeter of the building upto a depth of 300mm shall be treated at a rate of 4.5 litres emulsion per linear metre of plinth wall. If necessary, rodding at 300mm intervals may be carried out to facilitate spraying and absorption. Stage 4: Treatment of Critical Areas
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Soil under piers, utility pipe openings, floor drains and electrical conduit points shall be thoroughly flooded with the chemical emulsion at an approximate rate of 25 to 30 litres. If drainage pipes are laid along the walls and the chemical barrier laid as per Stage 3 is disturbed/broken, additional treatment to such areas will be necessary. Precautions must be taken not to disturb the treated areas by re-levelling, excavation or earth filling, as this will break the chemical barrier. If such a situation arises the disturbed area must be treated again in order to restore the chemical barrier.
End of Section
4.0 4.1
CONCRETE WORKS General 4.1.1 Description of works This section covers manufacture, testing and use of structural quality concrete and consists of providing all plant, labour and materials and of performing all operations in connection with plain and deformed bar reinforcement and steel fabric to be cast into concrete. To be read with preliminaries/general conditions. 4.1.2 Related Standards All materials methods and workmanship shall comply with the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice. General Specification November 2001, Sultanate of Oman: Concrete Work In general the work shall be carried out in accordance with Concrete Work Specification, Sultanate of Oman, and as per the following codes. 4.1.3 Reference documents for concrete work BS 12: 1991 BS 812 BS 882: 1992 Specification for Portland Cement Testing aggregates Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete. Specification for batch type concrete mixers. Specification for solid stem general purpose thermometers Methods of testing concrete
S 1305: 1974
BS 1704: 1985
BS 1882
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST BS 3148: 1980 Methods of test for water for making concrete Methods of testing cement Method of testing the mixing performance of Concrete mixers. Concrete admixtures. Guide to specifying concrete Methods of specifying concrete mixes Specification for the procedures to be used in producing and transporting concrete. Specification for the procedures to be used in sampling, testing and assessing Compliance of concrete. Code of Practice for concrete work 1990 Structural use of concrete Code of Practice construction for design and
BS 4550 BS 3963: 1974
BS 5075 BS 5328: Part 1: 1991 BS 5328: Part 2: 1991 BS 5328: Part 3: 1990
BS 5328: Part 4: 1990
BS 8000 Part 2 BS 8110 a) Part 1: 1997
b) Part 2: 1985
Code of Practice circumstances.
for
special
4.1.4
Reference documents for reinforcement work: BS 4449: 1988 Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete Specification for scheduling dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete. Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete. Specification for austenitic stainless steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.
BS 8666: 2000
BS 4483: 1985
BS 6744: 2001
4.1.5
General Approvals 4.1.5.1Materials
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Submit samples of all materials proposed for use in the works to the Contract Administrator for approval. Include specifications, tests and name of source and supplier for the materials. The Management Team and the Contract Administrator shall have access to all the sources of supply for the purpose of inspection and taking samples. Obtain the Contract Administrators approval in writing for all materials included in the concrete works before commencement of concrete works. Any change of materials or source of supply requires approval by the Contract Administrator in writing. The Contract Administrator and/or the Management Team has the right to reject any material that in his opinion does not meet the required standard for the Works. 4.1.5.2 Execution The Works Contractor is required to obtain concrete from an approved readymixed concrete batching facility. The Works Contractor shall submit detailed descriptions of all work methods, equipment and plant intended to be used for the works to the Contract Administrator for approval. The Works Contractor shall Execute all trials and tests as specified and submit detailed reports for all trials and tests to the Contract Administrator for approval. The Works Contractor shall obtain the Contract Administrators approval in writing for the arrangements for mixing concrete. Any changes in the arrangements will be required to be approved by the Contract Administrator in writing. The Contract Administrator has the right to reject any mixing arrangements that in his opinion are not acceptable. 4.2 Material 4.2.1 General All materials for the works shall be new and have the properties as specified and approved. The approved samples shall be representative for the delivered materials. All materials shall be delivered to the site well in advance of use to enable testing on site of the delivered materials. The materials shall be independently tested or provided with original test certificates from the manufacturer for approval of the Contract Administrator.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST The materials shall be tested regularly and at a frequency necessary to ensure continuous compliance with the specification and not less than specified as a minimum. New deliveries shall be tested before use. Materials shall be transported, handled and stored on the site or elsewhere in such a manner as to prevent damage, deterioration or contamination. Materials not approved shall be removed immediately from the site at the Works Contractors expense. 4.2.2 Cement All cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement from an approved source and shall comply with: BS 12 ASTM Type 1
The heat of hydration at 7 days (ASSTM C-186) shall be: Maximum 325 kj/kg
The cement shall be low alkali cement and contain: Max. 0.6% (Na2 O+0.658 k2O)
The specific surface (BS 4550) shall be: Max. 325 m2/kg.
The tricalcium aluninate content shall be as high as possible without creating undesired effects and shall not cause disintegration of the concrete from reaction with sulphates. The cement shall contain: Minimum 6% C3A Maximum 12% C3A
Cement shall be delivered in the manufacturers sealed branded bags or barrels. Each consignment shall be accompanied by the manufacturers test certificate. The certificate shall include the following information: The manufacturers bulk average test results for the manufacturing batch including chemical composition and physical properties determined in accordance with the approved specification for the cement.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST The date and place of manufacturing of the cement. The date and place of original loading and the date of intended delivery to the site
Damaged bags or barrels and any cement Contract Administrator considers unsatisfactory shall be rejected. Cement affected by water or damp conditions shall be rejected. Rejected cement shall be removed from the site immediately. Where bulk cement deliveries are proposed by the Works Contractor, the Works Contractor shall provide all information concerning off-site storage and loading arrangements for approval of the Contract Administrator. All cement shall be stored and transported in a suitable way to keep it dry and cool. The cement shall be stored in a dry weatherproof building or silo. It shall be ensured, that condensation in the storage does not occur ever at high humidity. Bagged cement shall be stored off the ground in an approved manner. Different types of cement shall be stored in separate areas, and shall be clearly marked. 4.2.3 Aggregate i) General
All materials used as aggregates shall be obtained from an approved source known to produce aggregates for concrete of the required quality. The aggregates shall not cause damage or weakening of the concrete. The materials shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, durable, of limited porosity and free from adhering coatings, clay lumps, coal and coal residues and organic or other impurities that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or may impair the strength or durability of the concrete. The maximum size of the aggregates shall not be larger than 1/5 of the smallest dimension of the member to be cast or larger than 3/4 of the smallest distance between items embedded in the concrete. All aggregates shall be stored and handled in a manner that the aggregates do not segregate or be contaminated. The aggregates shall be stored on a clean concrete slab with a slope effectively draining the slab. Each type and grading of aggregates shall be completely separated from others by tight and durable walls of concrete or equal. The stored aggregates shall be covered with sheeting and provided with shading. The temperature in the aggregates shall be kept as low as possible. ii) Fine Aggregates
The aggregates shall be natural or crushed sand. Beach sand shall not be used. The limits for deleterious substances and physical property shall comply with the following: (M or F to BS 882) GRADING: Percentage by mass passing BS sieve
Sieve Size 5.00mm 2.36mm 1.18mm 0.60mm 0.30mm 0.15mm Fine material Shells Chlorides Sulphates Magnetite Mica, loam, clay, silt, dust and any vegetable or saline or other impurities
Limits -65 - 100 45 - 100 25 - 100 5 70 -: Max. 3% by weight finer than 75 microns : Max 1% voided shells : Max. 0.05% by weight acid soluble Cl: Max. 0.17% by weight acid soluble SO3 : Max. 2.5% by weight
: Max, 1.0% by weight and max. 3.0% by volume. : Max. 2.0%
Absorption Magnesium Sulphate soundness Weight loss Organic impurities
: Max. 10% after five cycles
: Colour lighter than reference standard colour
Alkali
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Reactivity Drying shrinkage iii) Coarse Aggregates : Expansion less than 0.05% after 3 months. : Max. 0.05%
The aggregates shall be crushed aggregates obtained from an approved source. The limits for deleterious substances and physical property shall comply with the following: GRADING: Percentage by mass passing BS sieve Sieve 20.00mm 14.00mm 10.00mm 5.00mm 2.36mm Surface Chlorides Sulphates Magnetite Combustible particles Absorption Flakiness index Clay lumps and friable particles Magnesium sulphate soundness Weightloss Alkali reactivity
Limits 90 100 -30 60 0 10 --
: Min. 90% with fractured faces. : Max. 0.02% by weight acid soluble Cl: Max. 0.17% by weight acid soluble SO3. : Max 2.5% by weight
: Max 1.0% by weight : Max. 1.5% : Max. 25%
: Max. 1.0%
: Max. 10% after five cycles
: Expansion less than 0.05%

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST after 3 months 10% fines value Drying shrinkage
: Min. 100 kN.
: Max. 0.05%
4.2.4
Admixtures Admixtures shall be used as specified and shall be approved before construction commences, and used strictly to manufacturers recommendations. Make trial mixes and in consultation with the Contract Administrator adjust the dosage and/or mix proportions in order to give suitable properties in the fresh and hardened concrete. Admixtures shall be products manufactured for use in concrete. All effects of the admixtures on the fresh and on the hardened concrete shall be well documented by the manufacturer, and the admixtures shall have proven record for use under similar conditions. Admixtures containing chlorides or nitrates shall not be approved. The Works Contractor is to submit detailed and comprehensive manufacturers technical description and recommendation for handling and use. When more than one admixture is to be used the compatibility of the materials shall have been ascertained by tests and approved in writing by the manufacturer(s). Admixtures shall be handles and stored according to the manufacturers recommendations. The materials shall be protected from any contamination. Plasticizers shall be used for all concrete, according to AASHTO M 194. The purpose of plasticizers is to increase the workability of the concrete, and at the same time to reduce the water content. For all admixtures used a certificate shall be submitted. The certificate shall include the following details: Type/Nature of admixture Main Effect Name of product Supplier/Manufacturer
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST General Active components Density, kg/l Content of dry solids, % Equivalent Na2O, % Chloride ion content, % pH value Colour Latest date of test and name and address of the testing laboratory When more than one admixture is to be used and compatibility of the materials shall have been ascertained by tests and approved in writing by the manufacture(s). Admixtures shall be handled, stored and introduced to the concrete according to the manufacturers recommendations. The materials shall be protected from any contamination. All admixtures shall be approved by the Contract Administrator as a part of the concrete mix design. The packing shall be marked with the name of the supplier, brand name (name of product), admixture type, date of manufacture and expiry.
Side Effects Normal side effects Side effects when overdosed
Storage Dosage Max/Min. shall be specified as percent (%) by weight of the total amount of cement.
Shelf life Max/Min. allowable temperature Other instructions (e.g. requirements for stirring)
4.2.5
Silica Fume Silica Fume shall be from an approved source, and shall comply with the following: The condensed silica fume shall be from an approved source, and shall comply with the following: The condensed silica fume shall have a content of: Minimum 85% Si O2
and comply with: Specific surface Magnesium oxide (MgO) Sulphur trioxide (SO3) Soluble equivalent sodium oxide (Na2O)e Chlorides (Cl) Moisture Loss of ignition Fineness (more than 0.045mm) Min. 15,000m2/kg Max. 5.0% Max. 4.0% Max. 1.5% Max. 0.1% Max. 1.5% Max. 5.0% Max. 40%
The analysis of the Silica Fume shall be according to BS or ASTM Standards. Sodium oxide, moisture, loss on ignition and finess shall be tested according to ASTM C311-77. Silica Fume shall be stored and handled as cement. 4.2.6 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall as a minimum record the check on following items: Materials test including all items mentioned in the Specification. A material test is valid for only one month. Materials not used within this period shall be removed or re-tested. Check of delivery note and certificate of Silica Fume on arrival to the Site for all deliveries.
4.2.7 Water
Regularly check temperature and humidity where the Silica Fume is stored. Minimum once every working day.
Water for use in concrete and mortar and for curing shall be obtained from an approved source. The water shall not affect the strength and durability of the concrete or the mortar and shall not create discolouration of the hardened concrete or affect the reinforcement. The water shall be clean, desalinated or potable water which complies with the following: PH value Total dissolved solids Suspended solids Chloride as NaCL Chloride as ClSulphates as SO3 Alkali HCO3/CO3 : : : : : : : Max. 8.0 Min. 7.0 Max. 2000 ppm Max. 2000 ppm Max. 500 ppm Max. 250 ppm Max. 350 ppm Max. 500 ppm
Water shall be stored in clean covered containers and protected from any contamination. Water shall be kept cool and the temperature of the water when added to the concrete shall be the lowest possible. In hot periods crushed ice from an approved source of water may be used if approved by the Contract Administrator. 4.2.8 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall, as a minimum, record the check on following items: 4.2.9 Laboratory test of water. Temperature of water just before concrete mixing.
Fibres Fibres for concrete shall be non-ferrous type that have no effect on the finish of the concrete surface. Fibres for concrete shall have proven record of use in concrete mixes. The fibres shall have no water absorption and have a high resistance to acids and alkalies.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST The Works Contractor shall submit documentation for the material and test report for its use in concrete to the Contract Administrator for approval. The documentation shall include information on type of fibre material, fibre dimension, specific surface of fibres, and eventual changes in the fibre during its service life. Polypropylene fibres shall be finely cut and specifically treated for enhanced bond. The length and diameter of the fibres shall be optimal in order to minimize cracking in the concrete and without creating balls in the mix. Specified quantity of fibres (typically 0.6 to 0.9 kg/m3) shall be added to the concrete using a method ensuring uniform distribution. The method of adding fibres shall be according to the manufacturers recommendation.
4.2.10 Quality Control 1) Cement The Works Contractor shall, as a minimum, record the check on following items: Materials tests including all items mentioned in the specification and the BS and ASTM standards. A material test is valid for only one month. Check of delivery note and certificate of cement on arrival to the site for all deliveries. Regularly check of temperature and humidity where the cement is stored. Minimum once every working day.
2)
Aggregates The Works Contractor shall, as a minimum, record the check on following items: Materials test including all items mentioned in the specification and according to the mentioned BS and ASTM standards. The frequency of the tests shall be according to 2.2.2.10. Check of delivery notes of all types of aggregates on arrival to the site for all deliveries.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 3) Check of temperature in the aggregates during concrete mixing.
Water The Works Contractor shall, as a minimum, record the check on following items: Laboratory test of water. Temperature of water during concrete mixing.
4)
Admixtures The Works Contractor shall, as a minimum, record check on following items: Check of delivery note on arrival to the site for all deliveries.
4.2.11 Materials tests and Frequencies Required Test Grading Test Method BS 812, Part 103 Frequency Each delivery, each 2 weeks or per 100m3 whichever is more frequent. -do-
Material finer than 0.075 BS 812, Part 103 mm Clay lumps friable particles Organic impurities Water absorption Specific gravity ASTM C142
-do-
ASTM C40 ASTM C128/C127 ASTM C128/C127
-doEach day of concreting Each delivery, each 2 weeks or per 100m3 which ever is more frequent. -do-doEach delivery, each
Shell content Particle shape
BS 812, Part 106 BS 812, Part 105
Acid soluble chlorides(Cl-)BS 812, Part 117

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 1 week in which concreting is going on whichever is more frequent. Acid soluble Sulphates (SO3) Soundness (Mg SO4) ASTM, C88 Each month with Concreting Every second month with concreting Each day of concreting Each source of Supply -doBS 812, Part 118 -do-
Mechanical strength 10% fines value Moisture variation in all aggregates Drying shrinkage
BS 812 Part III,Part 112 Oven dried
BS 812, Part 120
Potential reactivity of aggregates Potential reactivity of carbonate Potential reactivity of cement aggregate combination
ASTM C 295 and C289 ASTM C586
-do-
ASTM P214 and C227
-do-
4.2.12 Reinforcement 4.2.12.1 General
Reinforcement steel shall comply with the standards mentioned in section 4.1.4. All steel bars shall be high yield deformed bars of Grade 460, type 2 or as specified in the drawings. Stainless steel, when specified, shall be grade 316 S33 (En 1.4436) or 318 S13 (En 1.4462). The Works Contractor shall submit two copies of a mill test report for each lot of steel reinforcement bars proposed of use in the works to the Contract Administrator for approval. The bars in each lot shall be legibly tagged by the manufacturer. The tag shall show the manufacturers test number and lot
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST number and other applicable data that will identify the material with the certificate issued for the lot of steel. The Works Contractor shall submit certificates for each type and size of bars showing each number from which the bars have been fabricated. Further test to determine the compliance of the Chemical Composition and Physical Properties to the mill tests, as deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator, shall be carried out randomly to reinforcement delivered to site. The method of sampling and testing and the frequency of tests shall be in accordance with BS 4449, or as required and agreed by the Contract Administrator. All reinforcement shall be clean and free from materials that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. The steel bars shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease or other materials that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement. Sheets of mesh fabric shall be flat unless specified as bent, and any tendency to curve or twist shall be corrected by the Works Contractor before fixing. Mesh fabric shall not be supplied in rolls. Reinforcement shall be stored on properly constructed racks at least 150mm above ground level. The storage, cutting and bending of steel reinforcement shall be carried out under cover on an approved, free draining concrete platform. All steel reinforcement at site shall be protected from humidity and salt laden dews by 1000g polythene sheeting or equivalent approved. 4.2.12.2 Quality Control
As a minimum record the check on following items: 4.3 Check of steel certificates for all types and sizes of bars. Check of delivery notes for all types and sizes of bars. Visual inspection of steel when delivered to the site. Check of storage for steel.
Workmanship Concrete 4.3.1 General

The concrete shall be designed, mixed and cast according to the specifications in order to produce a durable concrete of required quality. The Works Contractor shall execute the works in a way that the hardened concrete is completely compacted without air voids and with an even distribution of the components in the concrete. The concrete shall be without cracks caused by plastic shrinkage, thermal movements or any other cracks caused by a concrete or works not complying with the specification. Readymixed concrete shall be used for the concrete and must be obtained from a plant which holds a current certificate of Accreditation under the quality scheme for readymixed concrete. Each mix shall be obtained from only one source unless otherwise approved by the Contract Administrator. Site-mixed concrete shall not be permitted. 4.3.2 Concrete Types i) Concrete for all Principal structures As per the notes on the Structural drawings (No Sulphate Resistant Cement SRC shall be used in concrete members and elements having steel reinforcement embedded in them, even in sub structure). ii) Concrete for Blinding Concrete grade 15 Characteristic strength: 15 N/mm2 Cement : Sulphate Resistant Cement (SRC) Min cement content: 200kg/m3 Nominal maximum size of aggregate : 25mm iii) Concrete for Screed (at the Super Structure) Concrete grade 10 Cement: Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) Nominal maximum size of aggregate: 10mm Minimum cement content:180 kg/m3 iv) Concrete for Lightweight Screed (at the Superstructure) Maximum density: 1000 kg/m3 Minimum compressive strength: 5N/mm2
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Determination of the free water/cement ratio shall include silica fume whenever used, with an activity factory of 2.0. Calculation of the free water/cement ratio is then: W/C = water (1.0 cement + 2.0 silica fume) The specified quantity of silica fume as % cement content is in addition to the cement e.g. where cement is 350 kg/m3, silica fume will be min.24.5 kg. 4.3.3 Mix Design The Works Contractor shall submit a design proposal for each type of concrete to the Contract Administrator for approval well in advance of commencement of concreting on the side. The proposed mix design shall include but not be limited to the following: Weight and density of all materials Grading for each type of aggregates Grading for the combined aggregates Calculation of fine materials Calculation of free water/cement ratio Calculation of content of alkalies Calculation of content of chlorides Calculation of content of sulphates Estimation of air content Estimation of characteristic strength Estimation of workability All the necessary Test Certificates of the used materials
The Works Contractor shall design the concrete mixes with the lowest possible content of cement necessary to meet the requirements of the specified type of mix. The content of cement shall not exceed 500 kg per cubic metre. The concrete mixes shall be designed with a grading of the combined aggregates requiring a minimum of water to create workability and creating a homogeneous concrete with a high density. The total chloride content in the concrete expressed as a percentage acid soluble chloride by weight of cement shall not exceed 0.15% for SRC and 0.3% for OPC. The total sulphate content in the concrete expressed as percentage by weight of cement shall not exceed 4.0% acid soluble SO3. 4.3.4 Trial Mixes
Laboratories independent of both the ready mix concrete supplier and the Works Contractor must be used. Execute the laboratory tests and trial mixes required to demonstrate that the proposed mix design for all types of concrete mixes meets the requirements. The laboratory tests shall be made on concrete samples from the trial mixes. The tests shall include determination of the following properties. The Works Contractor shall make three trial mixes on the site for each type of concrete mix using the plant, equipment, batching and transport methods intended for use in the works. The requirement to compressive strength shall be verified by taking six cubes from each of the three mixes. The test cubes shall be prepared and cured in accordance with BS 1991, Part 3. Two cubes shall be tested after 7 days of maturity, and four after 28 days of maturity. The results of the tests of compressive strength for the trial mix shall be approved, if the 28 days cube strengths for ALL test cubes exceed the specified characteristic strength minus 3 N/mm2, and if the average compressive strength of the four cubes tested at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic strength by at least 3 N/mm2. No concrete mix shall be placed in permanent works until the mix has been approved in writing by the Contract Administrator. No approval by the Contract Administrator shall relieve the Works Contractor of the responsibility of maintaining the required quality. Any change in the mix design or any change in materials, type, source of grading requires approval by the contract Administrator and execution of a new trial mix. All costs connected with laboratory tests, trials mixes, mix design and practical tests shall be included in the Works Contractors price for the works. 4.3.5 Mixing of Concrete Concrete shall be weigh batched and mixed in an approved mixing machine fitted with approved water metering device. Volume batching will not be allowed. The weighing and water-dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order. Their accuracy shall be maintained within the tolerances described in BS 1305 and checked against accurate weights and volumes when required by the Contract Administrator. The batcher must automatically record quantities actually placed in each batch. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within +3% of the quantity of cement, water or aggregates being measured and within
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST k+5% of the quantity of silica fume and admixtures. The weights of the fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water contained in them. The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the quantity of free water contained in the fine and coarse aggregates, which shall be determined by the Works Contractor before mixing begins, and further as the Contract Administrator. The temperature of all materials shall be measured before discharged into the mixer. The temperature of the fresh concrete shall be measured when discharged from the mixer. Unless otherwise agreed by the Contract Administrator, concrete shall be mixed in a batch type mixer manufactured in accordance with BS 1305 or in a batch type mixer, a specimen of which has been tested in accordance with BS 3963 and having a mixing performance within the limits of Table 6 of BS 1305. Where appropriate, the batch capacity, method of loading, mixing time and drum speed shall conform to the details furnished in accordance with the requirements of BS 3963 for the mix which corresponds most closely to the mix proportions being used. The mixing blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerances specified by the manufacturer of the mixer, and the blades shall be replaced, when it is no longer possible to maintain the tolerances by adjustments. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned, before any fresh concrete is mixed in the machine. Mixing plants shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of mix to another or before changing from one manufacture of cement to another. Controls shall be provided to ensure that no additional water can be added during mixing. The entire batch shall be discharged before the mixer is recharged. The mixing and tempering of stiffened concrete shall not be permitted. A concrete slab with adequate drainage shall be provided as a working platform, unless alternative arrangements are specifically permitted by the Contract Administrator. The concrete shall be placed in its final position within 60 minutes of the time, when the cement first came into contact with water or wetted aggregates. This time limit may be extended by adding suitable retarding admixtures in concrete, subject to approval by the Contract Administrator. Detailed technical information on such admixtures shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for approval, well in advance of their proposed use in concrete.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 4.3.5.1 Ready-Mixed Concrete All ready-mixed concrete shall meet the requirements of the specifications. The Works Contractor shall submit name and address of the readymix company with full details of operation and plant to the Contract Administrator for approval. The details of the readymix company shall include information of plant, equipment storage depots, transportation and quality system. The Contract Administrator shall have access to the readymix site for inspection at any time. The Contract Administrator may reject the proposed readymix company and at any time withdraw the approval, if the quality of the readymix concrete or the documentation of the quality in the opinion of the Contract Administrator is not satisfactory. Readymixed concrete shall comply in all respects with BS 5328 except where amended herein. All testing of the mixed concrete shall be executed on the site. The Works Contractor shall ensure that the supplier keeps a record of all the required tests and the quality control for mixing and transportation. The readymix concrete shall be delivered to the site in truck mixers or agitators operating continuously and must be accompanied by a delivery note with following information: Name of supplier Type and grade of concrete Mix code number Time of arrival of truck on the site Registration number of truck Delivery certificate number Slump/temperature when leaving batching plant
One copy of the delivery note shall be submitted to the Management Team immediately after the truck has arrived at the site.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Truck mixing and addition of water and admixtures to the concrete after the concrete has been discharged from the mixing plant shall not be accepted. 4.3.5.2 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall, as a minimum, record the check of following items: Temperature of all materials before and during concrete mixing in hot water (Air shade temperature above e0deg C). Temperature of the fresh concrete discharged from the mixer. Within 2 minutes of taking the concrete sample type A 100mm immersion thermometer complying with BS 1704 shall be inserted in the sample to a depth of 100mm. When steady conditions have been maintained for one minute the temperature of the concrete shall be determined with an accuracy of 1deg C. Laboratory tests of trial mixes as specified. Execution of trial mixes and trial castings. Regular check of the mixing plant. The weighing devices shall be adjusted daily and checked for accuracy and calibrated at least once every month. Record of weight of all materials in the concrete for each batch. Record of mixing time and the time when the concrete is discharged from the mixer. Visual inspection of each batch prior to discharge. Test of air content in the fresh concrete. Test of compressive strength. The sample shall be taken from each batch of concrete according to BS 1881, typical one sample for every 15m3 The samples shall be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer. Each sample is represented by two cubes. The cubes shall be prepared and cured in accordance with BS 1881.
A sample consisting of two cubes shall be tested after 7 days maturity, and two samples represented by four cubes shall be tested after 28 days maturity. For any given sample, the test result becomes invalid when the difference between the strength of the two cubes divided by their mean is greater than 15%. The test cubes shall be tested by an approved independent laboratory, and the test results (original copies) shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.
Compliance with the requirements to the characteristic strength , as per BS 5328, will be assumed if all the conditions given below are met: The mean compressive strength for any four consecutive samples with 28 days maturity shall exceed the specified characteristic strength by 3 N/mm2. The comprehensive strength of any individual test cube shall be higher or equal to the specified characteristic strength less 3 N/mm2.
The Works Contractor shall specify control sections prior to commencement of work. Once control section shall be max. 30 m3 of concrete. If any sample from one control section does not comply with the requirements to the strength, the whole control section shall be rejected, and the concrete shall be removed and replaced at no additional costs to the Employer. If the Works Contractor can prove, by additional testing according to a test programme approved by the Contract Administrator, that the concrete in the works complies with the requirements to strength, the control section shall be approved by the Contract Administrator. All test cubes shall be clearly marked prior to leaving the site and the following documentation shall be recorded for each test cube:
Grade of mix Temperature of concrete Time of mixing and concreting Location of the concrete in the structure
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Mark on the cube Signature of the person responsible for the test
The cost of taking and testing concrete and materials required to ensure compliance with this specification shall be borne wholly by the Works Contractor. Further random concrete samples, as determined by the Contract Administrator, shall be made and tested at the owners laboratory in Muscat, or any other lab, without any additional cost to the owner. Should the concrete supplied not comply with the characteristic strength requirements the Contract Administrator may instruct the removal and replacement of the concrete or other remedial action to be taken. Any such removal or remedial action will be carried out at the Works Contractors own expense and payment will not be made for such elements until the removal and replacement or remedial action is completed, to the satisfaction and approval of the Contract Administrator. 4.3.6 Transportation and Placing of Concrete The Works Contractor shall inform the Contract Administrator in writing 24 hours before commencement of concreting works giving complete details of the works. The Works Contractor shall not commence the works without written approval from the Contract Administrator of excavations, formwork, reinforcement, arrangements for plant and materials on site, installation of accessories, etc. Any concrete placed before obtaining such approval shall be rejected. Controls shall be provided to ensure that no additional water can be added during mixing. The entire batch shall be discharged before the mixer is recharged. The mixing and tempering of stiffened concrete shall not be permitted. The concrete shall be placed in its final position within 60 minutes of the time, when the cement first came into contact with water or wetted aggregates. This time limit may be extended by adding suitable retarding admixtures in concrete, subject to approval by the Contract Administrator. Detailed technical information on such admixtures shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for approval, well in advance of their proposed use in concrete. The formwork or area of disposition shall be cleaned as specified. Constructional plant and materials required, or which may be required during the concreting work and for curing shall be on site and fully prepared before concreting commences.
All accessories shall be installed, and formwork for holes, chases, etc. shall be provided as specified. The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the point of placing as rapidly as practicable by methods that will maintain the required workability and will prevent segregation, loss of any constituents or ingress of foreign matter or water. The concrete shall be deposited as close as practicable to its final position to avoid rehandling or moving the concrete horizontally by vibration. Except where otherwise agreed by the Contract Administrator, concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to compacted depth not exceeding 400mm where internal vibrators are used or 300mm in all other cases. Unless otherwise agreed by the Contract Administrator, concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 1.5 metres. When trunking or chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid segregation. Concrete shall be deposited continuously. No concrete shall be placed against concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause seams, planes at weakness or cold joints. If for unforeseen reasons it is necessary to stop concreting before completion of the pour, then construction joints as specified shall be formed and further concreting shall be suspended for at least 24 hours unless otherwise approved in writing by the Contract Administrator. The concrete shall be placed in its final position within one hour from being discharged from the mixer, or before that if the initial set has started. Cutting and chasing of hardened concrete shall not be permitted without the Contract Administrators approval. The Works Contractor shall provide openings, mortises, chases, sleeves, etc., and fix bolts, anchors, etc, in concrete as work proceeds and support embedded items against replacement. Items cast shall be filled with readily removable materials to prevent concrete ingress. All receptacles used for the transport and deposition of the concrete shall be kept clean. The Works Contractor shall obtain the Contract Administrators permission before concreting in periods where the daily max. air shade temperature exceeds 30 deg. C, and shall take appropriate precautions to prevent early setting and to ensure that the concrete temperature when placed does not exceed 30 deg. C or 28 deg. C where cement
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST replacement is used. The Works Contractor shall control the temperature in the hardening concrete and in previously cast concrete at construction joints. Under no circumstances should concrete be placed when ambient temperature exceeds 45 deg. C. Such appropriate precautions may include but are not limited to the following: Cooling of ingredients Adding ice to concrete mix Cooling of existing structure before concreting by spraying cool water or by an arrangement of chillers Cooling of hardening concrete and existing structures during curing
No concreting shall be carried out in rain. The re-mixing or retempering of stiffened concrete is not permitted. The Contract Administrator can reject any concrete which he considers to have been inadequately mixed, or in which the ingredients have segregated, or which is no longer capable of being effectively placed or compacted. 4.3.6.1 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall, as a minimum, record the check on following items: Completion of excavations, formwork, reinforcement and arrangement for plant. Time when the concrete is discharged from the mixer and time when placed in final position for each batch. Air shade temperature and temperature of concrete when placed in final position in air shade temperatures above 30 deg. C. Special cooling arrangements if required.
4.3.6.2 Hot Weather Precautions Hot weather precautions shall be taken at the concrete mixing plant and during transport in order to comply with specified temperature limits of fresh concrete at any time of the year. CIRIA Special Publication 31 and ACI 305R are applicable for
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST examples of good practice, always subject to stricter requirements which may be stated in this Specification or in other contract documents. The overall maximum temperature limit for fresh concrete when starting to place it in its final position shall be 30 deg. C, except where cement replacement is used whereby the maximum temperature shall be 28 deg. C. To ensure compliance, the target max temperature for fresh concrete at the mixing plant shall be set lower than this overall maximum limit, taking into account the variations in ambient conditions, transport time, waiting time, etc. 4.3.6.3 Compaction All concrete shall be compacted using vibrators. The size and type of vibrator shall be selected in relation to the size of the structure and free space inside formwork and between bars. The vibration equipment shall be approved by the Contract Administrator. Internal vibrators shall be of the immersion type with a frequency of not less than six thousand vibrations per minute and sufficient amplitude to consolidate the concrete effectively. The Works Contractor shall provide at least 50% duplication of all vibration equipment as standby during any period of concreting. The vibration shall be carried out only for the necessary time required for thorough compaction of all parts of the concrete. The Works Contractor shall carefully supervise the compaction work and ensure that excessive vibration, vibration of steel and form, and moving of concrete leading to defects in the concrete, shall be avoided. Do not use vibrator to make concrete flow horizontally into position, except where necessary to achieve full compaction under void corners and cast in accessories and at vertical joints. The Works Contractor shall as a minimum record check on following items: 4.3.7 Curing Casting and curing of the concrete shall be planned and executed in such a way, that the concrete during hardening is protected against harmful influence from the environment and from heat of hydration. Supervision of vibration of concrete.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST All methods and materials for curing shall be approved by the Contract Administrator prior to commencement of the works. All surfaces shall be protected, which are not sealing the surface completely from evaporation. The method of protection shall as a minimum include: Protection from direct sunlight of concrete surfaces and formwork by shades. Protection with close fittings polythene membrane immediately after casting and compaction is completed. Protection after finishing operations with absorption mat of fabric laid directly onto the concrete in unbroken sheets with substantial lap joints. The mats shall be kept continuously wet and covered with a white polythene membrane. The polythene sheets shall be unbroken with substantial close fitted lap joints. Sheets shall be fixed in full contact with the concrete surface and kept in place at all times during curing.
The water for curing shall be of equal quality as for the water concrete. The curing period for protection against evaporation shall be decided based on the type of concrete and the air temperature and humidity. Use of chemical compounds for curing shall not be permitted, unless specifically approved by the Contract Administrator. The protection period shall be minimum 10 days. 4.3.7.1 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall as minimum record the check on following items: Time when polythene membrane is placed and removed. Time when absorption mat and polythene membrane is placed and removed. Wetting and check of efficiency of polythene cover in the curing period.
4.3.8
Temperature Control The temperature in the fresh and in the hardening concrete shall be controlled if required by the Contract Administrator in order to prevent defects from high temperature during hydration and from movements caused by temperature differences.
The Works Contractor shall plan the works in order to minimize deformation and stresses from restraint in thermal movements. If the difference between the mean temperature of the cast concrete and the temperature of previously cast concrete does not exceed 12 deg C, it may be acceptable, dependent upon the actual degree of restraint to thermal movement. Appropriate precautions shall be made for cooling the recently placed concrete and previously cast concrete adjacent to the newly cast concrete. These methods may include but not be limited to: Cooling the ingredients for the concrete. Adding ice to the concrete mix. Keeping the concrete cool during transportation by shading or insulation. Cooling the concrete in the curing period by spraying cool water; cooling the surrounding air using chillers and insulation and cooling the concrete using cast-in cooling pipes.
The cooling arrangements must not create temperature differences in the concrete that could result in damaging the concrete. The temperature control arrangements and the methods of cooling the concrete shall be approved by the Contract Administrator prior to commencement of the works. Exposed areas of newly placed concrete should be protected from direct sunlight by appropriate shading, installed to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator. 4.3.9 Concrete Tolerances a) The following tolerances shall not be exceeded:All setting out dimensions, lengths of beams nd slabs, storey heights Cross-sectional dimensions of concrete members Surface levels of floor slabs - Generally (in 10 m of length) - Local undulations Plumbs of columns and walls - In a storey height - In full building height Variation in size and location of openings,
6mm 6mm
6mm 3mm 6mm 20mm
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST sleeves and embedded fixtures Variation in stairs In stairs In rise - In tread b) 6mm 3mm 6mm
Regardless of the tolerances permitted, the Contractor shall consider building details that adjoin each other, since these may call for even finer tolerances.
4.4
Workmanship Reinforcement 4.4.1 General The Works Contractor shall prepare his own bar list and bending diagrams in accordance with BS 4466 from the information given on the drawings and in the specification. The Works Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that correct information is given when ordering reinforcement. Copies shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for his information at least two weeks in advance of placement of the steel but this shall not relieve the Works Contractor of any responsibility. The Works Contractor shall provide and submit to the Contract Administrator for approval any working drawings additional to the contract drawings which may be found necessary for the production of bar schedules or for completion of the works. The approval of working drawings shall in no way relieve the Works Contractor of responsibility for the correctness of such drawings. The Works Contractor is responsible for the reinforcement, and shall ensure that all reinforcement is checked by a competent person. The Works Contractor shall notify the Contract Administrator well in advance about portions of reinforcement work ready for inspection and shall keep a detailed record of the planning and control of the reinforcement work. 4.4.2 Cutting and Bending Dirt, rust, concrete, scale, paint, oil, grease, salts, etc. shall be removed from the reinforcement by grit blasting. Only grit blasting will be approved. Reinforcement shall be cut and bent within the dimensional tolerances given in BS 4466. Bars shall be bent cold by hand or by using an approved hand or power operated bending machine. When bending, the reinforcement shall be subjected to a constant even load and not an impact load. Welding of reinforcement will only be allowed with the specific written permission of the Contract Administrator.
Bar types, sizes and placement shall be shown on the drawings. Bending dimensions shall be in accordance with BS 4466. Bars incorrectly bend shall not be used. Hot rolled high yield steel bars shall not be straightened or bent again having once been bent. No reinforcement shall be bent when in position in the works without approval, whether or not it is partially embedded in hardened concrete. The minimum diameter of the former shall be:
4.4.3
for mild steel for high yield steel for cold worked steel
(BS 4449) 4 x d (BS 4449) 4 x d (BS 4461) 6 x d
Labelling and Storage All bars and bundles of bars shall have a waterproof label securely attached stating the drawing number and bar mark. Reinforcement shall be stored in a manner and place such that it is kept free from damage and mud, oil and any contaminants likely to impair its performance within the concrete. 4.4.3.1 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall as minimum record the check on following items: Visual inspection of bent steel.
4.4.4
Fixing of Reinforcement Bars in contact shall be firmly secured to each other with approved binding wire or proprietary clips of a type approved by the Contract Administrator. Binding wire shall be black annealed mild steel wire diameter 1.5mm free from rust or other contaminants. The reinforcement shall be fixed accurately in position so that reinforcement is in the correct position in relation to the formwork to give the specified concrete cover. The reinforcement shall be fixed securely in position so that it will not be displaced during the passage of Works Contractors traffic, the placing and compaction of the concrete or any related operations.
Reinforcement shall be securely fixed in position with a dimensional tolerance of 20mm in a direction parallel to a concrete face and within a tolerance of 5mm at right angles to a face, provided that the cover is not thereby decreased below the minimum specified or otherwise shown on the drawings. Care shall be taken to ensure that projecting ends of ties or clips do not encroach into the concrete cover. The following clear cover to all steel in cast in-situ concrete including links shall apply: Pad footings, columns below ground, ground beams, ground slabs earth face to walls Columns, beams, walls, slabs, stairs, external exposure Columns, beams, walls, slabs, stairs, internal exposure Coastal structures
75mm
40mm
40mm 75-100mm
The correct cover shall be maintained by the use of specially manufactured high quality impermeable concrete or mortar spacers. Site manufactured blocks shall be well compacted and cast of approved repair mortar and water cured for a minimum of 7 days after casting and shall have a 30 minute absorption of less than 3.5% by weight. Concrete spacers shall be similar in strength, durability and appearance to the surrounding concrete. Samples of spacers shall be submitted for approval at least 14 days before it is intended to place concrete. Any wire cast into the spacer blocks shall be positioned well away from the exposed surface and shall be of stainless steel. Spacers fixed to parallel reinforcement bars shall not be located in a line across a section. Timber, stone, plastic or metal spacers will not be permitted. The top reinforcement in slabs shall be rigidly supported by mild steel chairs from the bottom reinforcement. Chair spacing shall be 1.0m centers in both directions or less if required for working loads by small dimensions or more by large dimensions. Starter bars must be securely fixed to the reinforcement in the parent concrete and accurately located to maintain the specified cover. Reinforcement cages assembled before fixing shall be protected against the weather and shall be stored and transported carefully so that no distortion or contamination may occur.
Concrete shall be placed without delay after fixing reinforcement, and the reinforcement shall be protected with plastic sheeting or tarpaulins in the interim period. If any reinforcement is found to be displaced after the concrete has set and , if in the opinion of the Contract Administrator, the durability, stability or strength of the structure is thereby impaired, the Works Contractor shall cut away the defective member and recast, all at the Works Contractors expense. Bars that are embedded in hardened concrete shall not be field bent except where absolutely necessary and only if approved by the Contract Administrator. Reshaping of bars that are already bent should not be done at points of high stress and shall be allowed only if approved by the Contract Administrator. The clear distance between bars in any one layer shall not be less than the greater of: a) b) c) 30mm One bar diameter (5 + maximum size of aggregate) mm
Larger spacing is advisable in top layers in order to facilitate the flow of concrete through the section and to allow penetration of the vibrator. Multi layered reinforcement must be placed such that bars of the upper layer fall directly above bars of the bottom layers with a clear distance of at least 30mm between layers. 4.4.4.1 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall, as a minimum, record the check on following items: 4.4.5 Visual inspection of fixed reinforcement Visual inspection of spacers. Measurements of concrete cover.
Laps and Joints
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Laps and joints not shown on the drawings shall be approved by the Contract Administrator. Laps are to be staggered in such a manner that maximum one third of the bars are lapped in the same section. Otherwise the lap length shall be increased by 50%. Mechanical splices shall not be used. Quality Control The Works Contractor shall as a minimum record the check on following items: 4.5 Visual inspections of laps.
Workmanship Formwork 4.5.1 General Formwork for concrete shall be rigidly constructed of approved materials and shall be true to the shape and dimensions described on the working drawings. Steel or plywood forms or forms of other materials may be used with the approval of the Contract Administrator. The formwork design shall be the sole responsibility of the Works Contractor, who shall submit his design for approval to the Contract Administrator before construction commences. Loadings design and construct formwork to withstand worst combination of: 1. 2. 3. Total weight of formwork, reinforcement and concrete. Construction loads including dynamic effects of placing, compacting and construction traffic. Wind loads.
Propping: Provide adequate propping to prevent deflection and damage to the structure. Carry down such props to bearings strong enough to provide adequate support. 4.5.2 Design and Construction The design of formwork shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. However, the following upward cambers are suggested to the formwork: i) ii) iii) iv) Cantilevered slabs Cantilevered beams Slabs over 3m span Beams over 6m span 3mm to every 1.5m of span 6mm to every 1.5m of span 3mm to every 3m of span 6mm to every 3m of span but not exceeding 40mm.
Faces in contact with concrete shall be free from adhering grout, projecting nails, splits, or other defects. Joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage of cement grout and to avoid the formation of fins and other blemishes. Faulty joints shall be caulked. 20mm by 20mm chamfers shall be formed on the external corners of concrete members, unless otherwise specified. Opening for inspection of the inside of the formwork and for the escape of water used for washing out, shall be formed so that they can be conveniently closed before placing the concrete. Connection shall be constructed to permit easy removal of the formwork and shall be strong enough to retain the correct shape during consolidation of the concrete. Formwork shall be fixed in perfect lines, grades and dimensions, with no crevices at joints. It shall be securely braced, supported and wedged so as to retain its position without displacement or deflection during the placing and compaction of concrete. All joints shall be either horizontal or vertical, unless otherwise required. In long spans, the anticipated deflection due to the effect of self-weight shall be accurately computed by the Works Contractor and taken into account in the design of formwork such that the finished concrete member shall have true surfaces conforming to lines, planes and elevations shown on drawings. If adequate foundations for shores are not secured, trussed supports shall be provided by the Works Contractor. Cast in metal ties and anchors shall, if possible, be avoided. Where metal ties and anchors are required, they shall be of stainless steel or removable bolts located clear of the reinforcement by a distance equal to the thickness of the concrete cover provided in the member. The arrangement shall be to the satisfaction and approval of the Contract Administrator. An approved mould oil or other material shall be applied to faces of formwork to prevent adherence of the concrete. Such coatings shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, and non-injurious to the concrete. Liquids that retard the setting of concrete shall be used only when approved. Mould oil, retarding liquid, and similar coatings shall be kept from contact with the reinforcement or previously cast concrete. Before any concrete is placed, forms shall be properly cleaned by washing out with water and/or air under pressure to remove sawdust, shavings, metal and other foreign matter. All water shall then be drained and mopped out from the formwork. In no case shall concrete be placed in the forms until such forms have been approved by the Contract Administrator. Such approval shall not relieve the Works Contractor of his responsibility for the formwork.
Details of any fixtures to be cast into the concrete shall be to the approval of the Contract Administrator. No fixtures shall be attached to the concrete by shot-firing without prior permission of the Contract Administrator. Notwithstanding any such authorization, the Works Contractor shall take full responsibility for any such damage to the structure and make good to the satisfaction and approval of the Contract Administrator. Details of any openings, holes, chases, etc. required to be formed or cut in the structure shall be approved by the Contract Administrator prior to the work being carried out on site. Immediately after striking the formwork, all surface fins and other superfluous projections shall be removed and purpose-made holes for internal ties shall be made good with specially prepared cement mortar of equal quality as the concrete. 4.5.2.1 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall as a minimum record the check on following items: 4.5.3 Visual inspection of formwork design Inspection of cleaning before concreting. Visual inspection of watering of formwork where required.
Re-use of Formwork Case should be taken, when re-using formwork, that its surface shall be smooth and clean and that it shall be free from warping, twisting or other deformation. Any formwork which has, in the opinion of the Management Team, deteriorated sufficiently to render it unsuitable for the work shall be rejected and must be removed from the site immediately or must be broken up at once, and new formwork being provided at the Works Contractors expense. 4.5.3.1 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall as a minimum record the check on following items: Visual inspection of formwork before re-use.
4.5.4
Stripping of Formwork
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Formwork shall be removed in such a manner as not to cause any damage to or over-stress in the concrete. Formwork shall not be removed before the concrete has sufficiently set and hardened. The minimum periods which shall elapse between placing the concrete and the removal of formwork for the various parts of the structure shall be as given below. These minimum requirements shall not relieve the Works Contractor of the obligation to delay the removal of forms if the concrete has not attained its specified working strength. The Contract Administrator may, at his discretion, vary these minimum periods. The following striking time, given in day (24 hours) are the absolute minimum that will be permitted: i) ii) iii) iv) Sides of beams, columns and walls Slab soffits (props left under) Beam soffits (props left under) Removal of props to slabs - 1 day - 4 days - 10 days - 7 days upto 4.5m span - 14 days above 4.5m span - 14 days upto 6m span 21 days above 6m span
v)
Removal of props to beams & Archites
The Works Contractor shall ensure that the concrete has sufficient strength when forms are removed, and no defects are caused by early removal of the forms. He should maintain records of ambient temperature in order to determine if early removal of props is permissible. Critical structural elements such as cantilevers, long span beams, etc. may require additional time for hardening of the concrete before striking. Loads shall not be placed on concrete before the following periods after casting (or as otherwise agreed in writing by the Contract Administrator). Columns, beams, slabs, etc. Foundations 14 days 10 days
Quality Control The Works Contractor shall as a minimum record the check on following items: 4.5.5 Striking of all types of formwork
Construction Joints
The Works Contractor shall submit to the Contract Administrator for discussion and approval a marked up drawing of the construction showing proposed positions of construction joints at least 7 days before work commences. Construction joints shall be formed in either horizontal or vertical planes and located in the work to suit working stresses. They shall be so located and the quantity of concrete placed at any one time shall be so limited in size and shape as to minimise shrinkage and temperature effects. All reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric shall be continued across construction joints except where shown on the drawings. The surface of the concrete at all joints shall be straight and shall be thoroughly cleaned by sandblasting the surface to expose aggregate. All construction joints shall be cleaned by sandblasting to a level approved by the Management Team. The cleaned surfaces shall be wetted for at least 12 hours and shall be kept in a saturated surface dry condition prior to concreting of next stage. 4.5.5.1 Quality Control The Works Contractor shall as a minimum record the check on following items: 4.6 Visual inspection of construction joints before concreting.
Worked Finishes on In-situ Concrete 4.6.1. Timing Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to the setting and hardening of the concrete. Do not wet surfaces of concrete to assist surface working. Do not sprinkle cement onto surface. 4.6.2. Wood Floated Finish Use a wood float to give an even slightly coarse texture with no ridges or steps. 4.6.3. Trowelled finish to receive floor finishes 1. Float Concrete to an even surface with no ridges or steps, then immediately commence curing as specified. When the concrete is suitably stiff, hand or power trowel to give a uniform smooth surface, free from trowel marks and other blemishes, and suitable to receive the specified flooring material. Resume specified curing without delay. Adequately protect the surface from construction.
2.
3. 4.
5.
If, because of inadequate finishing or protection, the surface of the concrete is not suitable to receive the specified flooring material, it must be made good by application of a smoothing compound to the satisfaction of the flooring sub-Works Contractor. Allow for the cost of such making good.
4.6.4.
Trowelled finish for concrete wearing surfaces 1. Float concrete to an even surface with no ridges or steps, then immediately commence curing as specified. Successively hand or power trowel at intervals, applying sufficient pressure to close the surface, to give a uniform smooth finish free from trowel marks and other blemishes. Resume specified curing without delay. Complete a sample area of the finished work, size 5m2, in advance of the remainder, in an approved location, and obtain approval of appearance from the Contract Administrator via the Management Team before proceeding.
2.
3.
4.6.5.
Formed Finishes 4.6.5.1. Basic Finish Grade 1 No particular requirements, except those for tolerances and full compaction. 4.6.5.2. Plain Smooth Finish Grade 2 Produce an even finish with a sheet material (e.g. plywood), with panels arranged in a regular pattern as a feature of the surface. Abrupt irregularities to be not greater than 5mm. Gradual irregularities, expressed as maximum permissible deviation from a 1 m straight edge, to be not greater than 5mm. Variation in colour resulting from the use of an impermeable form lining will be permitted but the surface to be free from discolouration due to contamination or grout leakage. Blowholes less than 10mm in diameter will be permitted but otherwise surface to be free from voids, honeycombing, segregation and other large defects. Making Good: Projecting fins are to be removed and rubbed down with a carborundum stone but otherwise the finish is to be
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST left as struck. Making good of small defects will normally be permitted after inspection by the Management Team. Arrisses to be chamfered 20 x 20mm. Formwork tie holes to be in an approved regular pattern, filled with matching mortar to an approved sample Complete a sample area of the finished work size 10m2 in advance of the remainder, in an approved location, and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding. 4.6.5.3. Fine Smooth Finish Grade 3 Produce a smooth even finish with an impervious sheet material (e.g. resin film faced plywood), with panels as large as is practicable and arranged in an approved regular pattern as a feature of the surface. Do not replace parts of formwork panels where this may cause a change of colour in the concrete. Abrupt irregularities to be not greater than 3mm. Gradual irregularities, expressed as maximum permissible deviation from a 1m straight edge to be not greater than 3mm. Variation in colour resulting from the use of an impermeable form lining will be permitted but he surface is to be free from discolouration due to contamination of grout leakage. Cover spacers: Do not use without approval. Blowholes less than 5mm in diameter will be permitted but otherwise surface to be free from voids, honeycombing, segregation and other defects. Making Good: projecting fins are to be removed and rubbed down with a carborundum stone but otherwise the finish is to be left as struck. Making good will not normally be permitted. 4.7 Microconcrete Shrinkage compensated Microconcrete of approved quality shall be used for infilling openings in substructure concrete elements. The material shall be a shrinkage controlled flowable grade concrete suitable for mass infill to structural repairs and shall comply with following requirements. Compressive strength at 28 days Flexural strength at 28 days Bond strength to concrete surface at 28 days Tensile strength at 28 days Water absorption
> > > > >
60 N/mm2 9 N/mm2 2 N/mm2 5 N/mm2 2%
4.8
Pre-Cast Concrete Precast elements of concrete shall be made on site using the specified type of concrete, following specific guidelines given in the relevant drawings. Unless otherwise specified, surface finish of precast concrete slabs shall be as per section 4.6.3 above.
End of Section
SECTION 5 BLOCKWORK 5.1 Scope of Work Delivery of masonry-blocks and construction of block work as shown on Drawings and described in this Specification. 5.2 Related Standards All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest relevant British Standard or Code of Practice except as amended herein: BS 56238 : 1978 Part 1 Structural use of masonry; unreinforced masonry. Use of masonry Materials and Components design and Workmanship
BS 5628 : 1985 Part 3
BS 8000 : 1989 Part 3
Workmanship on building sites; Codes of practice for masonry Specification for readymixed Building mortars Precast concrete blocks Precast concrete masonry units Metal ties for cavity wall construction Recommendations for the design of wall ties
BS 4721
OS 1 : 1985 BS 6073 : 1981, Part 1 BS 1243 : 1978 (amended 1981 and 1982) DD 140, Part 2 : 1987
5.3
General Approvals Prior to manufacture, the Works Contractor shall prepare two samples of each block for the Contract Administrators approval and the approved samples shall be clearly marked and retained until completion of the contract. Testing of blocks to be carried out in accordance with BS 6073:Part 1 : 1981. Submit test results to the Contract Administrator at regular, not more than fortnightly intervals. From every consignment of 1000 blocks select 10 (in the case of load bearing blocks) and 5 (in the case of non-load bearing blocks) and deliver to an approved laboratory for measurement of dimensions and determination of compressive strength. The Works Contractor shall obtain the Contract Administrators approval in writing for all materials included in the work prior to commencement. Submittals and approvals related to concrete and steel for infill in block work shall be in accordance with the enclosed Specification for concrete work. All materials used in the work shall be new and undamaged. Approvals by the Contract Administrator shall not relieve the Works Contractor of any of his responsibilities.
5.4
Materials 5.4.1 Blocks All concrete blocks shall be hollow or solid as per the drawings, dense and shall comply with the requirements of Omani Standard No. 11985- Precast concrete blocks and Omani measurement Standard MA91 1975. Blocks shall be made in approved block making
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST machines in the thickness required. The materials for all blocks shall be mixed upon a clean mixing platform or in an approved mechanical mixer and shall be gauged with sufficient water to enable the materials to bind together under pressure and thereby placed in the block making machine in layers not exceeding 75mm, each layer being thoroughly tamped or, if approved, machine vibrated. On removal from the machine the blocks shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun in approved manner and kept wet for ten days after which they may be stacked in the open without protection. Each batch of blocks shall be marked in a distinguishing manner. Block sizes and compressive strength shall be as follows (unless specified otherwise on the drawings) Purpose Loadbearing block work Non-loadbearing block work Size 390x190x190 390x190x190 390x190x140 390x190x90 Min. compressive Strength (N/mm2) 10.5 7.5 7.5 7.5
Block work at sub-structure (below plinth level) shall be precast with cement type Sulphate Resistant Cement (SRC) and constructed by using mortar having SRC. Block work at Super Structure (above plinth level) shall be precast with cement type Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) and constructed by using mortar having OPC. 5.4.2 Cement Cement bed in mortar or blocks shall be Ordinary Portland Cement for super structure and Sulphate Resistant Cement for sub-structure complying with BS12: 1978, or Omani Standard No. OS 7. 5.4.3 Aggregate Aggregate for concrete infill shall comply with attached Specification for concrete work. Aggregate for mortar shall comply with grade M of BS 882. The clay/silt content shall not exceed 3% when determined in accordance with BS 812. Chloride and Sulphate content shall not exceed the limits given in aggregates for concrete. 5.4.4 Water
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Water for mortar, concrete and curing, shall comply with attached Specification for concrete work. 5.4.5 Lime Lime for use in both mortar and block manufacture shall be nonhydrated or semi-hydrated lime and shall comply with BS 890. Readymixed mortars delivered wet to site can be used and shall comply with BS 4721 and this Specification. 5.4.6 Admixtures Mortar plasticisers shall comply with the requirements of BS 4887. Admixtures used in the manufacture of bricks and blocks shall comply with BS 5075. 5.4.7 Wall Ties Wall ties, set in structural concrete, shall comply with BS 1243. Ties shall be galvanized or stainless steel, as noted on the drawings, with a minimum diameter of 4mm, characteristic tensile strength of 4kN, and characteristic shear strength of 5 kN. Their type shall be fishtail, provided at every alternate course and finished with galvanized or stainless steel, as per drawings, metal lathing at both faces of the wall. For cavity walls, unless otherwise specified, where both skins of cavity walls are built in block work, the skins shall be tied with galvanized or stainless steel ties, as noted on the drawings. The spacing of the ties shall be 800mm horizontally and 400mm vertically. The type of the ties depends on the size of the cavity but must comply to BS 5628. 5.4.8 Compressive Joint Filler Compressive joint filler shall be non wood based board of specified size and thickness. The filler shall have a minimum recovery of 90% after 25 hours of compression to 50%. 5.5 Execution 5.5.1 Storage and handling on site Consignment of materials shall be placed so that they will be used in order of delivery and will not be damaged or contaminated during the storage period.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Blocks shall be carefully unloaded and stacked on compacted hardcore or concrete slabs. Cement and lime shall be stored off ground and kept dry. If affected by dampness the material shall be rejected. Aggregates shall be stored as described in the section covering concrete work. Storage and handling of damp-proof courses shall be done as per the manufacturers recommendations. 5.5.2 Mortar, batching and mixing Minimum quality of mortar to be used in difference applications are shown below: Location Mortar designation to BS 5628 (iii) Mix by volume Cement : Lime : Sand 1:1:6 Mix by volume Cement : Sand
Internal walls/ Inner leaf of cavity walls External walls/ Outer leaf of cavity walls Earth retaining walls, reinforced block work
1:4
1:1:6 (iii)
1:4
(ii)
1: : 4
1:3
The materials for mortar shall be accurately measured. If mixing by volume is adopted a standard container must be used to measure the materials. The volume of the container shall be such that only a whole number of volumes of each material is required for each batch. Mixing Sequence: When mixing by machine, load about three quarters of the sand or premixed lime/and and water. While mixing gradually add lime and/or cement and continue mixing. The load remainder of sand and water to achieve required workability. Mix ingredients large enough to obtain a uniform consistency and colour. Hand mixing is allowed only for small batches and shall be done on a watertight platform, first dry and then with added water until the correct consistency and uniform distribution of materials is obtained.
All mortar shall be used within 35 minutes of the addition of water. Any mortar not used after such time shall be discarded. 5.5.3 Block Walling 5.5.3.1 1. General All block work shall be cut and built to the respective dimensions, thickness and heights shown on the Drawings. All block work coursing to be gauged in height and length. All joint between blocks shall be solidly filled to a general thickness of 10mm and at no point more than 15mm. All cross joints shall be filled by well buttering the end of the blocks and then pushing it into position against its neighbour. Fair-faced joints shall be flush, recessed (bucket-handle or hosepipe) and of average thickness 10mm, with joints finished as the work proceeds. 2. Wetting before laying shall be done where necessary to adjust suction on the faces in contact with mortar. The blocks shall not be over wetted or soaked, as this may lead to floating on the mortar bed. Mortar beds shall be laid in short lengths only so as to limit water loss. 3. Block work shall be carried up in a uniform manner, no one portion of a single run/leaf being raised more than one metre above another at one time unless special circumstances render this impracticable. All perpends, quoins, etc. shall be kept strictly true and square and the whole properly bonded together. The maximum height of wall built in one day shall be limited to 1.150m. Paralled walls and adjacent leaves of cavity walls may be constructed separately providing adequate provision is made for wall ties, insulation and DPMs. Block walls shall be built in stretcher bond. Intersections of internal block walls shall be properly bonded in alternate courses. At junctions of external cavity wall with int. stainless steel ties are required in alternative courses. Generally block work, where exposed, shall be flush joined as the work proceeds. Joints and beds shall be filled with mortar except those which are to receive
4.
5.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST external or internal plastering which shall be raked out not exceeding 5mm deep using a key with shoulder to prevent deeper raking. 6. Provide a solid course of block work at sill level of openings and under bearing of all in-situ concrete. All cutting of blocks shall be made by machine; hand cutting shall not be permitted.
7.
5.5.4 Treatment of Junctions Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, the detailing at joints shall be as follows: a) Vertical joint between block work and concrete column or wall For all block work walls, stainless steel ties to BS 1554 are to be secured to concrete at 400mm vertical spacing using approved fixing system, and then built into the mortar bed joints of the wall. b) Vertical connection between block work and block work at changes of direction All walls shall be properly bonded at intersection except where a wall which is built off a ground bearing slab joins a wall built off a ground beam or footing in which case a vertical joint shall be provide with 2 layers of building paper or similar between. The walls shall be tied together with wall ties at 400mm vertical spacing. c) Horizontal joint at the top of the wall between the wall and concrete beam or slab over
1.
Non-load bearing 200 to 100 mm wall the top course of block work shall be constructed after the structure above has been constructed and the props have been removed and a period of 14 days minimum has elapsed after the construction of the remainder of the wall.
5.5.5
Allowance for Services Where services are required to pass through block work walls, the Works Contractor shall provide either lintels or sleeves to prevent damage to the services. Horizontal or diagonal chases in block work walls will not be permitted.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 5.5.6 Bedding Frames Bedding frames around openings shall be provided as per architect details. Where the frames are built in they shall be bedded in the same mortar as that used for the walling. 5.5.7 Movement Joints Movement joints between top of block work and underside of concrete shall be located as shown on the Drawings and shall be made with two layers or 3.0mm thick preformed plastic slip membrane. Vertical contraction joints are to be provided as indicated and detailed on the Drawings. Generally, the maximum spacing between joints is to be 6m unless otherwise agreed with the Contract Administrator.. 5.5.8 Protection The Works Contractor shall protect newly built walling against drying out too rapidly by the suns heat or from any other adverse climatic effect. In particular the Works Contractor shall cover all newly erected walling with hessian or other material approved by the Contract Administrator and shall keep the same wet for at least three days. The Works Contractor shall prop and stabilize the walls prior to erection of floors and/or roofs and shall not remove any props without the prior agreement of the Contract Administrator.
End of Section
SECTION 6 PROTECTION OF SUBSTRUCTURE 6.1 General This section covers external and internal surface protection of structures below ground e.g., membrane, coating, water-stops, water bars etc. The protection systems comprise: - (unless otherwise noted on the Structural drawings) Waterproofing membrane on reinforced concrete work below ground level. Waterproofing membrane on reinforced concrete work below external paving.
Fibre reinforced bituminous paint on concrete/block work below ground. Protection boards/Sheets on all structures below ground. Waterstops at construction joints
The membrane and coating works shall be executed by specialist appointed by the Works Contractor to the approval of the Contract Administrator. All materials and systems shall be installed to the satisfaction of the Management Team. The Works Contractor shall submit to the Contract Administrator for his approval at least 60 days prior to use, his proposals for the complete waterproofing system together with full specification, technical literature and samples. The membrane and coating system shall be approved in writing by the Contract Administrator before commencement of the work, and the work shall comply in all respects with the approved specification. The completed waterproof membrane shall be guaranteed for a period of not less than 20 years from the date of contract completion. Should any damage occur to the building or its contents as a result of faulty materials or workmanship the Works Contractor shall make good such defects to the satisfaction of the Management Team and subsequent approval of the Contract Administrator.
Reference documents BS 743:1970 Specification for materials for damp proof courses + AMD 2503, AMD 4336, AMD 4594. Methods of test for petroleum and its products. Determination of needle penetration of bituminous material Determination of softening point bitumen (ring and ball method) of
BS 2000
Part 49:1983
Part 58: 1993
Part 72:1993
Determination of viscosity of cut-back bitumen.

CP 102:1973
Code of practice for protection of buildings against water from the ground + AMD 1511, AMD 2196, AMD 2470. Code of practice for protection of structures against water from the ground. Code of Practice for waterproofing
BS 8102:1990
BS 8000:Part 4:1989 6.2 Materials 6.2.1 General
All materials shall be tropical formulations, manufactured or supplied by a G.C.C. licensed company under approved quality-control conditions for use in the local environment. External protective membrane shall comply with Type A protection as defined in BS 8102 : 1990. The waterpoof membrane shall in general prevent any ground water, sea water or chemical ions from entering the concrete structure. The Contract Administrator shall have reasonable access to the testing and manufacturing stations and may require sample testing of the materials supplied to site to ensure compliance with the Specification. All such testing shall be carried out at the Works Contractors expense. The Works Contractor shall ensure that the selected material supplier is capable of both pre-contract and on-site technical back up during the works should it be necessary.
6.2.2
External protection below ground Apply a flexible, cold applied, high density polyethylene film carrying a thick elastic self adhesive rubber/bitumen compound. The reinforced carrier film shall be a high performance cross laminate with dimensional stability and high tear strength, impact and puncture resistance. Membrane without HDPE film shall only be used if specified on the drawings. The membrane shall have the following properties. Colour: Black Physical Properties:
Property
Value
Test Method
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Thickness Puncture Resistance Elongation Moisture Vapour permeability Min. 1.5mm 220 N 65mm 1250% 0.23g/m2/24 Hrs.
ASTM E154 ASTM D638 BS 3177:1959 (75%RH/25 deg. C)
The membrane shall be self-adhesive and joints shall be rendered watertight by overlapping adjacent sheets by minimum 60mm and rolling the joints. All surfaces except horizontal concrete blinding shall, when surface dry, be painted with a primer as specified by manufacturer and allowed to dry. A preformed PVC extrusion 40 x 40mm coated with self-adhesive compound shall be used to provide an angle fillet between walls and slabs. Alternatively a compatible liquid membrane can be used which forms a flexible seamless rubber like layer. After placing membrane, the surface shall be protected from construction traffic by application of a screed, min. 25mm thick on base slabs and by a protection board on walls, as shown on the drawings. The membrane shall be installed to the satisfaction and subsequent approval of the Contract Administrator. 6.2.3 Fibre reinforced bituminous paint The paint shall be based on bitumen blended together with nonasbestos reinforcing fibres and solvents to provide a high build flexible bituminous coating. The paint shall be resistant to water, salt solutions, sulphate, chloride and alkali solutions. Dry film thickness shall be minimum 0.750mm. The number of coats shall be 3 unless specified otherwise on the drawing. The paint shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. The bituminous paint shall be protected with a 1000 gauge polythene membrane. The paint and polythene protection shall be applied to the satisfaction and the subsequent approval of the Contract Administrator. 6.2.4 Accessories for Tanking Systems Waterstops
The waterstop shall be a high performance system forming a continuous band as shown on the Contract drawings. Site jointing shall be limited to butt joints and shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Waterstops shall be a hydrophilic strip positioned in the center of the joint, but not less than 75mm from external face of concrete. 6.2.5 Penetrations through Membranes A cold applied bitumen mastic compound shall be used to seal the membrane around projections and irregularities such as gulleys and small diameter pipes and any fixing for support of stone cladding etc. 6.2.6 Protection to Vertical Tanking Membrane Protection of the membrane shall comprise a preformed asphaltic board composed of aggregate bonded in bitumen and encased between two layers of asphaltic felt. The board shall be of minimum 3mm thickness and bonded in place on accordance with manufacturers instructions. Unless mentioned otherwise on the Structural drawings after placing the board, a second layer of protection shall be placed comprising 100mm block work. The protection shall be used on all vertical concrete structures that have been applied with water proofing membrane or fibre reinforced bituminous paint, prior to backfilling excavations. 6.2.7 Damp proof-courses (DPC) between external walls and slab/foundation For the Damp proof courses (DPC) refer to Architectural Drawings and Details. Bonding of the DPC sheet to the waterproof membrane shall be carried out in accordance with the waterproofing manufacturers recommended and approved details. 6.3 Applications 6.3.1 Membrane application One layer of the specified membrane shall be laid on horizontal blinding and applied to vertical surfaces of the edge formwork with minimum laps in accordance with the waterproofing manufacturers recommended and approved details. One layer of the other specified membrane shall be applied to vertical surfaces of basement external walls.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 6.3.2 Surface preparation The membrane shall be laid on a regular surface free from sharp protrusions and hollows. 6.3.3 General details Laps Adjacent rolls of membrane shall be provided with a minimum overlap in accordance with the waterproofing manufacturers recommended and approved details at the joints to ensure complete continuity. Similarly ends shall be lapped or butted together and taped. Pressure shall be applied at the joints with a roller to ensure complete adhesion between both layers. All joints shall be well rolled until complete waterproofing is obtained. External corners External corners where possible shall be trowelled to provide a 20x20mm minimum chamfer. Angles : Internal Internal angles between slab and walls shall be provided with a 40x40mm Membrane Fillet to facilitate dressing the membrane at these points. The membrane shall not be stretched through corners, but carefully dressed and eased around angle. Alternatively an angle fillet can be formed by use of an approved liquid rubber/mastic compound. 6.3.4 Drainage and Pipes Form waterproofing around pipes including cable etc. in accordance with the waterproofing manufacturers recommended and approved details. Carefully form openings through structures and protecting walls etc., accurately sized to receive pipes or pipe sleeves. Where sleeves are cast into concrete, suitable flanges shall be provided as shown on the drawings. Where pipes occur they shall be treated with Mastic reinforcing strips and collars as shown on the detailed Drawings, to form a watertight seal. 6.3.5 Vertical application Where the membrane is expected to be left exposed at the top of a high wall for any length of time the top edge shall be batten-fixed to secure edge.
6.3.6
Inspection Immediately prior to covering the membrane careful inspection shall be made for accidental damage, and any damaged areas shall be cleaned and patched with membrane material.
6.3.7
Protection On horizontal areas where steel reinforcement is to be fixed prior to concreting the membrane shall be either suitable for trafficking without further protection or protected as per section 6.2.2 if its type requires so. On vertical applications where abrasive backfill is to be used the membrane shall be protected as given section 6.2.5. The perimeter of the membrane shall be left with an extended edge for later continuity and the free edge shall be adequately protected while exposed. The free edge of the membrane shall be carefully cleaned before further laying is commenced. Bituminous paint application shall be protected by a 1200 gauge polythene membrane of approved quality.
6.3.8
Precautions The following shall be carefully observed while laying the waterproofing membrane: The area of membrane laid in a working day shall not exceed that which can be protected in the same working day. No storage of materials shall be allowed or trafficking by trades other than those directly engaged in the subsequent works on areas waterproofed with membrane. Where required and at the discretion of the Management Team protective materials shall be laid.
6.3.9
Fibre-reinforced bituminous paint application Apply 750micron fibre-reinforced bituminous paint on structures above the finished level of membrane protection and on other structures/foundations below ground directed by and to the subsequent approval of the Contract Administrator. Before applying the paint all visible cracks in concrete walls shall be dressed with 300mm wide strips of membrane material.
End of Section
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 7.0 ROOFING
7.1
MATERIAL 7.1.1 Cement and Water Cement and water shall be as described in "Concrete Work" 7.1.2 Sand Sand shall be wadi sand and shall comply with BS 1199 and 1200:1976. 7.1.3 Lightweight Concrete Roof Screed Light weight concrete roof screed shall have a density between 800-1000 kg/m3 consisting of cement and sand with a foaming agent. Light weight aggregate may also be used. The work shall be carried out by a specialist agency approved by the Engineer strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's Instructions. 7.1.4 Insulation Insulation shall be minimum 30mm thick foam or rigid polyurethane with a minimum density of 55 kg/m3. 7.1.5 Vapour Barrier Vapour barrier shall be 1000 gauge polythene sheet lapped 150mm at joints. 7.1.6 Waterproofing Systems The waterproofing system shall be as specified on drawing or in the Bills of Quantities, carried out by a specialist sub-contractor approved by the material supplier. An insurance backed guarantee of 10 years for materials and workmanship shall be provided. The guarantee shall be furnished jointly by the material supplier and the contractor. 7.1.7 Waterproofing Membrane a) Acrylic, Polyurethane or PVC or a waterproofing membrane comprising a rubber/bitumen based compound with HDPE film shall be used for the waterproofing of a roof. When spray applied in liquid form the minimum thickness of dry membrane shall not be less than 1000 micron (40 mils). When in the form of sheets, the minimum thickness shall be 1500 micron.
b)
7.1.8
Solar Shield A solar shield of high purity aluminium sheet resistant to environmental pollution; ozone and puncturing with a self adhesive backing of rubber/bitumen compound shall be provided where no other finishing or topping is provided.
7.1.9 Aluminium Flashings Aluminium flashings shall be 0.90mm thick aluminium strip complying with BS EN 515. 7.1.10 Aluminium Angle Trim Aluminium angle trim shall be satin anodised aluminium trim with a minimum wall thickness of 2mm with all arises pencil rounded . 7.1.11 Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets Asbestos Cement corrugated sheets shall comply with BS 690-3:1990 and fastenings shall comply with BS 690-6:1976. 7.1.12 Hot Dipped Galvanised Corrugated Steel Sheets Hot dipped galvanised corrugated steel sheets shall comply with BS 3083:1988 type 180 and shall be 22 gauge and have a minimum weight of zinc coating of 550g/m2 (both surfaces). 7.1.13 Profiled Aluminium Sheets Profiled aluminium sheets shall comply with BS 4868:1972 Figure 2 and shall be 0.90mm thick. Powder coated to a minimum film thickness of 60 micron super polyester or 25 micron PVF2 on the exposed side and 12 micron clear lacquer on the inside. 7.1.14 Profiled Steel Sheets Colour coated galvanised profiled steel sheets shall have minimum thickness of 0.63mm and minimum depth of profile of 32mm. It shall have minimum weight of zinc coating of 550 gm/m2 (both surfaces). The colour coating on the exposed side shall be baked enamel polyester or silicon polyester minimum 40 micron thick or PVF2 25 micron thick. The coating on the reverse side shall be minimum 12 micron thick. 7.1.15 Steel/Aluminium Roof Sheeting i) The roof material supplier and erector shall be the same Agency. OR
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST The Contractor shall be an authorised erector of the material supplier and shall submit a certificate to that effect. ii) The Contractor shall furnish a guarantee for a minimum period of five years against roof leakage due to faulty material or workmanship.
7.2
Workmanship 7.2.1 General a) No application of roofing work or flashings shall commence or proceed during inclement weather. All surfaces to receive roofing shall be thoroughly dry and free of moisture. Prior to and during application, all dirt and dust shall be removed from surfaces either by vacuuming, sweeping, blowing with compressed air, or similar methods. Surfaces not designated to receive roofing shall be protected against accidental damage, spillage or application of the material to those areas. When the porosity of the concrete is such that entrapped air may cause blisters or pinholes in the roofing, the concrete surface shall be sealed with a solution of sealing compound. Materials used shall be obtained for one single source and shall be used with compatible primers, adhesives and flashing sheets throughout.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
7.2.2 Delivery of Materials a) Materials shall be delivered in their original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages, all clearly labelled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, and number and batch number of the materials where appropriate. Materials and equipment shall be stored as directed in a neat and safe manner so as not to exceed the allowable live load of the storage area provided. Storage areas shall be shaded, ventilated and shall be located away from all sources of excess heat, sparks or open flame. Containers of liquid material shall not be left open at any time in the storage area. Materials not conforming to this requirement will be rejected by the Engineer, and shall be removed from the site and replaced with approved materials, at no additional cost to the Employer.
b)
7.2.3 Storage of Materials a) Sheets shall, if possible, be stored internally in their original packing and in a dry well ventilated position.
b)
Consideration may be given to storing externally, providing the sheets are stacked horizontally, clear of the ground, on clean dry timber battens, the whole stack being covered with polythene or tarpaulins which have not been treated with a copper bearing proofing agent. These covers should allow adequate ventilation to minimise the risk of condensation.
7.2.4 Inspection of Surfaces a) In case of the specialist Sub-Contractors, the Main Contractor shall examine all surfaces on which all roofing is to be applied in order to ascertain that they will be left by others without serious projections and sharp edges. Surfaces shall be free of projections, voids, depressions, scale, efflorescence, loose material, laitence, oil grease and other foreign materials. Before starting work, inspect all surfaces to be water-proofed and rectify any surfaces that are not suitable for the correct application of the water-proofing. Commencement of the work shall be construed as acceptance of the surface on which the roofing is to be applied by the Contractor.
b)
7.2.5 Built-up Roofing System The built-up roofing shall be laid in accordance with recognised practice in the best workmanlike manner. It shall be carefully worked or fitted around pipes, outlets openings etc. and shall be protected from damage at all times until completion. All roofs shall be left in a sound, watertight and clean condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer at completion. 7.2.6 Lightweight Concrete Roof Screed The roof screed shall be laid to falls to ensure adequate run-off of rainwater and to prevent "ponding". The minimum thickness shall be 50mm and the screed shall be laid in alternate bays not exceeding 3000mm in any direction A 45 fillet shall be formed at the junction of the screed and base of all upstands. 7.2.7 Aluminium Flashing Aluminium flashings shall be dressed into chases where appropriate and shall be dressed evenly down the surface to which they are applied. All edges shall be sealed with mastic. Joints in the running length shall be formed with a single welt. Joints in the running length over 50 degrees or on vertical surfaces shall be lapped at least 150mm. Where a flashing is nailed to timber fillets, this shall be done with aluminium nails at 100mm centres. Flashing collars shall be at least 150mm high and welded at the lower end to a 450 x 250mm base. The upper edge shall be protected by means of a cap fitted on top of the pipe.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 7.2.8 Aluminium Edge Trim Aluminium edge trim shall be screwed with aluminium or stainless steel dome headed countersunk screws at 450mm centres, plugged where necessary. The holes and countersinks shall be drilled and not punched. All lines shall be true to line and level. Horizontal and vertical angles shall be mitred and open ends capped. All edges shall be sealed with mastic. 7.2.9 Domes Before the application of finishes to domes the surface shall be prepared in the following manner a) b) The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from loose material. Apply 15mm of render comprising 1 : 3 Cement Sand Mortar mixed with Nitobond SBR (or equal and approved). Where it is necessary to increase the thickness of render to make good imperfections in the surface of the dome, it shall be built up in layers of not more than 15mm thickness prior to the application of the final single layer to the whole surface. The surface shall be cured using dampened hessian cloth for a period of seven days. Apply one coat (1mm thick) Nitocote CM210 Waterproofing Membrane (or equal and approved) and while still wet embed glass fibre mesh(120g per m). Apply a second coat of 1mm Nitocote eight hours after the first coat. Where mosaic tiles are to be laid Nitotile LMT (or equal and approved) adhesive should be used and work shall commence from the base of the dome. Final grouting shall be carried out with Nitotile LM (or equal and approved) grout. Where alternative finishings (eg GRC Panels) are used refer to the drawings for further details.
c)
d)
e)
f)
7.2.10 Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets a) Asbestos cement corrugated sheet erection shall comply with BS 5247 14:1975. End laps shall be 150mm and side laps shall be 1 1/2 corrugations for type A sheets and 1/2 corrugation for type B sheets. The sheets shall be fixed at centres not exceeding 300mm by galvanised drive screws to timber or by hook bolts to steel with galvanised diamond shaped washers and lead or plastic sealing washers. All holes for bolts or screws and shall be drilled (NOT punched) from the underside of the sheets and shall be on the crown of the corrugations.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Special fittings including ridges, barge boards, cappings, gutters, eaves, filler pieces, apron flashing etc., shall be compatible with the roof coverings and shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer. The asbestos cement sheeting shall be as manufactured by an approved supplier, fixed to rafters strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, using the requisite starter, finishing and apex sheets described therein. Each sheet shall be fixed starting from eaves level. The finishing sheet shall be fixed to the last sheet and to the apex sheet. The sheets shall project 75mm beyond all fascia and barge boards. On double pitched roofs the laying of the sheets on both slopes shall commence from the opposite end to the prevailing wind. All holes shall be drilled 1.5mm larger in diameter than that of the nail or bolt and no holes may be punched. The nails shall not be driven in nor the bolts tightened more than is necessary to seat the washers firmly in position. All cutting shall be accurately and carefully executed with a sharp saw. Neat, close fitting joints shall be formed around vent pipes and the like.
c)
d)
7.2.11 Hot Dipped Galvanised Corrugated Steel Sheets a) Hot dipped galvanised corrugated steel sheeting shall be erected in accordance with CP 143-10:1973. Sheets shall be fixed with one and a half corrugation side laps and 150mm minimum end laps. Sheets shall be fixed at centres not exceeding 300mm by galvanised drive screws to timber or by hook bolts to steel with galvanised diamond shaped washers and lead or plastic sealing washers. All holes for bolts, or screws shall be drilled (NOT punched) from the underside of the sheets and shall be on the crown of the corrugations. Bolts, screws, washers etc., shall generally comply with BS 1494-1:1964 and -2:1967. All holes, cuttings, etc., exposed after galvanising shall be treated with cold galvanising treatment. Special fittings including ridges, barge boards, cappings, gutters eaves filler pieces, apron flahsings etc., shall be compatible with the roof coverings and shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer.
b)
c)
7.2.12 Profiled Aluminium Sheets a) The sheeting is to be fixed securely to supporting steelwork by means of aluminium or galvanised steel hook bolts with plastic washers and caps or self-tapping screws with plastic washers, or by alternative means of patent design, as approved by the Engineer. All steelwork surfaces in contact with the sheeting or flashings shall be separated by means of a continuous strip of bitumen felt, PVC tape etc., or alternatively painted with zinc chromate or aluminium paint.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) The sheeting is to be fixed securely to timber or similar roofs by means of aluminium drive screws, or galvanised steel screws with plastic washers, all timber surfaces in contact with the sheeting or flashings shall be overlaid with heavy grade roofing felt. All exposed nail heads in timber shall be hammered and punched well below the surface of the timber. All fixings are to be in accordance with the recommendations laid down in CP 143-15:1973 and manufactured to standards laid down by BS 14941:1964 and -2: 1967. Sheets up to 10 corrugations or 6 troughs in width should be secured to every purlin or side rail, allowing at least one fastening in addition to those of side laps and edges. Wider sheets require at least two intermediate fixings. Patent plastic washers of approved design may be used instead of the metal and bitumen felt washers recommended by CP 143-15:1973. All holes for fixings shall be 0.8mm diameter larger than the thread of the bolt, care being taken to avoid burrs or dishing of the sheet. Sheets shall, where possible, be laid from the end of the building away from the prevailing wind, so that exposed edges face downwind. Cuts are to be carefully marked out using a pencil, not a sharp tool, to ensure that re-bending does not become necessary. Cuts across the corrugations can be made with tools with fine teeth. Side laps to pitched roofs shall be fixed with a lap of not less than one and a half corrugations. Side laps to vertical cladding shall be fixed with a single corrugation. Side laps in sloping roofs shall be sealed with two rows of minimum 6mm butyl tapes. In addition to the fixings to purlines, side laps should be secured by bolts or rivets passing through the overlap of the profile and spaced as follows unless specified otherwise: i) ii) iii) 380mm to 460mm centres for roofs of more than 15 pitch. 300mm to 380mm centres for roofs of less than 15 pitch. 460mm centres for vertical sheeting.
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Unless specified otherwise minimum end laps should be as follows: i) ii) iii) 100mm for vertical sheeting. 300mm for roofs down to 15. 300mm for roofs of less than 15 pitch down to 12 sealed with a suitable non-hardening mastic sealing strip. Below 12 and down to 5 single sheets with sealed side lap. Laps should never occur at the crown of the roof.
iv)
Expansion and contraction in the length of long sheets should be allowed for by providing over size holes for fixings and correspondingly large sealing washers. The use of fasteners with some flexibility, e.g. hook bolts, are to be used for very long sheets. If self-tapping screws are used, care must be taken not to 'overdrive' them thus damaging the washers. It is most important for the under sheet at a lap to be free to slide and not to be secured to the top sheet. Lateral expansion of sheeting is absorbed by the corrugations and therefore can generally be disregarded.
7.2.13 Testing a) All horizontal roofing areas shall be water flood tested prior to the installation of the protection course. No areas shall be water tested before 48 hours after application of the waterproofing finish. Water testing shall include flooding of the entire area with 300mm depth of water either by section or in its entirety for a minimum period of 24 hours. Roof drain openings shall not be patched for testing. The drains shall be plugged at a convenient point below roof level to enable the waterproofing and the flashing to the drain(s) to be fully tested. Any area where leaks occur shall be drained, thoroughly dried, repaired, and then retested. Installation of the roof finishes which are applied over the waterproofing shall not start until such time as the membrane is leak free and has been accepted by the Engineer.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
7.2.14 Protection a) b) All roofing work shall be protected from damage. Until such time as the membrane has been covered with insulation, mortar bed or finishing slabs, or until practical completion, the area shall be kept free of all traffic and other trades.
7.2.15 Cleaning Upon completion of the Roofing the Contractor shall remove all masking, protection, equipment, material and debris from the work and storage area and leave those areas in an undamaged and acceptable condition.
End of Section
8.0.0 WOODWORK 8.0.1 Standards I) General All Carpentry & Joinery Works shall be carried out in accordance with British (BS) Standards or British BS EN Standards to the latest revisions, and/or substitutions thereof, which may include other current allied standards that apply such as ISO or CEN European Standards. II) Standards for Woodwork The following list of BSI Standards together with all cross references contained therein is given as a general guide for the Woodwork Section of this Specification. Other standards and guides may also be used from time to time. BS EN 20-1: 1992, -2: 1993 BS EN 204: 2001 and 205: 1991 BS EN 301: 1992 and 302-1 to 4: 1992 BS EN 313-1: 1996, -2: 2000 BS EN 314-1 & 2: 1993 BS EN 315: 2000 BS EN 316: 1999 BS EN 322: 2000 BS EN 335-1 & 2: 1992, -3: 1996 BS EN 350-1 & 2: 1994 BS EN 351-1 & 2: 1996 BS 373: 1957 BS EN 438-1 and 2: 1991 BS 459: 1988 BS EN 460: 1994 BS 476: 1970 to 1993 BS EN 599-1 & 2: 1997 BS EN 622-1, 2, 3, 4 & 5: 1997 BS EN 635-1, & 2: 1995, -5: 1999 BS EN 636-1, 2 & 3: 1997 BS EN 844-1 & 3: 1995, -2, 4, 5 to 9: 1997, -10 & 11: 1998, & -12: 2001 BS EN 912: 2000 BS 916: 1953 BS EN 927-1: 1997, -3, 4 and 5: 2000 BS EN 942: 1996
Wood preservatives Non-structural adhesives Structural adhesives Plywood Plywood Plywood Wood fibreboards Plywood Wood hazard classes Wood durability Wood durability and preservation Testing timber High pressure laminate External matchboard doors Wood durability Fire doors Wood preservatives Wood fibreboards Plywood Plywood Round and sawn timber Timber fasteners Bolts, screws and nuts Exterior wood finishes Timber quality
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST BS 952: 1995 Part 1 & 1980 Part 2 BS EN 952: 1999 BS 1088-1 & 2: 2003 BS 1142: 1989 BS 1186: 1988 Part 2 & 1990 Part 3 BS 1202: 2002 BS 1204: 1993 BS 1210: 1963 under revision BS 1282: 1999 BS EN 1313-2: 1999 + (BS EN 844 above) BS 2870: 1980 refer replacements BS 3444: 1972 Revised BS EN ISO 3506-1 & 2: 1998 BS 3837: 1986 Part 1 & 1990 Part 2 BS 4072: 1999 BS 4800: 1989 BS 5218: 1989 BS 5219: 1975 BS 5268-2 to 7.7: 1978 to 2002 BS 5588: 1990 to 1998 BS 5589: 1989 BS 5707: 1997 BS 6150: 1991 BS 6206: 1981 under revision BS 6262-1: 1982 & 2: 1994 BS 6375: 1989 Part 1 & 1987 Part 2 BS 6398: 1983 BS 6566: 1985 Parts 1 - 8 BS 7359: 1991 BS 7386: 1997 BS 7449: 1991 BS 8000: 1990 Parts 5 & 7 BS 8214: 1990 BS EN ISO 9001: 2000 Glass and mirrors Door leaves general and flatness Marine plywood Wood fibreboards Timber and workmanship Nails specification MR adhesives Screws specification Wood preservatives Round and sawn timber Copper specification Blockboard & laminboard Stainless steel fasteners and nuts Polystyrene boards Wood preservatives Paint schedule Wood preservatives Wood preservatives Structural timber Building fire precautions Timber preservation Wood preservatives Paint code of practice Safety glass Glazing for buildings Windows performance Bitumen damp proof course Plywood Timber supply sources Neoprene seals Glass and mirrors Workmanship on site Fire door assembly Quality management
Reference may also be made to the technical literature available on Wood Information etc. issued by TRADA U.K. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that they use materials, workmanship and practices conforming to the latest Standards to the approval of the Engineer. III) Specialist Work Works of a specialised nature not covered in the above list of Standards, shall be to the relevant BS, BS EN, ISO or CEN Standard and/or other allied Standard/s which apply to such Works. 8.0.2 Materials
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST I) General All materials shall be of the best grade for their respective class. The Contractor shall submit, soon after contract award, typical samples of all their proposed materials to be used in The Works. These samples must be submitted with the DGPM standard format Material Approval Submission (For M.A.S.submission details refer to Clause 7.00.16). Timber Species a) All timber species shall be from botanical source, as described in BS 7359, and supplied by reputable Timber Merchants in the species country of origin who are directly party to the species source Sawmill at country of origin, to ensure exact timber specification and quality. A Sawmill Certificate from source of supply, stating species commercial name along with botanical (Latin) name classification and grading quality, has to be provided for all Timbers during M.A.S. submission. Note, a commercial invoice from the timber merchant/exporter will not be sufficient proof of certification. Generally, all blonde and pale coloured hardwoods will not be used for any External Works. Unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work or stated on the Design Drawings, Burma Teakwood shall be used for all exposed Exterior Carpentry & Joinery Works. When Beechwood is specified for use in visible finished work it shall be from Northern European White Beech, (Fagus Sylvatica) variety unsteamed. Steamed Beech may be used when the stain finish is to be of either; Dark Mahogany, Dark Cherry or other dark reddish stain finish. This does not include Teak stain as generally this will be required in a light Teak stain colour on the Beechwood. Whilst Beechwood will generally be used for show wood framed sofas, chairs, occasional tables and other items of Furniture, it should not be used for large section size work in Cabinetry. As a general rule, timbers under Softwood classification will not be used for any Works, whether they be grounds, first fix or otherwise. Unless specified or shown otherwise on the Design Drawings, timber used for carcassing or framework, which is not exposed in the finished work, shall be from preservative impregnated Dark Red Meranti (Shoera) or Nemasu from Malaysia or Indonesia. Similarly, Burma Teakwood (Tectona Grandis) when specified shall be sourced from Myanmar. Where Maple is specified for Internal only Joinery Works this shall be from the Hard/Rock Maple (Acer Saccharum) species only, to approval of the Engineer. It is therefore particularly noted that the species classified as Soft Maple shall not be used for any of the Joinery Works.
II)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Beechwood (Fagus Sylvatica) shall not be used for Hardwood Panelled Doors, Door Frames or any other such large sectional size work due to its unsuitable characteristics for such elements of Carpentry & Joinery Works.
III)
Timber Grade a) Timber used in The Works shall comply with BS EN 942 in particular, along with BS EN 350-1 & 2, BS EN 351-1 & 2, BS 373, BS EN 460, BS EN 844-1 to 12, BS EN 1313-2 in general. All Timber shall be of best quality select and better grade for the species on exposed finished work, complying with or surpassing the aforementioned standards. Generally, unless specified otherwise, Burma Teakwood (Tectona Grandis) in exposed finished work shall be of minimum S.G. 2 Grade, and such to be selected for best quality and appearance particularly in large visible components of Carpentry & Joinery Works.
b)
c)
IV)
Timber Quality a) All timbers shall be sound, well conditioned prior to kiln drying, close grained, free of any defects as stipulated at item VI) below and shall be totally suitable in all respects for the purpose as indicated in the Design Drawings and Contractors Working Drawings. Unless indicated on the design drawings or instructed by the Engineer, all exposed timber in adjacent pieces shall be matched, uniform and symmetrical throughout all manufacturing procedures for colour, grain etc., in any one assembly or unit. This shall include from breakout, to machining, to assembly, to finishing through to installation and site completion. Where design criterion is modular or continuously adjacent, the multiple edge to edge and/or end to end as per design intent.
b)
c)
V)
Structural Timber a) Hardwood for Structural Use shall comply with BS 5268 Parts 2 to 7.7, BS 373, BS EN 460 and all other cross-referenced BSI Nos. noted therein. Carpentry and Fitted Cabinetry Work must not carry any Structural Live or Dead Loads, unless specifically designed and engineered to do so, which shall be verified by the designated Structural Engineer.
b)
VI)
Timber Defects
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) All timber shall be free from any defects stipulated in the aforementioned Standards or as indicated by the Engineer. As a guide, such defects will include, but not be limited to, the following: Heartwood, sapwood, soft pith, decay, bluing or other timber colour stains, sticker marks, surface checks, case hardening or other drying defects, shakes, splits, knots, bark pockets, pinholes, worm holes, beetle holes, grub holes or any other form of insect attack, torn grain, twisting, warping or capping, or manufacturing defects. Work found with any such defects, at any time, will be rejected and shall be replaced by the Contractor.
b)
c)
VII)
Ordering of Materials The Contractor should notify the Client immediately if any specified material size, species or type is unobtainable in the grade and/or quantities required for the Project Works Programme.
8.0.3 Moisture Content I) The Contractor is wholly responsible for the Moisture Content of the end use timber, suitable for its designated purpose. All Hardwoods shall be carefully and properly stacked and stored for air seasoning prior to kiln drying. The kiln dried Moisture Content shall be suitable for the situation and location of the finished work. BS EN 335-1 & 2, BS 373, BS EN 844-4, BS EN 942, BS EN 1313-2, BS 1186 and TRADA Wood Information Section 4 Sheet 14 shall be used for guidance. a) Additionally for local conditions, dependent on site location and season of installation, Hardwood for External work should not exceed 15% by dry weight or be lower than 11%, the mean moisture content being between 12% and 14%. Similarly as a guideline, Hardwood for Internal Carpentry & Joinery work should not exceed 12% by dry weight or be lower than 8%, the mean moisture content being between 9% and 11%. Hardwood for Cabinetry & Furniture use should not exceed 11% by dry weight or be lower than 8%, the mean Moisture Content being 9.5% for Cabinetry & Furniture items.
II)
III)
b)
IV)
All blonde and pale coloured hardwoods, such as Ash and Maple etc., must be end reared upon arrival at the origin sawmill after felling and either be kiln dried to the correct Moisture Content at country of origin. Or be of maximum 18% Moisture Content prior to shipping from country of origin, to avoid discoloration and dark streaks. Upon arrival here such timber of 18% M.C. must be end reared again and then kiln dried to the correct Moisture Content suitable for their end use locally.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST V) Immediately before manufacture, the Moisture Content of all timber should be ascertained using an Electronic Moisture Meter used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. As per TRADA Wood Information section 4 sheet 18 and appendix revised March 1997. Seal all exposed end grain of raw timber, with shellac or other proprietary presealant immediately after the drying process to the correct Moisture Content, and before factory breakout and machining. This process to be carried to prevent splitting and/or cracking of the end grain, before the manufacturing processes and is not relative to general sealer or primer coats applied during the finishing processes after manufacture referred to hereinafter. During manufacture, storage, delivery, site fixing and thereafter to practical completion, care must be taken to maintain the end use Moisture Content of all the timber components, assemblies etc.
VI)
VII)
VIII) When fixed in position the Timber shall remain stable and free from any undue expansion or contraction or other movement, which will detract from the satisfactory in service performance and required aesthetic appearance of the finished elements. a) The Timber shall be free from all drying defects whatsoever and there shall be no detrimental indication of shrinkage or expansion in the finished work. The Contractor shall replace items, units, assemblies or components in which timber defects occur through improper moisture content, air seasoning, kiln drying or any other drying defects.
b)
8.0.4 Preservative Treatment I) General All Wood Preservative Treatments shall comply with BS EN 20-1 & 2; BS EN 335-1, 2 & 3; BS EN 350-1 & 2, BS EN 351-1 & 2, BS EN 599-1 & 2, BS 5218, BS 5219 and BS5589. II) Hicksons Vacsol WR Vac-Vac Impregnation Treatment a) All Dark Red Meranti or similar approved species used for carcassing, framework and timber grounds shall be machined to the final dimensions before treatment by pressure impregnation with preservative. The termite and decay preservation treatment for such timbers shall be by Hicksons Vac-Vac Double Vacuum Impregnation Treatment process, to achieve an average loading of 40 litres Vacsol WR preservative per M of Timber, used strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) A current certificate, for the particular Timber Parcel, endorsed by M/s Hicksons, over and above their local agency validation stamp, is required for approval by the Engineer, prior to delivery of any such materials to site. Refer to M.A.S. submission, item 1.16 hereinafter.
III)
Hicksons Vacsele End Grain Preservative a) Where Vacsol WR treated timbers require subsequent factory or site; end cutting, jointing or machining, the rework operations to the previously treated timber adversely effect of the Vacsol WR Vac-Vac treatment penetration. These newly exposed surfaces must be treated with a liberal brush or swab application of Hicksons Vacsele End Grain Preservative. A similar certificate is required for Vacsele. Additionally all such timber end grain shall receive a liberal coat of Vacsele prior to actual installation at site to approval of the Site Engineer.
b)
IV)
Impregnation Treatment Hicksons Vac-Vac impregnation treatment shall not be carried out on Hardwood for finished or exposed Carpentry and Joinery Work, unless called for in the Design Drawings or Scope of Works.
V)
Preservative for Finished Hardwood a) As opposed to Hicksons Impregnation Treatment, which may not be suitable for finished or exposed Hardwood, a suitable alternative Preservative, such as Sadovac SP561-2102 for example, should be applied as the first application coat to the prepared Hardwood and allowed to dry completely, all as per the manufacturers instructions for use in the local environment and climate. The Preservative must be of a clear finish and contain inhibitors against decay, bluing, fungi, termites and other insect attack. It must also be compatible with, and immediately prior to primer/base coat and successive stain and topcoat applications. Generally such Preservative should be from the manufacturer of the successive coatings, to ensure compatibility.
b)
VI)
Preservative Protection Warranty It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure the above processes are carried out properly to warrant protection as stipulated, any failure whatsoever of protection against termites and decay will be to the Contractors liability.
8.0.5 Damp Proof Course

I)
Place a Damp Proof Course between all faces, edges and ends of Timber in contact with concrete, block work, plaster, render, marble or metal. Damp Proof Course shall be, to a relevant standard, of 3 ply bituminous felt fabric weighing not less than 2.7 kg/m which shall be neatly cut for bolts and fixings, and be at least the full width of the Timber member.
II)
8.0.6
Manufactured Boards I) General a) b) The use of Chipboard (Particle Board) shall not be permitted. In all instances where the further application of veneers and other finishes is required to the face of manufactured boards, they shall be applied to both sides. Where the rear face is not visible, a compensating Balancer veneer or similar material to that used on the visible face must be applied to the rear face. Sub-section 1.7 item C hereinafter also refers. Any works carried out without the Balancer to the rear face can be rejected at any time and replacement by the Contractor will be required at that time.
c)
II)
Blockboard, Lamin-Board etc. Only in particular circumstances, when specified or shown in the Design Drawings, other board materials such as blockboard or lamin-board may be used, and such shall conform to BS 3444 latest revision.
III)
Medium Density Fibreboard a) Only in particular circumstances, when specified or shown in the design drawings, Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF), or other similar derivatives, shall be used. In such particularly specified instances MDF shall comply with latest BS, BS EN, ISO or CEN Standards and/or with EMB/EPF Industry Standards, whichever provides the higher specification. This is also relevant for the 3mm thick MDF outer build-up layers used in the local manufacture of DGPM Composite Board noted below at item VI.
b)
c)
IV)
Adhesives The adhesives used in the manufacture of all Board Materials shall be of minimum WBP grade to the latest BS, BS EN, ISO or CEN Standards.
V)
Plywood
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Generally the minimum grade for plywood shall be; Schauman F Ply Wisa Birch BS 6566 III/IV BB/WG TEM WBP E or approved equivalent or better. Any veneering to plywood carried out by the Contractor shall be cold pressed to both faces. Composite Board a) DGPM Standard Composite Board, (C.B.) shall be made up locally by the Contractor, using cold pressing of 3mm MDF to both sides of Birch Ply (as described at items III, IV and V directly above), as shown in the following Standard Sketch INTDES/001 in the following thicknesses: b) 12mm 15mm 18mm 21mm 24mm 31mm = = = = = = 3mm MDF/6mm Birch Ply/3mm MDF 3mm MDF/9mm Birch Ply/3mm MDF 3mm MDF/12mm Birch Ply/3mm MDF 3mm MDF/15mm Birch Ply/3mm MDF 3mm MDF/18mm Birch Ply/3mm MDF 3mm MDF/25mm Birch Ply/3mm MDF
VI)
Generally 24mm thickness will be the maximum, and above 31mm will not be required, all the above Composite Board, (C.B.) given thicknesses are prior to face and backing veneer and other lay-on applications. Face Veneering, Marquetry lay-ons and/or Inlay Bands to Composite Board, (C.B.) shall be cold pressed, with a balancer or face veneer on the rear face depending on visibility of that face as shown or specified in the Design Drawings. Composite Board (C.B.) shall be used as the substrate for all Joinery Veneered and/or Marquetry and Inlaid Work, unless otherwise specified or shown on the design drawings.
c)
d)
VII)
Fibre Building Boards Fibre building boards, when specified or shown in the design drawings, shall conform to BS EN 316, BS EN 622-1 to 5 and BS 1142 latest revisions.
VIII) Polystyrene Boards Where specified expanded polystyrene boards shall comply with BS 3837 Part 1 and 2 latest revisions for Grade SD Type A cut boards. 8.0.7 Veneers & Veneering I) General a) Veneer shall be of a minimum 0.6mm thickness. well conditioned and suitably stored prior to use. All Veneers shall be
b)
All Veneers shall be applied to a single substrate face. Where Veneer is specified on the Design Drawings to incorporate Marquetry Work and/or Inlay Bands the components used in a face lay-up must be of the same thickness prior to stitching or taping of the lay-up for pressing.
c)
The Contractor shall be responsible for any imperfections or de-lamination of the lay-up and shall these under the warranty. Veneers that are visible in the finished work shall be of the best Premium Grade Select Quality for consistency in colour, grain etc. and free from any defects whatsoever. As a general rule veneers shall not be applied to large section size, or constructional solid timber members of Joinery work. Veneers shall not be applied to any Carpentry work whether it be structural load bearing, framed work or otherwise. Diamond Booking Matching or Reverse Diamond Book Matching lay-up of Veneers shall not be allowed in work for the Palaces. Crown Cut Book Matched Veneer lay-up will be used in their place. Where Marquetry Work is shown on the Design Drawings the Contractor shall state the name/s of his Supplier/s during Tender Submission.
d)
e)
f)
g)
II)
Decorative Burr, Burl, Curl and/or Crotch Veneers a) When Burr, Burl, Curl or Crotch Veneer is specified on the Design Drawings the tenderer shall ensure that their veneer supplier is aware of the end use. Dark knots, knot holes, plain grained veneer and other imperfections will not be acceptable. Decorative veneer(s) contained in an item shall be approved as dry lay-up, prior to complete lay-on and before pressing.
b)
c)
III)
Matching & Jointing a) Where Veneer is visible, select from flitch bundles from the same batch consignment to maintain matching of grain and colour, with no defects, throughout The Works. Unless specified or otherwise shown on the Design Drawings, the veneers shall be laid-up so that grain features and patterns are aligned and in regular uniform symmetry with precise Book-Matching from the same flitch batch bundle. Where stated or shown on the Design Drawings, Book Matching, Cross Banding and Inlaying shall be carried out accurately in the correct manner. All Veneer joints shall be tightly butted together and flush, with no gaps, overlaps or any other jointing defects.
b)
c)
IV)
Balancer Veneer
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) In all cases Veneer shall be applied to both faces of the substrate material, including all non-visible rear faces. When Balancer Veneer of a different species to the Face Veneer is used on the non-visible rear face it shall be of the same thickness, must be conditioned and have the same moisture, temperature and movement characteristics as the Face Veneer. Works carried out without a Balancer Veneer will be rejected.
b)
c)
V)
Adhesive & Pressing a) Proprietary Veneer Pressing Adhesive, suitable for the local environment shall be used for bonding the Veneer/s, Marquetry and/or Inlay Bands to both faces simultaneously in a hydraulic veneer pressing machine. Where permitted hot pressing of Veneer to the substrate shall be carried out in accordance with the Adhesive Manufacturers instructions for local conditions. Cold pressing of lay-ups of Veneers with Marquetry and/or Inlay Bands shall follow the Adhesive Manufacturers instructions for cold application in detail.
b)
c)
VI)
Curved Work - Veneer Pressing a) Where board materials are required to form a curve the substrate shall be manufactured from composite board, with an odd number of plywood core layers of equal and suitable thickness for the radius bending. Both outside faces of the 3mm MDF outer layers shall be Veneered. The preferred method for bonding the multiple layers of curved work is carried out by means of purpose made cradles employing radio frequency (R.F.) equipment and suitable adhesives. Where such equipment is not available robust purpose made male and female cradles shall be jigged up for bonding in a veneer press machine. Alternatively, when the curved work cradles are too large for the veneer press machine cold bonding shall be carried out ensuring sufficient clamping pressure over the surface area to achieve a complete bond without air pockets.
b)
c)
d)
8. 0.8 High Pressure Plastic Laminate I) General a) All decorative High Pressure Plastic Laminate shall be of minimum 1.0mm thickness and conform to BS EN 438-1 & 2 latest revisions.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) This clause of the specification does not refer to Pre-Faced Melamine Boards. High Pressure Plastic Laminate shall not be applied to large sized sections or solid constructional timber members of Joinery work neither shall it be applied to Carpentry work of any type.
c)
II)
Colour & Type These shall be as specified on the Design Drawings or by submission of samples from the manufacturers range, to the approval of the Engineer, in accordance with BS EN 438-1 & 2 and BS 4800 and their latest revisions.
III)
Balancer Laminate A Balancer high pressure plastic laminate shall always be applied to the rear face of the substrate board material.
IV)
Adhesive and Pressing a) Proprietary Water & Boil Proof Veneering/Plastic Laminate Adhesive, to the relevant standard, shall be used for bonding of all plastic laminate, to both sides of the calibrated core material in a Hydraulic Veneer Press Machine. Under no circumstances whatsoever shall Contact Adhesive be used. The manufacturers warranty shall provide for renewal or replacement in the event de-lamination occurs.
b) c)
V)
Plastic Laminate Edging a) Laminate Edgings shall be applied to the perimeter edges of the core material. They will be applied by an edge banding machine with hot melt waterproof adhesive, suitable for the local climate. Contact Adhesive shall not be used.
Where
VI) Finishing Where the perimeter of the Plastic Laminated panel is exposed to contact by hand, it shall have slightly rounded smooth arrises. 8.0.9 Adhesives I) General
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Adhesives shall conform to BS EN 204 & 205, BS EN 301 & 302 and BS 1204 for all Timber Works. Adhesives for all Exterior Carpentry & Joinery and Structural Carpentry Work shall be to BS EN 301/302. The shelf life and storage instructions given by the Adhesives Manufacturer shall be strictly adhered to. Adhesives shall not be used for Woodwork production when the shelf life has been reached.
b)
c)
d)
II)
Specific Requirements It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure all Adhesives are suitable for the purpose and for use in the local environment and are used in the correct manner for location of the works.
III)
Timber Joint Surfaces a) The contact surfaces of glued joints shall have a good machine formed, or 80 grit calibrated machine sanded finish, to ensure a perfect bond for the type of joint. They shall be glued and clamped up, or machine cramped or pressed, before any dust or other contaminants are allowed to settle on the newly prepared surface. Cutting edges of tools shall be kept sharp and sandpaper not allowed to clog to avoid burnishing of the surfaces to be glued.
b)
IV)
Board Materials Surfaces a) The surface of Plywood, Composite Board and other Board/Sheet Materials, to be bonded together or applied with Veneer/s, shall be machine calibrated lightly dressed with 80 grit sandpaper to ensure a suitable bonding surface and a uniform thickness immediately prior to layup and pressing. The machine sandpaper belt must not be allowed to clog and cause burnishing where substrates/panels are built-up from multiple layers to form an overall finished panel thickness.
b)
V)
Matching Construction Members a) Members in an assembly to be jointed by gluing shall be of a similar type and of matching moisture content. All surfaces to be glued are to be kept clean, free from dirt, dust, sawdust, oil, grease or any other contamination prior to gluing assembly.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST VI) Adhesive Usage a) The mixing, application and setting conditions shall be in strict accordance with the Adhesive Manufacturers instructions for the local environment. The Contractor shall provide a warranty covering the completed works. Adequate pressure and closed time should be applied and maintained whilst the adhesive to glued joints is setting to ensure intimate contact.
b)
c)
VII)
The manufacturers open time shall be strictly adhered to, ensuring the adhesive has not started to set on the substrate/joint prior to assembly and application of pressure. Adhesive Types a) For glued joints for Internal Work and for joints in work where the ambient moisture content is always less than15%; organic or casein adhesives may be used. For External Work or where the ambient moisture content may become more than 15% or under damp conditions during service, resin type adhesives shall be used. General purpose PVA adhesive shall not be used for any construction joints whether External or Internal.
b)
c)
VII)
Construction Joints a) b) Construction Joints in Carpentry & Joinery Work shall be assembled using adhesives to BS EN 301/302 Type I. For load bearing Carpentry Work the relevant sections of BS EN 301-1 & 2, BS 1204 and BS 5268 latest editions shall be strictly adhered to.
8.0.10 Framing Anchors I) Proprietary framing anchors/timber connectors, (e.g. as available from Hilti Co. or equal and approved for Carpentry work), shall be to the latest relevant standard to approval of the Engineer. Metal framing anchors/timber connectors shall be manufactured from 304 grade stainless steel to BS EN Standard, unless otherwise approved in an alternative non-corrosive metal by the Engineer for the particular project. All framing anchors/timber connectors shall be secured to the structure of the building to ensure a complete and effective anchor. Where timbers are cut between supports or wherever framing anchors are required these shall be applied in accordance with Site Engineers instructions. All necessary means of support and connection shall be included in the works, even if not specifically mentioned in the Design Drawings or Scope of Works.
II)
III)
IV)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 8.0.11 Framing Supports I) Primary Structural Members fixed directly to the substructure shall be manufactured from 304 Grade Stainless Steel to BS EN Standard and shall have a damp proof course between the member and the structure. Where connections between galvanised mild steel and stainless steel are necessary they shall all incorporate washers to separate the one metal from the other. Where Primary Structural Members or other Frameworks are to be fixed to the building structure this shall be carried out using stainless steel chemical anchor bolts.
II)
III)
8.0.12 Steel Framework I) General a) Where indicated on the design drawings Steel Framework together with all fixings including fasteners, nuts, bolts, washers and screws shall be manufactured from 304 Grade Stainless Steel to BS EN Standard. The fixings shall also conform to BS EN ISO 3506. Where locally made custom pivots are required for large and/or heavy doors or gates these shall be manufactured from 316 Grade Stainless Steel to BS EN Standard where necessary for moving parts and bearings, with the balance static parts in 304 grade stainless steel.
b)
II)
Steel Section Sizes Load Bearing & Working Drawings a) The section sizes and thickness of Steel Framework together with all allied steel gussets, plates and braces shall be capable of accommodating all loads in service. Sufficient number of fixing locations for the plywood and/or timber sub-frame shall be provided. Working drawings of the Steel Framework and all its ancillary components, including any hanging/pivoting method, shall be submitted for approval of the Structural Engineer. Where Steel Framework is to be fixed to the building structure this shall be by means of chemically anchored Stainless Steel bolts nuts and washers. There shall be a DPC between the steel and the structure.
b)
c)
III)
Plywood Substrate to Steelwork for Finished Timber Cladding a) The Finished Timber facade shall not be fixed directly to the Steel Framework A Birch plywood substrate of minimum 18mm thickness shall be fixed to the Steelwork, with a waterproof membrane between in the case of
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST exterior works. Face timber shall then be fixed to the plywood by means of secret fixings. c) The 18mm Birch plywood shall be secured by means of 6mm minimum diameter Pan Head Stainless Steel Machine Screws and Washers. These shall be slot recessed into the plywood, with the pan head of the machine screw precisely flush with the outer face of the plywood. No exposed Finished Timber fixing shall be connected through to the steelwork.
d)
IV)
Detailing of All Connections & Fixings All connections of plywood to the Steel Framework and finished timber to the plywood substrate only, shall be carefully detailed to accommodate the differential movement between the materials.
V)
All necessary forms of fastening and fixing shall be included in The Works, even when not specifically mentioned in the scope of work or shown in the design drawings.
8.0.13 Nails, Screws, Bolts and Fastenings I) General a) Nails, Screws, Bolts & Fasteners shall conform to the respective BS 1202, BS 1210, BS EN 912, BS 916 and /or BS EN ISO 3506. All brads, nails, pins etc. shall be of best quality of appropriate gauge and strength and be from minimum 304 Grade Stainless Steel. They shall be of sufficient length to enter the second member for at least half their length before being punched. If splitting is likely in the timber, pilot holes are to be pre-bored at diameters not exceeding four-fifths diameter of the nail. Nails heads shall be punched not less than 2mm below the timber surface. They shall be invisible and shall not show any signs of corrosion in the completed work. Brass countersunk screws shall be of sufficient length and gauge for their purpose. The first member shall be bored through at same diameter as screw size and countersunk/bored. Lead-in pilot holes shall be bored to the appropriate diameter in the second member for all screws. All hardwood framework and/or grounds shall be fixed or assembled with brass screws at the approved centers.
II)
a)
b)
c)
III)
a)
b)
IV)
All screw types used in finished Joinery work shall be of non-corrosive metals. This specifically includes mild steel, blackened metal, galvanised and other surface coatings, which eventually deteriorate in service and shall not be used. All necessary fastenings and fixings are deemed to be included in The Works, even if not specifically mentioned in the scope of work or shown in the drawings.
c)
8.0.14 Plugging and Screwing I) Wall plugs shall be manufactured by Hilti, Fischer or equal and approved, of sized in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. The location of wall plugs shall be to approval by the Site Engineer. Wall plugs shall be accurately located into the structure. When plugging through applied finishes and/or DPC, ensure that plugs and fastenings have ample penetration into the structural backings to secure the component being fixed.
II)
8.0.15 Pelleting I) Generally pelleting will only be permitted in visible Wood Work where absolutely necessary. All other means of fixing or secret fixing shall be thoroughly exhausted before pelleting will be considered on exposed face work. Where pelleting is permitted by the Engineer, screw heads shall be counterbored 6mm below the timber surface and will be invisible in completed work. Grain matched pellets, of exact diameter to be glued in place, shall not be less than 10mm thick cut from matching timber and run with the grain of the member being inserted into. Finish off flush with the timber member face.
II)
8.0.16 Material Approval Submission (M.A.S.) The following shall be adhered to for Material Approval Submission (M.A.S.): I) Manufacturers technical literature, performance data, samples and all pertinent information of all materials, shall be submitted in ample time for approval, prior to the Contractor placing orders. Manufacturers and suppliers names, addresses and fax numbers, catalogue copies, sizes, capacity and/or samples of all materials shall be included with the Material Approval Submission. The DGPM Standard MAS format dated 30/04/03 Rev.1, or as amended by the Consultant or Project Management to comply with a general format for the Project Works shall be used. The Contractor shall not customise or rearrange the standard format for the project works. Different items shall not be presented on a single M.A.S. sheet, unless previously agreed or at the instruction of the Engineer. Multiple items of the same type, use, manufacturer etc. may be presented on the same M.A.S. sheet, only with the prior agreement of the Engineer.
II)
III)
IV)
V)
a)
The M.A.S. format sheets shall be submitted with either a transmittal form or covering letter, listing the M.A.S. Nos. being submitted by title and number. All samples shall be clearly labelled with the Project Title and number, Contractors name and M.A.S. number. When re-submissions are necessary, the original submission M.A.S. No. shall be re-used with the relevant revision number, e.g. M.A.S. No. 4 / Rev. 1. and so on as may be required. New M.A.S. Nos. shall not be used for re-submission of items previously submitted and consequently rejected.
b)
c)
VI)
M.A.S. submissions made without due care to the foregoing requirements, shall be returned Not Approved for resubmission. Any delays arising from incorrect submissions will be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall also submit an itemised Programme of The Works along with a list of intended M.A.S. submissions for approval at the beginning of the project immediately after award. This will be in addition to any completion date or programme required during tender return.
VII)
8.0.17 Mock-Ups and Samples I) Mock-Ups a) Full size paste-ons and/or mock-ups of items and/or areas of The Works shall be required, as noted/marked on the design drawings, in the Scope of Work or otherwise informed by the Clients representatives. These shall be presented for comment and approval by the Client; at the Contractors Workshop, at site or other given location, at the earliest after award of contract in consultation with the Design Team. Generally this procedure shall be approved in principle by the Client, prior to submission of full working drawings by the Contractor. To establish the paste-ons and /or mock-ups development of the clients design drawings by the Contractor shall be allowed for where necessary.
b)
c)
e)
II)
Samples a) In addition to the mock-ups requirement, the Contractor shall submit samples of the elements of the work normally required, or as instructed by the Design Team. The samples shall contain the actual materials the Contractor proposes to use in the finished work, and any proposed alternatives.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) The samples shall be offered up for Client approval arranged room-byroom, and aligned in relation to the paste-ons or mock-ups where not fixed, or as instructed by the Clients representatives. These samples shall be approved in principle by the Client, prior to submission of full scope working drawings by the Contractor. These samples do not in any way relate to the M.A.S. procedure for all materials proposed for use in the works by the Contractor.
d)
e)
III)
Mock-up / Samples Approvals
All mock-ups and/or samples must be presented with M.A.S. for comments/approval at the time of Client inspection/s, for completion by the Engineer recording approval and/or comments. 8.0.18 Working Drawings I) Site Survey a) Prior to preparation of the necessary Working Drawings the Contractor will first visit the Works Site to carry out a thorough Site Survey at the location/s of the Scope of Wood Work. The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer by Request For Information (RFI) or Technical Query (TQ) or otherwise in writing, of any errors of site dimension or other discrepancies found during the initial survey or any site subsequent site visit.
b)
II)
Site Coordination It is the Contractors responsibility to carefully check the following at site during the initial and subsequent site visits and ensuing site work: a) b) The Scope of Work shown and/or described on the Design Drawings. All clearances, field conditions, contiguous other trades work, materials and finishes, and maintenance of architectural conditions. Proper coordination with other trades at site.
c)
The above are the ongoing responsibilities of the Contractor, for the proper completion of The Works. Any unresolved conflict between trades, on or off site shall be immediately notified by the Contractor to the Engineer in writing. III) Setting Out a) Wood Works shall be accurately Set Out by the Contractor in strict accordance with the Design Drawings and site survey conditions.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Setting out and consequent manufacture shall be in accordance with BS 5268 and all other cross referenced BS Nos. therein, for any timber members in the Works designated for structural use. Reasonable tolerances shall be provided at all connections between the Works and the building structure, so that any irregularities, settlement or other movement shall be adequately compensated.
c)
IV)
Preparation of Working Drawings a) The Contractor shall prepare accurate Working Drawings, which shall include. Scaled elevation/s, plan/s, end and sectional views Full size details of all necessary working/manufacturing details. Full size details of all the proposed jointing and fixing methods to be used. Working drawings shall provide the following information 1. 2. 3. All overall dimensions from the site survey. All overall dimensions of the Works. Dimensions of sub-frame members, showing adjacent works and/or building structure by others, with detailed forms of connecting thereto. Overall dimensions of frames, units and assemblies. Overall dimensions of components. Dimensioned details of all construction including joints. Dimensioned sectional views through members where necessary. Sectional dimensions and profiles of ancillary mouldings etc. Sectional dimensions of seasonal clearance gaps and overlays. Indicate and state all methods of fixing.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. b)
For large or medium size projects the Contractor must also submit Floor Plans, based on the site survey, indicating their Scope of Work and identifying works by others. The Contractor shall not submit for approval copies or of the Design Drawings with their company name and/or logo added to the title block. The Contractor will be responsible for any delays caused by such submissions, which shall automatically be returned Not Approved For Resubmission without further comments.
c)
V)
Submission & Approval of Working Drawings a) Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer or Consultant, the Contractor shall submit the Working Drawings to the Client in triplicate for approval with either; a transmittal form, or covering letter listing the Drawings being submitted by number and title.
b)
One copy will be returned to the Contractor marked-up with comments. When the drawing/s are marked for re-submission the Contractor shall submit the revised drawing/s incorporating all the previous comments, along with the original marked-up drawing/s, which shall be returned to the Contractor with the re-submitted drawing/s. Working Drawings shall be submitted in such a manner that all views and details, relating to a particular item, which are shown on continuation or other sheets, must be submitted simultaneously. Similarly, all common/typical details for an item must be shown on the first drawing/s submitted for the item. Subsequent submissions of Working Drawings for other items having the same details must be crossreferenced to the earlier drawing submission. Working Drawings shall be submitted sequentially for groups of similar items with like detailing. Dissimilar items shall be submitted under separate transmittal unless they form an integral unit. For example, doors and windows shall be submitted under separate transmittal, unless they form an integral unit. A Register of Working Drawings is required to be submitted by the Contractor, for the whole of The Works in sequential order. The Register must be submitted for approval, prior to the first Working Drawings being submitted. Working Drawings which do not include all the above requirements, the drawings will be returned, without comment, stamped Not Approved For Resubmission. The Contractor will be responsible for any delays caused by such incomplete submissions. When the Working Drawings are returned to the Contractor stamped; Approved With Comments the Contractor shall proceed with the manufacturing, incorporating all the comments marked on the drawings, before final revised drawing issue.
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
8.0.19 Workmanship I) General a) The Workmanship of all Works shall be equal the highest standard in accordance with best trade practices. The works shall comply with BS 1186 specification for workmanship. It is the Contractors responsibility to be fully aware of this Standard, and to ensure all products meet it. Works which do not comply with the required standards will be rejected at any time during The Works.
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) The whole of the work shall be properly framed and the various sections securely fixed together to withstand all normal conditions in service. All Works shall be properly jointed, assembled and finished at the Workshop and installed at site in accordance with best traditional methods, to the approval of the Engineer. Site fabrication work shall be minimised, by ensuring large items or components are made up in sub-assemblies at the Workshop with the necessary method of site jointing/fabrication pre-formed ready for final assembly at site. Project Sites shall not be used as a Carpentry, Joinery, Cabinetry or Polishing Workshop under any circumstances.
e)
f)
g) II)
Shop Floor Setting Out a) The Works shall be accurately Set Out full size on the Shop Floor in strict accordance with the approved working drawings and all site survey conditions. Setting out and manufacture shall be in accordance with latest edition of BS 5268 and all related BSS. for timber members in the Carpentry Works designated for structural use.
b)
III)
Structural Loading a) The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the integrity of the construction of the work to withstand all imposed live or dead loads, without the imposition of undue stresses on any member or connector or connection. Fitted Cabinetry Work shall not be subject to Structural Loads unless specifically designed to do so and approved by the Structural Engineer. Any such work found to be defective, shall be rectified or replaced at the instruction/discretion of the site Engineer at any time.
b)
c)
IV)
Timber Conversion Where commercially available flat sawn timber is used, all components of wide section shall be selected first from the timber parcel for grain perpendicular to the face, quarter sawn stock, to minimise the seasonal movement on the wide components.
V)
Timber Sizing and Profiling Timber shall be accurately machine wrought to the exact sizes and shapes on the drawings, with slightly rounded arrises where appropriate.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST VI) Construction Jointing a) All jointing methods, including mortising, haunching, tenoning, wedging, tonguing, grooving, half-lapping, dovetailing, matching, housing, trenching, rebating and all other operations necessary for correct jointing must be carried out accurately to best traditional practices, or modern methods to approval. Joints shall be accurately machine formed on purpose built machinery, using proprietary machine tooling wherever possible. The jointing method for all construction of Carpentry & Joinery items having Stiles and Rails shall be by mortice & tenon joint where practicable, properly haunched and wedged as per traditional practice. When the timber section is too small to accept such joint other jointing methods such as proprietary Beechwood fluted dowels may be used. The jointing method for all items of cabinetry on legs, such as tables and desks etc., shall be Mortice & Tenon Joint with haunching where appropriate. Only when the timber section size is too small to accept such joint, will proprietary Beechwood fluted dowels be permitted. Mitre construction jointing of Stiles and Rails for Carpentry & Joinery Work shall not be permitted except for wall mounted mirror and picture frames, which shall be hung/mounted on the Birch plywood backing. Mortice and Tenon Joints shall be carried out to traditional construction practices detailed below: The mortice and tenon thickness shall be one third () of the finished thickness of the stile/rail member, and centralised therein. However, where the stile and rail are of different thickness an offset or barefaced mortice and tenon joint will be permissible to the approval of the Engineer. The width of the tenon/mortice should not exceed five (5) times the thickness. The minimum depth of all haunches shall be of equal to the thickness of the tenon, and maximum equal to the depth of the groove in the stile/rail to accept the plywood core where applicable. Extra thick stile and rail members (60mm thickness and more) should have Double Tenons in the rail thickness with central Haunch in between. For example 60mm finished thickness may have equal 12mm outside shoulders, mortice & tenon, along with central 12mm haunch. Wedges shall be let into the Tenon by means of a fine Bandsaw draft, at a minimum distance equal to the Tenon thickness, at each
b)
c)
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST edge of the tenon in the case of wide tenons. In the case of practical tenon width less than five times its thickness, the Wedge may be inserted at the centre line of the tenon width, to approval of the Engineer. The Bandsaw draft should be formed utilising the machine fence and a stop to ensure constant accuracy. All Wedges shall be made from the off-cuts produced by the Haunching machine operation, and shall be machine sawn to exact matching uniform size by a jig. Wedges shall be knocked into the fine Bandsaw draft/s made at the end of the tenons, and fixed into position immediately after the final clamping up and squaring of the frame, while the main mortice and tenon joints are under clamp pressure and before the adhesive has set on the mortice & tenon.
f)
Door, Window and similar Structural Frames shall be provided with suitable jointing at jambs/head and cill by dovetailing, finger-jointing or similar joint, with glue and screw fixing. Rebates into the head/cill to accept screw fixing of the jambs will not be permitted. The Contractor shall have full knowledge the traditional methods and practices. Incorrectly formed joints, or applied fillers of any kind, will not be permitted Details of the proposed construction jointing must be clearly shown on the working drawings submitted for approval, and followed through to practical execution.
g)
h)
All necessary metal plates, connectors, screws, nails and other fixings are deemed to be included in The Works. The Works shall be carried out employing proper construction of all framings, linings, exposed components etc., with secret jointing and fixing for their support where visible in the finished work, and for their support and fixing to the building structure with a DPC between.
i)
VII)
Bending Work In Solid Timber a) Where bending is required the work shall be performed by; laminating, saw-kerfing, keying or steaming to the approval of the Engineer. Only certain timber species are suitable for bending work. These are identified in BS 7359 together with the cross-referenced BS Nos., and with the relevant TRADA Wood Information sheets.
b)
VIII) Circular Work In Solid Timber
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) When circular work is required it shall be built up with an appropriate odd number of equal thickness pieces befitting the required radius, cut to the required shapes at nominal width, and jigged up when gluing in former cradles to the required curvature. Where long and large radius work is required the shaped lamination pieces shall be put together by brick bonding method, in multiples of two and three lengths, so that they break and provide overlapping joints between each layer. They will be secured, during bonding pressure application, with matching hardwood keys and wedges or with matching hardwood pins, whichever is more appropriate for the particular finished work. The ideal method for bonding the necessary multiple thin layers of curved work together is referred to in 7.0.07 b)
b)
c)
d)
IX)
Framework a) Generally frames, whether to be installed within a structural opening or surface mounted, shall follow the principles set out under the preceding sub-section 7.0.12, along with item VI) e) above, and sub-section 7.0.20 below. Where frames are secured to metal hangers, purlins, bearers etc. the fixings shall be in 304 Grade Stainless Steel. Connections shall incorporate inner washers or similar to separate dissimilar materials. Where timber frames are to be installed within a structural opening, a perimeter gap of 15mm all around must be allowed. The 15mm gap is to provide for proprietary construction foam, together with intermittent Vac-Vac treated Dark Red Meranti ground blocks of nominal 75 x 30 x 15mm, at both edges of frame on approximately 600mm +/- centres dependent on frame height and width. For wide frames, or structural reveals with frame lining, additional midway intermittent ground blocks will be required at 400mm +/- centres to maintain the 15mm foam gap. Vac-Vac treated Dark Red Meranti ground blocks of nominal 75 x 30 x 15mm shall be inserted between the frame and the opening. These shall at approximately 600mm centers from the edges of the frame dependant on the frame height and width. . For wide frames, or structural reveals with frame lining, additional midway intermittent ground blocks will be required at 400mm. The 15mm shall be filled with proprietary foam. The Meranti grounds shall be plugged and screwed, with non-corrosive screws, to the structure and with a damp proof course membrane between the timber grounds and the structure.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
The proprietary construction foam, will completely fill the balance void fully, to ensure complete seal between exterior and interior atmospheric conditions for external frames, and for sound proofing at internal applications. Excess foam shall be cut flush with the frame edges only after setting. The approval of the Site Engineer shall be obtained prior to fixing of architraves, cover moulds etc. Any additional mechanical secret fixing of frames to the structure should also be provided using of plug and screw fixing hidden by any fitted ironmongery. Alternative secret fixings may be used to the approval of the Engineer. Plug and screw fixing through the finished frame visible face with pelleting will not be acceptable. When frames are specified in steel, whether to be installed within a structural opening or surface mounted they shall follow the principles set out under sub-section 7.0.12. Framework and hangers for suspended ceilings shall be carried out as shown in the following Standard Sketch INTDES/002 In general all Framework for Cabinetry & Loose Furniture shall be formed with the appropriate method of jointing for the application, for example either half-lapped or dovetailed, glued and securely fixed. Framework shall follow the principles set out under the preceding sub-sections 7.0.04; 05; 10; 11; 12 and 14.
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
X)
Mouldings a) b) Shall be to the sizes and profiles indicated on the Design Drawings. Plant-on mouldings that retain carved or other panels etc. as shown, shall be glued with a small bead of PVA adhesive to the frame members/stiles and rails only, and not to the panels. In addition they shall be mechanically fixed only to the frame members, through pre-drilled holes, by small diameter headless stainless steel nails All nails shall be carefully punched home below the moulding surface and filled with oil-based putty mixed 1/1 by proportion with sawdust derived from the moulding timber. All panels or other members restrained by cover mouldings shall be allowed to float below the mouldings, and in no circumstances shall the mouldings be glued or affixed to the actual panel of whatever material.
c)
d)
XI)
Timber Movement
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Allowances must be made for the natural movement of all Solid Timber members at the adjacent components, assemblies, forms of joints, etc. The arrangement, jointing and fixing of all work shall be such that any allowable slight shrinkage or expansion, in any part and in any direction, shall not impair the strength and appearance of the finished work, and shall not cause damage to contiguous materials or structures.
b)
XII)
Work In Progress a) All work is to be machined and framed together dry jointed un-wedged immediately on receipt of details and approvals, and left stacked horizontally with ample spacing between for sufficient air flow and clear of the floor in a dry well ventilated store prior to finishing processes, until site is near ready for installation. The Contractor shall maintain close liaison with site progress. Any work that warps, twists, cups, winds or develops shakes, splits or other defects is to be replaced with matching new components before final glued assembly and wedging up etc.
b)
XIII) Preparation For Finishing Applications a) Prior to any finishing medium application, all visible timber in the finished work shall be prepared by machine calibrated or hand fine sandpaper, as appropriate for the item, to a smooth even surface with slightly rounded arrises ready to receive decorative finish as soon as possible afterwards. All contaminants, such as oil, grease, pencil marks or any other foreign particles shall be completely removed from the surface prior to first application of finishing treatment. Machine marks, pencil marks, hammer bruises or other workmanship defects on visible finished work will not be accepted and may not be made good with fillers etc.
b)
c)
XIV) Despatch To Site Prior to despatch from the workshop to site, the finished works shall be inspected at the workshop and approved by the Engineer. XV) Site Installation a) b) Workmanship on site shall comply with BS 8000 latest revisions. Edges and/or ends of timber should be resealed or re-primed as originally specified above should it be necessary to; cut, plane or otherwise be reworked during site fixing. This also applies to Meranti framework, grounds etc. which should receive a liberal coat of Hicksons Vacsele end grain preservative.
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 8.0.20 Priming and Sealing I) The rear face, ends and butts of all external framing timbers and all framing or finishing timbers, in contact with concrete, block work, render, plaster, marble or steelwork, whether external or internal at site shall be primed with a suitable primer to seal the timber before fixing. This will be in addition to the preservative treatment application for carcassing, grounds and framework timbers. The priming application may be carried out at site and allowed to dry completely prior to fixing.
II)
8.0.21 Finishing I) II) The finishing works shall comply with BS 6150 latest edition. Manufacturers a) The whole of the finishing system shall be manufactured by one of the following: International Paints Hicksons Timber Products Cuprinol Limited Ronseal Limited Akzo Nobel Woodcare Khimji Permoglaze Leighs Paints Arabian Liquid Chemicals Ltd. Or similar and equal approved in writing by the Engineer. b) Non impregnated preservatives and pigmented/non-pigment stains shall be as supplied by Sadolin Limited, or equal from any of the above listed manufacturers, or similar and equal approved by the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility, to ensure all such finishing materials and successive applications are ultimately suitable for their end use.
c)
III)
General a) All finishing work shall be carried out at the Contractors premises, in a suitably conditioned dust free Finishing Workshop environment, with the proper extraction facilities. Project Sites shall not be used as a Finishing Workshop. The final topcoat to the exterior face of external timber works shall be carried out after completion of installation on site at an agreed time.
b) c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings, particular specification or scope of work, finishes for external use shall be of silk-matt or semi-satin sheen to approval of the Engineer.
IV)
Finishing Products Expiry Dates a) Paints, lacquers and other finishes materials shall be used within six months of delivery or as the manufacturers instructions where the expiry time is less. The shelf life must be strictly adhered to, and no finishing material shall be used beyond expiry date.
b)
V)
Stirring, Sediment and Residue a) b) Finishes shall be kept well stirred, as to the manufacturers instructions, and shall not be used when a thick sediment has settled. Any finishing material, which develops a skin within the container shall not be used on the works, and must be removed from the workshop or site. Any residue left in a tin or other container shall not be added to the contents of another tin or container for later use on the project works.
c)
VI)
Surface Preparation and Cleaning a) All exposed surfaces in the completed work shall be thoroughly prepared smooth, free from surface defects and shall be; clean, free from dust, loose and powdery particles and thoroughly dry for the finishing treatment. Hardwood containing an excess of natural oil, such as Teak, may need to be degreased with white spirit immediately prior to primer/base coat application.
b)
VII)
Equipment Cleaning All spraying equipment and brushes etc. used in carrying out the work shall be cleaned prior to and ready for application of finish, and shall be thoroughly recleaned before being used for any different type or class of finishing material.
VIII) Application a) The preparation and application of finishing materials shall be carried out in strict compliance with the manufacturers instructions for use on the surface to which it is being applied.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Primer or base coats may be thinned only in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Any runs, droppings or other finishing irregularities shall be removed or scrapped off, and re-primed as necessary. Then allowed to dry completely, before the surface is cutback smooth, flat and then cleaned in readiness for the first top coat finish. Each finish coat shall be applied in a light build up and allowed to dry completely as per manufacturers instructions, then cutback with minimum 400 grit silicon carbide abrasive paper, between coats. A heavy build-up coating application will not be permitted, unless particularly specified by the finishing material manufacturer.
c)
d)
e)
IX)
Compatibility of Successive Coatings The finish coats shall be of a type and manufacture compatible with the primer and/or base coats.
X)
Stains a) b) Stains shall not be mixed with lacquer or other finish coats for application. Staining shall be a separate application, prior to timber sanding sealer and other successive finish coatings.
XI)
Lacquer Coatings for Internal Finish a) Lacquer preparation and applications shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, which may include a first coat of sanding sealer after stain application. Successive applications of lacquer shall be of the correct viscosity and provide a light build up. Thick heavy coat application shall only be applied when specifically mentioned in the manufacturers instructions. Between coats the lacquer must be allowed to dry completely. Successive surfaces shall be cut-back using minimum 400 grit silicon carbide abrasive paper, then dusted off using a tack cloth and cleaned in readiness for next coat, as per the manufacturers instructions.
b)
c)
XII)
External Wood Finish a) External Finishes shall have preservative, ultra violet and water-resistant properties within their make up, and will not be of high gloss appearance when dry.
b)
When the timber item has interior finish to one face and exterior finish to the other, it shall be masked off as necessary to avoid overlapping and reaction. This junction of interior and exterior finishes should occur at a change in profile of the timber. The External Finish applications, shall comprise a minimum of two coats, applied at the Workshop, with the final topcoat carried out at site upon completion of installation, at a time to be agreed with the Engineer.
c)
XIII) Seal Coat Treatment To Un-Exposed Elements All timber shall receive a sealer coat to the unexposed faces and/or edges and ends prior to despatch from the workshop.
XIV) Final Touch-Up Finish Application At Site a) Any finishing materials used at site for touch-up or finishing purposes, shall be brought in unopened sealed tins or containers. They must be from the same supply and batch as those used at the workshop during the original finishing process. The Contractor shall protect all areas in which he is working, with covers where necessary, from finish materials splashes, drips etc. Exterior finish applications shall not be carried out in damp weather or during rain, or when dew is falling or is likely to fall within two hours.
b) c) 8.0.22 Protection I)
From workshop storage of raw timber and other materials, through to site completion, all timber and other allied materials used in The Works shall be protected from the weather and stored under cover clear of the floor to avoid any penetration of dampness. All timber, assembled items of Carpentry and other such materials shall be immediately fillet stacked, under cover well clear of the ground, upon arrival at site. During installation at site, work in progress and completed work all Work shall be protected by the Contractor until handover and acceptance by the Site Engineer.
II)
III)
8.0.23 Inspection a) Facilities shall be given to the Consultants or Clients Representative/s and/or Works Engineer to inspect all work in progress in the workshops and at site.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) The Contractor shall inform the Consultants or Clients Representative when finished items are ready at their Workshop for inspection prior to shipping to site. No finished product shall be despatched to site until inspection by the Clients representative at the Workshop. Contractor shall request an inspection by preparing an itemised Pre-Despatch Inspection Form, which shall be used for comment and/or approval during the inspection visit. This form shall be submitted at least 48 hours before the inspection is requested. The Factory Pre-Despatch Inspection Report shall be as the P and M Standard circulated format dated 30/04/03 Rev.2, or as amended by the Consultant or Project Management to comply with a general format for the Project Works. The Contractor shall not customise or rearrange the standard format for the project works. Any items that are rejected for rework and review shall be listed on further PreDespatch Inspection sheet/s with the relevant revision noted. No work shall be despatched to site without prior approval.
c)
d)
e)
f)
8.0.24 Warranty All finished Carpentry & Joinery Works installed at site shall be guaranteed for a minimum of 10 years.
8.1.
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
8.1.1 Door & Window Frames I) General a) b) All members of frames shall be wrought to the finished sizes, rebated, profiled, grooved and/or carved as shown on the Design Drawings. Unless specified or shown differently on the Design Drawings, frames will be of the same timber species as the door leaf. Frame members shall be of a minimum 45mm finished thickness, unless shown or stated otherwise on the Design Drawings, or as marked-up on the Working Drawings submitted for approval. Timber for jambs, head and cill shall be selected for; straight close grain parallel with the edges, without heart or sapwood or any other defects, and with matching colour and grain in each frameset assembly. Where transom panels are not glazed the overhead structural opening must be provided with a recessed concrete down-stand within the overall
c)
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST structural height to accept timber panels or a reinforced concrete lintel beam with full infill block work above. f) The structural detailing noted in e) should be furnished in the tender document. Where this information is not provided the Tenderer should raise a query at time of tender.
II)
Laminations of Deep Reveal Frames a) Where required by frames the width of deep jambs and head shall be builtup in overall width by comb-jointed equal width laminations of an odd number of pieces, of matching grain and colour etc. Alternatively use framed reveal panel/s, as shown on Design Drawings. The lining of the reveal panel/s shall be fixed centrally on their width, by means of dry fixed proprietary fluted dowels back to the treated Meranti grounds, to accommodate the natural seasonal expansion and contraction movement.
b)
III)
Frame Rebates for Leaves a) Doorstops shall be wrought from the solid frame member to a minimum depth of 15mm installed at site. Plant on doorstops will not be accepted. For external doors the minimum rebate depth to frame shall be 20mm installed at site. this will also apply to some windows with large leaves. Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Design Drawings, all External Doors shall be hung/pivoted in a rebated frame When pivoted on Floor Springs, the floor spring components shall 5mm offset with cover cap/disk to straps at pivot spindle.
b)
c)
d)
IV)
Jambs and Head/Cill Jointing Mitre jointing of Door and Window Frames shall not be permitted. Jambs, head and cill joints shall be properly formed as described in Section 7.0.19 Clause VI)e and be securely fixed to ensure no movement in the joint after installation.
V)
Relief Keying Grooves for Foam a) Relief saw kerf grooves of minimum 3 x 3mm and maximum 6 x 6mm dependent on frame thickness and rebate depth and as indicated on the Design Drawings, shall be provided on the back face of all frame perimeter members, which are immediately adjacent to the structural opening.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) These multi grooves, for keying-in of construction foam to the timber frame during site installation, shall be at 35mm centres dependent on frame width, but shall not be on any necessary comb-joint lamination line. The minimum distance of grooves from edges of frames, that are full width of the structural reveal, shall be equal to plaster/render thickness plus 20mm.
c)
VI)
Sealer Coat to Frame Back Face a) After machining operations the frame members detailed above shall be painted with a liberal seal coat of lacquer/varnish or PX-65 to the back face. Two liberal coats of similar material shall be applied to all end grain of finished members. Both of these seal coat operations shall be carried out at the workshop prior to despatch to site. Any shaving or cutting of the back face or ends, which may be necessary during site installation shall be similarly recoated prior to final fixing of the frame.
b)
c)
d)
VII)
Method of Installation Refer to Section 8.0.19 Clause IX)
VIII) Secret Fixing Refer to Section 8.0.19 Clause IX) g IX) Neoprene Door, Window & Window Screen Seals a) Neoprene Seals, which comply with BS 7386 shall be provided for all Main Buildings for VIP use. The Seals shall be fitted to the frame and not to the leaf except in special circumstances. Double leaf doors shall also have seals at the meeting stiles. Neoprene seals will not be used on Service or Staff Buildings, unless specified by the Client. Heavy duty sound proofing seals will be required to all opening edges and meeting stiles for Plant Room Frames/Doors, whether they form part of the Main Building or otherwise.
b)
c)
d)
X)
Neoprene Compression Seal

a)
All frames with hinged or offset pivoting leaves shall be provided with Sealmaster ARH neoprene compression seal (or approved equivalent) to jambs, head, (and cill for windows), unless particularly specified otherwise. The aluminium carrier channel shall be grooved flush into the 15mm or 20mm edge of the frame rebate, at 4mm distance from the rebate corner. The frame rebate width shall be machined 4mm wider than the leaf thickness, to provide 3mm compression of the neoprene seal, when the door/window/screen leaf is in the closed position. Plant Room Doors shall be fitted with Sealmaster CA neoprene compression seal, to the jambs, head and cill of the frame, along with the meeting stiles of the door leaves.
b)
c)
d)
XI)
Neoprene Wiper Seal a) External frames with hinged or offset pivoting leaves shall also be provided with Sealmaster ARK wiper seals (or approved equivalent) to jambs and head, (and cill for windows), unless specified otherwise. This also includes External or Internal Plant Room Doors, unless specified with N30 or N60 intumescent seals. The aluminium carrier channel shall be grooved flush into the width of the frame rebate, behind the line of the hinges or behind the line of strap in the case of pivoted doors on floor spring. There shall be sufficient clearance between leaf edge and frame rebate to ensure correct and efficient function of the seal and the door leaf. For external frames of extra tall and/or wide or extra thick leaves alternative seal types, similar to Sealmaster ARL, ARM, PEFA/PEFS or a combination of these shall be used.
b)
c)
d)
XII)
Double Action Internal Door Seals a) Internal doors with curved edges to the pivot stiles on a centre pivoted action, shall be fitted with Sealmaster PEFA/PEFS neoprene seals (or approved equivalent), centralised on the frame jambs, scalloped rebate, frame head, and for double leaf doors at the meeting stiles. Adequate clearances must be allowed between leaf edge and scalloped frame and meeting stiles to ensure correct and efficient function of the seal and ease of operation of the door leaf/leaves. All Doors with PEFA/PEFS neoprene seals; operating in a scalloped lockset frame jamb in the case of single leaf, or curved edge meeting stiles in the case of double leaf; shall be provided with a closing mechanism.
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) The closing mechanism shall be Floor Spring, or Concealed Overhead Cam Action Closer for door leaves of 55mm minimum thickness. For Back of House and Service Areas surface mounted closers shall be used.. Doors for Kitchen, Pantry or Handwash Areas shall be fitted with closing mechanisms be supplied with weak or adjustable spring strength for ease of access and operation. These doors shall have deadlock bolt action only, or where called for on the Design Drawings an additional adjustable roller bolt action.
e)
f)
XIII) Intumescent Fire and Smoke Seals a) Fire Rated Doors frames shall be fitted with Sealmaster Intumescent Fire and Smoke Seals (or approved equivalent) to BS 476 and CertiFire Approval No. CF142. The Seal shall incorporate an angled selfextinguishing elastomeric replaceable wiper blade, which matches the fire rating of the door. Where Double Leaf Door and Window Sets meeting stiles are not rebated or the section detail cannot accommodate N30 or N60 seals, then Sealmaster IMN/IMP for FD30S rating, or N60S/IMP for FD60S rating shall be fitted. For FD60S Rated Door and Window Sets the N60 Intumescent Seal elastomeric wiper blade shall be flame retardant and Sealmaster Intumescent Plugs shall be fitted to hinges, locks, and other ironmongery, which breaks the continuity of the seal. Glazing to FD30S Fire Rated Door or Window Set panes shall be provided with either a bedding of Sealmaster FireGlaze Compound or Sealmaster G30 Glazing Strips as appropriate. For FD60S rating they shall be provided with both Sealmaster GL60 FireGlaze Liner and FireGlaze Compound. To achieve FD60S integrity Sealmaster Gap Filling Compounds, such as Intumescent Compound or Masterseal will be required at all door/window framesets joints between the building structure, and around all ironmongery cutouts. Sealmaster N30 and N60 Fire and Smoke Seals may take the place of Sealmaster ARK wiper seals on external doors or windows where prevalent, depending of leaf thickness. Under no circumstances whatsoever shall Fire Only Seals be used.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
XIV) Seals Aluminium Channel Finish
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) All types of Sealmaster seals shall incorporate aluminium carrier channel finished in Gold Anodised Finish for VIP and general thoroughfare areas. For Service and Back of House areas in the aluminium carrier channel shall be in Standard Silver Mill Finish.
b)
XV)
Architraves a) Architraves shall be solid wrought to the finished sizes, rebated, grooved, trenched, profiled and/or carved as shown on the Design Drawings. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Design Drawings, Architraves shall be of the same timber species as the doorframe and leaf. The overlay of Architraves on the wall finish and timber frame shall be 10mm minimum to 20mm maximum, with their grounds taking up the difference. Architraves shall be provided with treated Dark Red Meranti grounds plugged and screwed, with brass screws, to the structure and with a continuous damp proof course membrane between. The Architraves shall be secured using secret fixings. The Meranti grounds for Architraves shall also form a plaster/render stop for the wall treatment finish, and shall be affixed at site prior to the wall finishes. Where possible the grounds shall act as a locating key to the rear face of the centrally trenched Architrave. Architraves shall be secret fixed along the centre line of their width across the grain. Screw fixing through the face using pelleting will not permitted in VIP and general areas, unless it can be accommodated secretly within the carved design element on the centre line of the of the Architrave. In all external installations Architraves shall be provided with an approved mastic sealant, which shall be completely continuous between adjacent rear edge of the Architrave and the render/exterior wall finish, to make it watertight. The mastic sealant colour shall match either; the approved external timber finish colour, or the external wall finish colour.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
8.1.2
Door & Window Leaves I) General
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) All members of door, window & screen leaves shall be wrought to the finished sizes, rebated, profiled and grooved etc. as shown on the Design Drawings. When Flush Doors are required they shall be as item XII of this section. Similarly when Fire Rated Flush Doors are required refer item XIII.. Stiles and rails shall be 45mm minimum finished thickness, unless shown otherwise on the Design Drawings. Timber for stiles and rails shall be selected for straight close grain parallel with the edges, without heart or sapwood or any other defects, matching colour and grain within a doorset, window set or window screen set. The lockset leaf to open first on double leaf doorsets shall always be the right hand facing leaf, viewed from outside opening inward. The right hand facing leaf of double leaf windows and window screens, viewed from inside the room shall always open first, whether it be inward or outward opening, unless, stated or shown otherwise on the Design Drawings. External Doors shall always open inwards, into the building, except for External Plant Room doors.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
II)
Door Stiles and Rails Dimensions a) Panelled doors shall have equal Stiles not less than 100mm wide except double leaf doors where: The overall width of meeting stiles shall be equal to the hinge or pivot stile, plus the meeting stile rebate depth with a feature 2 x 2mm groove line. When Main Entrance Double Leaf Doorsets design incorporates a plant-on post/mullion doorstop to the meeting stiles.
b) c)
Top Rail; shall not be less than width of hinge/pivot stiles. Bottom Rail; minimum width 200mm, or wider dependent on leaf height and width. Lock Rail; minimum width of 150mm. Extra thick stiles and rails that are built-up in their thickness shall be laminated from two equal thickness pieces and must have the lamination (glue line) joint exactly on the centre-line of the finished work. The pieces being laminated shall be of the same moisture content and have the annual rings opposed to each other. Unequal offset laminations shall not be permitted.
d) e)
f)
Timbers within the same Species classification and characteristics may be laminated together, to prior approval of the Engineer. Dissimilar species should not be laminated together. Glued or loose plywood or timber slips grooved into each piece shall not be used. Finger jointing shall be used at the centre of the width formed by proprietary machine tooling, to ensure balanced movement of the pieces across the grain. Mortice and Tenon Joints shall not be on the lamination line. Stiles and rails, of 60mm and above thickness, shall have equally spaced Double Mortice and Tenon Joints either side of the lamination glue line, with equal thickness centre haunch and outside shoulders.
g)
h)
III)
Special Doors with Dissimilar Timber Species a) Where dissimilar timber species have to be used on a door leaf, the leaf shall be provided with an inert GRP core of minimum 12mm thickness at the centre line of the leaf thickness. doors will therefore be of a minimum 70mm thickness. The GRP core shall have M6 Stainless Steel threaded rod cast into it during its make-up. These M6 threaded rods shall be located on the centre line of the face of the door timber stiles and all rails, for bolting the timber to the GRP. The timber shall not be glued to the GRP core. The perimeter meeting faces of the two timber species shall be dry butt jointed only, with the remainder of the stile/rail rebated over the GRP core. The GRP core panel size shall be based on the finished width and height of the door leaf, less 12mm at top and both edges and less 20mm at the bottom. If the door leaf is to be fitted with an Automatic Bottom Seal, the bottom of the GRP core, shall be reduced by 60mm. The Joinery Contractor shall provide his GRP core supplier with an accurately dimensioned drawing and/or plywood template of the required core giving the overall size with exact centres for the M6 Stainless Steel threaded rods. The M6 Stainless Steel fixing nuts and washers shall be counter-bored, slightly under the face, of the timber stiles and rails. These shall be covered with decorative timber studs or similar as indicated on the Design Drawing.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
IV)
Window/Screen Stiles and Rails Dimensions a) Window Screens shall have equal stiles of not less than 60mm wide. Likewise, double leaf windows/screens shall have meeting stiles width equal to hinge stiles plus the rebate depth at meeting stiles.
b)
Top rail width shall not be less than width of hinge stiles. Bottom rail width shall not be less than 80mm, or wider dependent on leaf height and/or width. In particular cases when the window/screen is of small mass area, smaller section widths may be acceptable, to approval of the Engineer.
c)
V)
Double Leaf Meeting Stiles Rebates a) Internal Double Leaf Doors shall have a minimum rebate depth of 15mm on the meeting stiles when installed. This will also apply to Double Leaf External Windows and Internal Window Screens. External Double Leaf Doors, and large External Windows shall have a minimum rebate depth of 20mm meeting stiles when installed. For extra larger leaves, the rebate will increase as indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
c)
VI)
In all cases the overlay of the meeting stiles rebate shall be centralised in the thickness of the stiles, with allowance for the neoprene compression seal and wiper seal where applicable. Door Construction Joints This clause to be read with Clause 7.0.19 VI). All Stiles and Rails shall have Through Mortice and Tenon Joints, properly Haunched and Wedged, unless otherwise shown on the design drawings. All wide bottom and lock rails shall have Twin Tenons with Haunch in between. Top rails shall have Single Tenon. Haunch sizes shall be adequate at bottom rail floor level, top rail at head and between twin tenons for bottom and lock rails. For External Doors to Main Buildings the bottom rail Haunch at floor level will be sufficient to accommodate the automatic bottom Door Seal.
a) b)
c)
d)
VII)
Automatic Door Bottom Seal a) External doors to all main buildings shall have Zero International or Athmer Automatic Door Bottom Seal, or similar approved, morticed into the floor level edge of the door leaf bottom rail. Where indicated on the Design Drawings this type of seal; shall be incorporated on internal doors.
b)
VIII) Carved Panelled Doors
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Carved panelled doors shall have 70mm thick stiles and rails, with a 12mm Birch plywood core panel which must be grooved centrally into the stiles and rails thickness at a depth equal to the plywood thickness plus 1mm clearance gap, unless shown otherwise on the Design Drawings. Carved panelled door leaves shall have the finish applications carried out prior to fitting of the carved panels. The retaining mouldings for the carved panels shall also have finish applications carried out prior to fitting. The final topcoat of lacquer shall be applied to the fully assembled door. The only exception being final exterior topcoat to external doors, which will be carried out at site after installation is completed to the approval of the Engineer.
b)
IX)
Carved Panels a) Panels shall be made up with comb-jointed laminations, in an odd number of pieces of equal width not exceeding 70mm. The panel lamination pieces shall be selected from commercially available stock, for quarter sawn material (straight grain perpendicular to the face width), to minimise climatic and seasonal movement. Panel thickness shall be at least twice the carving depth. A single panel should not exceed 550mm in width across the grain. Overhead carved transom panels that are wider than their height shall have the grain in horizontal direction, to minimise the amount of climatic and seasonal expansion and contraction. The rear face of solid timber panels shall be provided with 3 x 3mm saw kerf relief grooves, along the grain direction equally spaced between the comb-jointed lamination joint lines. No relief groove should fall on a comb-jointed lamination joint line. Panels shall receive all finish applications prior to fitting into the door leaf. The exception being final exterior topcoat to external doors and windows, which shall be carried out at site after installation to the approval of the Engineer. The rear face and all edges of all panels shall also be provided with at least one liberal coat of coloured sealer, and the end grain shall receive at least two liberal coats. Panels shall be held in place with mouldings, which shall be bolection mouldings wherever possible, sized to accommodate seasonal panel movement. The mouldings shall be pre-finished prior to fitting of the panels and fixing of the mouldings to the door stiles/rails.
b)
c) d) e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST k) Mouldings shall be pin fixed and where necessary, spot glued to the stiles and rails of the door leaf only with PVA adhesive. Under no circumstances shall any glue or pin fixing come into contact with the actual carved panel. To centralise the seasonal movement across the grain on wide carved panels dry fix 10mm diameter wooden dowels; accurately on the centre line of the carved panel width across the grain; near to the ends, and at centre if necessary, along the direction of the grain. The door leaf or transom plywood core shall be accurately bored to receive the dowels, ensuring equal gap clearance around all edges of the carved panel for expansion. The plywood must not be bored through to the opposite face on external doors. Provision for climatic and seasonal expansion shall be made by a gap around the solid timber panel installation, whether carved or plain. The overlay of mouldings onto the carved panel face must be adequate to accommodate climatic and seasonal movement.
l)
m)
n)
X)
External Back-of-House Doors a) External Back-of-House and Plant Room doors not requiring carved panel/s and located on non critical facades of the building shall have stopped bevelled edged Tongue and Grooved Lining Boards of maximum 90mm width and minimum 18mm thickness. The T&G lining boards shall be individually affixed to a Birch plywood substrate core by dry fixed 8mm diameter wooden dowels; accurately spaced on the centre line of each T&G lining board width; near to the ends, and at centre along the direction of the grain. A clearance/shadow gap/relief groove of 3mm centred on the lining board thickness shall be incorporated on the outer facade to the depth of the tongue/groove. A similar allowance shall be provided on the rear face of the T&G lining boards, to allow for expansion and contraction. All finishing procedures shall be carried out prior to final assembly, before final topcoat application.
b)
c)
XI)
Internal Doors with Veneered Raised & Fielded Panels a) Veneered Raised & Fielded Panels for internal doors shall be from Composite Board, as described in Clause 7.0.05 section VI) and Clause 7.0.06 Sections I) to V) inclusive. The edges all Veneered Composite Board (C.B.) panels for doors shall have the solid timber Raised periphery section with minimum 2mm
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST projection beyond the face of the veneer, and with minimum 2mm overlay onto the veneer at the edges of the C.B. panel. XII) Solid Core Flush Doors a) Solid Core Flush Doors, shall be 44mm thick to BS EN 952 latest revision, with 15mm hardwood lippings to all four edges, rebated on both faces for plywood skins of not less than 4.8mm thickness. The door substrate perimeter timber core frame shall not be less than 70mm wide, and be provided with additional lock and/or other timber blocks or framing as necessary for ironmongery and/or glazing panels, grilles etc.. Core material shall be from flaxboard, lamin-board, or similar to approval of the Engineer. All materials used side by side in the lay-up of the door substrate shall be of exactly equal thickness to prevent telegraphing in the finished door faces and ensure bonding over the full area of the door blank. Flush Door lay-ups shall be bonded together in a proprietary hydraulic flush door or veneer pressing machine, using suitable proprietary adhesives to the relevant standard for the flush door manufacture. Where Flush Doors are to incorporate High Pressure Plastic Laminate faces, the Plastic Laminate shall be all as detailed in Clause 7.0.08
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
XIII) Fire Rated Flush Doors a) Solid Core Fire-Check Flush Doors; (FD30S and FD60S) shall comply with relevant parts of BS 459, BS 476, BS 5588 and BS 8214 latest revisions. Construction shall be nominal Flush Door 44mm thickness with the proprietary Masterboard or Supalux board by Promat Glasgow Ltd., (formerly Cape Calsil Systems Ltd.), Uxbridge, Middlesex UB8 2JQ, U.K (or equal approved) fire resistant sheet/s to the specified rating laid-up under the plywood face skin. The fire-resistant sheet/s must be full size up to the inner edge of the hardwood edge lippings. Glazed panels in Fire-Check Doors shall be manufactured from fireresistant glass in accordance with the relevant BS or other standards. All Fire-Check Flush Doors shall carry the relevant BS test certification at submission for approval stage.
b)
c)
d)
XIV) Window Glazing
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Stiles and shall be rebated to accept the sealed glazing unit from the inside, to provide a solid wrought stop for the glazing on the external side, ensuring the unit is watertight within leaf. Loose pin fixed glazing beads to external and internal sides will not be permitted. The rebate size must allow for 2mm glazing compound/sealant all around and between the glass and the solid wrought external side rebated stop. The glazing compound/sealant colour shall match the timber finish. Unless indicated on the Design Drawings, bolection mouldings shall be provided on the internal side to retain the glazing unit, with a similar bead of glazing compound/sealant, and pin fixed at an angle into the stiles/rails.
b)
c)
d)
8.1.3
Glass & Mirror I) General a) All Glass shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of BS 952 Part 1 & 2, BS 7449 and BS 6206 where applicable, and/or revisions/substitution of these Standards. All Mirrors shall be to the latest BS, BS EN, ISO or CEN Standards. This shall include longevity of silver backing, without deterioration to the Mirror surface, such as telegraphic staining through to the Mirror face.
b)
II)
Window & Door Glazing a) Glazed Windows and Doors shall be fitted with 18mm certified hermetically sealed double glazed units, comprising 6mm clear internal glass and 6mm solar reflective outer glass, unless specified indicated otherwise the Design Drawings. Fitting of the sealed glazing units shall be as described at 2.21 item N above, with 2mm allowance in the timber rebate all around to provide a continuous bead of glazing compound/sealant. Glazing for FD30S and FD60S Fire-Rated Door and Window Sets the glazing shall be from Fire Resistant Glass, or from Pyran Glass, to BS 476, BS 5588 and BS 8214 over and above the General BS Standards given at item A above.
b)
c)
III)
Mirror & Decorative Glass to Internal Doors a) Mirror and Decorative Glass Fronts to Internal Doors shall be to the specified thickness with bevelled and/or polished edges, and other design features such as etching & filling etc., indicated on the Design Drawings. A sample of these works shall be submitted for approval shortly after contract award and prior to Joinery manufacture.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) All Mirror Fronts, plain or decorative, shall be mounted onto a Birch plywood substrate of minimum 12mm thickness fixed to suitable grounds of treated Meranti plugged and screwed to the structure.
IV)
Mirror Fixing a) Mirrors shall be mounted by pin fixed face mouldings only. The use of silicon, glue or double-sided adhesive mirror tape or similar to retain the Mirror in place will not be permitted. Mirrors shall have a minimum 10 Year guarantee against failure of the silver backing from deterioration, or any consequent tarnishing of the mirror. The guarantee shall cover visible corrosion through to the mirror face, including decorative design works such as filled etchings etc.
b)
8.1.4 Timber Entrance Gates I) General The timber used for Entrance Gates to Palace Properties shall be Teakwood, unless indicated otherwise on the design drawings for a particularly project. II) Construction a) Driveway Entrance Gates to Palace Properties shall be fabricated from 304 Grade Stainless to BS EN 12373 using steel box section framework core with 316/304 Grade Stainless Steel custom made pivots etc. Refer Clause 7.0.12 for further details of requirements. For walkway Entrance Gates of solid Teakwood, construction shall be by through haunched and wedged mortice & tenon joints, carried out in accordance with Clauses 7.0.19; 7.0.20 and 7.0.21.
b)
III)
Installation a) All forms of fixing to the adjacent structures shall be by Chemical Anchor Bolts of sufficient length and load capacity, manufactured from 304 Grade Stainless Steel. The approval for the Anchor bolts shall be obtained from the Structural Engineer.
b)
8.1.5 Ancillary & Other General Joinery Works All ancillary and any other general Joinery Works mentioned in the tender documentation shall be carried out as described under the preceding sub-sections. 8.1.6 Ironmongery Fitting
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST I) General a) All recessing, morticing, boring and cutouts for Ironmongery shall be carried out accurately in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions supplied with the Ironmongery, or as detailed in the Working Drawings. The location of all ironmongery must be clearly shown on the Contractors Working Drawings submitted for approval. All screw holes and other means of fixing provided in the items of ironmongery shall be utilised during installation.
b)
c)
II)
Cut-outs for Ironmongery a) All cutouts etc. for Ironmongery must be carried out at the Workshop, using a machine wherever possible and prior to the finishing process of the Joinery Work. All cutouts shall receive at least one sealer coat of finish material, before final fixing of Ironmongery at the Workshop.
b) .
III)
Final Fixing of Ironmongery a) Whenever possible all functional Ironmongery, excluding decorative furniture etc., should be final fixed to the Joinery Work at the workshop and protected to avoid surface damage. Decorative Architectural Furniture, such as door handles etc. shall only be final fixed at site on the instruction of the Site Engineer. These shall first be factory fitted and removed for transit.
b)
IV)
Door Lever Handle Height a) Generally the pivot point of door lever handles shall be 970mm AFFL throughout the works, unless otherwise shown on the Design Drawings. Fixed centre door knobs and pull handles shall be centralised within the carving module/design. On plain doors they shall be fixed as shown on the Design Drawings or where agreed by the Engineer.
b)
V)
Specific Parameters for the Requirements of Ironmongery Fitting a) Hinges i) All Butt and other types of architectural hinges shall be recessed equally into the leaf and the frame.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST ii) They shall be positioned on the door leaf at 15mm from the respective edge of the bottom, mid and top rails to avoid screws entering the end grain of the tennons. Screws shall be of the correct gauge, length and material finish to suit the hinge. All screw holes provided in the hinge shall be used for final fixing. All doors having concealed or surface mounted type Overhead Door Closers, must be fitted with either Double Ball Bearing Hinges irrespective of finish. Steel hinges shall not be used anywhere.
iii)
iv)
b)
Floor Springs i) Floor Springs shall have 5mm offset accessories, or have centre pivoted accessories for double action doors. Large offset accessories shall not be used, unless specified for a particular purpose. All standard External Doors, up to 70mm leaf thickness, shall be set in a traditional 90 rebated frame with minimum 20mm rebate depth, using 5mm offset components, unless indicated otherwise on the design drawings or in the specification. VIP Areas, Internal Main Thoroughfare Passage and Main Rooms Entrance Doors shall be provided with 5mm offset components, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, or approved by the Engineer. 5mm Offset Bottom Straps and Top Centre Straps shall be located with pivot point of the straps aligned with the door leaf pivot edge, except where the structural opening and/or door frame jamb thickness does not provide sufficient space for the pivot end of the floor spring cement box under the jamb. In such cases installation of the pivot straps pivot point shall be moved closer to the door leaf lock stile, to a maximum where the pivot straps knuckle edge will be aligned with the door leaf pivot edge (i.e. pivot strap pivot point 16mm from door leaf pivot stile edge, in the case of Dorma straps). Centre Pivoted Bottom and Top Centre Straps must be fitted on the centre line of the door leaf thickness and positioned laterally within the limitations shown in the instructions provided with the floor spring. Screws shall be of the correct gauge, length and material to suit the pivot strap. All screw holes provided in the pivot straps shall be used for fixing to the top and bottom of the door leaf and into the frame head/transom.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
After installation of the door leaf all functions of the floor spring shall be checked for proper functioning and adjusted as necessary.
c)
Overhead Door Closers i) Unless indicated otherwise, Overhead Door Closers shall normally not be used in areas highly decorated or/VIP locations. Overhead Door Closers used for External Doors must be specifically designed and manufactured for the purpose. Perko coil spring, or any other similar mechanical type Door Edge Closers shall not be used. The minimum leaf thickness for a door fitted with Concealed Overhead Door Closers shall be 55mm irrespective of make or model. Surface Mounted Door Closers shall only be used in Back of House and Service Areas, unless otherwise specified or instructed by the Engineer. The manufacturers installation instructions provided must be strictly followed to ensure proper functioning of the closer and the door. Screws shall be of the correct gauge, length and material to suit the pivot strap. All screw holes provided in the closer and its accessories shall be used for fixing to the top of the door leaf and into the frame head/transom. After installation of the door leaf all functions of the overhead closer, checked for proper functioning and adjusted as necessary.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
d)
Door Stops i) ii) All Doors shall have Door Stops. Door Stops shall be of floor mounted semi-dome type and shall be complete with floor pin and using screw fixing to the floor. Fixing to the floor shall ensure the maximum opening angle of the door leaf without making contact with any wall finish etc. The doorstop rubber buffer insert must be installed to make full-face contact with the door leaf bottom rail. The position of the Door Stop on the finished floor shall not encroach on the thoroughfare access, either with the door open or closed.
ii)
iv)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST e) Lever Action Flush Bolts i) Lever Action Flush Bolts shall be used at top and bottom of the rebated edge on the Dead Leaf of all Double Leaf Doors and Windows. The minimum bolt throw shall be of 15mm. The width of a Lever Action Flush Bolts shall be 19mm unless instructed by the Engineer to accommodate a door of large thickness. For Window/Screens with small section size timber stiles, narrower widths of lever action bolts or sunk slide bolts may be used, with the approval of the Engineer. Lever Action Flush Bolts Size; for Double Leaf Doors or Windows shall be of the following criteria: o Bottom Bolt Size: 152 x 19mm shall be fitted in the internal side of the meeting stile rebate check of the dead leaf. Top Bolt Size: width equal to bottom bolt, length to suit leaf height and accessibility. The length of top bolt shall be determined by the lever action being accessible within the range of 1800mm to 1950mm above finished floor level. For Double Leaf Windows that are not accessible from finished floor level, the top bolts shall be of the same minimum length as the bottom bolts.
ii) iii)
iv)
v)
iv)
Screws shall be of the correct gauge, length and material to suit the fittings used. All screw holes provided in the fittings shall be used for fixing the fittings to the dead leaf. Flush Bolt Floor Sockets i) ii) Spring activated Dust Excluding Bolt Sockets shall not be used. Easy-Clean Bolt Sockets shall be provided for bottom bolts of Double Leaf Doors and Double Leaf Windows/Screens with nonTimber cill. The Bolt Socket size shall correspond to the size of the lever action bottom shoot bolt diameter. Floor Bolt Sockets shall be set flush into the floor finish. For timber floor finish Floor Bolt Sockets shall be of screw fixed type, recessed flush into the timber flooring.
f)
iii) iv)
v)
Windows or Doors with Timber cill do not require a floor socket the supplied keep plate supplied will suffice. Screws shall be of the correct gauge, length and material to suit the fitting used. All screw holes provided in the fitting shall be used for fixing the floor bolt socket flush to the floor.
vi).
g)
Lock Cases i) Mortise Lock Cases shall be centralised in the leaf thickness, unless otherwise shown on the Design Drawings. All Lock Cases shall be of Euro-Profile type to suit cylinder locks, unless otherwise indicated in the Design Drawings or Scope of Work. All Mortise Cylinder Lock Cases for use with lever handle furniture, or knob furniture when particularly specified, shall be at 72mm centres and suitably sprung for lever handle/knob return action. External Main Entrance Doors and Internal Main Thoroughfare Corridor Doors that are on Floor Springs and Internal Double Swing Action Doors on Centre Pivot shall be provided with a Euro-Profile Mortise Deadlock Case. Internal doors to Private Suites or Rooms, which are specified with floor spring, and Hinged Doors without closer mechanism shall have Mortise Cylinder Lock Case with latch action. Lock Cases for decorative/VIP Areas shall have Solid Polished Brass Forends and Strike Plates. Other areas shall have 304 Grade Satin Stainless Steel lock cases. The Latch Action Projection Area of all Strike Plates shall be 2mm for all types of lock. Lock Cases shall have Backsets available in 5mm increments. The Backset of the Lock Case shall indicated on the Design Drawings and confirmed on the approved Working Drawings All Lock Cases for Double Leaf Doors (except internal double action swing doors) or Windows shall be supplied with proprietary Rebate Set of either 15mm or 20mm or 25mm. The Rebate Set will be supplied by the Lock Case Manufacturer to ensure matching material and finish.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii) viii) ix) x)
xi)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST xii) Screws shall be of the correct gauge, length and material to suit the fitting used. All screw holes provided in the fitting shall be used for fixing to the door leaf.
h)
Cylinder Locks i) Cylinder Locks shall be of Euro-Profile format to suit the specified lock cases. Cylinder Locks for VIP Areas shall be of Magnetic Security Code System (MCS) type, under a Grand Master-Key System. This will apply whether the Cylinder Locks are for a new project, or to comply with an existing area GMK System which is to be extended. All Cylinder Locks shall be supplied with three (3 No.) differ keys per cylinder lock. All cylinder key systems shall be of a manufacturer/type that prevents the local duplication of keys. GMK and SMK key quantity shall be three (3 No.) unless confirmed differently by the client. Where an existing GMK system is being extended additional Grand Master Keys will not be required. However three Sub Master Keys will be required for the system new extension where applicable. A GMK and SMK System Schedule of key accessibility to doors shall be provided by the Engineer for all cylinder lock systems. Immediately upon completion of the project a final As Built Key System Schedule must be provided to the relevant P and M Area Office. This final Key Schedule must take place before actual project handover to the Client by the Joinery or Main Contractor. All Double Cylinder Locks shall be of equal length on both sides of centre point; that is of equal incremental extension. The Cylinder Lock projection beyond the face of the Door Furniture shall be not more than 3mm maximum for security reasons along with practical aesthetics. They shall not be underflush. The finish shall match that of the adjacent furniture. However due to constraints in manufacturing materials, certain finishes shall be subject to submission for approval by the Engineer. Where door furniture is finished in gold plating, cylinder lock plate shall be polished brass. Where keyless knobs are required, these shall be in figure of eight (8) pattern as supplied by EVVA Werk, Austria, or equal and approved.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v) vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST xii) xiii) Under no circumstances should MCS cylinder locks be lubricated. All Cylinder Locks shall be retained in the lock case through the lock case forend by means of the supplied machine screw supplied, which must be of matching material and finish.
i)
Croft Door Bolt i) Croft Door Bolts shall be used on all VIP Toilets and Bathrooms Doors. Where indicated on the Design Drawings it shall also be required on Dressing Room Doors. The bolt shall be gold plated finish on solid brass with beaded edge design feature. The barrel length shall be 95mm long x 25mm wide, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings or in the Particular Specification. The bolt shall be of the straight shoot type, unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings. The keep plate shall be of solid brass surface mounted enclosed type with a matching beaded edge detail as the barrel. Edge mounted keep/strike plate shall not be used unless incorporated on the original Design Drawings or in the Particular Specification. Screws shall be of the correct gauge, length and material to suit the fitting used. All screw holes provided in the Croft Bolt shall be used for fixing to the door leaf and frame jamb.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
j)
Lever Action Door Furniture i) Unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings, Internal Doors shall be provided with Lever Action Furniture. Dead Leaves of Internal Double Leaf Doors shall have DeadFixed Latch Only Lever Furniture without key-hole as indicated on the drawings. Double Leaf Doors in Back of House and Service Areas shall only have Furniture to the Dead Leaf when indicated on the drawings. All internal doors Lever Furniture shall be on back-plate, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings or in the Particular Specification. All lever handle furniture, shall be with pivot centre point at 970mm AFFL on the lock stile/s, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings, all BackPlates for lockable door furniture shall be on the European Standard of 72mm Centres for Mortice Euro-Profile (PZ) Cylinder Lock Cases. All proprietary Follower Spindles, for lock cases with latch action, shall be supplied to suit the door leaf thickness, and be fully inserted within the lever handle/s. Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings all Follower Spindles shall be of the standard 8mm square. The Follower Spindles shall be supplied by the Door Furniture Manufacturer and will be of a non-corrosive metal. Wood screws provided or otherwise, shall be of the correct gauge, length, material and finish to suit the fixing purpose. All screw holes provided in the door furniture shall be used for fixing to the door leaf.
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
k)
Centre Door Dead Knob Furniture i) Knob Mortice Lock Furniture shall not be used with Latch Action Lock Cases for doors, unless indicated on the Design Drawings. In which case knob diameter shall not exceed 57mm and the lock case must be suitably sprung for use with knob furniture. When indicated, Dead-Fixed Knob Furniture of the same maximum diameter with back-plate or rose and escutcheon may be used on lock stiles with an Euro-Profile Mortice Dead Lock Case. Location of Decorative Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knobs shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings, to suit adjacent carving designs. Decorative Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knobs shall be provided with a Euro-Profile Mortice Deadlock Case to the lock stile with matching design escutcheon/s to the stile face/s at location shown on the Design Drawings. Where Centre Door Knobs are to both faces of the leaf and are concentric, back-to-back fixing shall be used. In all other instances, where door face design permits, concealed bolt through method should be used. Where the door face design does not allow for the bolt through method, or Lever Action Furniture is to be used on the internal face lock stile, a secure and robust secret fixing method of the Centre Door Knob shall be used to approval of the Engineer.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
Wood screws provided or otherwise, shall be of the correct gauge, length, material and finish to suit the fixing purpose. All screw holes provided in the door furniture shall be used for fixing to the door leaf.
l)
Pull Handles & Push Plates i) Pull Handles and Push Plates shall be used for Double Leaf Doors in main thoroughfare corridors or entrances, when indicated on the Design Drawings only. Pull Handles and Push Plates shall also be used for Single Leaf Doors in other locations such as; kitchen, pantry, servery and back-of-house washroom/toilet lobby doors when indicated on the Design Drawings or in the Particular Specification. When Pull Handles and Push Plates are used they shall be provided with a Euro-Profile Mortice Deadlock Lock Case to the lock stile only, with Euro-Profile piercing below the handle or with matching design escutcheon/s to the stile face/s at the location shown on the Design Drawings, or written in the Particular Specification. Where Pull Handles are to both faces of the door and are concentric, back-to-back fixing shall be used. When Push Plates are provided to the outside face of the door the Pull Handles shall be of the bolt through fixing type and bolts shall be covered by the Push Plates on the outside face of the door. Where door face design permits, the concealed bolt through method shall be used. When door face design does not allow for bolt through method, or Lever or Knob Furniture is to be used on the outside face lock stile, a secure and robust secret fixing method of the Pull Handle shall be used to approval of the Engineer. Pull Handles shall be positioned between 1200 and 1350mm on centre of their height above AFFL, unless particularly shown otherwise on the design drawings. Push Plates shall be positioned on the outside face of the lock stile concentric with the Pull Handle. Wood screws provided or otherwise, shall be of the correct gauge, length, material and finish to suit the fixing purpose. All screw holes provided in the door furniture shall be used for fixing to the door leaf.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
m)
Cylinder Roses/Escutcheons i) Cylinder Roses/Escutcheons shall be of matching design, shape and finish to the Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knob, Pull Handles, or other door furniture where applicable.
ii)
Unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings, all Cylinder Roses/Escutcheons shall be of Euro-Profile piercing to conform with the lock case and cylinder lock items mentioned above. Wood screws provided or otherwise, shall be of the correct gauge, length, material and finish to suit the fixing purpose. All screw holes provided in the door furniture shall be used for fixing to the door leaf.
iii)
n)
Entrance Gates Custom Ironmongery, Pivots, Etc i) For Driveway Entrance Gates to Palaces the ironmongery shall be custom made locally to the sizes and in the material finish shown on the Design Drawings. The core framework shall be fabricated from 304 Grade Stainless Steel with 316 or 304 Grade Stainless Steel custom made pivots etc. Refer sub-sections 7.0.12 and 7.01.04 above for further details. For walkway External Gates the ironmongery shall generally form
ii)
iii) o)
Window / Screen Knobs i) Knobs for Windows/Screens shall be round or oval shape as indicated on the Design Drawings, and shall be from the same suite as the door furniture within the room. Where Window/Screen Knobs are to be made from Beechwood Timber to match the Window/Screen finish they will not from part of the Ironmongery supply scope. Windows shall not have any furniture externally, unless specifically indicated on the Design Drawings. The Knobs shall be on a Rose to suit the available stile flat width unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. For window screens the maximum diameter of knob shall be 38mm. Full height, walk-through type windows, such as glazed French Windows shall be lockable from inside only and may have lever or mortice knob action furniture. French Windows shall be treated as external doors in respect of all other ironmongery requirements.
ii)
iii)
iv)
vi)
vii)
p)
Adjustable Roller Catches i) Spring activated ball or double Ball Catches shall not be used.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST ii) Roller Catches for Windows/Screens etc. shall be of adjustable type with barrel depth of 43mm x 19mm diameter, or where indicated on the Design Drawings, adjustable type Magnetic Catches. Roller Catches shall be recessed into frame head or cill or both, with the keep plate fixed into the leaf, as indicated on the Design Drawings. All Keep plates must project beyond the leaf/frame edge face, and this projection shall not exceed 2mm. Wood screws provided or otherwise, shall be of the correct gauge, length, material and finish to suit the fixing purpose. All screw holes provided in the Adjustable Roller Catch and keep plate shall be used for fixing to the window/screen leaf and frame jamb.
iii)
iv)
v)
q)
Window Locks & Bolts i) All External Windows, and where detailed Internal Window Screens, shall be lockable from inside only. External Windows and Internal Screens shall not be provided with mortice lock case, unless detailed. In these instances the locking function shall only be accessible from inside. All External Windows shall have the following Lock Type, dependent on the teakwood timber stile member section size and as detailed on the Design Drawings: Budget Locks with 10 to 22mm adjustable backset where lever or knob action furniture is required on the inside. Chubb type Security Bolt of suitable backset with star key, and Budget Lock as above, but with Tee Key where lever or knob action furniture is not required.
ii)
iii)
iv)
Internal Window Screens will be held in closed position by Adjustable Roller Catches and Chubb type Security Bolt of suitable backset, and/or adjustable backset Budget Locks to the selection and in the locations indicated on the Design Drawings. The Adjustable Backset Budget Lock and Chubb Security Bolt shall be installed in similar way to door lock cases, that is, in the centre of the leaf thickness. Wood screws provided or otherwise, shall be of the correct gauge, length, material and finish to suit the fixing purpose. All screw
v)
vi)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST holes provided in the Lock/Bolt and keep plates shall be used for fixing to the window/screen leaf and frame jamb. r) Neoprene Door & Window/Screen Seals i) Refer to Clause 7.01.01 Paras IX to XIV inclusive for all Door, Window and Window Screen frames neoprene seals. Neoprene Door and Window/Screen Seals together with Fire and Smoke Seals shall be from Sealmaster Limited, U.K. or approved equivalent.
ii)
s)
Automatic Door Bottom Seal i) Refer to Clause 7.01.02 Para VII for details of Automatic Door Bottom seals. Automatic Door Bottom Seals shall be from one of the following Zero International, Athmer, Ventura or Hafele ranges to suit the door construction and pivoting method. All Automatic Door Bottom Seals shall be mortice type for concealed fixing in the door bottom rail. The black or grey neoprene element of the seal must extend to full width of the door leaf, and in the case of double leaf doors must meet together at the meeting stiles.
ii)
iii)
8.2.0 FITTED AND LOOSE CABINETRY I) General a) All members of solid timber shall be wrought to the finished sizes, profiles, rebated, grooved and otherwise machined or carved as shown on the Design Drawings and/or Approved Working Drawings. Unless otherwise shown on the Design Drawings, all panels of 12mm thick and above shall be from P and M Standard Composite Board as defined Clause 7.0.06 Para VI. Samples of all materials, such as timber, panel substrate cores, veneers, marquetry, inlays etc. shall be submitted for approval, in accordance with Clause 7.0.16. Production methods, fabrication and assembly, shall be carried out to the highest standards, which shall incorporate traditional trade practices, along with modern techniques and equipment where appropriate.
b)
c)
d)
II)
Cabinetry Components & Jointing

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) All Construction Jointing methods shall be shown in detail on the Contractors Working Drawings. All joints of timber to timber joints shall be Mortice and Tenon Haunched where section size permits. For smaller sections the appropriate diameter proprietary Fluted Beechwood Dowels shall be used. For Permanent Joints between Timber and Board Materials, a suitable sized traditional Tongue and Groove Joint shall be used. For such type of joints a slip feather shall not be used. Alternatively where the timber section size or panel thickness does not allow for a T. and G. Joint, proprietary Lamello biscuits, of the appropriate thickness, in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, may be used. Board Material Panel Jointing for the Cabinet carcass finished assembly shall be by an approved secret fixing method to be indicated on the Working Drawings. The above form of jointing shall be supplemented by proprietary Fluted Beechwood Dowels of suitable diameter accurately positioned where required. Where concealed on one side all such panel joints shall also be provided with timber fillets of suitable section size, glued and screwed to both horizontal and vertical panels. All forms of panel joints shall have tightly closed shoulders. Jointing fixed shelves to cabinet gables shall be by means of a routed stopped raggle/recess into the gables, with the corresponding shelves having a formed tongue shoulder slightly under size on both faces of the shelf thickness and also stopped at each end. Finished Carcass Back Panels, Drawer Bottoms and the like, shall be grooved into their respective carcass/box. Nails or staples shall not be used for any fixings. Whether concealed or otherwise, in the intended location of the installed Cabinetry item at site, the rear/bottom face of all Carcass Back Panels and/or Drawer Bottoms shall receive at least one coat of approved; stain colour, sealer and lacquer to approval. Similar finishing process shall apply to all the unexposed faces of all carcass panels. Carcass Back Panels; shall be of 12mm thick Composite Board, unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings. They shall be veneered on inner face with the approved Veneer, and on the rear face at least with Balancer Veneer, refer to Clause 7.0.07 Para III. Drawer Bottoms shall be of Birch Plywood having a minimum thickness of 6mm, similarly veneered as the carcass back panels, unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST k) Drawer Bottoms shall be grooved into the Drawer Box front and sides by 5 6mm deep groove, at 8mm up from the bottom edge of the Drawer Box Sides, and screw fixed from below into the Drawer Box back. Drawer Box Sides, Front and Back shall be from 15mm thick Solid Timber of same species as specified for the Cabinetry item, unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings. The Drawer Box components shall be dovetail jointed together or by a robust alternative method to approval. Drawer Runners shall be of Full Extension Type, of closest length to suit internal carcass depth, and refinished by the Cabinetry Contractor to match the stain finish. Large and Tall Cabinetry shall have 45mm thick Impregnated Treated Dark Red Meranti framework within the base/plinth void area to support the extra weight. This base framework shall be scalloped 15/20mm deep at its bottom edge to provide intermittent 45 x 45mm contact with the finished floor level, (in addition to the contact of the carcass uprights with the finished floor), and be affixed to the carcass for overall rigidity and load support. Bookshelf Units shall only be provided with either down-lighters in the top of the cabinet, or mini strip lights behind the shelf fore edge/pelmet when they are to be used for ornaments. Wardrobe Units; that are to be provided with strip lights, as indicated on the Design Drawings, these shall be behind the internal pelmet downstand. The strip lights shall be RZB L300 in aluminium anodised finish with LDE-Lp/S14s/35W lamp or approved equivalent by the CDO Services Engineer. These lights shall be switched from the room switch plate.
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
III)
Audio/Visual Equipment Cabinetry (Particular Requirements) a) The minimum shelf thickness for supporting a television in a cabinet shall be 25mm. The shelf shall be securely fixed to the gables with additional support from 8mm dia. proprietary Fluted Beechwood Dowels and with timber fillets glued and screwed to shelf and inner gables junction. For wide or heavy TV Units the lower section of the cabinet shall have a full height centre division/s to support the extra load and prevent sagging. For Plasma or other flat screen TV monitors, the supporting back panel shall be manufactured from 25mm thick Composite Board, to accept the bolt through fixings of the TV monitor hanger frame. The 25mm supporting back panel must be at recessed into the top panel by minimum 3mm and into the lower panel by 6mm, and secured from behind by screw fixed 45 x 45mm timber fillets at top, bottom and sides to support the weight.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) All TV / Hi-Fi Units indicated on the Design Drawings with Pivot Sliding Door Fittings, shall utilise the scissor type action from the Hawa X range or approved equivalent. TV / Hi-Fi Units specified with Pivot Sliding Door Fittings, shall have removable inner gables and divisions at the back, top and bottom by using Swedish Type shelf supports (Magic Wires) for maintenance access of the Hawa Pivot Sliding Door Fittings. All other internal shelving and any intermediate upright divisions, between the inner gables and intermediate vertical divisions shall be securely fixed to provide rigidity to the integral inner unit that houses the TV and/or other audio/visual equipment. The Cabinetry Contractor shall ascertain the actual physical overall dimensions for all Audio/Visual Equipment together with the necessary airflow clearances for inclusion in the Working Drawings. Where indicated on Design Drawings, TV Turntables shall have 65kg. capacity, as per Hafele model Color E or equivalent.
d)
e)
f)
IV)
Mini Refrigerator Cabinetry Units (Particular Requirements) a) For Wardrobes in Royal Dressing Rooms and elsewhere as shown in the design drawings, housings for mini refrigerators shall be for units from the Bosch range; Integrated Built-Under Model: KUL 1406/14440 Size: H. 818-868 adjustable x W. 598 x D. 548mm. The minimum clear internal cabinet dimensions required are H. 825 x W. 600 (+ allowance for Cabinet shutter hinge type) x D. 575mm. fridge door for operation clearances.
b)
V)
Desks with Built-In Paper Shredder (Particular Requirements) a) Where indicated in the Design Drawings the carcase construction of the desk shall have a double height drawer to house the shredder and the waste paper bin, located in one of the desk side return units. The Paper Shredder shall be a Geha Top Secret Primo 1400C Cross-Cut Model available locally from Office Supplies Co. LLC. The supplied integral plastic waste paper bin shall be discarded and the above custom made elements by the Cabinetry Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure provision is made for the built-in safety trigger switch on the underside of the shredder unit. All cutouts, in the upper drawer bottom, housing the Paper Shredder machine shall be accurately formed by template to ensure proper location of the machine. The templates shall be marked with identification and retained for similar future works by the Contractor.
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) A maximum clearance dimension of 90mm is required from the top face of the upper drawer bottom, (housing the shredder), and the fixed lowest part of the desktop. The upper drawer box carcase sides, front and back for Paper Shredder shall be manufactured from either, minimum 18mm thick veneered composite board , or desk matching veneered 18mm Birch plywood. The lower drawer box housing the custom made waste paper bin shall be from either, 15mm thick veneered composite board, or desk matching veneered 15mm Birch plywood. The drawer bottoms shall be from desk matching veneered 12mm thick Birch plywood with balancer veneer to the underside and fixed in a groove 12mm minimum up from the bottom edge of the drawer sides and front. The custom made waste paper bin shall be manufactured from 12mm thick Birch Plywood throughout, with finger scallops on the inside of the sides for removal, and stained to the approved furniture finish. Where a paper shredder or similar heavy equipment is to be incorporated into the Cabinetry Work, Telescopic Side or Base Mounted Type Drawer Runners shall be used. For the paper shredder the minimum load capacity shall be 50 kg/pair. Higher capacity runners may be required for other equipment where installed. All the Drawer Runner Manufacturers predrilled screw fixing holes shall be utilised for both the cabinet and drawer fixing.
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
VI)
Desks, Dining, Dressing & Conference Tables etc a) Desks, Dining, Dressing and Conference Tables shall be 750mm AFFL overall height, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. All Tops for Desks, Dining, Dressing and Conference Tables etc. shall have Book-Matched Veneer (whether Crown Cut or Burr), Marquetry, Inlay Bands and Quarter Cut Cross-Band Veneer as indicated on the Design Drawings, and noted in Clause 7.0.07. Sample section/s for each dissimilar item of Cabinetry containing these elements along with perimeter edge moulding/s must be submitted to the Client for approval, under cover of M.A.S., prior to approval of Working Drawing submission. Large and Heavy Free-Standing Desks of framework and carcase construction, which are to be located on carpet or rug shall be provided with a solid 5mm thick Neoprene Strip on the foot-print bottom edges, which come into contact with the carpet or rug, to ease the load of the desk impression. The 5mm thick Neoprene Strip shall be from Sealmaster U.K. or equal approved.
b)
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST e) Where tops of Large Conference or Dining Tables require steel boxsection support framework, it and any associated fixings shall be manufactured from 304 Grade Stainless Steel to the approval of the Engineer, all as detailed in Clause 7.0.12.
VII)
Commodes, Consoles, Drawer & Bedside Cabinets & All Other Cabinetry These items of Cabinetry shall be constructed in accordance with Clause 7.02.01.
VIII) Cabinetry Carcase Panels & Veneering a) Cabinetry Carcase Panels with veneered faces shall be made from Composite Board as detailed in Clause 7.0.06 Para VI, unless otherwise specified on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. The thickness shall be as indicated on those documents. All Veneers, Marquetry and Inlay Bands for Cabinetry shall be as detailed at Clause7.0.07. Fitted and Loose Cabinetry shall have all the unexposed panel faces veneered with balancer veneer, with all edges and ends edge lipped in solid timber and veneered over.
b)
IX)
Inset Glass Tops Inset Glass Tops shall be provided to all Desks and Dressing Tables as detailed on the Design Drawings. Cabinetry & Loose Furniture inset glass tops shall be of 6mm minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. All edges shall be polished. also refer to Glass and Mirrors Clause 7.02.03.
X)
Marble / Granite Tops a) For Commodes and Consoles etc. marble tops shall be of 30mm minimum thickness, and be fitted to a 25mm thick Birch Plywood substrate. When specified for other Cabinetry as inset, the marble shall be of 20mm minimum thickness, and be fitted to a 25mm thick Birch Plywood substrate top. When specified or shown as sit on for other Cabinetry the marble or granite shall be of minimum 30mm thick.
b)
c)
XI)
Gold Leaf Highlights a) Where specified on the Design Drawings/ Control Sheets gold leafing shall be applied in 23 carat Real Gold Leaf in Agate polished finish and lacquered over.
XII)
Cabinetry Carcase Finishing

a)
The staining and successive finishing applications for Cabinetry Panelled Carcase Work should be applied prior to final assembly at the Workshop. The fully assembled unit shall only receive the final light coat of top lacquer, prior to despatch to site. Back panels rear faces and other unexposed elements of the work shall receive a coat of the approved stain colour along with sealer top coat.
b)
XIII) Assembly and Site Installation a) b) All assembly work shall be carried out at the Contractors factory. Under no circumstances shall the Project Site be used as an assembly shop. Where necessary, all large Cabinetry items of Furniture shall be made up into Sub-Assemblies at the Contractors Workshop. Assembly of these will be permitted.
8.2.1 Chairs, Framed Sofas & Occasional Tables I) General: Unless otherwise indicated on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings all Chairs, carved/moulded Sofas, show-wood frames and Occasional Tables base frames including table top perimeter edge profiled moulding, shall be in Beechwood stained to the approved finish. The Beechwood shall be of the un-steamed Northern Europe White Beech variety. II) Hardwood Concealed Anglet Corner Blocks a) Hardwood Concealed Anglet Corner Blocks must be provided across frame rails/leg junction at appropriate maximum thickness for the model frame timber sections on Chair or Sofa seat frame, and Table base frame. Metal corner connector plates shall not be used. This shall also apply to Desks and Dressing Tables other furniture on legs, described in Clause 7.02.01. Where frame rails are of curved shape, the Concealed Anglet Corner Blocks shall be machined accurately to match the inner curve of the frame rails. They shall incorporate machine formed shallow finger jointing, which shall correspond to stopped grooving formed in the inside face of the frame rails at the location of the Anglet Corner Blocks. The concealed Anglet Corner Blocks shall be glued and screwed to the frame rails. In addition the Corner Anglet Blocks on base frames for Occasional Tables, Consoles, Ottomans, Free Standing Desks, Dressing Tables and similar furniture on legs, shall also be used for additional screw fixing only, into the item top near the leg corners. 8mm dia. proprietary
b)
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Beechwood fluted dowels shall also be glued into the respective legs/rails and dry fixed only to the top. III) Upholstery Seat & Back Webbing Strips a) Pirelli Type Webbing Strips or equal approved shall be used for all Chairs and Sofas seat and backrest support substructure. Plywood shall not be used as the seat substructure for Chairs or Sofas. The Webbing Strips shall be to an approved industry standard of firm type as opposed to soft type, and of nominal 50mm width. The Webbing Strips shall be securely fastened from side rails to side rails, front rail to back rail and top rail to backrest bottom rail, interwoven at 90 crosswise at the correct tension and quantity, with non corrosive coil springs supporting the upholstery fill, to provide a firm seat, to approval of the Engineer.
b)
IV)
Felt Based Glides To Legs Felt Based Glides shall be provided for all Sofas and Chairs for dining, conference, dressing, and desk along with side and centre tables, freestanding desks and dressing tables on legs. The Felt Based Glides shall be of the appropriate diameter to suit item feet size, as per Hafele Cat. Nos. 650.20.720 / 724 / 728. The specified height for furniture includes the felt glides where fitted.
V)
Samples a) When noted in the Control Sheets/Design Drawings, or otherwise instructed, sample/s of Chair and/or Sofa Frames in-the-white and upholstered in white lining cloth (calico) will be required for Client approval/comments. During the manufacturing of the sample/s they shall be stage approved by the Engineer, before inspection by the Client. Production of the finished items shall not proceed until after approval of the samples to ensure all specific dimensions and ergonomics are as per client requirements.
b)
VI)
Specific Dimensional Requirements a) All specified dimensions given on the Furniture Control Sheets/Design Drawings shall be strictly adhered to. This is of particular importance to Chairs and Sofas in regard to Seat Height and Depth. The specified dimensions given on the Control Sheets/Drawings shall take precedence, and override the manufactures standard catalogue dimensions. Should the Manufacturer be in any doubt of the specific instructions, they should submit a Technical Query (T.Q.) or Request For Information (R.F.I.) sheet for clarification, prior to manufacture of the timber frames, as any adjustments necessary to the standard catalogue dimensions shall normally be taken up in the frame.
b)
c)
d)
It is an important Client requirement that Chair and/or Sofa specified Seat Height and where applicable Seat Depth when given on the Furniture Control Sheets/Design Drawings shall be strictly adhered to. Seat Height is measured vertically from Finished Floor Level (AFFL) to Crown of Seat Level (top of finished fabric, at centre of Seat, highest seating point), including Felt Based Glides to the feet. Any necessary adjustment, where Client specified Seat Height varies from the standard model manufacture, shall be taken up in the Beechwood frame legs, and not in the seat upholstery fill/padding. Seat Depth is measured horizontally from furthest projection point at seat front (leading edge of finished fabric) to backrest at seat level. Likewise, any necessary adjustment, where specified Seat Depth varies from the standard model manufacture, must be taken up in the Beechwood seat frame side rails and arms, and not in the backrest upholstery or backrest angle of inclination. This adjustment in the seat frame side rails must also maintain all standard carving details pro rata. When noted on the Furniture Control Sheets/Drawings, under section Specification or Special Requirements, the Manufacturer is to advise standard production dimensions including Seat Height and Depth at time of tender. The following shall apply to client specific requirements for Seat Heights and Depths, dependent on model style: All Dining Chairs for use in H.Ms Areas; shall have 515mm Seat Heights and 500 510mm Seat Depth, the latter depending on model design style. All Desk and Conference Table Chairs shall have 490mm Seat Heights and 510mm Seat Depth, the latter again depending on model design style. Occasional, Dressing and Side Chairs; shall have minimum 470mm Seat Heights and Seat Depth the latter again dependent on the model design style. Generally Framed Sofas shall have 470mm Seat Heights. and 560mm Seat Depth.
e)
f)
g)
VII)
Upholstery Fill & Padding a) All upholstery Fill/Padding must be firm when seat is occupied and must maintain shape as per catalogue illustrations when occupant rises from seat and when unoccupied without puckering. Feather and Down Fill shall not be used
b)
Seat Upholstery Fill shall be 40 Density Foam with Dacron Cover. Backrest Upholstery Fill of 30 Density Foam with Dacron Cover.
VIII) Fabrics and Trimmings a) All Fabrics and Trimmings shall be as specified on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. Where Fabrics and Trimmings are stated on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings as being supplied by Client, the tenderer is required during submission of tender to provide fabric quantity for each item, along with method statement and sketches of fabric pattern lay-up for each item. When Fabrics and Trimmings are to be supplied by the Contractor after award of contract, the following process must be adhered to: Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall arrange to submit fabric and trimming suppliers current ex-stock sample swatches, with Material Approval Submission sheet (M.A.S.) and covering letter, for Client approval prior to ordering. Fabrics and Trimmings are to be reserved by the Contractor immediately after award of contract, pending order confirmation subject to current ex-stock samples approvals. The Contractor should notify the Client immediately if any specified fabric or trimming is unavailable to suit the completion programme of the project. d) When spare fabrics and trimmings are to be allowed for, as stated in the scope of work or in the tender documents but not quantified, the following shall quantities shall be allowed for tender purpose. Minimum allowance of 20% of specified fabric and trimming for any one off (1 No.) only sofa or chair item. For sofa sets of a large quantity with same fabric, for example in a Majlis, allow for fabric and trimming to cover minimum 1 No. of the largest sofa. For a typical sofa lay out of 1 No. 3 Seater and 2 Nos. Single Seater allow for fabric and trimming to cover 1 No. Single Seater Sofa. For chairs to be used for conference or dining table purposes, where the quantity is 10 Nos. or more, allow for fabric and trimming to cover minimum 2 Nos. chairs. However, where the quantity of chairs increases, (by say units of 10), the spare fabric and trimming should also increase pro rata.
b)
c)
e)
The application of fabric to the Beechwood frame shall be with the use of non-corrosive fastenings, refer to Clause 7.0.13. All Trimmings, such as piping, gimp or cord must be securely and continuously fixed to the frame and/or fabric. These trimmings shall be sewn in addition to propriety hot melt glued to the Fabrics. The trimmings on loose cushions and bolsters shall have proprietary fabric lip sewn into the hem/joint of the cushions.
f)
g)
IX
Occasional Tables a) Occasional Tables Tops shall be as specified and shown on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. A sample section shall be supplied for approval by the Client. Table Tops with veneered faces shall be made from Composite Board as detailed Clause 7.0.06 Para VI unless otherwise specified on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. The thickness shall be as indicated on those documents. All Veneers, Marquetry, Inlay Bands for timber Table Tops shall be as detailed in Clause 7.0.07. Occasional Tables shall have Inset Glass tops as standard, unless otherwise specified. Inset Glass Tops shall be of 6mm minimum thickness unless stated/shown on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings, with all edges polished. Also refer to Glass & Mirror Clause 7.02.03. For Beechwood Base Frame Legs the minimum section size shall be 50 x 50mm at the top and for Base Frame Rails shall be a minimum of 55 x 30mm unless otherwise shown or stated on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings.
b)
c)
d)
e)
X)
Frame Finishes of Framed Sofas, Chairs, Occ. Tables & Consoles a) Beechwood Frame Finishes shall be as specified and stipulated on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. The Contractor shall submit a range of Stain Finishes samples for Client Approval. Indicative samples from The Project Joinery Works by others, may be available as a guide for stain colour shading. Where specified on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings Gold Leaf Highlights shall be in 23 carat Real Gold Leaf in Agate polished finish and lacquered over. Where gold leaf highlights are not quantified on the Design Drawings for tender purpose 30% should be allowed.
b)
c)
8.2.2 Glass & Mirror
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST I) General a) All Glass shall be manufactured to the latest revisions of one or more of the following; BS 952 Part 1 & 2, BS 7376, BS 7449, and BS 6206 as and where applicable. All Mirrors shall be to the latest BS, BS EN, ISO or CEN Standard. This shall include the longevity and integrity of silver backing, without deterioration to the Mirror surface, such as telegraphic staining through to the Mirror face.
b)
II)
Inset Plate Glass Tops for Cabinets etc. a) All Glass Tops for cabinetry and loose furniture shall be inset flush with the perimeter timber moulding of the item of furniture, with a nominal perimeter allowance to the glass. The glass top shall rest on a 5mm projecting edge to the solid timber perimeter moulding, which shall provide a 2mm gap between the underside of the glass and the veneer/marquetry surface below. All Glass Tops for Cabinetry and Loose Furniture items shall be of a 6mm minimum thickness or as indicated on the Design Drawings and have all edges polished. Where particularly noted on the Design Drawings the glass shall have an etched and/or sandblasted design feature, etc. The Contractor shall provide a of this work for approval shortly after contract award, during M.A.S. procedure and manufacture.
b)
c)
d)
III)
Cabinetry Mirror and Glass Fronts a) Mirror and Decorative Glass Fronts to Cabinetry shall be to the specified thickness with bevelled and/or polished edges, and other design features such as gold filled etching etc., as indicated on the Design Drawings. The sample procedure detailed in Para II above shall be followed for these items. Mirror Fronts, shall be mounted onto a Birch plywood substrate of minimum 12mm thickness, unless particularly noted otherwise on the Design Drawings. The method of retaining the Decorative Glass or Mirror shall be by face mounted pin fixed mouldings. All Mirrors shall have a minimum 10 Year guarantee against failure of the silvering and backing coats from deterioration, or any consequent failure of the true reflection on the outside surface. This guarantee shall cover visible corrosion through to the mirror face, including decorative design
b)
c) d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST embellishments from the back such as gold or otherwise filled etchings etc. 8.2.3 Fully Upholstered Sofa Seating I) General a) Framework for Fully Upholstered Sofa Seating shall be of either Treated Dark Red Meranti or Beechwood, as indicated on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. Board Material for Fully Upholstered Sofa carcassing shall be Birch Plywood, generally of 18mm minimum thickness, as detailed in Clause7.0.06 Para V.
b)
II)
Timber Corner Blocks & Anglet Blocks a) Hardwood Timber Corner Blocks/Fillets and Anglet Blocks shall be used in the framework and/or carcassing, glued and screwed to both component members for added strength. Birch plywood gussets and carcassing bracers shall be incorporated for added strength, and similarly fixed to the adjacent member by glue and screw method incorporating timber corner blocks as and where necessary. Refer to Clause 7.02.02 Para II)
b) III)
Upholstery Seat & Back Webbing Strips Refer to Clause 7.02.02 Para III)
IV)
Felt Based Glides To Base Frame Refer to Clause 7.02.02 Para IV) Mock-up Samples a) When indicated in the Control Sheets/Design Drawings, Mock-up Samples of fully upholstered sofas will be required, whether they are builtin or free-standing. These mock-ups may be fabricated using softwood and other non-specified materials, for these purposes only however, they shall accurately portray the final item. For upholstery refer to Clause 7.02.02 Para VIII For timetable refer to Clause 7.02.02 Para VIII
V)
b)
c) d) VI)
Specific Dimensional Requirements

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) All dimensions given on the Loose Furniture Control Sheets/Design Drawings shall be strictly adhered to and shall take precedence over standard catalogue dimensions. Refer to Clause 7.02.02 Para VI for general information on dimensions. The Client specific requirements for the height and depths of Fully Upholstered Sofas Seat, depending on style are VII) Seat Height shall be minimum 420mm and max. 460mm. Seat Depth shall be minimum 550mm and maximum 600mm.
b) c)
Upholstery Fill & Padding Refer to Clause 7.02.02 Para VII
VIII) Fabrics and Trimmings Refer to Clause 7.02.02 Para VIII 8.2.4 Soft Furnishings I) General a) All Fabrics and Trimmings for Soft Furnishings such as; curtains, blackout, sheers, bed covers & valances, bed headboards, loose cushions, bolsters etc., shall be as specified in the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. Mock-ups of dressed curtains and/or bedcovers etc. including all specified ancillary components shall be required for approval, either at the Contractors Workshop or on site, prior to production.
b)
II)
Procurement a) When Fabrics and Trimmings are indicated as Supplied by Client on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings, the tenderer is required during tender submission to provide fabric quantity for each item, along with method statement and sketches of fabric pattern lay-up for each item. When Fabrics and Trimmings are to be supplied by the Contractor after award of contract, the procedure shall be as given in Clause 7.02.02 Para VIII.
b)
III)
Application For application refer to 7.0.13
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST IV) Fixing of Trimmings For fixing of trimmings refer to Clause 7.02.02 Para VIII sections f and g. V) Curtains and Dressing All curtains, sheers, blackout etc. shall have the fullness indicated on the Design Drawings/Control Sheets and be properly dressed, together with fabric pelmets, swags, tails, tie-backs etc., at site to the approval of the Client or his representative. 8.2.5 Ironmongery Fitting I) General a) b) Refer to Clause 7.01.06 Para I Additionally refer to Clause 7.03 Ironmongery, for all other particular details on specific items of Ironmongery for Cabinetry & Loose Furniture.
II)
Cut-Outs for Ironmongery Refer to Clause 7.01.06 Para II
III)
Final Fixing of Ironmongery a) Wherever possible all functional Ironmongery, excluding decorative ironmongery furniture etc., should be final fixed to the Cabinetry and Loose Furniture at the Workshop, prior to pre-despatch inspection and then protected as necessary to avoid surface damage in transit or at site. Decorative Ironmongery Furniture such as shutter handles or knobs etc. can be fitted at the Workshop however, to prevent damage during transit or site they may be reverse fixed (facing into the cabinet) until ready for hand over at site for approval by the Engineer.
b)
8.2.6
Specific Parameters for the Requirements of Ironmongery Fitting I) Pivot Sliding Door Fittings a) Pivot Sliding Door Fittings shall be provided to all TV and Hi-Fi Cabinets in VIP areas, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. The Cabinetry Contractor shall ascertain the Audio/Visual equipment physical overall dimensions, prior to submission of the necessary Working Drawings. The Cabinetry Contractor shall advise the Ironmongery Supplier of the actual dimensions of the required Sliding Pivot Turn-Away Fitting.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) The Pivot Sliding Door Fittings shall be from the Hawa X range, or approved equivalent of robust construction with a smooth effortless self retracting operating action. Pivot Sliding Door Fittings shall be housed in a pocket to suit the particular door design and thickness and fitted as the manufacturers instructions enclosed with the Fitting. The Cabinet Doors when in the open retracted position within the pocket must protrude from the front of the cabinet by to ensure the door knob or handle is clear for operating. The protrusion shall not exceed 70mm. The installation of the Hawa Pivot Sliding Door Fittings shall ensure at least partial automatic retraction, by its spring loaded scissor action, when the door is opened to 90 in situ at site. Adjustable Mortice Type Magnetic Cabinet Catches shall be provided to retain the Cabinet Doors in closed position. Refer Para IV) below.
d)
e)
f)
g)
II)
Extending TV Turntable a. Extending Television Turntable shall be provided to all TV Cabinets in all VIP areas, unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings. The Cabinetry Contractor must ascertain the Television overall dimensions and weight during Working Drawings preparation. When an Extending Television Turntable is required it shall be from the Hafele range, model Color E single extension type, load capacity 65kg, or approved equivalent of robust construction with a smooth effortless safe operating action. The Extending Television Turntable base shall be bolt fixed with large size washers through the cabinet TV shelf, and with supplementary screw fixings, in addition to the manufacturers instructions which shall be followed in all other respects. Extending Turntable shall be in Grey-brown finish, as per Hafele catalogue No. 421.98.149 or to approval by the Engineer. All fixing holes in the extending TV Turntable under carriage shall be used for installing using the supplied machine screws, nuts and washers.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
III)
Plasma Flat Screen TV Monitor When a Plasma or other type technology flat screen TV Monitor is specified the Cabinetry Contractor shall ensure he obtains all the relevant information from the supplier regarding the proprietary hanger frame and its necessary fixings, together with other allied information for any peripheral equipment as necessary, for inclusion in the Working Drawings.
IV)
Cabinet Catches a) Adjustable Mortice Type Magnetic Catches as per Hafele catalogue No. 246.02.211 or equal shall be used throughout. Ball catches or surface mounted plastic body catches may only be used, when shown in the Design Drawings or listed in the client supplied schedule. Other type catches may be considered, where specified by the client to suit the design detailing. The Catches, shall be the 14mm diameter hole size and shall be fixed into the solid timber doorstop, or to the solid front edge of the shelf when of suitable thickness. They shall be adjacent to the cabinet shutter/s meeting stile/s closed position. The 3mm thick counter-piece/strike plate will be screw fixed to the shutter/s inside face next to the leading edge and may be slightly recessed into the shutter by up to 2mm maximum.
b)
c)
d)
V)
Shelf Supports a) Metal shelf supports shall be used, to suit the designed cabinetry with the correct insertion depth into the cabinet carcase gables. Plastic type shelf supports shall not be used. The shelf support systems must be capable of carrying a load in excess of anticipated end use of the shelves. Adjustable shelves shall be provided with 5mm dia. Pin Type with wedged ribs into the cabinet carcase, and with shelf fixing lug/pin into the shelf to prevent movement. All as per Hafele catalogue No. 282.24.320. Swedish (Magic Wire) concealed type Shelf Support shall be used on all TV/Hi-Fi Cabinets removable inner gables for the pivot sliding door fitting, and also at the carcase back panel. As per Hafele catalogue No. 282.72.719. When adjustable shelves from 16 to 22mm thickness are horizontally accessible directly from the front of the cabinet carcase and have a maximum load capacity of less than 80kg the Ex-Cellent H 3 Pin Type Shelf Support may be used. As per Hafele catalogue No. 282.23.725. For Glass Adjustable Shelves, from 6 to 10mm thickness which are directly accessible horizontally from the front of the cabinet the Ex-Cellent G 3 Pin Type Glass Shelf Support shall be used. As per Hafele catalogue No. 282.23.814. Pin Type Shelf Supports with wedged ribs shall be inserted into 5mm dia. x 9mm deep pre-drilled holes in the carcase gables, at centres shown in the design drawings. The shelf shall be accurately drilled on the underside to a depth of 7mm x 5mm dia. to accept the fixing lug/pin of the Shelf
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Support. Unless otherwise indicated on the design drawings, each adjustable shelf shall be provided with three rows of holes in the carcase gables. g) Swedish (Magic Wire) concealed type Shelf Support shall be inserted into pre-drilled holes 4mm dia. x 12mm deep in the top and bottom fixed shelves of the TV or Hi-Fi compartment to locate the removable inner gables. The inner gables shall have a 4mm wide groove along their centre line to a depth of 12mm maximum to accommodate the Magic Wire. The carcase back panel and the rear edge of the removable inner gables shall be secured in a similar manner. The Ex-Cellent H and G 3 Pin Type Shelf Supports shall only be used when horizontal access, from the front of the cabinet is available within the design, for installing and removal of the shelf. The Ex-Cellent Shelf Support shall be inserted into 5mm dia. x 9mm maximum deep pre-drilled holes in the carcase gables, at centres shown in the design drawings, with at least three rows per shelf. The finish shall be as the catalogue ref./code number for the item.
h)
i) VI)
Drawer Runners a) Metal Drawer Runners shall be used, with length equal to the drawer box depth, to match the cabinetry design. All Cabinetry Drawer Runners must be of suitable for a load bearing capacity in excess of anticipated end use of the drawers. All Drawer Runners shall be of the full extension type with roller guides, or telescopic type with ball guides, to allow the drawer box to be fully opened clear of the cabinet carcase or upper drawer front. Full Extension Base Mounted Type Runners with a minimum load capacity of 30 kg/pair shall be used for standard drawers. Where drawers contain special or heavy equipment, Telescopic Side or Base Mounted Type Runners with a minimum load capacity of 50 kg/pair shall be used. Where required other drawer runner types; such as Differential or Roller Bearing Types may be specified. For Lay-On Drawer Fronts the cabinet carcase components of the Drawer Runners shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturers details from the front edge of the cabinet carcase gables. Where Inset Drawer Fronts are required the distance from the front edge of the cabinet carcase shall include the drawer front thickness, plus the inserted drawer/door buffer pad thickness.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST g) The drawer box side components of the Drawer Runner shall be fixed as the manufacturers details indicate. The method of fixing into the cabinet carcase gables and into the drawer box shall be by screws of the appropriate gauge, length and quantity as indicated by the manufacturer. all pre-drilled holes in the metal drawer runner shall be used for secure fixing and ease of drawer operation. For all types of Drawer Runner the drawer box side to cabinet carcase clearance dimension, given in the runner manufacturers instructions, shall be strictly followed to ensure smooth operation without excess play. The finish shall be as given in the catalogue ref./code number for the item. Where the manufacturers standard finish to a RAL cream or white finish does not co-ordinate with the cabinetry approved stain colour finish, the Drawer Runners shall be refinished locally by the Cabinetry Contractor to match the approved timber stain colour. In the case of telescopic drawer runners, they shall be chrome plated finish.
h)
i)
j)
k)
VII)
Cabinet Door Hinges a) All Cabinet Door Hinges shall be from metal and be of suitable design capacity to carry the door weight and size. Cabinet Door Hinges shall be one of the following types to suit the required cabinetry design detail, or as client specified: Concealed Self-Closing Boss Type with Screw-On Cross Mounting Plates and Cranking to suit either Lay-On or Inset Door function as indicated in the design drawings. Concealed Self-Closing Boss Type Hinges shall be from Hettich Intermat range, or equal approved. Soss Invisible Hinges of size to suit cabinet door thickness and carcase gable thickness, but not exceeding 95 x 19 x 26.5mm deep unless particularly required for an extra large and thick cabinet door. Other types of hinges, such as brass butts or lift-off with decorative finials of appropriate size to suit the cabinetry, may also be considered or client specified to suit the design detailing.
b)
c)
All hinge types shall be installed to the manufacturers instructions, in sufficient quantity to suit the door height and weight.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) For Butt and Lift-Off hinge types both leaves of the hinge shall be equally recessed into the door and cabinet carcase, to locate the hinge and support the door. All hinge types shall be secured using all the available hinge screw holes. Lead/pilot holes shall be bored as necessary to accept the fixing screws. The finish shall be as the catalogue ref./code number for the item Concealed Self-Closing Boss Type Hinges shall be nickel plated steel. Soss Invisible Hinges shall be in standard dull brass. Butt and Lift-Off Hinge shall generally be in polished brass, or as client specified.
e)
f)
VIII) Cabinet Knobs & Handles a) Cabinetry Knobs or Handles shall be of solid brass unless otherwise indicated in the Design Drawings or specified by the client. Knobs, Handles or Flush Pulls may be required to be in Timber of the same or similar wood species as the cabinet doors and/or drawer fronts. In such instances these proprietary Flush Pulls, Knobs or Handles may form part of the Ironmongery supply Scope of Work, or may be custom made by the Cabinetry Contractor as per design drawings. Knobs or Handles for Cabinetry shall be of the same Suite, (matching design), as the Architectural Door Furniture in the room, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. Knobs for Cabinetry shall be either round or oval shape as indicated on the design drawings and of the size shown. The maximum Knob diameter for Cabinetry shall be 38mm whilst the minimum shall be 22mm to suit the application, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. Knobs or Handles shall be with or without back rose/plate, of appropriate size/diameter as indicated on the Design Drawings. Cabinetry Knobs or Handles shall be dead-fixed, by means of needle point pin to outside of door/drawer front, and secured by machine screw of sufficient length from inside. Flush Pull Type Handles, to be of suitable depth to be recessed into the door/drawer front of the cabinetry.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST i) The finish of Knobs or Handles shall match the Architectural Door Furniture in the room, unless otherwise indicated on the design drawings. Wood Knobs or Flush Wood Handles, shall be supplied natural in-thewhite i.e. unfinished, to be finished by the cabinetry contractor to match the approved stain finish of the furniture.
j)
IX)
Wardrobe Hanging Rails a) Plastic coated or chrome plated steel tube shall only be used where specified for back-of-house or service areas. Wardrobe Rails, and their required ancillary fittings, for V.I.P. Areas shall be manufactured from Solid Drawn Polished Brass Tube of 31.8mm diameter. Wardrobe Rails for secondary areas, such as entourage accommodation, shall be manufactured from 25mm dia. seamless brass coated steel tube. Rod End Sockets for securing the rod to the carcase gables shall be of heavy duty type with two or three fixing points each. When the hanging rail span exceeds 900mm Centre Support Brackets shall be provided. The hanging rail shall be positioned in the centre of the wardrobe inside depth at the height shown on the design drawings, and securely fixed in position by screws of the correct length and gauge to all fixing points. The finish of the hanging rail and ancillary fittings shall be polished brass finish.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
X)
Cabinet Door/Drawer Buffer Pads a) Buffer Pads shall be used on Cabinetry Doors and Drawers in VIP and other main building areas. These shall be of 6mm diameter, Press-Fit Transparent Type, as the Door Stop from Hafele range Cat. No. 356.20.421 or approved equivalent. Door Stop/Buffer Pads shall be fitted to the cabinet carcase close to the top and bottom of the door, for all doors with self-closing type concealed hinges. For tall doors intermediate Buffer Pad/Door Stops shall also be applied. When non self-closing hinges are to be used then adjustable magnetic catches will be used in place of buffer pads.
b) c)
d)
XI)
Cabinet Access Panel Fittings
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Where access is required through a panelled desk to phone and electric sockets housed in a floor box, the Insert Bolt Locks (Giro Bolt) from the Hafele range Cat. No. 261.05.902 or equal approved shall be used. The Insert Bolt Lock shall be supplied with striking plate, brass rose and hexagon key. The Insert Bolt Locks and striking plates shall be morticed flush into the respective cabinetry components and the outer face of the panel bored to accept the brass roses. Where the moulding profile of the panel will not aesthetically accept the brass roses they shall not be fitted, and a suitable diameter hole shall be provided in the solid timber moulding The Insert Bolt Lock and striking plate shall be secured in position with correct length and gauge wood screws.
b)
c)
XII)
Cabinet Flush Bolts a) Furniture Straight Flush Bolts when required shall be in brass finish of suitable length as per Hafele range Cat. No. 253.00.314/332 or equal approved. When required for desk double height drawer for paper shredder the Furniture Straight Flush Bolts shall be fitted to the drawer box sides, 2 Nos. close to the front of the box and 2 Nos. close to the rear of the box. The Furniture Flush Bolts shall be recessed flush with the timber component face and secured in place with matching brass screws of appropriate length and gauge.
b)
c)
XIII) Sliding Door Gear a) Sliding Door Gear shall be from Hawa AG, Switzerland using the appropriate model for the purpose as indicated on the Design Drawings. The Sliding Door Gear shall be supplied with all necessary track, accessories and fittings and have a capacity in excess of anticipated load. All the supplied components and accessories shall be used and be properly and securely fixed in the installation, all as the manufacturers instructions.
b)
c)
8.2.7
Beds and Headboards I) General a) All custom or standard grades of Divan Beds shall be from the Raha Orthopedic range by Poly Products L.L.C., Oman or equal approved.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Headboards for high grade Beds shall be custom made by the Furniture Contractor as specified on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. Lower grade Beds shall have Headboard from the Bed Manufacturers range, as specified on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings and/or noted in the particular Scope of Work. The Headboards supplied as standard by the Bed Manufacturer shall have the vertical members for connecting the headboard to the bed base made from solid Beechwood suitably finished with sealer, approved stain colour and top coats. Metal beds for Guards Barracks etc. shall be from Al Khoud / Metafurn Co., Oman or equal approved.
c)
d)
e)
II)
His Majestys Bed Specification MODEL: Raha Majestic Super - Orthopedic Firm Fine, deep tufted, with 7 Year Warranty. W. 2200 x L. 2200 x H. 600mm (at mattress top AFFL). The size may differ from the above dependent on project requirements, refer to specific project Control Sheets/Drawings. However the overall height shall not change.
O/A. SIZE: Note;
MATTRESS: Orthopedic Majestic Super Spring Mattress, 300mm Deep. BED BASE: Deep Hard Top One Piece Firm Edge 300mm Deep with 12 legs. TICKING: Belgian Damask Premium quality, pattern and colour to approval from Raha range.
This specification shall be quoted in full when an order is placed, and Poly Products shall be made aware that this bed is for His Majesty, to ensure correct custom specification is adhered to. III) Head Of State Bed Specification MODEL: Raha Sublime - Orthopedic Firm Plush, hand tufted, with 15 Year Warranty. W. 2200 x L. 2200 x H. 600mm (at mattress top AFFL).
O/A. SIZE:
Note; The size may differ from above dependent on project requirements, refer to specific project Control Sheets/Drawings. However the overall height will remain unchanged. MATTRESS: EncloSpring 7 Star Orthopedic, flanged construction, 300mm Deep.
BED BASE: One Piece Firm Edge 300mm Deep with 12 legs. TICKING: Belgian Damask Premium quality, pattern and colour to approval from Raha range.
IV)
Minister & Other VIP Bed Specification MODEL: Raha Serenade - Orthopedic Firm Plush, deep tack-n-jump, with 10 Year Warranty. W. 2000 x L. 2100 x Standard Height.
O/A. SIZE: Note;
The size may differ from above dependent on project requirements, refer to specific project Control Sheets/Drawings. MATTRESS: BounceBack 6 Star Orthopedic, box construction, 270mm Deep.
BED BASE: One Piece Firm Edge, Serenade standard, with number of legs to suit size. TICKING: Belgian Damask Premium quality, pattern and colour to approval from Raha range.
V)
Entourage and ADC Bed Specification MODEL: Raha Majestic Standard - Orthopedic Firm Fine, deep quilted, with 7 Year Warranty. Generally this grade of Bed shall be twin or queen size to standard Raha optional dimensions, or as shown on Control Sheets/Design Drawings with standard height.
O/A. SIZE:
MATTRESS: BounceBack 5 Star Orthopedic, box construction, 300mm Deep. BED BASE: Majestic Standard One Piece Firm Edge. TICKING: VI) Belgian Damask Superior, pattern and colour to approval.
Custom Made Headboards a) Headboards for the above grades of bed shall be Custom Made by the Furniture Contractor as shown on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings. Where Bed Headboards are to be positioned on a wall between fibrous plaster wall moulding panels, niches, columns or pilasters etc. the Headboard shall be accurately centred in position between these wall projections and secured to the wall by secret fixing. The wall fixed member of the secret fixing shall be securely plugged and screwed into the structural wall.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) Where there is no fibrous plaster wall moulding panels etc., the Headboard shall be secured to the bed base, to approval of the Engineer. Procurement and application of fabrics and trimmings shall be as defined in Clause 7.02.02 Para VIII
d)
VII)
Catering & Household Staff Bed Specification MODEL: This grade of Bed shall be from standard Raha Model either; Regular, Celeste or Supreme - Orthopedic Range; with Firm or Extra Firm, deep or multi quilted class, with 3 or 5 Year Warranty. Generally as noted on the Control Sheets/Design Drawings/Scope of Work for the particular project. Widths and Length shall be to standard options of Raha dimensions, suitable for the room furniture layout. All as shown on Control Sheets/Design Drawings, generally this grade of Bed shall be single or twin size.
O/A. SIZE:
MATTRESS: BounceBack 3 or 5 Star Orthopedic; 220mm, 210mm or 240mm Deep dependent on model. BED BASE: Standard One Piece Firm Edge, with minimum 6 legs for single width bed size. TICKING: Knit-USA or Belgian Damask dependent on model.
Generally these latter grades of beds will be supplied with the Bed Headboard from the Bed Manufacturer. However the Note at item I above must be observed, regarding vertical connecting members to the bed base. 8.2.8 Cane Furniture I) General a) All Bamboo used in the manufacture of Cane Furniture shall be of best quality and free from insect attack, torch and bending marks.
II)
Construction & Bamboo Sizes a) The main framework of chairs and tables shall be from 3032mm diameter. Bracing and support members shall be from 22-25mm diameter. Joints shall be bound with leather binding suitable fixed at the ends. Latticework shall be from 6mm diameter with same diameter retention beads. All pin fixings, where necessary shall be from stainless steel and sunk slightly below the surface. The indent shall then be filled. The feet of all tables and chairs shall have glides fitted to the bottom.
b)
c)
III)
Tinted Glass Tops a) Glass tops to low occasional tables shall be minimum 8mm thick with polished edges and tinted. The glass shall be inset within the tabletop peripheral bamboo and must be flush with same, while evenly resting on the sub-frame bamboo without rocking or flexing. For large tables at dining height the tinted glass should be thicker and shall also be supported by sub-frame cross members of 3032mm diameter.
b)
IV)
Cane Chair Upholstery Work a) The seat and back cushions shall be upholstered in the specified fabric shown on the drawing/s and/or control sheets. A sample of the fabric/s must be submitted with M.A.S. for approval immediately after award. Generally dust covers to the shape of the item of furniture are required, whether or not shown or stated in drawing/s and/or control sheets. These shall be made from colour fast exterior grade canvas with piping. A sample submission is required for approval at the earliest. Cushion fill shall be from 40 density foam for seat and 30 density for back with Dacron to approval.
b)
c)
V)
Frame Finishing a) Prior to any finishing medium being applied all bamboo frames shall first be treated with a liberal coat of preservative against termite and decay. Refer to Clause 7.0.01 Para V. Stain and topcoats finish shall be to sample submission and MAS approval. The topcoats finish must be of exterior grade.
b)
VI)
Samples a) During the initial manufacture a sample raw frame of each item shall be provided for inspection and approval by the Engineer at the workshop. This initial sample raw frame inspection shall be approved by M.A.S. before manufacture of full quantities. These samples shall indicate actual production methods and shall be presented with cushions covered with lining cloth in the case of chairs, and with actual glass inset top in the case of tables. Finished frame samples with specified fabrics for each item shall also be required for inspection and approval, prior to finishing of full quantities. Final pre-despatch inspection of all will be carried out as detailed in Clause 7.0.21.
b)
c)
8. 3. 8.3.1
IRONMONGERY Standards a) The Ironmongery Specification, Performance, Quality and Finishes shall be in accordance with the following Standards as indicated on the Design Drawings or in the particular Specification b) British (BS) Standards BS EN Standards German (DIN) Standards European (CEN) Standards ISO Standards
Ironmongery supplied shall be manufactured in factories accredited with BS EN ISO 9000 to ensure quality control. All Ironmongery Manufacturers and principal source suppliers shall be affiliated to and comply with the requirements of the Guild of Architectural Ironmongers in London, U.K. and/or their respective European counterpart bodies. Ironmongery of a specialised nature not covered by any of the above Standards shall, as far as possible, be constructed from components manufactured to these standards, in terms of performance, quality and finish.
c)
c)
8.3.2 Materials I) General a) Ironmongery shall be supplied with all necessary components and ancillary fittings and including all matching fixing screws, bolts, of correct size and capacity to suit the particular installation function and loading. Noncorrosive materials shall be utilized throughout. All Ironmongery shall be supplied with the Manufacturers Fitting Instructions, which must be strictly adhered to in all cases. The Woodwork Contractor, in liaison with the Ironmongery Supplier, is responsible for ensuring the correct operation of the ironmongery after installation.
b)
c)
II)
Function
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST All items of Ironmongery shall be suitable for the purpose shown on the Design Drawings and detailed in the Particular Specification and shall comply with BS 476 and BS 5588. III) Finish a) All Materials used in the components of an item of Ironmongery shall be of best quality material and shall be resistant to corrosion, in accordance with BS EN 1670. Lacquer coating to polished brass finish etc. is not required. When PVD (Diamond/Ultra) Finish is specified the PVD process shall be carried out to all items specified by a single source, to maintain consistent colour throughout for the particular project. PVD finish shall be guaranteed for a minimum of 15 years against corrosion and tarnishing. All Stainless Steel Ironmongery products shall be manufactured from 304 Grade Satin Stainless Steel to BS EN Standard except where detailed in the following paragraph. Internal Ironmongery for Kitchens, Pantries and Serveries shall be manufactured from 316 Grade Satin Stainless Steel to BS EN Standard. This shall also include adjacent Washrooms/Toilets for use by Kitchen/Catering Staff, whilst at work. All Aluminium Ironmongery shall conform to BS EN 12373 latest revisions. The Ironmongery Manufacturer/Supplier shall comply with the requirements of this Specification in respect of Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
b) c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
IV)
Gold Plating a) When Ironmongery is required to be in Gold Plated Finish, it will be to exposed Ironmongery parts only, and shall be of 22.5 Carat Gold on 30 micron nickel base: 1. All External Furniture Only: 2. Other External exposed items: 3. All Internal Furniture Only: i.Other Internal exposed items: b) 7 micron. 5 micron. 5 micron. 3 micron.
Gold Plating is not required for the following items: Hinges Lock Case Forends or Strike Plates Cylinder Locks
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST V) Flush Bolts Floor Sockets Roller Catches Wardrobe Hanger Rails Shelf Supports Keep Plates, and the like.
Samples of All Ironmongery a) After award of the Ironmongery Contract a sample of each item of Ironmongery with all its accessories shall be provided to the Woodwork Contractors to evaluate its fixing. These samples inclusive of all accessories etc. need not be of the specified finish, but shall be typical in all other respects to the specified item to be used in The Works.
b)
8.3.3 Door and Window/Screen Ironmongery I) Joinery Ironmongery Fitting General Joinery Contractors shall also refer to Clause 7.01.06. 8.3.4 Hinges I) General i) ii) Hinges shall comply with BS EN 1935. Hinges and their screws shall be suitable for the application and shall be of similar material and finish. PVD Finish can be proposed in lieu of Polished Brass Finish. Doors fitted with Overhead Closers, shall be fitted with Hinges manufactured in Satin Stainless Steel or Polished Brass/PVD Finish with Double Ball Bearings , or Hinges manufactured in Brass/PVD Finish with Double Phosphor Bronze Washers.
nim
iii) iv)
II)
Door Hinges a) For VIP area hinges shall be one of the following types as indicated on the Design Drawings Solid Drawn Polished Brass Finial Butt with Double Phosphor Bronze Washers. Solid Drawn Polished Brass Finial Butt with Double Ball Bearings.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) For Service and Back-of-House areas hinges shall be one of the following types, as indicated on the Design Drawings o o o 304 Grade Satin Stainless Steel with Double Ball Bearings. Solid Drawn Polished Brass Butt with Double Ball Bearings. Solid Drawn Polished Brass with Double Phosphor Bronze Washers. Satin Anodised Aluminium to BS EN 12373 with Double Washers. Pairs of Rising Butt Hinges shall be used for Toilet Cubicles.
o o III)
External Window and Internal Screen Hinges a) For VIP areas hinges shall be one of the following types as indicated on the Design Drawings Solid Drawn Polished Brass Finial Butt with Double Phosphor Bronze Washers for external windows. Solid Drawn Polished Brass Finial Butt with Double Ball Bearings for external windows. For internal window screens, either of the above or, Dull Brass Invisible Soss Hinges to suit leaf stile width and rebated frame thickness. The largest size required will be 95 x 19 x 26mm deep, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
For Service and Back-of-House areas Hinges shall be one of the following as indicated on the Design Drawings 304 Grade Satin Stainless Steel with Double Ball Bearings. Solid Drawn Polished Brass Butt with Double Ball Bearings. Solid Drawn Polished Brass with Double Phosphor Bronze Washers. Satin Anodised Aluminium to BS EN 12373 with Double Washers, where appropriate for the location of the external window. Dull Brass Invisible Soss Hinges, as per item a3 above.
8.3.5 Floor Springs I) General
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) All External Main Entrance Doors and all Internal VIP Main Thoroughfare Doors shall have Floor Springs with hold open, adjustable closing speed, backcheck, delayed action and latch action facilities, unless otherwise indicated on the design drawings. The Floor Spring and all its components, shall be manufactured to BS EN 1154, BS 6459 and BS 5750 and be of suitable capacity for its intended purpose, and shall function without undue opening effort. Floor Springs shall not be used on Bathroom or Toilet Doors unless indicated on the Design Drawings. Where required the spring strength shall be weak and the hold open facility deactivated or removed.
b)
c)
II)
Application a) Centre Pivoted Floor Springs shall not be used for External Door application, unless detailed on the design drawings. External Doors shall be set in a traditional 90 rebated frame, with minimum 20mm rebate depth, using 5mm offset components, unless otherwise indicated on the design drawings. All other Internal Main Thoroughfare and Main Rooms Entrance Doors within VIP Areas shall be provided with 5mm offset components, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Internal Kitchen, Pantry and Servery Doors, which have Floor Springs shall be supplied with weak spring strength, for ease of function and access whether of single or double action as required.
b)
c)
d)
III)
Function a) All Floor Springs shall be supplied with variable closing speed, backcheck, hold open, delayed action and latch action facilities unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings or client schedule. The floor box cover plate shall be without raised bevelled edges. Door Stops shall always be use in conjunction with floor springs.
b) c)
IV)
Finish a) For VIP Areas only the exposed components of the Floor Spring shall be gold plated finish, refer to Clause 7.03.02 Para IV When PVD Brass Finish Furniture is specified the gold plating colour shall match that of the PVD Finish Brass colour. PVD Finish shall be used for the Brass Cover Plate for the floor box.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) When door furniture is in Satin Stainless Steel Finish the exposed components of the floor spring shall be manufactured in 304/316 grade as appropriate.
8.3.6
Overhead Door Closers I) General a) Overhead Door Closers and all of their components shall be to BS EN 1154, BS 6459 & BS 5750 and be suitable for their intended purpose, and shall function without undue effort in use. Overhead Door Closers shall only be used on External Doors if they are specifically designed and manufactured for the purpose.
b)
II)
Application a) The minimum required thickness of door leaf when using a Concealed Overhead Door Closer is 55mm. Surface Mounted Door Closers shall only be used in Back of House and Service Areas.
b)
III)
Function a) Overhead Door Closers shall be supplied with adjustable closing force, adjustable backcheck, latch action, limit function and hold open facilities, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. Door Closers shall be used in conjunction with Door Stops.
b) IV) Finish
When door furniture is in Satin Stainless Steel Finish the exposed components of the closer shall be manufactured in 304/316 grade as appropriate. 8.3.7 Door Stops I) General Door Stops are required for all doors, regardless of method of door hanging, pivoting or closer method. II) Type a) The Floor Door Stop shall include both floor pin and screw fitting to the floor.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Door Stops shall be floor mounted of semi-dome type with shielded base of 50 x 45mm and projection of 25mm to the rubber door buffer insert, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. Where Floor Door Stops are not practical wall mounted Door Stops, having a suitable projection from the wall, shall be provided.
c)
III)
Application a) Fixing to the floor or wall shall allow the maximum opening angle of the door leaf without making contact with any wall finish. The door stop rubber buffer insert shall be aligned to make full face contact with the door leaf bottom rail in the case of floor mounted door stops. Floor Door Stops must be positioned on the finished floor to avoid any possible encroachment of thoroughfare access, to the door opening when in the open position or within the room when door leaf is in closed position.
b)
IV)
Finish The Door Stop finish shall match the Door Furniture and/or other ironmongery finishes previously described.
8.3.8
Lever Action Flush Bolts I) General a) Lever Action Flush Bolts to BS EN 12051 shall be used on the Dead Leaf, at top and bottom of the inside rebated edge, on all Double Leaf Doors and Windows. The bolt shall have a minimum 15mm throw to provide sufficient penetration and security into the frame head keep plate and floor socket. Lever Action Flush Bolts width size shall be 19mm except for thick door or gate leaves where larger width shall be used as indicated on the Design Drawings. For Window/Screens with small section timber stiles, narrower lever action bolt widths or sunken slide bolts shall be used as indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
c)
d)
II)
Function The criteria for Lever Action Flush Bolts Size; for Double Leaf Doors or Windows shall be as follows
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Bottom Bolt Size: 152 x 19mm shall be fitted in the internal side of the meeting stile rebate check of the dead leaf. Top Bolt Size: width equal to bottom bolt, length to suit leaf height and accessibility. The length of top bolt shall normally be pre-determined by the lever action being accessible within the range of 1800mm to 1950mm above finished floor level. For Double Leaf Windows that are not accessible from finished floor level the top bolts shall be of the same minimum length as bottom bolts.
III)
Finish The Bolt finish shall match the Door Furniture and/or other ironmongery finishes previously described
8.3.9
Floor Bolt Sockets I) General a) Easy-Clean Bolt Sockets shall be provided for bottom bolts of Double Leaf Doors, and/or Double Leaf Windows/Screens with non-Timber cill. The Bolt Socket shall be to the corresponding size of the lever action bottom shoot bolt diameter.
b)
II)
Type Floor Bolt Sockets shall be suitable for setting into the marble floor finish alternatively for timber floor finishes Floor Bolt Sockets shall be suitable for screw fixing.
III)
Function Windows and Doors with timber cill do not require a floor socket; the keep plate supplied with the lever action flush bolt shall be used.
IV)
Finish Floor Bolt Sockets finish shall be match the other ironmongery and/or furniture on the door, except for gold plating, which shall only be carried out if instructed.
8.3.10 Lock Cases I) General a) All Lock Cases shall comply with BS 5872 and/or DIN 18251.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Mortise Lock Cases shall be centralised in the leaf thickness, unless shown otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
II)
Type a) All Lock Cases that are key operated shall be of Euro-Profile (PZ) type to suit cylinder locks, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, Scope of Work or clients schedule. Key operated Mortise Cylinder Lock Cases for use with lever handle or knob furniture when particularly specified, shall be at 72mm centres and suitably sprung for lever handle/knob return action. External Main Entrance Double Leaf Doors and Internal Main Thoroughfare Corridor Double Leaf Doors that are on Floor Springs together with Internal Double Swing Action Doors on Centre Pivot shall be provided with a Euro-Profile Mortise Deadlock Case. Internal Doors to Private Suites or Rooms, which are specified with floor spring, shall have Mortise Cylinder Lock Case with latch action, and include Euro-Profile cylinder lock, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings or client schedule. All Hinged Doors without closer mechanism shall have Mortise Cylinder Lock Case with latch action, with the exception being VIP toilet and bathroom doors, which shall be provided with Latch Only Lock Case and Croft Door Bolt.
b)
c)
d)
e)
III)
Forends and Strike Plates a) The Latch Action Protection area of all Strike Plates used with Latch Action lock cases shall project beyond the jamb no more than 2mm. This shall also apply to Mortice Latch Only Lock Cases.
b) IV)
Rebate Sets a) Lock Cases for Double Leaf Doors or Windows shall be supplied with a proprietary Rebate Set of either 15mm or 20mm or 25mm. The Rebate Set shall be supplied by the Lock Case Manufacturer to ensure matching material and finish. For centre pivoted Internal Double Swing Action Double Leaf Doors with curved meeting edges a deadlock case shall be used. For extra large External Doors the Lock Case manufacturer shall supply a larger Rebate Set.
b)
c)
V)
Backsets a) Lock Cases shall have Backsets available in 5mm increments.

b)
The Backset of the Lock Case shall be fitted to ensure the door furniture is centred on both faces of the door leaf lock-stile flat face when the door is in the closed position. Double Leaf Doors Backset shall be measured as half the flat face on the rebated side of the lock stile, (outside the room being entered), plus the full rebate depth of the lock stile, i.e. 15, 20 or 25mm. Main Entrance Double Leaf Doors with plant-on door stop mullions to the meeting stiles shall be measured at half the flat face on the rebated side of the lock stile, (outside the room being entered), plus the full rebate depth of the lock stile as stated above, but including the necessary lock stile overlay of the plant-on doorstop mullion as shown on the Design Drawings. For Doors with Carved Stiles, the carving module or pattern shall determine the backset, with similar allowance for double leaf doors as described above.
c)
d)
e)
VI)
Finish Exposed components of Lock Cases, (i.e. forends, strike plates and rebate sets) shall be finished to match other ironmongery and/or furniture on the door. Gold plating will not be required.
8.3.11 Cylinder Locks I) General a) b) c) All Cylinder Locks shall be of Euro-Profile (PZ) type unless otherwise indicated on the design drawings or client schedule. Cylinder Locks shall comply with BS EN 1303 and/or DIN 18254. The Cylinder Lock specification shall include the following features 1. 2. 3. 4. d) 6 pin Tumblers. Anti-Picking Devices. Hardened Anti-Drilling Devices. Master-Keyed and Sub-Mastered applicable to the project.
The above part of the specification applies to Back of House and Annexe Buildings together with, certain General and Service Areas within Main VIP Buildings, which are not for VIP use. All Cylinder Locks shall be supplied with a lifetime guarantee.
e) II)
VIP Areas MCS Cylinder Locks

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Cylinder Locks for VIP Areas shall be of Magnetic Security Code System Euro-Profile (PZ) type, and under a Grand Master-Key System. This will apply whether the Cylinder Locks are for a new project, or to comply with an existing area GMK System to be extended. GMK Systems under Magnetic Security Code System shall be devised to include up to maximum 50 Sub-Master Keys only, unless otherwise specified. A Magnetic Security Code System Certificate, along with Client/Owner Only Security Access to the System for additional cylinders and/or keys, is required from the Manufacturer. This MCS Certificate and Access Security shall be issued by the supplier only to His Excellency, The Head of Projects and Maintenance Affairs, Royal Court Affairs, Muscat and to no other person or department. Under no circumstances shall photocopies of such certification be permitted. Magnetic Security Code System Cylinders and Keys shall be failsafe in service.
b)
c)
d)
III)
. Individual Cylinder Differ Keys and GMK / SMK System Keys a) Cylinder Locks shall be supplied with three (3 No.) differ keys per cylinder lock. All cylinder key systems shall be of a manufacturer/type so that the keys cannot be duplicated locally. GMK and SMK key quantity shall also be three (3 No.) unless otherwise stated in the client schedule or scope of work. A GMK, and as necessary SMK, System Key Schedule of key accessibility to individual differs/doors shall be provided by the Engineer for all cylinder lock systems. Immediately upon completion of the project contract a final As Built System Key Schedule shall be provided to the relevant P and M Area Office. This final Key Schedule shall be issued before actual project handover to the Client by the Joinery or Main Contractor.
b)
c)
d)
IV)
Cylinder Lock Length a) All Double Cylinder Locks shall be of equal length on both sides of centre point; that is of equal incremental extension. Single Cylinder Locks shall be centred on the leaf thickness. The Cylinder Lock projection beyond the face of the Door Furniture shall be not more than 3mm maximum for security reasons along with practical aesthetics. They shall not be underflush.
b)
V)
Finish
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) The finish shall match that of the adjacent furniture. However due to constraints in manufacturing materials, certain finishes shall be subject to submission for approval by the Engineer. Where door furniture is finished in gold plating, cylinder lock plate shall be polished brass.
b)
VI)
Cylinder Knobs and Privacy Cylinders Where keyless knobs are required, these shall be of figure of eight (8) pattern as per EVVA-Werk system, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
8.3.12 Croft Door Bolt I) General Croft Door Bolts shall be used on all VIP Toilets and Bathrooms Doors. Where indicated on the Design Drawings it shall also be required on Dressing Room Doors. The bolt shall be gold plated finish on solid brass with beaded edge design feature. II) Type and Application a) The barrel length shall be 95mm long x 25mm wide, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings or in the Particular Specification. The bolt shall be of the straight shoot type, unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings. The keep plate shall be of solid brass surface mounted enclosed type with a matching beaded edge detail as the barrel. Edge mounted keep/strike plate shall not be used unless incorporated on the original Design Drawings or in the Particular Specification.
b)
c)
III)
Finish The Croft Door Bolt shall be manufactured from solid brass and shall be gold plated as described in Clause 7.03.02 Para IV.
8.3.13 Lever Action Door Furniture I) General a) Unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings, Internal Doors shall be provided with Lever Action Furniture. Door Furniture shall comply with BS EN 1906. Dead Leaves of Internal Double Leaf Doors shall have Dead-Fixed Latch Only Lever Furniture without key-hole as indicated on the drawings.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) Double Leaf Doors in Back of House and Service Areas shall only have Furniture to the Dead Leaf when indicated on the drawings. All internal doors Lever Furniture shall be on back-plate, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings or in the Particular Specification. All lever handle furniture, shall be with pivot centre point at 970mm AFFL on the lock stile/s, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
d)
e)
II)
Back-Plates on 72mm Centres for Cylinder Lock Unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings, all Back-Plates for lockable door furniture shall be on the European Standard of 72mm Centres for Mortice Euro-Profile (PZ) Cylinder Lock Cases.
III)
Follower Spindles a) All proprietary Follower Spindles, for lock cases with latch action, shall be supplied to suit the door leaf thickness, and be fully inserted within the lever handle/s. Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings all Follower Spindles shall be of the standard 8mm square. The Follower Spindles shall be supplied by the Door Furniture Manufacturer and will be of a non-corrosive metal.
b)
c)
IV)
Securing Lever Latch Action Handle to Back-Plate The method of securing lever latch action handle to the back-plate shall incorporate grub screw fixing from the underside of the lever onto the follower spindle and a blue steel non-corrosive spring circlip retaining the lever handle on the rear side of the back-plate/rose.
V)
Finishes a) Gold Plated Finish shall be as specified in Clause 7.03.02 Para IV for internal, external and use. Where Polished Brass Finish is required, this shall be protected against corrosion and tarnishing with PVD finish or similar, and having a minimum 15 year warranty against corrosion and tarnishing. Where Polished Brass Finish Only is specified, this shall be without lacquer over coating. Stainless Steel Furniture shall be in Satin Finish of 304 or 316 Grade for the areas as noted previously.
b)
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST e) Where Aluminium Furniture is required, it shall be in Satin Anodised Finish to BS 1615.
8.3.14 Centre Dead Knob Door Furniture I) General a) Knob Mortice Lock Furniture shall comply with BS EN 1906 and shall not be used with Latch Action Lock Cases for doors, unless indicated on the Design Drawings. In which case knob diameter shall not exceed 57mm and the lock case must be suitably sprung for use with knob furniture. When indicated, Dead-Fixed Knob Furniture of the same maximum diameter with back-plate or rose and escutcheon may be used on lock stiles with an Euro-Profile Mortice Dead Lock Case.
b)
II)
Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knobs a) Generally Decorative Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knobs shall only be used on the outside face of Double Leaf Entrance Doors, which are provided with Floor Spring and Deadlock lock case. In such cases Pull Handles or Dead-Fixed Lever Furniture shall be used on the inside face. Decorative Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knobs may be used on both sides of Entrance Gates, with back-to-back fixing method. Knob and Rose diameters or Back-Plate size, and design, shall be as shown on the Design Drawings or indicated in the project schedule. Location of Decorative Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knobs shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings, to suit adjacent carving designs.
b)
c)
d)
e)
Decorative Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knobs shall be provided with a EuroProfile Mortice Deadlock Case to the lock stile with matching design escutcheon/s to the stile face/s at location shown on the Design Drawings.
III)
Fixing a) Where Centre Door Knobs are to both faces of the leaf and are concentric, back-to-back fixing shall be used. In all other instances, where door face design permits, concealed bolt through method should be used. Where the door face design does not allow for the bolt through method, or Lever Action Furniture is to be used on the internal face lock stile, a secure and robust secret fixing method of the Centre Door Knob shall be used to approval of the Engineer.
b)
IV)
Finish Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knobs for Main Entrance Doors or Gates shall be in Gold Plated finish, as previously described.
8.3.15 Pull Handles & Push Plates I) General
a)
Pull Handles and Push Plates shall be used for Double Leaf Doors in main thoroughfare corridors or entrances, when indicated on the Design Drawings only. Pull Handles and Push Plates shall also be used for Single Leaf Doors in other locations such as; kitchen, pantry, servery and back-of-house washroom/toilet lobby doors when indicated on the Design Drawings or in the Particular Specification. When Pull Handles and Push Plates are used they shall be provided with a Euro-Profile Mortice Deadlock Lock Case to the lock stile only, with Euro-Profile piercing below the handle or with matching design escutcheon/s to the stile face/s at the location shown on the Design Drawings, or written in the Particular Specification.
b)
c)
II)
Fixing a) Where Pull Handles are to both faces of the door and are concentric, backto-back fixing shall be used. When Push Plates are provided to the outside face of the door the Pull Handles shall be of the bolt through fixing type and bolts shall be covered by the Push Plates on the outside face of the door. Where door face design permits, the concealed bolt through method shall be used. When door face design does not allow for bolt through method, or Lever or Knob Furniture is to be used on the outside face lock stile, a secure and robust secret fixing method of the Pull Handle shall be used to approval of the Engineer. Pull Handles shall be positioned between 1200 and 1350mm on centre of their height above AFFL, unless particularly shown otherwise on the design drawings. Push Plates shall be positioned on the outside face of the lock stile concentric with the Pull Handle.
b)
c)
d)
III)
Finish
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Pull Handles and Push Plates shall finished to match the furniture on adjacent doors in the room. Kitchen, pantry and servery doors that do not swing into a VIP area or dining room shall be manufactured from 316 Grade Satin Stainless Steel.
b)
8.3.16 Cylinder Roses / Escutcheons I) General Cylinder Roses/Escutcheons shall be of matching design, shape and finish with the Dead-Fixed Centre Door Knob, Pull Handles, or other door furniture. II) Type Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, all Cylinder Roses/Escutcheons shall be of Euro-Profile piercing to conform with Clauses 7.03.11 and 12. The overall diameter and other dimensions and design shall comply with the design concept of the door stile.
III)
Finish The design and finish shall match that of the adjacent door furniture..
8.3.17 Entrance Gates - Custom Ironmongery I) Driveway Entrance Gates a) For heavy duty Driveway Entrance Gates to Palace Properties the ironmongery shall be custom made locally to the sizes and in the material and finish indicated on the Design Drawings. These items shall be under the Joinery Contractors scope of work and excluded from the Ironmongery Package unless indicated otherwise. The items likely to be included in the Ironmongery Package are surface mounted heavy duty hasps and staples, locking bars, padlocks, gate catches or stops of proprietary manufacture. Padlocks wherever required shall comply with BS EN 12320. The pivoting system of such gates shall also be included within the Joinery Contractors scope of work. When Driveway Entrance Gates are shown on the design drawings with integral Wicket Gates, the hinging and locking of the wicket gate may either form part of the Supply of Ironmongery package scope of work or
b)
c)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST be under the Joinery Contractors scope of work. 7.03.05, 7.03.11 and 12. shall be complied with.. d) II) In all cases Clauses
In some instances the wicket gate furniture may be required to match the suite of the entrance doors to the building/s within. Walkway Entrance Gates Ironmongery for Walkway Entrance Gates shall generally form part of the project door ironmongery schedule. The functional ironmongery and furniture etc. shall follow the same principles as that for external entrance doors to the building/s.
a)
b)
8.3.18 Window / Screen Knobs I) General a) Knobs for Windows/Screens shall be either round or oval shape and of the size indicated on the Design Drawings. Where Window/Screen Knobs are to be made from Beechwood Timber to match the Window/Screen finish they shall not from part of the Ironmongery supply scope, but will be included in the Joinery Scope of Work. Window Lever Furniture may be specified for external windows for use with adjustable backset budget locks, or window casement fasteners for use with casement stays. Windows shall not have any furniture externally, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
c)
d)
II)
Type a) The Knobs shall be on a Rose to suit the available flat width of the window stile unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. Window/Screen Knobs, and any other window furniture, shall match the design of the door furniture in the room, unless otherwise on the Design Drawings. For window screens the maximum diameter of a knob shall be 38mm. Full height, walk-through type, glazed French Windows shall be lockable from inside only and may have lever or mortice knob action furniture.
b)
c) d)
III)
Finish The finish shall match that of the adjacent Door Furniture.
8.3.19 Adjustable Roller Catches
I)
General a) Spring activated ball or double Ball Catches shall not be used for windows. Roller Catches for Windows/Screens etc. shall be of adjustable type with barrel depth of 43mm x 19mm diameter, or where indicated on the Design Drawings adjustable Magnetic Catches may be used.
b)
II)
Function and Installation Adjustable Roller Catches for Windows/Screens shall be recessed into frame head or cill or both, with the keep plate fixed into the leaf, as indicated on the Design Drawings. Keep plates shall not project beyond the leaf/frame edge face by more than 2mm.
III)
Finish Roller Catches finish shall match other ironmongery and/or furniture on the Window/Screen, but will not be gold plated.
8.3.20 Window Locks & Bolts I) General a) External Windows, and where indicated Internal Window Screens, shall be provided with a lock accessible from inside only. The locks shall comply with BS EN 12051. External Windows and Internal Screens shall not be provided with mortice lock case, except full height, walk through type glazed French Windows. In such instances the lock shall only be accessible from inside.
b)
II)
Type a) All External Windows shall have either or both the following Lock Type, dependent on the teakwood timber stile member section size as indicated on the Design Drawings. Budget Locks with 10 to 22mm adjustable backset where lever or knob action furniture is required on the inside. Chubb type Security Bolt of suitable backset with star key, and Budget Lock as above, but with Tee Key where lever or knob action furniture is not required.
b)
Internal Window Screens shall be held in closed position by Adjustable Roller Catches and Chubb type Security Bolt of suitable backset, and/or adjustable backset Budget Locks to top and bottom of the screen leaf.
III)
Finish The finish shall match the hinges, with the escutcheon or ferrule if specified to match the leaf furniture.
8.3.21 Neoprene Door & Window/Screen Seals I) General a) Neoprene Seals, which comply with BS 7386 shall be provided for all Main Buildings for VIP use. The Seals shall be fitted to the frame and not to the leaf except in special circumstances. Double leaf doors shall also have seals at the meeting stiles. Neoprene seals will not be used on Service or Staff Buildings, unless specified by the Client. Heavy duty sound proofing seals will be required to all opening edges and meeting stiles for Plant Room Frames/Doors, whether they form part of the Main Building or otherwise.
b)
c)
d)
II)
Neoprene Compression Seal a) All frames with hinged or offset pivoting leaves shall be provided with Sealmaster ARH neoprene compression seal (or approved equivalent) to jambs, head, (and cill for windows), unless particularly specified otherwise. Plant Room Doors shall be fitted with Sealmaster CA neoprene compression seal, to the jambs, head and cill of the frame, along with the meeting stiles of the door leaves.
b)
III)
Neoprene Wiper Seal a) External frames with hinged or offset pivoting leaves shall also be provided with Sealmaster ARK wiper seals (or approved equivalent) to jambs and head, (and cill for windows), unless specified otherwise. This also includes External or Internal Plant Room Doors, unless specified with N30 or N60 intumescent seals.
b)
For external frames of extra tall and/or wide or extra thick leaves alternative seal types, similar to Sealmaster ARL, ARM, PEFA/PEFS or a combination of these shall be used.
IV)
External Fire Rated door and window sets may not require ARK wiper seal, dependent on thickness, as similar blade is already incorporated in the Sealmaster Intumescent Fire & Smoke Seal. Double Action Internal Door Seals a) Internal doors with curved edges to the pivot stiles on a centre pivoted action, shall be fitted with Sealmaster PEFA/PEFS neoprene seals (or approved equivalent), centralised on the frame jambs, scalloped rebate, frame head, and for double leaf doors at the meeting stiles. Where indicated on the Design Drawings a PEFS seal will not be required at the frame head/top of door. The PEFA seal shall only be used at the frame head, depending on the design detailing. All Doors with PEFA/PEFS neoprene seals; operating in a scalloped lockset frame jamb in the case of single leaf, or curved edge meeting stiles in the case of double leaf; shall be provided with a closing mechanism. The closing mechanism shall be Floor Spring, or Concealed Overhead Cam Action Closer for door leaves of 55mm minimum thickness. For Back of House and Service Areas surface mounted closers shall be used.. Doors for Kitchen, Pantry or Handwash Areas shall be fitted with closing mechanisms be supplied with weak or adjustable spring strength for ease of access and operation. These doors shall have deadlock bolt action only, or where called for on the Design Drawings an additional adjustable roller bolt action.
c)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
V)
Intumescent Fire and Smoke Seals a) Fire Rated Doors frames shall be fitted with Sealmaster Intumescent Fire and Smoke Seals (or approved equivalent) to BS 476 and CertiFire Approval No. CF142. The Seal shall incorporate an angled selfextinguishing elastomeric replaceable wiper blade, which matches the fire rating of the door. Where Double Leaf Door and Window Sets meeting stiles are not rebated or the section detail cannot accommodate N30 or N60 seals, then Sealmaster IMN/IMP for FD30S rating, or N60S/IMP for FD60S rating shall be fitted. For FD60S Rated Door and Window Sets the N60 Intumescent Seal elastomeric wiper blade shall be flame retardant and Sealmaster
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Intumescent Plugs shall be fitted to hinges, locks, and other ironmongery, which breaks the continuity of the seal. d) Glazing to FD30S Fire Rated Door or Window Set panes shall be provided with either a bedding of Sealmaster FireGlaze Compound or Sealmaster G30 Glazing Strips as appropriate. For FD60S rating they shall be provided with both Sealmaster GL60 FireGlaze Liner and FireGlaze Compound. To achieve FD60S integrity Sealmaster Gap Filling Compounds, such as Intumescent Compound or Masterseal will be required at all door/window framesets joints between the building structure, and around all ironmongery cutouts. Sealmaster N30 and N60 Fire and Smoke Seals may take the place of Sealmaster ARK wiper seals on external doors or windows where prevalent, depending of leaf thickness. Under no circumstances whatsoever shall Fire Only Seals be used.
e)
f)
g) VI)
Seals Aluminium Channel Finish a) All types of Sealmaster seals shall incorporate aluminium carrier channel finished in Gold Anodised Finish for VIP and general thoroughfare areas. For Service and Back of House areas in the aluminium carrier channel shall be in Standard Silver Mill Finish.
b)
8.3.22 Automatic Door Bottom Seal I) General a) All External doors to all Main Buildings for VIP use shall have Automatic Door Bottom Seal. These seals shall also be fitted to external doors of other buildings where indicated on the Design Drawings. Automatic Door Bottom Seal shall also be fitted to Plant Rooms with noise emitting equipment such as an AHU, whether internal or external to the Main Buildings. Where an Automatic Door Bottom Seal is required for Internal Doors it will noted on the Design Drawings or in the client schedule. Automatic door bottom seals shall not be used on Service or Staff Buildings, unless specified.
b)
c) d)
II)
Type
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Automatic Door Bottom Seals shall be mortice type from either Zero International, Athmer, Ventura or Hafele ranges to suit the door construction and pivoting method. III) Application a) All mortice type Automatic Door Bottom Seals shall be concealed fixing and grooved into the door bottom rail. The black or grey neoprene element of the seal must extend to full width of the door leaf, and in the case of double leaf doors must meet together at the meeting stiles. Where it is not possible to accommodate the mortice type, surface mounted Automatic Door Bottom Seals be considered, and these will only be to Back-of-House areas.
b)
IV)
Finish The mortice fixed concealed Automatic Door Bottom Seal shall be in the manufacturers standard mill finish for the aluminium carrier.
8.3.23 Cabinetry Ironmongery I) Fitting in General Cabinetry and Loose Furniture Contractors shall refer to the Woodwork Specification Clause 7.02.06 Ironmongery Fitting. 8.3.24 Cabinet Pivot Sliding Door Fittings I) General a) Pivot Sliding Door Fittings shall be provided to all TV and Hi-Fi Cabinets in VIP areas, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. The Cabinetry Contractor shall ascertain the physical dimensions of Audio/Visual equipment, prior to submission of the Working Drawings. The Cabinetry Contractor shall advise the Ironmongery Supplier the dimensions of the required Sliding Pivot Turn-Away Fitting.
b)
II)
Type The Pivot Sliding Door Fittings shall be from the Hawa X range, or approved equivalent with a smooth effortless operating action.
III)
Application a) Pivot Sliding Door Fittings shall be housed in a pocket to suit the particular door design and thickness and fitted to the manufacturers instructions.
b)
When in the open retracted position within the pocket the Cabinet Doors must protrude from the front of the cabinet sufficiently, to ensure the door knob or handle is clear for operating. 70mm is the maximum permitted for this. The Hawa Pivot Sliding Door Fittings shall enable partial automatic retraction, by its spring loaded scissor action, when the door is opened to 90.
c)
Adjustable Mortice Type Magnetic Cabinet Catches shall be provided to retain the Cabinet Doors in closed position. 8.3.25 Cabinet Extending TV Turntable I) General a) Extending Television Turntable shall be provided to all TV Cabinets in all VIP areas, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. The Cabinetry Contractor shall ascertain the Television overall dimensions and weight prior to preparation of Working Drawings.
d)
b)
II)
Type Extending Television Turntables shall be from the Hafele range, model; Color E single extension type, load capacity 65kg, or approved equivalent of robust construction with a smooth effortless safe operating action.
III)
Application The Extending Television Turntable base shall be bolt fixed with large size washers through the 25mm thick Composite Board TV shelf. The manufacturers instructions enclosed with the Extending TV Turntable shall be strictly adhered to.
IV)
Finish Extending Turntable shall be in Grey-brown finish, as per Hafele catalogue No. 421.98.149 unless instructed otherwise by the Engineer.
8.3.26 Cabinet Catches I) General Ball catches or surface mounted plastic body catches shall not be used, unless indicated on the design drawings or listed in the client schedule. II) Type
a)
Adjustable Mortice Type Magnetic Catches as per Hafele catalogue No. 246.02.211, shall be used, to ensure proper installation adjustment, and in-service movement of the cabinetry timber shutters. Other type catches may be considered, or be client specified to suit the design detailing.
b)
III)
Application a) Hafele Adjustable Mortice Type Magnetic Catches (catalogue No. 246.02.211), requiring 14mm diameter hole size, shall be fixed into a solid timber doorstop of suitable section size, or to the shelf solid front edge when of suitable thickness, adjacent to the cabinet shutter/s meeting stile/s closed position. The 3mm thick counter-piece/strike plate shall be screw fixed to the shutter/s inside face next to the leading edge and may be slightly recessed into the shutter by up to 2mm maximum.
b)
IV)
Finish All as catalogue item number No. 246.02.211 or alternatives which are equal and approved.
8.3.27 Cabinet Shelf Supports I) General a) Metal shelf supports shall be used, to suit the cabinetry, with the correct insertion depth into the cabinet carcase gables. All Cabinetry Shelf Support systems must be of suitable for a load capacity in excess of anticipated end use of shelves.
b) II) Type a)
Adjustable shelves shall be provided with Shelf Supports of 150 kg. load capacity, which shall be 5mm dia. Pin Type with wedged ribs entering the cabinet carcase, and with shelf fixing lug/pin into the shelf to prevent movement. All as Hafele catalogue No. 282.24.320. Swedish (Magic Wire) concealed type Shelf Support shall be used on all TV/Hi-Fi Cabinets removable inner gables for pivot sliding door fitting, and also at the carcase back panel. As per Hafele catalogue No. 282.72.719. The Ex-Cellent H 3 Pin Type Shelf Support shall be used for adjustable shelves from 16 to 22mm thickness, which are horizontally accessible directly from the front of the cabinet carcase with the door in the open
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST position and have a maximum load capacity of less than 80kg. Hafele catalogue No. 282.23.725. d) As
For Glass Adjustable Shelves, from 6 to 10mm thickness, which are directly accessible horizontally from the front of the cabinet the Ex-Cellent G 3 Pin Type Glass Shelf Support shall be used. As Hafele catalogue No. 282.23.814.
III
Application a) Pin Type Shelf Supports with wedged ribs shall be inserted into 5mm dia. x maximum 9mm deep pre-drilled holes in the carcase gables, at centres shown in the design drawings. The shelf shall be accurately drilled on the underside to a depth of 7mm x 5mm dia. to accept the fixing lug/pin of the Shelf Support. Unless otherwise indicated on the design drawings, each adjustable shelf shall be provided with three rows of holes in the carcase gables. Swedish (Magic Wire) concealed type Shelf Support shall be inserted into pre-drilled 4mm dia. x 12mm deep holes in the top and bottom fixed shelves of the TV or Hi-Fi compartment to locate the removable inner gables. The inner gables, carcase back panel and the rear edge of the removable inner gables shall have a 4mm groove along their centre line to a maximum 12mm depth to accommodate the Magic Wire. The Ex-Cellent H and G 3 Pin Type Shelf Supports shall only be used when horizontal access, from the front of the cabinet is available, for installing and removal of the shelf. This horizontal access shall include any door/s in the open position. The Ex-Cellent Shelf Support shall be inserted into 5mm dia. x maximum 9mm deep pre-drilled holes in the carcase gables, at centres shown in the design drawings, with at least three rows per shelf.
b)
c)
IV)
Finish The finish shall be as the catalogue ref./code number for the item, although in some instances gold plating may be required which will be as previously specified.
8.3.28 Cabinet Drawer Runners I) General a) Metal Drawer Runners shall be used, with length normally equal to the drawer box depth, to suit the cabinetry internal depth. All Cabinetry Drawer Runners shall have a load capacity in excess of anticipated end use of the drawers.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST II) Type a) All Drawer Runners shall be of the full extension type with roller guides, or telescopic type with ball guides, to allow the drawer box to be fully opened clear of the cabinet carcase or upper drawer front. Full Extension Base Mounted Type Runners with a minimum load capacity of 30 kg/pair shall be used for standard drawers. Where drawers contain special or heavy equipment, Telescopic Side or Base Mounted Type Runners with a minimum load capacity of 50 kg/pair shall be used.
b)
c)
d) III)
Where required other drawer runner types; such as Differential or Roller Bearing Types may be specified. Application a) For Lay-On Drawer Fronts the cabinet carcase components of the Drawer Runners shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturers details from the front edge of the cabinet carcase gables. Where Inset Drawer Fronts are required the distance from the front edge of the cabinet carcase shall include the drawer front thickness, plus the inserted drawer/door buffer pad thickness. The drawer box side components of the Drawer Runner shall be fixed as the manufacturers details indicate. The method of fixing into the cabinet carcase gables and into the drawer box shall be by screws of the appropriate gauge, length and quantity as indicated by the manufacturer. all pre-drilled holes in the metal drawer runner shall be used for secure fixing and ease of drawer operation. For all types of Drawer Runner the drawer box side to cabinet carcase clearance dimension, given in the runner manufacturers instructions, shall be strictly followed to ensure smooth operation without excess play.
b)
c)
d)
IV)
Finishes a) The finish shall be as given in the catalogue ref./code number for the item. Where the manufacturers standard finish to a RAL cream or white finish does not co-ordinate with the cabinetry approved stain colour finish, the Drawer Runners shall be refinished locally by the Cabinetry Contractor to match the approved timber stain colour. In the case of telescopic drawer runners, they shall be chrome plated finish.
b)
8.3.29 Cabinet Door Hinges
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST I) General All Cabinet Door Hinges shall be from metal and be of suitable design capacity to carry the door weight and size. II) Type Cabinet Door Hinges shall be one of the following types to suit the required cabinetry design detail, or as client specified: Concealed Self-Closing Boss Type with Screw-On Cross Mounting Plates and Cranking to suit either Lay-On or Inset Door function as indicated in the design drawings. Concealed Self-Closing Boss Type Hinges shall be from Hettich Intermat range, or equal approved. Soss Invisible Hinges of size to suit cabinet door thickness and carcase gable thickness, but not exceeding 95 x 19 x 26.5mm deep unless particularly required for an extra large and thick cabinet door. Other types of hinges, such as brass butts or lift-off with decorative finials of appropriate size to suit the cabinetry, may also be considered or client specified to suit the design detailing.
III)
Application a) All hinge types shall be installed to the manufacturers instructions, in sufficient quantity to suit the door height and weight. For Butt and Lift-Off hinge types both leaves of the hinge shall be equally recessed into the door and cabinet carcase, to locate the hinge and support the door. All hinge types shall be secured using all the available hinge screw holes. Lead/pilot holes shall be bored as necessary to accept the fixing screws.
b)
c)
IV)
Finishes The finish shall be as the catalogue ref./code number for the item Concealed Self-Closing Boss Type Hinges shall be nickel plated steel. Soss Invisible Hinges shall be in standard dull brass. Butt and Lift-Off Hinge shall generally be in polished brass, or as client specified.
8.3.30 Cabinet Knobs & Handles I) General

a)
Cabinetry Knobs or Handles shall be of solid brass unless otherwise indicated in the Design Drawings or specified by the client. Knobs, Handles or Flush Pulls may be required to be in Timber of the same or similar wood species as the cabinet doors and/or drawer fronts. In such instances these proprietary Flush Pulls, Knobs or Handles may form part of the Ironmongery supply Scope of Work, or may be custom made by the Cabinetry Contractor as per design drawings.
b)
II)
Type a) Knobs or Handles for Cabinetry shall be of the same Suite, (matching design), as the Architectural Door Furniture in the room, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. Knobs for Cabinetry shall be either round or oval shape as indicated on the design drawings and of the size shown. The maximum Knob diameter for Cabinetry shall be 38mm whilst the minimum shall be 22mm to suit the application, unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings. Knobs or Handles shall be with or without back rose/plate, of appropriate size/diameter as indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
c)
d)
III)
Application a) Cabinetry Knobs or Handles shall be dead-fixed, by means of needle point pin to outside of door/drawer front, and secured by machine screw of sufficient length from inside. Flush Pull Type Handles, to be of suitable depth to be recessed into the door/drawer front of the cabinetry.
h)
IV)
Finish a) The finish of Knobs or Handles shall match the Architectural Door Furniture in the room, unless otherwise indicated on the design drawings. Wood Knobs or Flush Wood Handles, shall be supplied natural in-thewhite i.e. unfinished, to be finished by the cabinetry contractor to match the approved stain finish of the furniture.
b)
8.3.31 Wardrobe Hanging Rails I) General
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Plastic coated or chrome plated steel tube shall only be used where specified for back-of-house or service areas. II) Type a) Wardrobe Rails, and their required ancillary fittings, for V.I.P. Areas shall be manufactured from Solid Drawn Polished Brass Tube of 31.8mm diameter. Wardrobe Rails for secondary areas, such as entourage accommodation, shall be manufactured from 25mm dia. seamless brass coated steel tube. Rod End Sockets for securing the rod to the carcase gables shall be of heavy duty type with two or three fixing points each. When the hanging rail span exceeds 900mm Centre Support Brackets shall be provided.
b)
c)
III)
Application The hanging rail shall be positioned in the centre of the wardrobe inside depth at the height shown on the design drawings, and securely fixed in position by screws of the correct length and gauge to all fixing points.
IV)
Finish The finish of the hanging rail and ancillary fittings shall be polished brass finish.
8.3.32 Ancillary Fittings I) General The items contained in this section fall into three main categories; 1. 2. 3. II) Generally required accessories, but not seen in the finished work. Accessories required for particular specific items only. Seldom used ironmongery for special purposes.
Cabinet Door/Drawer Stop Buffer Pads a) Buffer Pads shall be used on Cabinetry Doors and Drawers in VIP and other main building areas. They shall also be used on drawer fronts in all other areas. These shall be of 6mm diameter, Press-Fit Transparent Type, as the Door Stop from Hafele range Cat. No. 356.20.421 or approved equivalent. Door Stop/Buffer Pads shall be fitted to the cabinet carcase close to the top and bottom of the door, for all doors with self-closing type concealed
b) c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST hinges. For tall doors intermediate Buffer Pad/Door Stops shall also be applied. d) When non self-closing hinges are to be used then adjustable magnetic catches will be used in place of buffer pads.
III)
Cabinet Access Panel Fittings a) Where access is required through a panelled desk to phone and electric sockets housed in a floor box, the Insert Bolt Locks (Giro Bolt) from the Hafele range Cat. No. 261.05.902 or equal approved shall be used. Adequate Insert Bolt Locks shall be supplied with striking plates, brass roses and hexagon keys to secure the panel(s).
b)
IV))
Cabinet Flush Bolts a) Furniture Straight Flush Bolts when required shall be in brass finish of suitable length as per Hafele range Cat. No. 253.00.314/332 or equal approved. When required for desk double height drawer for paper shredder the Furniture Straight Flush Bolts shall be fitted to the drawer box sides, 2 Nos. close to the front of the box and 2 Nos. close to the rear of the box.
b)
V)
Sliding Door Gear a) Sliding Door Gear shall comply with BS EN 1527 and manufactured by Hawa AG, Switzerland using the appropriate model for the purpose as indicated on the Design Drawings. The Sliding Door Gear shall be supplied with all necessary track, accessories and fittings and have a capacity in excess of anticipated load.
b)
VI)
Window Roller Blinds a) When required Roller Window Blinds shall be from Silent Gliss Ltd., Star Lane, Margate, Kent CT9 4EF, England. Tel: 0044 1843 863 571 Fax: 0044 1843 864 503. Unless otherwise indicated on the design drawing they shall be model 4210 manually operated by centre pull cord attached to the blind weight bar. The blind weight bar shall be supplied 18mm longer and weighted heavier than the Silent Gliss standard, as the weight bar will operate vertically
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST within a trench in the timber window frame jambs. The blind fabric shall be wider than the window frame jamb to jamb inside dimension, to prevent emission of unsatisfactory light at the edges of the blind fabric.
d)
The blind fabric will generally be from Silent Gliss range of either, Mono Black Out Ref. Parchment 790 or Oscurama 5 Ref. OSC401.
8.3.33 Scheduling a) When Ironmongery is not client specified, the Consultant shall provide the Ironmongery Supplier with a full set of all relevant drawings of the works for the purpose of specifying, quantifying and scheduling of the ironmongery requirement. The client will not be responsible for any errors or omissions. For large or medium size projects a sequential Door/Window and/or Furniture itemised Schedule shall also be provided, with a blank column for the Ironmongery Supplier to insert the ironmongery set/type number. The door and/or furniture schedule must be completed accurately, as it will be used as a quick reference multi purpose guide throughout the duration of the project.
b)
c)
8.3.34 Material Approval Submission (M.A.S.) The MAS procedure is fully detailed in Clause 7.00.16, which shall apply to throughout Section 7.03. 8.3.35 Receiving & Delivery I) General a) It is the responsibility of the Ironmongery Contractor/Supplier to check all items before delivery. Checking shall include ensuring related items are kept together and that the items function correctly. The Engineer shall be notified when missing or faulty components are likely to delay the works.
b)
c)
II)
Packaged Sets a) The Ironmongery Contractor/Supplier shall supply the Ironmongery packaged in sets, identified by Door/Window No. and Type or Furniture Unit and Type along with the relevant Ironmongery Schedule page/s for the particular Door/Window or Furniture Unit per package.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) The packaged sets of Ironmongery shall be delivered, to the respective Woodwork Contractors Factory Stores, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
III)
Itemised Delivery Note a) Each delivery shall be recorded on the Ironmongery Suppliers standard format Delivery Note, listed by Set number and Door No. or Furniture Unit Type, and signed for receiving by the Woodwork Contractor. Deliveries of a single item in full project quantity shall not be made, unless at the request of the Engineer.
b)
IV)
Ironmongery Items Samples Refer to Clause 7.03.02. A sample of each item of Ironmongery with all its accessories shall be delivered to the Wopodworking Contractors Factory as soon as possible after the receipt of instruction to proceed.
V)
Operation and Maintenance Manuals a) The Ironmongery Contractor/Supplier shall supply O&M Manuals in accordance with Clause 1.1.13 of this Specification. These O&M Manuals shall be delivered to the Project Engineer, together with covering letter copied to all relevant parties.
b)
8.3.36 Warranty a) All Ironmongery shall be supplied with a minimum 10 year warranty by the supplier. The warranty shall cover all defects.
b)
End of Section
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 9.0 9.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK AND METAL WORK Material 9.1.1 Steel a) Structural steel shall conform to BS EN10137-1:1996 Grade as applicable of approved manufacture conforming to Euronorms. Rolled steel joists, channels and universal beams shall comply with BS 41:1993. Hot rolled structural steel sections shall comply with BS EN 102101:1999 and -2:1997. Structural steelwork fabrication and erection shall comply with BS 449 2:1969. Steel tubes for structural and general engineering purposes shall comply with BS 6323-1:1982. Steel tubes for tubulars for balustrades shall comply with BS 1387:1885 designation of either light, medium or heavy and the steel pipe fittings shall comply with BS 1740-1:1971. Tubes and fittings shall be galvanised before screwing. Stainless steel shall be grade 304 in normal situation and grade 316 in corrosive atmosphere. Stainless steel bars shall conform to BS:970-1:1996, stainless steel tubes shall conform to BS 6323 Part 8 and wires to BS 1554:1990 and BS 31111:1979 and -2:1987. Steel to be chromium plated shall be treated after fabrication in accordance with BS 1224:1970 Classification for the following uses: (i) (ii) S.P. 12R S.B. 8R - External use - Internal use in damp areas.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
9.1.2 Nuts, Bolts and Screws a) Nuts and bolts etc., shall comply with BS 4190:1967 and BS 1494:-1:1964 and shall have ISO metric thread complying with BS 3643-1 and -2:1981. Metal washers shall comply with BS 4320:1868. The stainless steel for bolts, nuts and washers shall comply with BS 9701:1996, quality EN 58 A.M.
b) c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) Self-tapping screws shall comply with BS 4174:1972 and BS EN ISO 1479:1995.
9.1.3 Aluminium a) b) Aluminium extruded sections shall comply with BS 1474:1987. Anodised finish to aluminium shall comply with BS 3987:1991 and BS 1615:1987. Acrylic finish to aluminium shall be stoved on with an even coat averaging 30 microns thick to BS 4800:1987 and treated with wax or similar approved protective coating before dispatch to site.
c)
9.1.4 Aluminium Windows, Doors and Screens Aluminium windows, doors and screens shall comply with the requirements of BS 4873:1986. Stainless steel screws shall be used in the fabrication. All units shall be of local manufacture. 9.1.5 Roller Shutters The roller shutters shall be of an approved manufacture. The contractor shall oil and leave in perfect working order at completion and shall label keys and hand them to the Employer. 9.2 Workmanship 9.2.1 General a) Prepare and submit shop drawings where required and obtain the Engineer's approval before proceeding with the fabrication and work. The Contractor shall check site dimensions and make fabricated work corresponding to the "Approved" Shop Drawings. Drawings shall show in detail the various portions of the work, kind of materials, size of members and methods of securing same together and to the work of other trades. The Contractor shall coordinate with other trades in obtaining the exact site dimensions and the Contractor will be held responsible for the accurate execution of the parts of the work specified. All fastening shall be concealed where possible. the approved shop drawings shall be followed exactly. All metal shall be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines or angles. Shearing and punching shall be left clean to true lines and surfaces. Shop connections shall be welded or riveted and site connections bolted unless otherwise noted using flat beaded countersunk
b)
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST rivets where rivets connections are exposed to view in finished work. Bolts shall be turned up tight and threads nicked to prevent loosening. All bolts shall be provided with washers. e) Exposed connections with hair line joints shall be flush and smooth using concealed fasteners wherever possible. If exposed fasteners are unavoidable, countersunk fasteners shall be used.
9.2.2 Welding a) Welding in the shop and field shall be in accordance with BS 5135:1984 and shall be done by qualified and experienced welders approved by the Engineer. In the absence of specific requirements, the techniques and materials employed in welding and brazing shall be selected with due regard to the character of the work and the metals being connected and shall be to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. All welds shall be neatly filed smooth and the whole left smooth and clean for painting.
b)
9.2.3 Galvanising a) The surfaces of all steel described as galvanised are to be thoroughly and evenly coated to a thickness of 88 Microns or equivalent to 610 grams per square metre and shall be free from pin holes, lumps of surface galvanising materials and all other defects and should be in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461:1999. All damaged galvanised surfaces and all edges exposed by cutting or drilling after galvanising shall be treated with two coats of zinc paint sprayed on in accordance with BS 2569-2:1965. Ends of metal sections not exceeding 100mm2 exposed by cutting after galvanising shall be treated with two coats of zinc paint sprayed on in accordance with BS 2569-2:1965.
b)
9.2.4 Erection of Structural Steelwork a) The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the stability of the steelwork during erection and he shall arrange for all temporary guying, bracing and supports, together with any additional tack bolts necessary for the stability of the steelwork until final bolting up. The erection sequence and procedure shall be approved by the Engineer prior to erection, including the details of lifting plant or other machinery. Notwithstanding such approval, the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the adequacy of all erection plant. The Contractor shall assemble all parts as shown on the drawings and shall accurately position plumb line and level the work. Drift pins shall only be employed to align component parts and must not distort the work.
b)
c)
The steelwork shall be accurately erected within the following tolerances: i) Setting out - Plan Dimensions 12mm overall building but not more than 5mm in any one metre bay. 5mm 10mm 0.1% of height, but not more than 6 mm overall. Not more, after erection,than the rolling tolerances as given in the appropriate British Standard.
ii)
Levels - for truss, girder support plates - for stanchion base plates
iii)
Plumb of stanchions, portal legs and vertical axis of truss girders Straightness or bow or out of squareness of sections
iv)
9.2.5 Castings Castings shall be sound and free from warp, holes and other defects that impair strength and appearance. Exposed surfaces shall have a smooth finish with sharp well-defined lines and arises. Machined joints shall be milled to a close fit. All necessary lugs, brackets and similar items shall be provided so that work can be assembled and installed in neat, substantial manner. 9.2.6 Bedding of Column Bases a) Bedding shall be carried out with cement grout or mortar (sulphate resistant if required), together with an approved grout expanding agent compatible with the above materials. Bedding operations shall not commence until a sufficient number of bottom length stanchions have been properly lined, levelled and plumbed and sufficient floor beams are in position, these stanchions being supported meanwhile by steel wedges. Immediately before grouting the space under the steel shall be thoroughly cleaned. Either of the following methods may be adopted for grouting: (i) Using sulphate resistant cement together with an approved expanding agent in proportions as directed by the manufacturer to a thickness not exceeding 25mm. The grout shall be mixed as thickly as possible consistent with fluidity and shall be poured under a head so that the space is completely filled between the underside of the base plate and top of the concrete foundation. Using fluid sulphate resistant cement mortar together with an approved expanding agent in preparations as directed by the
b)
c)
(ii)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST manufacturers to a thickness of between 25mm and 50mm. The mortar shall not be leaner than 1:2 cement to sand and shall be mixed as thickly as possible consistent with fluidity. It shall be poured under a suitable head and tamped until the space between the underside of base plate and top of concrete foundation has completely filled. d) The Contractor shall ensure at all times that all column bases, i.e. holding down bolt pockets are thoroughly protected against dew, rain and all other moistures running down the columns and into the pockets. The Engineer may, at his discretion, instruct the Contractor to cut out and make good at the Contractor's own expense any column base which is not protected as described.
e)
9.2.7 Aluminium Windows, Doors and Screens a) All units shall be complete with all necessary glazing inserts, sealing strips, gaskets, skids, weather strips, glazing beads and all necessary ironmongery. For sliding windows, main frames shall be a minimum 100mm wide x 50mm high x 2mm thickness. Sliding or fixed frames shall be a minimum of 40mm wide and 1.5mm thickness and shall have weep holes for drainage. Aluminium sliding windows shall be removable for cleaning and shall be fitted with a suitable locking device. All opening sashes shall have necessary stays and fasteners etc. Doors shall be fitted with suitable heavy duty hinges, locks, latches, pull handles, push plates and floor springs where specified. All opening light windows shall be fitted, where described with removable fly screens complete with suitable aluminium frame and aluminium mesh. Aluminium units shall be designed to resist penetration of external moisture to the inside of the building. Fixing of frames for all units to the building shall be such as to ensure solid, void free, water proof joints. The joints shall be caulked with a building mastic which does not sag or run, which is non hardening, non-staining and can be painted. If drilling or cutting of extruded sections is necessary for drainage purposes, the damaged anodizing is to be made good with a suitable epoxy paint. The aluminium frame shall be secured to a hardwood frame with stainless steel or aluminium screws and shall be bedded in mastic all round.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
9.2.8 Finishing a) All ferrous metal work is to be shop primed or galvanised before delivery to site. Those portions of items which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry and surfaces and edges which are to be site welded, unless galvanised are to remain unprimed. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before the shop coat of paint is applied. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on metal primer paint applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, at a rate sufficient to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 0.05mm for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces.
b)
c)
9.2.9 Installation a) Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing to finished work including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, rag-bolts, wood screws and other connectors as necessary. Cut, drill and fit as necessary for installation. Set the work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level and true. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in framework for items which are to be cast or built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Do not cut or abrade members with finishes which cannot be completely restored on site. Where cutting, welding and grinding are required for fitting and jointing of the work, restore finishes to eliminate any evidence of such corrective work. Carry out all welds and carefully make good on completion. Immediately after erection, clean on-site welds, exposed cut faces, drill holes, bolted connections and rough areas of the shop paint and coat all exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting and to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05mm.
b)
c) d)
9.2.10 Storage and Handling a) All items described under this Section shall be handled, delivered and stored in a manner that will avoid damage, rust or deformation. Items shall be stored off-ground and shall be entirely covered with weatherproof coverings in the storage area.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Items which become rusted or damaged because of non-compliance with these conditions will be subject to rejection, and such items shall be replaced without additional cost to the Employer.
9.2.11 Protection a) Before arriving on site, all surfaces of galvanised metal which are damaged or have rough spots or joints (which must be welded after galvanizing), shall be touched up, using an approved zinc primer coat. Primer shall be compatible for finish paint. Galvanised items shall not receive a shop coat of primer so that there may be a visual inspection of site for such items by the Engineer. Thoroughly insulate all non-ferrous items in contact with dissimilar metals, concrete, masonry and mortar with approved zinc-chromate coating or plastic membrane on contact surfaces before installation. All aluminium frames and surfaces shall be protected from damage until completion of the works. Damaged or blemished surfaces shall be made good to match shop finished surface. All doors and window frames shall be painted externally at junctions with the surrounding fabric with mastic. On completion the Contractor shall ease all opening sections of windows and doors and leave in perfection working order.
b)
c)
d)
e)
End of Section
10.0.0 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHINGS 10.0.1 General a) General plastering shall be carried out in accordance with Code of Practice BS5492: 1990 in so far as it applies to particular types of plaster finish in this section. Decorative gypsum works shall normally be carried out by a specialist contractor.
b)
10.0.2 Drawings a) The Design Drawings are the concept, appearance, contractor shall develop Drawings which show all the specifications. intended to indicate design intent, illustrating style, finish and quality of the work. The the design, furnishing full size Working the points of construction in compliance with
b)
The working drawings shall clearly show the design, construction, reinforcement, method of fixing and all other relevant information including all proposed materials to be used and shall be submitted in duplicate for the approval process.
10.0.3 Samples When instructed and in particular for decorative gypsum work, the Contractor shall submit samples of each item listed in the schedules for the designers approval. Manufacture shall only proceed after receipt of final approval. 10.1.0 MATERIALS 10.1.1 Cement, Sand and Water Cement, sand and water shall be as specified for "Block work". 10.1.2 Granolithic Granolithic paving shall consist of one part cement and two parts of granite chippings to BS 882:1982. A solution of silicate of soda or similar hardening agent shall be applied to the Manufacturer's Instruction. 10.1.3 Terrazzo Tiles
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Terrazzo tiles shall be precast of approved standard size but no more than 400 X 400 X 20mm thick to BS 4131:1973 comprising 10mm thick terrazzo layer of white cement to BS 12:1996 with three parts marble chippings (3-6mm) thoroughly mixed and cast in prepared moulds and polished with a wet polish fine grit process, applied to a 10mm base layer of cement and sand (1:4) (for which the contractor shall include in his rate) the whole being cast and cured contiguously. They shall be bedded in cement and sand screed to provide a finished floor thickness of 50mm to 70mm (as indicated) and jointed and pointed in neat coloured cement grout to match tiles. 10.1.4 Quarry Tiles Quarry tiles shall be of approved standard size, non-slip, conforming in all respects with the requirements of BS 6431-1:1983, with colour to the approval of the Engineer. 10.1.5 Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tiles Unglazed ceramic floor tiles shall conform to the requirements of BS 64311:1983 and be to a standard manufactured and available size and colour to approval of the Engineer. 10.1.6 PVC Tiles PVC tiles shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 649 and shall be 300 x 300 x 2.5mm thick and fixed with an approved proprietary adhesive on cement and sand screed. 10.1.7 Glazed Wall Tiles Glazed wall tiling shall be cushion edged glazed ceramic tiles to conform to BS EN 6431:1983 colour to approval of the Engineer. 10.1.8 Skirtings a) Unless otherwise described tile skirtings shall be as follows: i) Terrazzo tile skirting Approved size Terrazzo tile grouted vertically into wall finish with top edge chamfered and jointing and pointing as for terrazzo floor tile. Standard manufactured size Quarry tile coved at base grouted vertically into wall finish and jointing and pointing as for terrazzo floor tiles. Standard manufactured size Unglazed ceramic skirting tile coved at base
ii) Quarry tile skirting
iii) Unglazed ceramic tile
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST grouted vertically into wall finish and jointing and pointing as for unglazed ceramic floor tiles.
10.1.9 Floor Hardener A suitable epoxy floor hardener to the approval of the Engineer shall be applied over finished concrete floor surfaces in two coats strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 10.1.10 Gypsum Wall Plaster Gypsum wall plaster shall be 15mm thick in two coats. The first coat shall be browning plaster 12mm thick and finished with a uniform rough scratch surface to provide a good bond for the finishing coat. The second coat shall be finishing plaster 3mm thick and shall be finished with a steel float . 10.1.11 Wall Render Wall render shall consist of (i) Slurry coat consisting of one part cement and two parts sand. (ii) 12mm base render coat of 1 part cement to 4 parts sand, and (iii) 3mm finishing coat of one part cement and three parts sand. Surfaces shall be cleaned down and well wetted before rendering is commenced. Slurry coat shall be left for at least 24 hours before base coat is applied. Base coats to be finished level with a wood float and finishing coat with steel trowel. Render shall be kept damp for at least 7 days after its application. 10.1.12 Ceiling Render Ceiling render shall consist of a single coat of proprietary bonding agent and one 6mm thick render coat of one part cement to four parts sand finished with a steel trowel. 10.1.13 Textured Paint Finish i) For external finish the following coatings shall be applied: One coat of two component epoxy primer. (Alternatively one coat of Acrylic undercoat.) One coat of two component epoxy spray. (Alternatively one coat of Acrylic spray coat.) Two coats of two component polyurethane top coat, gloss or eggshell finish as indicated. ii) For a smooth render finish the following coatings shall be applied: A solvent based Alkyd primer to be applied to manufacturer's instructions. Two coats of weather resistant pure Acrylic emulsion paint.
10.1.14 Expanded Metal Lathing Expanded metal lathing, angle and stop beads shall comply with BS 1369-1:1987 and weigh not less than 1.6 kg per square metre and be of an appropriate quality/grade of stainless steel, unless otherwise specified. 10.1.15 Gypsum Works a) Plaster The plaster used shall be calcium sulphate beta hemihydrate which conforms to BS 1191: Part 1: 1972:2.1 Class A Plaster of Paris. The manufacturer shall provide test certificates to show proof of origin, chemical composition and freedom from course fibres, alternatively it shall be approved to BS 5750. b) Fibre Reinforcement General reinforcement shall be by the use of Jute Skrim or similar approved vegetable fibre or glass fibre as indicated on the drawings or deemed necessary to ensure structural stability. c) Timber Timber used in reinforcement shall be sorted redwood and free from excessive knots, bow and distortion. Any timber used to provide support i.e. not fully wetted out, shall have been tantalized or treated with by alternative approved preservation process. c) Metal Any metal lathe used shall be as required for structural stability and shall be fully galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminium. 10.2.0 WORKMANSHIP 10.2.1 Surfaces a) Surfaces to receive plastering or rendering shall by dry brushed to remove all loose particles, dust, latency, efflorescence, etc, and any projecting fins on concrete surfaces shall be hacked off. All traces of mould oil shall be removed from concrete surfaces by scrubbing with water containing detergent and rinsing with fresh water. Surfaces shall be wetted and re-wetted as required to equalise suction before the first coat of plaster is applied. In particular, dense hard concrete surfaces shall be wetted and re-wetted as required before bonding plaster is applied.
b)
10.2.2 Floor Screeds a) Floor screeds shall consist of cement and sand in the proportions described in the Bills of Quantities and they shall be covered to avoid too rapid drying out. The concrete floor under the screeds shall be well brushed and a coat of cement grout applied immediately prior to laying screeds, and shall be a thickness as required by the overall floor thickness. b) Screeds for marble floors shall be mixed with white Portland cement and the concrete mother slab/structure treated with a PVA bonding agent. c) Screeds shall be laid in alternate bays not exceeding 3 metres in either direction with joints over any construction joints in the concrete under as agreed with the Engineer. The contractor shall include in his rates for plastic division strips at all door openings bedded to the full depth of the screed.
d)
10.2.3 Terrazzo Tiles Terrazzo tiles shall be machine polished after laying and left in a clean condition. Care should be taken to ensure that grinding burns are eliminated. Cutting should be kept to a minimum and cut edge should be against the walls.
10.2.4 Quarry Tiles Quarry Tiles shall be applied to a 10mm cement and sand (1:4) base layer (for which the contractor shall include in his rates). They shall be bedded in cement mortar and jointed and pointed in neat coloured cement to match tiles. 10.2.5 Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tiles Unglazed Ceramic floor tiles shall be bedded, jointed and pointed as for "Quarry Tiles". 10.2.6 PVC Tiles Laying tiles shall produce a surface finish free from blemishes, undulations and other faults and shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the Manufacturers instructions. 10.2.7 Glazed Wall Tiles Tiles shall be fixed to render previously prepared with proprietary adhesive to the approval of the Engineer with joints neatly grouted with white cement or coloured grout to approval. Care must be taken to lay all courses perfectly horizontal and vertical. Cutting should be kept to a minimum and cut tiles should finish into the corners and the floor where possible.
10.2.8 Suspended Ceilings Setting out shall be carried out from the centre of the ceiling to ensure a satisfactory symmetrical pattern is achieved. Cutting should be carried out only to edge tiles. Work shall be carried out in such a manner that all self-finished tiles remain clean and undamaged, and dirty or damaged tiles will be replaced at the Contractors expense. 10.2.9 Expanded Metal Lathing Fixing of expanded metal lathing shall be by plaster or render dabs as applicable with the applied finish up to and into the lathing to finish neatly against the beads. 10.3.0 GYPSUM WORKS 10.3.1 Manufacture a) All materials shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, including their storage prior to use. Water used in the mixing of plaster shall not contain previously set particles of semi-hydrate plaster or salt and shall be clean and free from other deleterious materials. All reinforcing materials shall be fully wetted out with plaster. All units shall be fit for their design use i.e. sufficiently strong to be handled prior to fixing and remain rigid once fixed. The surface of each unit shall be smooth and uniform and free from any signs of exposed reinforcement. The surface shall not shell off when the unit is handled and maintain its integrity when pressed lightly. Units shall be straight and true. Variations in length of 2mm in 1metre are acceptable, whilst maintaining the aesthetic requirements of the design. All moulded or cast profiles/patterns shall be consistent, clean and sharp without distortion
b)
c) d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
10.3.2 Installation a) All units shall be installed in accordance with the design specification, using approved mechanical fixings Suspension shall be by British Gypsum MF system or other similar, corrosion free, suitable and approved system.
b)
c)
All joints to be prepared, matched and filled so that the joint becomes invisible. The pattern repeats are to be consistently jointed at the corners and centred on the room centre lines where possible, or matched where indicated on the drawings
d)
10.3.3 Protection The Contractor shall co-ordinate his work sequence with all other contractors to ensure that no damaged or defective work arises from his activities. After completion and approval He shall protect his works adequately from damage from any source, until handover.
End of Section
11.0 11.1
GLAZING Materials 11.1.1 Clear Float or Polished Plate Glass Clear float or polished plate glass shall comply with BS 952-1:1995 Table 1. The thickness shall be 6mm thick. 11.1.2 Clear Sheet Glass Clear sheet glass shall comply with BS 952-1:1995 Table 2 Ordinary Glazing Quality. The thickness shall be 4mm thick. 11.1.3 Cast Glass Cast glass shall comply with BS 952-1:1995 Table 4. The thickness shall be 4mm thick. 11.1.4 Wired Glass Wired glass shall comply with BS 952-1:1995 Table 4. The thickness shall be 6mm thick. 11.1.5 Mirrors The glass shall be 6mm thick silvering quality float glass silvered one side, copper backed, varnished and painted. Edges of mirrors shall be bevelled. The mirror shall be backed with 6mm plywood. 11.1.6 Putty a) Linseed oil putty for glazing to wood shall comply with BS 544:1969 tropical grade. Putty for glazing to metal windows shall be an approved tropical grade mastic putty used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommended by the window manufacturer.
b)
11.2
Workmanship 11.2.1 Preparation a) Before beginning work, the Contractor shall measure and inspect frames to receive glazing to determine that other trades have completed preparatory work and that sash and frames are ready to receive his materials. Frames and sash shall be adjusted, plumbed, and squared. All rivets, screws, bolts nail heads, welds, and other projections shall be finished flush in the glazing rebates. All corners and intersections shall be sealed and weathertight. Opening sashes shall be fastened and kept closed until glazing compounds, except non-setting type, have cured or set. Surfaces to receive glazing materials shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil and other foreign materials, and shall be painted or sealed, before glazing work is begun. Do not begin glazing work until all cleaning and repairing of surfaces has been completed. Aluminium glazed frames requiring dry glazing method shall be glazed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Cut glass accurately to fit openings. Sizes of glass indicated on drawings are approximate only, and the actual sizes required shall be determined by measuring on site the frames to receive the glass. Size glass to permit the required clearances around the full perimeter of the glass.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
11.2.2 Glazing a) The glass shall be cut to sizes with proper clearance and shall be well back puttied, sprigged for timber rebates or pegged for metal rebates and neatly front puttied. Putty must not appear above the sight lines. Glass to all windows and doors (except bathrooms and W.C.) shall be clear sheet glass or as specified. Glass to bathrooms and W.C.'s shall be an approved obscured glass or as specified. Glass shall be fitted in accordance with BS 6262:1982. Glass panes over 0.1m2 in metal windows for putty glazing shall be secured by means of spring glazing clips fixed in the preformed holes. Georgian wired glass shall have the wiring aligned vertically and horizontally one or both ways to adjacent glazed panels.
b) c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST e) The provision of glazing compounds and putties and springs, clips and other sundry fixings shall be included in the cost of glazing and of fixing of mirrors. Distance pieces and setting blocks in appropriate materials shall provided in accordance with good glazing practice and they shall be included in the cost of glazing.
f)
11.2.3 Mirrors Mirrors shall be fixed with rubber sleeves and chromium plated domeheaded screws into prepared plugs let into walls which shall be included in the cost of the mirrors. 11.2.4 Beads and Wash-Leather Glass to doors and screens and other places subject to vibration or as directed by the Engineer, shall be bedded in wash leather and fixed with beads. Where so specified the beads shall be fixed with brass cups and screws. The contractor shall allow for taking out and refixing beads as required. 11.2.5 Protection a) All glass shall be protected from damage until Practical Completion of the building and if glass is broken or defective it shall be removed and replaced with the specified type. Plaster, mortar, paint, excess sealant, putty etc., or any other material shall be removed immediately after contact with the glass and shall not be permitted to collect or remain on the glass surface. Remove all labels, excess glazing compounds, stains, and spots from glass on completion of glazing. Remove all rubbish and debris from the site at the end of each day's work. Clean compound smears and stains from adjacent surfaces as the work progresses. At the completion of the entire project, all glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed by a professional window cleaner.
b)
c)
d)
e)
End of Section
12.0 12.1
PAINTING AND DECORATING MATERIALS 12.1.1 General a) All colours and finishes are to be selected or approved by the Engineer and provision must be made for execution of patterns on trial areas on the site if required. Wherever possible all primers, undercoating and finishing paints shall be obtained from one manufacturer approved by the Engineer. Primers shall be those appropriate for the various kinds of building materials to which they are applied and shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Paints are to be used exactly as received in the sealed cans from the manufacturer in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The addition of thinners, dryers or other materials will only be permitted with the approval of the Engineer. The type of additive and the proportions for use shall be recommended by the manufacturer. Materials are to be thoroughly stirred in the original containers and must be used as delivered, not adulterated in any way or mixed with different types or brands and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. The Engineer shall be at liberty to take samples for the purpose of test analysis. The Contractor shall allow in his prices for the extra cost where small quantities only of a particular type or colour of materials are required. Undercoating shall be those recommended by the paint manufacturer as appropriate for the finishing coat used.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST i) Upon acceptance of his tender the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer for his approval. i) The name of the approved paint manufacturer whose products he proposes to use. The brand name or trade descriptions of the proposed paints.
ii) 12.1.2 Knotting
Knotting shall comply with BS 1336:1971.
12.1.3 Primers a) b) Primer for wood and ferrous metals shall comply with BS 5358:1993. For plaster, concrete, block work, ceiling boards etd., an Alkali resisting primer shall be used.
12.1.4 Stopping a) Stopping for plasterwork shall be an approved plaster or plastic based filler. Stopping for asbestos cement and asbestos based insulating board shall be a composition of asbestos filler and cement.
b)
12.1.5 Bituminous Paint Black bituminous paint shall comply with BS 3416:1991 Type 1 for general use. 12.1.6 Cement Based External Paint Cement based external paint shall be Sandtex Matt and shall comprise of a priming coat of stabilising solution and two coats of Sandtex Matt of approved colour applied by brush. 12.1.7 Waterproof and Chemical Resistant Paint Waterproof and chemical resistant paint shall be comprise a twin pack epoxy paint and shall be applied in two coats strictly in accordance with the Manufacturers instructions. 12.1.8 Paint Finish(Vandal Resistant) Flecked paint finish shall be Portaflek or similar approved and shall be finished in one coat with Portabond priming coat.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 12.1.9 Clear Finish Timber surfaces shall be finished with an approved clear matt lacquer. 12.1.10 Sundries White spirit shall comply with BS 245:1976. Paper hanging paste shall comply with BS 3046:1981. Colours for paint shall comply with BS 4800:1989. Stain for woodwork shall comply with BS 7779:1994 12.2 Workmanship 12.2.1 Generally a) b) All work shall be carried out in accordance with BS 6150:1991. Thinning of paint, shall only be carried out with the type of thinner and in the proportions recommended by the Manufacturer and after approval of the Engineer. Colours shall not be mixed except on the instructions and under the supervision of the Engineer. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied and surfaces shall be cleaned and rubbed down between each coat. No paint shall be applied to surfaces, structurally or superficially damp, and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from condensation, dirt etc., before the application of each coat. Paint shall show easy brushing, good flowing, spreading and levelling properties. These properties will be demonstrated on test specimens at the request of the Engineer. Coats that have any noticeable pull under a large brush and that show poor or fair spreading and flowing properties will not be acceptable. Paint shall dry to a uniform, smooth, gloss appearance under ordinary conditions of illumination and wearing. There shall be no laps, skips, high-lighted spots or brush marks. Tinted paints shall dry to a uniform colour. Recoating of a previously painted surface shall produce no lighting, softening or other film irregularities. All materials shall be kept in a clean, dry store so as to minimise exposure to extremes of temperature.
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
12.2.2 Acceptance of Surfaces
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Before proceeding with the application of Painting and Decorating the Contractor shall inspect all surfaces and determine that they are in a proper condition to receive decoration. The starting of painting operations will be construed as acceptance of such surfaces as being satisfactory, and any defects in work resulting from such accepted surfaces shall be corrected by the Contractor. All spaces shall be swept clean and all surfaces dry before painting is started. All dust, dirt, plaster, grease and other extraneous matter affecting the finish of work shall be removed. Foreign matter on surfaces shall be removed.
b)
c)
12.2.3 Preparation of Surfaces a) No finish shall be applied where room temperature is below 15 degrees Centigrade. Woodwork to be painted shall be cleaned down to remove dirt, grease etc., rubbed down or scraped smooth and dusted off. Knots and resinous areas shall be coated with knotting and allowed to harden before priming. When the primer is hard all cracks, nail holes, open joints and other imperfections shall be made good with stopping. When this stopping is hard the surfaces shall be rubbed down overall and all dust removed. Woodwork to receive a clear finish shall be cleaned down to remove dirt, grease, etc., rubbed down or scraped smooth and dusted off. In the case of teak, surfaces shall be cleaned with white spirit to remove free oil. The first coat of clear primer shall be applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions and allowed to dry. Any necessary making good shall then be carried out with a filler suitable for the type of finish or with stopping suitably tinted, rubbed down overall and all dust removed. Priming paint on joinery shall be applied on site after the Engineer has approved the joinery and before it is fixed. All items fabricated off site shall be primed in the factory. All woodwork shall be primed all round before fixing. Items of carpentry work, such as ends of roof timbers, which are to be built into walls shall first be treated with two coats of Creosote preservative. Asbestos cement and asbestos based insulating board surfaces to be painted shall have plaster or mortar splashes and the like carefully removed by scraping. Any oil or grease shall be removed with white spirit. All holes shall be stopped and all surfaces brushed down to remove dust and loose materials. Plastered, rendered, concrete block and brick surfaces to be painted shall have plaster or mortar splashes and the like carefully removed by scraping
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST or by the use of dilute hydrochloric acid. Holes and cracks etc., shall be stopped and allowed to dry out thoroughly and all surfaces cleaned down to remove dust and loose materials in addition all traces of mould oil shall be removed from concrete surfaces by scrubbing with sweet water and detergent and rinsing with clean sweet water. Any efflorescence shall be removed by wiping first with a dry, coarse cloth and then with a damp cloth, the surface then being left for forty-eight hours to see if the salts reappear. Painting should not be attempted until efflorescence has ceased. Oil paint on plastered or rendered surfaces will not be allowed unless the plaster or rendering had dried out. All surfaces shall be treated with a coat of alkali resisting priming paint, which shall be applied by brush and allowed a minimum period of twenty-four hours in which to harden thoroughly and a period of at least twenty four hours, or longer if necessary, shall be allowed between subsequent coats. g) Galvanised and zinc surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease, galvanic shine, and dirt before priming. Where rusting has occurred through damage to the galvanising, such rust shall be removed by wire brushing back to clean metal and galvanising made good with a rust inhibiting agent. The surface shall then be treated with one coat of epoxy primer 80 microns DFT. Primed metal surfaces shall be examined to ascertain that the priming paint is hard, firmly adhering and in good condition. If not satisfactory the priming paint shall be removed and the surfaces cleaned to remove rust, and reprimed. If the conditions of the priming paint is satisfactory, the surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt, minor damage to the priming paint being made good with red lead oxide priming paint after removal of rust. Unprimed and ungalvanised surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt, and wirebrushed, sand blasted and scraped to remove all rust and scale before applying red lead oxide priming paint. Priming paint shall be brushed well into the surface and shall be allowed to dry and harden thoroughly before the application of subsequent coats. Items of steelwork such as frames to roller shutters, covers to expansion joints etc., which are to be built into walls shall first be primed. Copper, lead aluminium and brass pipework shall have the surfaces slightly abraided with glasspaper and white spirit or similar solvent and wiped clean. The surface shall be further prepared with a zinc phosphate metal primer prior to finishing with two coats of eggshell paint. Steel pipes will be treated as for steelwork with the exception that galvanised pipes are to be treated with a zinc-chromate priming paint. Coated soil pipes shall be wiped clean and treated with two coats of knotting followed by priming paint.
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST o) All scratches, cuts, cracks and abrasions in cement plaster surfaces shall be cut out as required, then filled with approved patching cement (epoxy, acrylic or polyurethane) flush with adjoining surfaces and when dry shall be sanded and sealed before application of priming coat. The Contractor shall touch-up finished coats of factory finished coats of factory finished items that become damaged before completion of the building. Sand damaged areas smooth and apply specified primer before applying finishing coat. Where spot touch up cannot be done neatly and blended smooth with other finish material repaint the entire surface or panel as approved by the Engineer.
p)
12.2.4 Quality of Work a) All painting shall be carefully carried out and left perfect on completion. No paint spots shall be left on glass, hardware or other finished work. All materials shall be applied by skilled tradesmen and all paint shall be evenly spread and thoroughly brushed out. Finished surfaces shall be uniform in gloss, finish and color and shall be free from brush or roller marks. The applicator shall properly prepare all surfaces before painting by cutting, stopping, filling etc., to insure a smooth uniform surface. All cutting to line and all lines of demarcation between paints of different colours or shades shall be carefully drawn so as to be true and free from blurred edges. No claim concerning the unsuitability of any material specified or ability to produce first class work with same will be entertained after the contract is signed. Before application, materials in containers shall be thoroughly stirred, unless otherwise directed, to ensure uniformity of colour and mass, and all paint skins or other materials which would cause lumps or roughness shall be strained out. Materials shall be applied without the additions of any ingredients and without reducing or thinning except as recommended by the manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Engineer. The finishing coat of paint to walls and ceilings shall be applied after the completion of testing of the electrical installation. Any paint splashed on electrical fittings, switches, sockets, outlets etd., shall be carefully cleaned off. Every possible precaution shall be taken to keep down dust before and during painting processes. No paint shall be applied to surfaces structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from condensation, efflorescence etc., before the application of each coat.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Primed or undercoated woodwork and metalwork should not be left in an exposed or unsuitable situation for any undue period before completing the painting process. No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions, such as rain, extreme humidity, dust storms etc. Metal fittings such as ironmongery etc., not required to be painted shall first be fitted and then removed before the preparatory processes are commenced. When all paintings are completed the fittings shall be cleaned and refixed in position. The Contractor will be required to repaint at his own expense any work on which the paint is found to be incorrectly applied. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting from damage the paintwork and all other work during and after painting operations including the provision of all necessary dust sheets, covers etc. Each succeeding coat of priming and undercoating paint shall be sufficiently different in colour to be readily distinguishable. Brushes, pails, paintspots, etc., used in carrying out the work shall be cleaned and free from foreign matter. They shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classes of materials. The use of kerosene (paraffin) in painting work is FORBIDDEN and its use by workmen as thinners or for cleaning brushes etc., must be prevented by the Contractor. All paintwork that is contaminated by kerosene will be rejected and must be removed and repainted according to the Specification. Primers shall be applied by brush; roller or spray to ensure an even finish. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied. The work shall be well rubbed down between each coat and cleaned off. No priming coats shall be applied until the surfaces have been inspected and the preparatory work approved by the Engineer. No undercoats or finishing coats shall be applied until the previous coat has been similarly inspected and approved. Remove blisters or other imperfections in previous coats caused by foreign substances or paint skins from all painted surfaces before the subsequent coat is applied. All wood and metal surfaces shall be rubbed down before finishing and between coats with fine sandpaper or steel wool, leaving a perfectly clean surface. Smooth finished surfaces shall be sanded before finishing and between coats as required to smooth out rough areas and to ensure a smooth, even finish. All surfaces to receive paint shall be smooth and free of all sandpaper scratches, millmarks, and other imperfections, and except for coats applied in the shop, shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before application of primer and subsequent coats.
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST o) All hidden, stained and natural finished woodwork shall be back sealed with one (1) coat of approved clear sealer finish. All hidden exterior or interior painted woodwork shall be painted with one coat of approved primer. Edges of fixtures, equipment, and other material shall be painted or sealed where they present an unfinished appearance.
End of Section
13.0
SPECIALIST PAINTING, DECORATING & GOLD PLATING
13.1. Material 13.1.1 General Clause 11.1 Section 1 shall apply equally in total. 13.1.2. Etching Primer Etching Primer shall be of an approved manufacturer complying with the approved BS. 13.1.3 Rust Inhibitors Rust inhibitors shall be of approved manufacture. 13.1.4 Knotting Knotting shall comply with B.S. 1336:1971. 13.1.5 Stopping (Woodwork) a) Stopping for woodwork to receive clear finish shall be tinted to match surrounding woodwork, to approval. Stopping for internal woodwork, plywood, hardboard and fibreboard shall be linseed oil putty to B.S. 544:1969, tinted to match the colour of the undercoat. Stopping for external woodwork shall be white lead paste and gold size well mixed.
b)
c)
13.1.6 Thinners
Refer to Clause 11.1 Section 13 Sundries. 13.1.7 Stain Stain for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil stain complying with B.S. 7779:1994. 13.1.8 Polyurethane Lacquer a) b) Polyurethane lacquer for woodwork shall be of an approved manufacture. Finished - Gloss or matt to Engineer's approval.
13.1.9 Varnish Varnish for interior woodwork shall be an approved brand, oil varnish. Varnish shall form a hard flexible transparent and quick drying film. Craig and Rose extra pale eggshell varnish or similar approved. 13.1.10 Linseed Oil Linseed Oil for woodwork shall comply with BS 6900:1987. 13.1.11 Priming/Undercoating The following materials shall be used for priming/undercoating: a) b) For woodwork an Alkyd based primer. For steelwork an epoxy based aluminium primer at 200mic. DFT(from a manufacturer specified by the architect or engineer). The above should be applied to a surface which has been powertool cleaned to a minimum St2 standard. For galvanized iron or aluminium work following a high pressure fresh water wash the surface should be degreased with an Alkali degreaser and washed. When thoroughly dry a two pack Zinc Phosphate pigmented epoxy primer (from a manufacturer specified by the architect or engineer) should be applied in one coat 80mic. DFT, followed by one coat of Hibuild Polyamide based epoxy coating (from a manufacturer specified by the architect or engineer) to 100mic DFT. For concrete, block work, plaster, plasterboard use an Acrylic Primer/Undercoat.
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST e) Sizing - Le Franc + Bourgeouis 24 hour size to be tinted with J.Keep intenso colour or similar approved.
All the above to be applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 13.1.12 Finishing Paints The following materials shall be used for finishing: a) b) c) Alkyd Eggshell. Co-Polymer based emulsion, silk or matt finish. For steelwork; galvanized or aluminium work a two pack Polyurethane top coat at 50mic. DFT(from a manufacturer specified by the architect or engineer). Gold Leaf Gilding 23 carat gold leaf. Transparent oil glaze for use with stainers for producing special broken colour effects. Stainers - good quality artists oil paint. Pigments which are affected by acid conditions should be avoided.
d) e) f)
All the above to be applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 13.1.13 Alkyd Based Paint Systems An alkyd based system shall be made up of the following layers: i) ii) iii) iv) v) A bare dust free previously painted surface or a solvent based primer to a new surface. Stucco filler to make good. One Alkyd based thinned undercoat. Two coats of Alkyd based Eggshell; Matt or Gloss to Architects requirements. Where the surface is to receive decorative finish Eggshell shall be used as for item iv) above.
13.1.14 Water Based Paint Systems Water based systems shall be made up of the following layers:i) ii) iii) iv) 13.2 One coat of PVA primer. Stucco filler to make good. One thinned (mist) coat of emulsion. Two top coats of first quality washable emulsion paint.
Workmanship
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 13.2.1 General a) All work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. Before application of any paint or finish all surfaces shall be cleaned, dried and prepared as specified herein after. The contractor shall coordinate work to ensure that factory primed items are primed or painted as required in the Specifications. All metal fittings such as hardware and fastenings, etc., not required to be painted shall first be fitted and then removed before the preparatory processes are commenced. When all painting is completed the fittings shall be cleaned and refixed in position. Before painting floors must be washed and every possible precaution shall be taken to keep down dust before and during the painting processes. No paint shall be applied to surfaces structurally or superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from condensation, efflorescence, etc., before the application of each coat. No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions such as rain, extreme humidity, dust storms, high temperature of surface etc. All coats of paint must be thoroughly dry before subsequent coats are applied and rubbed down with fine waterproof abrasive paper where necessary. All coating shall be well applied, leaving no sags, laps, brush or other defects. Each coat must thoroughly dry before next coat is applied. All work must be carefully cut into a true line and left smooth and clean. Details of mixing and application shall be in accordance with the Specifications of the manufacturer concerned and to the approval of the Engineer. The mixing of paint, etc. of different brands before or during application will not be permitted. No dilution of painting materials shall be allowed except strictly as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved by the Engineer. On surfaces which are not accessible to paint brushes, paint shall be applied by spraying or with sheep skin daubers. All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly covered with paint. Brushes, pails, kettles and all other tools and equipment used in carrying out the work shall be maintained in good working order and shall be clean and free from foreign matter. They shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classes of materials.
b) c)
d)
e)
f)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST m) The Contractor will be required to repaint, at his own expense any work on which the paint is found to be incorrectly applied. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting from damage the paint work and all other work during and after necessary dust sheets, covers etc. All paint droppings shall be cleaned up as the work proceeds. All loose and defective paint shall be removed from previously painted surfaces before repainting. All burning off must be done by skilled workmen. The blow-lamp must be used on surfaces adjoining glass.
n)
13.2.2 Painting to Concrete, Blockwork or Plaster a) Concrete, block work and plaster surfaces to be painted or decorated shall have all cracks cut out and made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Plasterboard surfaces shall have taped joints and the surface puttied to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surfaces shall be completely dry and shall be brushed free of impurities immediately prior to the commencement of the painting work. Efflorescence shall be completely removed by rubbing down and dry coarse cloths followed by wiping down with damp cloths and allowed to dry. All surfaces shall be rubbed down with fine glass paper and brushed free of dust before applying any form of decoration. Concrete block work and plastered surfaces which are to receive paint shall be given one thin coat of oil putty and allowed to dry for at least two days. The surfaces shall then be rubbed down with fine glass paper and given a second thin coat of oil putty and when completely set shall be rubbed down again with fine glass paper before applying the priming coat of paint. Emulsion paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of: i) ii) e) Internally one primer coat and three coats of interior quality paint. Externally one primer coat and three coats of exterior quality paint.
b)
c)
a)
Oil paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of 1 coat primer coat, 1 coat alkali primer, two undercoats and one finishing coat of paint, unless using a manufacturer's proprietary system. For each application of Specification a performance sample of not less than 2m2 or as agreed by Engineer will be executed for approval by Engineer.
f)
13.2.3 Varnishing a) All surfaces to be varnished shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned and sanded down and all holes or similar defects shall be filled and levelled up with approved hard stopping. Sanding shall follow the line of the grain. Knots shall be treated with two coats of knotting.
b)
One coat of clear varnish shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer.
13.2.4 Painting to Woodwork a) b) c) Woodwork to be painted shall be cleaned of impurities. Knot shall be treated with two coats of knotting. Priming paint shall be applied by brush. Two coats shall be applied to end grain. Priming paint shall be applied on site after the Engineer has approved the joinery and before it is fixed. When the priming paint is dry, all cracks, holes, open joints and the like shall be filled with stopping and rubbed down with fine glass paper. Two undercoats and two finishing coats of paint shall be applied by brush or spray unless otherwise specified. The priming paint and undercoats shall be lightly rubbed down with glass paper to remove blemishes, and all dust removed before the application of subsequent coats.
d)
e)
f)
13.2.5 Painting to Metalwork a) Steelwork delivered to the site unprimed shall be cleaned of impurities as described in Clause 12.1.11 Section c). Steelwork delivered to the site primed shall be cleaned of impurities and damage to the priming paint and made good with priming paint. Galvanized metalwork to be painted shall be cleaned of impurities, where rusting has occurred the rust shall be removed by wire brush. Priming and finishing shall be as previously described in Clauses 12.1.11 and 12, Sections c) in both cases. Metalwork which is concealed shall be prepared and primed as above and shall be painted in accordance with Clause 12.1.11 Section b) and Clause 12.1.12 Section c).
b)
c)
d)
13.3
Specialist Finishing 13.3.1 Tinted Glazes a) Preparation of tinted glazing to be carried out using special transparent oil glaze with tinting stainers. Care must be taken to mix adequate quantities to do complete areas required to ensure proper colour matching.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) In general glaze should be tinted as strongly as possible and applied as sparingly as possible to achieve the desired effect. For paler tints stainer should be carried in on appriate amount of oil based white undercoat. The addition of stainer should never be less than 2% by volume unless reduced with white. Glaze should never be used unthined, but do not overthin which will cause flocculation of the pigments. Drying time is 7 to 10 hours but this may be retarded by thinning with a mixture of white spirit and acid refined linseed oil in the ratio of 2:1 parts.
c)
d)
e)
13.3.2 Textured Finishes a) Dragging (Brush Graining) Clean dry graining or dragging brush is drawn through glaze while still wet. Wipe surplus material from brush after each stroke. b) Rag Rolling or Ragging A lint free rag, such as cotton sheeting, should be crumpled up and rolled over the surface of the wet glaze to partially remove the glaze to create the effect required. Initially the rag should be dipped in white spirit and wrung out. New areas of the rag should be used as it becomes soaked with the glaze. The cloth may be rinsed in white spirit and wrung out periodically. c) Wiping This is used if the base surface is textured and highlights are required. A lint free rag as for item b) is used to wipe the glaze off the surface to highlight the raised areas of the texture. d) Stippling Pound the wet glaze with a stippling brush drawing the glaze with tiny points. Wipe the brush frequently. e) Marblising Apply glazes to surface to be marblised in various colours and artwork to create colours and grain of effect required. Each coat should dry before application of a further coat or colour. 13.3.3 Protection
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) If additional protection to the glazed surface is required the following should be applied : i) For surfaces experiencing light wear and tear - one coat of emulsion glaze coat - matt, eggshell or gloss depending on the desired effect. For surfaces experiencing heavy wear and tear - 2 coats Pale scumble varnish.
ii)
13.3.4 Gold Leafing i) Apply one coat of shellac or varnish coating as a sealant before sizing. Selected areas of friezes and mouldings to be prepared for gold leafing by sizing areas to be gold leafed, then apply 23 1/4 carat 25 micron gold leaf whilst still wet. Excess gold leafing to be brushed off after sizing dry. German Gold Leaf or British Gold Leaf to approvals.
ii)
iii) 13.4 Gold Plating
13.4.1 All Ironmongery, Sanitary Accessories and Electrical Switch Plates: a) b) Internal Use 5 micron 22.5.carat over 30 microns of nickel plating. External Use 10 micron 22.5 carat over 30 microns of nickel plating.
13.4.2 Light Fittings All exposed brass shall be finished with 0.5 micron 23 carat gold plating over 30 microns of nickel plating, which is to be guaranteed against any tarnishing for a minimum period of five years. .
End of Section
14.0.0 MARBLE & GRANITE WORK 14.0.1 General a) The material shall be from an approved source of the best type and shall conform to relevant British and American Standards. The works comprise of all works required for the supply and installation of marble and granite, including completion and maintenance. Marble/granite in floors, skirting, stair treads/risers, walls or elsewhere shall be as shown on the Design/Contract Marble Layout Drawings, which are intended to show design intent. The Marble Contractor shall co-ordinate his work sequence with all other contractors to ensure that no damaged or defective work arises from his activities. After completion and approval He shall protect his works adequately from damage from any source, until handover.
b)
c)
d)
14.0.2 Shop Drawings a) A site survey shall be carried out by the contractor and shop drawings shall be prepared for the works. The Contractor shall submit drawings for the approval of the Engineer prior to ordering or commencing the works. The Contractor shall prepare full size detailed Working Drawings showing all points of construction and setting out of the marble in accordance with the specification and design intent.
b)
c)
Unless otherwise specifically required in the drawings or Specification, shop drawings shall be supplied in two copies. Shop drawings shall be approved or returned to the Contractor for alteration or amendment. The drawings shall be resubmitted after carrying out the necessary alterations and amendments.
d)
14.0.3 Samples a) The Contractor shall submit samples, normally a minimum tile size of 400 X 400 X 20mm thickness, for the Interior Designers approval of every type of marble/granite required for the project. Upon receipt of approval the block slabs shall be clearly marked with the project reference and set aside for the works. The Contractor shall lodge control samples of each item with the Engineer and work shall be carried out in accordance with these approved samples. For external and non ID walls and floors see Clause 13.1.1 para f).
b)
Marble marquetry pattern samples listed on a separate schedule shall be treated in a similar manner to a) above. 14.0.4 Programme The Contractor shall prepare a programme for the works. Receipt of programme by the Engineer shall neither affect the Contract completion date nor relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to complete the Works by that date. 14.1.0 MATERIAL 14.1.1 Marbles/granite a) The marble specified on the drawings shall be 20mm thick for flooring and wall marble slabs and elsewhere to the thicknesses indicated on the Design Drawings. All exposed faces shall be polished to high gloss unless otherwise specified before delivery to site. Arises shall be sharp and true, square and continuous with adjoining arises. The following tolerances shall be considered: Slab dimensions Slab deviation plane Arises deviation d) + 0.5 mm 1/500 + 0.5 mm
c)
b)
c)
Slabs shall be sound, of uniform appearance and shall be free from holes, seams, shakes, pockets, spalls, stains, starts, and other defects which would impair the strength, durability or appearance of the work.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST e) Marble/Granite of the same type but with distinctly different colour or texture shall be rejected out right. Marble shall be uniform in colour, without excessive veining and shall match the samples submitted and approved by the Engineer. For floor and wall cladding the Contractor shall submit four (4) samples (400x400 mm size) of required thickness of each type of marble/granite of the best quality specified. One of the samples shall be the type to be incorporated in the works. The others three shall indicate the closest variation in type, colour, vein and general appearance of the material. Powder used for inlay shall be marble stone powder with resin adhesive. All sheets, bars, plates, fasteners, anchor bolts, nuts/washers, etc. required for mechanical anchorage shall be of stainless steel and details of each item shall be clearly illustrated in shop drawings and samples submitted for approval. The slabs of marble/granite shall be of the shape and size shown in the drawings and shall follow the shop drawings approved by the Engineer. Slabs for stair treads, risers, skirting etc., shall be supplied with rounded/profiled edges, grooves of all dimensions/types shown in the drawings. Where there is a change in floor finish from marble internally in dry areas there shall be a brass threshold strip of 5mm visible thickness which, shall be to the overall depth of the marble and its adhesive. It shall be secured to the screed and shall be positioned centrally on the door leaf thickness. Where there is a change of material finish or level into wet floor areas or in external use, the dividing strip shall be of stainless steel. The Contractor shall take adequate steps to ensure that all materials are carefully stored to prevent damage. If any material arrives at site damaged, the supplier shall be notified for immediate replacement. Materials shall not be allowed to come into contact with oil, grease, smoke or wash from concrete construction. The material shall be stored in a dry area on raised platform and shall be covered with tarpaulin or similar material until required for use.
f)
g) h)
i)
j)
k)
14.2.0 WORKMANSHIP 14.2.1 Laying and Fixing The laying and fixing of marble/granite slabs shall be carried out with best trade practices with masons specialised in marble/granite laying and fixing. a) Marble/granite shall be thoroughly soaked in clean fresh water. The marble/granite slabs are to be uniformly buttered by a brush application of two coats of waterproof cement based coating to the underside face like THOROSEAL or approved equivalent product. The thickness of
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST brushcrete coating must not be less than 2mm. The second coat should be applied as soon as the first coat is dry enough to take the second coat and should normally be within 12 hours. Whit marble shall be coated on the rear face with white coloured THOROSEAL. All edge thicknesses of all cut marble/granite pieces shall be treated with a waterproof clear sealant from a proprietary manufacturer and applied by brush as specified by the suppliers. b) Marble/granite slabs for floors, treads, copings etc., shall be laid strictly in accordance with approved setting out/shop drawings. The slabs shall be bedded on white cement mortar which in turn is laid on a 1:3 cement sand semi dry mix layer well compacted to the base structure. The layer shall be of uniform or varying thickness as shown in the drawings. The mortar to which slabs shall be laid shall contain a suitable additive like ACRYL 60 or approved equivalent product to improve the workability, mechanical and chemical properties. The mortar bed shall be uniformly distributed with a dentelled spatula to ensure maximum support to the pavers. For fixing marble/granite slabs to the walls suitable mechanical anchorage system shall be adopted. All accessories of the mechanical anchorage shall be of stainless steel and shall conform to relevant British and American Codes. No part of the anchorage system shall penetrate flashing, gutter or other elements of drainage system. i Marble/granite slabs shall be laid on the floor internally with joints as detailed on the drawings. Externally where partially or completely exposed to the elements tiles shall have 2mm X 2mm chamfered edges and the joint width shall be 3mm to 4mm unless otherwise stated. Once the mortar bed has dried all joints shall be filled with a waterproof non-shrink mortar prepared with water, ACRYL 60 or approved equivalent and neat cement. Approved pigment may be used in cement to match colour of marble/granite.
c)
d)
ii
e)
Unless specified otherwise in external works, 10mm wide expansion joints shall be provided at intervals so that no panel is more than approx 3m x 3m in area in exposed locations. The contractor shall obtain specific approval from the Engineer where the joint width is less than 10mm or the panel size is larger than 3m. The expansion joints shall be sealed by BOSTON KIBOSEAL 96 or approved equivalent product. The level of sealant shall be 2 mm lower than the finished surface. For internal works a proprietary expansion/movement junction bar such as Tilock or approved equivalent shall be used with brass channel for internal dry areas and stainless steel for wet or external floors. The colour of the neoprene infill shall match or complement the marble colour.
f)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST g) Cut outs in marble/granite slabs for switch plates, socket outlets, etc., shall be cut with a rebated edge to allow face plates to finish flush with the finished surface. All cut edges shall be treated with waterproof sealant as described in 13.2.1 a). Fixing holes and mortices shall be obtained by careful drilling to avoid stunning or fracture of the marble adjacent to the hole or mortice. The marble/granite slabs shall be ordered in sizes exact or as near as the sizes indicated in the drawings to avoid additional cutting at site. Prior to actual execution of floor marble/granite in a room area, the pieces shall be dry laid for approval of the Engineer. When approved all the pieces shall be numbered, directional arrow indicated and this information added to a tiling plan to correspond to the approved dry lay. All external floor marble and/or granite, whether in a colonnade or fully exposed , shall be laid to falls of 1:100 away from the building or structure (unless otherwise stated) to ensure proper drainage. The area where marble/granite laying or cladding to wall is in progress shall be properly shaded. The area shall be covered with non staining cloth to prevent quick drying of the mortar bed. Wetting shall be ensured for at least 24 hours after the installation. After completion of setting, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned with water and detergent that contains no caustic or harsh fillers. The scrubbing shall be carried out with fibre brushes. No wire brush or acid solution shall be permitted. Upon completion all work shall be left clean and free from stains or traces of cleaning fluid, all joints pointed to the satisfaction of Engineer. All finished work shall be protected with polythene sheet, 50mm polystyrene board, 12 mm plywood and layer of gypsum as per the best trade practices approved by the Engineer. On final completion and before handing over the work the contractor shall carry out crystallization / vitrification of all floor and walls with appropriate chemicals as specified to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
End of Section
15.0 15.1
EXTERNAL WORKS General 15.1.1 Specification to Other Work Sections The Specification for the preceding work sections shall apply to this work section so far as is consistent with the clauses following:
15.2
Material 15.2.1 Desert Fill a) Desert fill in making up levels except next to buildings and under pavements and roads shall be selected graded hard granular fill free from clay and deleterious substances. Filling shall be compacted to at least ninety five percent of the maximum dry density as determined in accordance with the procedures given in BS 1377-4:1990. Each compacted layer shall be tested and approved in writing by the Engineer prior to the laying of the subsequent layer. The above operation shall be continued until the fill layers reach the required levels.
b)
15.2.2 Precast Concrete Kerbs and Edgings

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Precast concrete kerbs and edgings shall be hydraulically pressed and shall comply with BS 7263-1:1994. The cement used in the manufacture shall be sulphate resisting. Sizes, sections and standard transverse strengths shall be as stated below: i) 175 x 250mm half batter kerbs, batter section to be in accordance with Figure 7 BS 7263-1:1994. Transverse strength of kerbs when tested in accordance with BS 7263-1:1994 shall not be less than 26.15 KN. 50 x 150mm Edging to be in accordance with Figure 12 BS 72631:1994 with chamfers to top edges.
b)
ii)
iii)
15.2.3 Precast Concrete Paving Slabs Precast concrete paving slabs shall be hydraulically pressed and shall comply with BS 7263-1:1994. Slabs shall be 600 x 600 x 50mm thick or as shown on drawings. 15.3 Road works 15.3.1 Bituminous Paving Pavements for roads and parking areas shall conform to the Specifications issued by Directorate General of Roads (DGR), Ministry of Communications(MOC). The formation of the tarmac roads and car parking areas are to be well compacted to the required levels. After trimming the line and levels the formation is to be well consolidated by mechanical plant to a density such that subsequent rolling of the foundation stone does not produce further settlement. 15.3.2 Sub - Base The material for sub-base shall be washed gravel or crushed rock aggregate Class A (Maximum Size of Aggregate = 65mm), Class B (MSA =50mm) or class C (MSA = 25mm) conforming to DGR, MOC Specifications. The minimum thickness of sub-base shall not be less than 150mm. 15.3.3 Bituminous Prime Coat This work shall consist of applying a liquid asphalt prime coat on previously constructed sub-base. The material shall consist of medium - curing cut back asphalt conforming to grade MC-70. The application rate shall vary from minimum 0.8kg/m2 to maximum 1.2kg/m2. The prime coat shall be maintained until covered by the surface course.
15.3.4 Bituminous Tack Coat Prior to the placing of bituminous mixture, a tack coat shall be applied to the existing surface at a rate of application not exceeding 0.25kg/m2. Liquid asphalt for tack coat shall be rapid-curing type cutback grade RC-250 or emulsified asphalt (SS-1) conforming to DGR, MOC Specifications. 15.3.5 Bituminous Base Course a) b) The thickness of base course shall not be less than 30mm. The crushed rock aggregate for base course shall be DGR, MOC Class A (MSA = 40mm) or Class B (MSA = 25mm). The asphalt for bituminous base course shall be petroleum asphalt cement grade 60-70 penetration conforming to DGR, MOC Specifications. The asphalt shall not foam when heated to 180 C. The quantity of asphaltic binder shall be between 3 to 5 percent by weight.
c)
15.3.6 Bituminous Wearing Course a) b) The thickness of wearing course shall not be less than 20mm The crushed rock aggregate for wearing course shall be DGR, MOC Class A (MSA = 20mm), Class B (MSA = 20mm same as Class A but containing more finer components) or Class C (MSA = 12.5mm). The asphalt cement for wearing course shall be grade 60 - 70 penetration similar to that used for bituminous base course. The quantity of asphaltic binder shall be between 4 to 6 percent by weight.
c)
15.3.7 Bituminous Surface Treatment a) This work shall consist of a wearing surface composed of one (single surface treatment) or two (double surface treatment) application of bituminous binder with each receiving an application of cover material in accordance with DGR, MOC Specifications. The bituminous binder shall be medium curing cutback asphalt grade MC 3000 or other approved binder applicable for bituminous wearing course. The cover material for surface treatment shall be crushed rock aggregate of the same quality as that used for base or wearing course.
b)
c)
15.3.8 Single Surface Treatment Bituminous Binder : Aggregate Class :

1.30 - 1.90 kg/m2 A (MSA = 20mm)

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST A1 (MSA = 12.5mm) 100-65sq.m/cu.mof aggregate.
Aggregate Coverage: 15.3.9 Double Surface Treatment a) First Course
Bituminous binder : 1.10-1.70 kg/m2 Aggregate Class : MSA = 25mm Aggregate Coverage : 80 - 55 sq.m/cu.m of aggregate b) Second Course Bituminous binder : 1.20-1.80 kg/m2 Aggregate Class : MSA = 12.5mm Aggregate Coverage : 165-110 sq.m/cu.m of aggregate c) For both single surface treatment and double surface treatment the specific rates of application of bituminous material and aggregate will be established by the Engineer from a test section as directed by the Engineer. Chain Link Fencing a) Chain link fencing shall be galvanised plastic coated complying with BS 1722-1:1999Type PLS 180, 1800m high heavy duty pattern. Gates and gate posts shall comply with BS 1722-1:1999 Supplement I. The gate posts shall be constructed with RSJs and the gates shall be constructed with galvanised rectangular hollow sections coated with approved anti corrosion paint. Anti-Intruder chain link fencing and gates shall comply with BS 1722 -10:1999. They shall be 2400mm high with galvanised mild steel posts. Gate posts shall be constructed with galvanised rectangular hollow sections coated with approved anti corrosion paint. Where shown gates shall have 100 x 6mm mild steel flat bar track curved to radius of gate and bedded in concrete foundation. The gate shall be fitted with a mild steel roller.
15.3.10.
b)
c)
d)
15.3.11
Landscaping a) Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, part of the elements of which are derived from organic sources. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorous and potash shall be 5% nitrogen, 10% phosphorous and 5% potash by weight or as approved by the Engineer.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) Fertilizer shall be delivered, mixed as specified, in standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. The fertilizer shall be stored in a weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its effectiveness will not be impaired. Manure shall be screened manure. It shall be aged a minimum of six months and be free from noxious weeds, straw and other objectionable materials and chemicals. Soil used for general planting (including lawns), planters over structure and plant pits on grade shall be a thoroughly mixed composite consisting or 2 parts sweet soil to 1 part manure.
d)
e)
15.4
Workmanship 15.4.1 Excavation On completion of the excavation and earth filling, the whole of the surface to be paved shall be consolidated to the required levels and contours with a roller or mechanical rammer to the compaction required, care being taken that no damage is done to the adjoining work. 15.4.2 Sub-Bases and Road Bases a) All sub-bases and road bases shall be laid in layers not exceeding 150mm in thickness, each layer consolidated to ensure a minimum compaction of 98%. The consolidation shall be carried out with a roller or mechanical rammer to the required compaction, care being taken that no damage is done to the adjoining work. The finished surface of the base shall conform to the levels shown on the drawings within the limits of 12mm, any making up necessary to achieve these limits shall be carried out by rolling material approved by the Engineer. All the works starting from the preparation of sub-grade to finishing with wearing course shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements laid down in DGR, MOC Specifications.
b)
c)
15.4.3 Laying Precast Concrete Kerbs and Edgings a) Precast concrete kerbs, edgings and channels (kerbs laid on reverse face) shall be laid and bedded in a layer of cement sand mortar (1:3) not less than 10mm thick and not more than 40mm thick on a concrete foundation. The foundation for 250 x 175mm kerbs shall be 450 x 150mm and for 150 x 50mm kerbs shall be 300 x 75mm. Kerbs shall be backed and haunched with concrete. For radii of 12m or less, kerbs of appropriate length shall be used as follows:
b)
i) ii)
3m - 12m Less than 3m
Half Kerbs One third Kerbs
Any unit of kerb or edging deviating more than 3mm in 3m from line and level shall be made good by lifting and re-laying. 15.4.4 Laying Precast Concrete Paving Slabs a) Precast concrete slabs shall be laid on a hardcore sub-base at least 150mm thick. Slabs shall be laid to the required falls and cross falls and bedded on 50mm thick sand or using 5 pats of mortar not less than 150mm diameter for each slab. On circular work where the radius is 12m or less all slabs shall be radially cut out, each edge to the required line. The joints shall be grouted with mortar and shall be uniform in width and not exceeding 12mm.
b)
c)
d)
15.4.5 Chain Link Fencing a) Chain link fencing and gates shall be erected in accordance with BS 17221:1999. Anti-Intruder chain link fencing and gates shall be erected in accordance with BS 1722-10:1999. The fence shall be erected so as to be true to the lines indicated on the drawings and the top of complete fencing should follow the average profiles of the existing ground. All standards and posts except the gate-posts shall be lowered in hole 450mm diameter x 750mm deep and concreted in after the alignments and verticality have been checked. Before placing concrete the excavations should be lined with polythene sheeting. Where the ground cannot be excavated to required dimensions, footings shall be formed. Forms shall be removed 24 hours after concrete has been placed and the footing backfilled with suitable material placed in layers of 100mm and thoroughly tamped. Backfill materials shall be thoroughly moistened at the time it is placed.
b)
c)
d)
e)
15.4.6 Backfilling of Excavations other than Sewer Trench After the works constructed in pits or trenches have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all pipes, conduits and cables shall be surrounded in soft sand at least 150mm thick all round. Conduits, cables and the like shall have
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a precast concrete cable cover to BS 2484:1985 laid on top before final backfilling. The remaining backfilling will be carried out with selected approved excavated material free from lumps, stones and vegetable matter. This shall be placed in layers and thoroughly rammed to a compacted thickness of 150mm for each layer. Backfilling on all sides of the works constructed shall be kept evenly distributed to avoid damage to the works. In particular no boulders or large stones shall be allowed to bear on the sides of the works constructed. Backfilling shall be completed to a level flush with the top level of the works constructed or as instructed by the Engineer. 15.4.7 Landscaping a) A sample of agricultural soil shall be submitted for approval and all materials delivered to the site must conform to the sample. Any soil delivered to the site which is not up to approved standards must be removed off the site by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer. The area is to be cultivated to the full depth of the agricultural soil or to a minimum thickness of 150mm. Cultivations must be carried out right up to kerbs, fences and other boundaries. Where mechanical cultivators cannot be used the work is to be carried out to the same depth by hand. All rubbish, large stones and weed roots shall be gathered and removed from site to an approved disposal area. The area is to be graded to remove all irregularities and produce evenly running falls. The end result of this operation must not reduce the approved depth of agricultural soil. Finished levels shall be 25mm above all surrounding finished levels. The top 75mm of agricultural soil to be cultivated to produce fine tilth suitable for seed sowing. The tilth must be of even texture throughout, free from bumps, hard areas and soft pockets. All stones over 50mm diameter shall be removed from site to an approved disposal area. The Engineer must be notified when these operations are taking place and his approval must be obtained before seed can be sown or siblings planted.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
15.4.8 Grass Grass shall be as approved by the Engineer and siblings shall be planted at 150mm centres in both directions. 15.4.9 Preparation for Shrubs and Trees a) The following depths of top soil for shrubs and trees are required:AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST i) ii) iii) b) Shrubs Trees in standard pits Trees in bed : 450mm : 900mm : 900mm.
The shrub base below the planting area must be left graded to a proper level free from rubbish and broken up to a depth of 150mm. When tree pits are required the Engineer must be informed when they have been excavated so that he can approve them before they are backfilled.
c)
15.4.10 Staking Trees a) The stakes shall be 2500mm long x 76mm diameter. They shall be of hardwood, with the bark peeled off and with one pointed end. The stakes must be treated with a preservative which will not harm the plants. The stakes are to be driven into the ground before the tree is planted. The top of the stake must be just below the first branch of the tree.
b)
15.4.11 Planting Trees a) A hole to be excavated which will hold the tree roots without cramping or bending and allow the tree to sit to the same depth as in the nursery. On exposed sites the tree shall be placed on the side of the stake away from the prevailing wind. On other sites the tree shall be placed on the side of the stake nearest to the main viewpoint. The soil must be worked round the roots as backfilling proceeds. The soil shall be firmed up removing any air pockets as backfilling proceeds. Holes must not be filled up completely in one operation and only tramped on top.
b)
c)
15.4.12 Tying Trees a) The ties are to be of rubber with a solid rubber spacer, hollowed on two sides and twice slotted for tie. The ties are to be strapped around the tree and the spacer and nailed to the stake. Two ties are to be used per tree. One to be placed 50mm below the top of the stake and the other 450mm above ground level.
b)
15.4.13 Planters a) Where a planter is constructed attached to and as part of fabric as a feature, it shall be fitted with a glass reinforced Liners applied directly to the surface of the planter are not they do not allow for building movement and can fail in settlement. the building plastic liner. permitted as the event of
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Provision for drainage shall be furnished and this shall be sealed to the liner to ensure water cannot seep into the structure. The integrity of the waterproofing shall be tested by plugging the drain(s) externally and filling the planter with water. There shall be no loss of water in a twentyfour hour period.
c)
15.5
Maintenance of Grass, Plants, Etc. a) The Contractor will be responsible for the maintenance of grassed and planted areas for the duration of the contract and during the defects liability period. After germination the grass shall be fed with an approved fertiliser. During this time the Contractor will clear the beds of weeds by hoeing, forking and hand weeding. An approved spraying programme may be used in conjunction with these operations, but will not supersede them. All stakes and ties must be regularly checked and repaired or replaced as necessary. Watering during the Maintenance Period must be undertaken daily and the applications shall be sufficient to soak the soil to below root depth. The Contractor will be liable, after one growing season, to replace all dead plant material at his own expense.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
In respect of the grass areas, this clause shall cover the making good of any sinkage below approved finished levels and the subsequent re-seeding of those areas. The Contractor shall re-cultivate, re-plant and re-seed any areas which failed to germinate or in the opinion of the Engineer had exceptionally poor growth.
End of Section
16.0.0 BUILDING SERVICES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16.1.0 NOTES FOR GUIDANCE 16.1.1 Purpose This section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with sections 16, 17, 18 and 19 and is common to each. It should also be noted that sections of the Civil/Architectural Specification which preceded this shall apply where appropriate. 16.1.2 Definition In the following Building Services Specification the term "Contractor" shall mean the legal entity responsible for carrying out the Mechanical and Electrical works and the term 'Builder' shall mean the Main Contractor. 16.1.3 Scope of Work a) The Scope of Works shall comprise the supply, installation, testing, commissioning, maintenance and setting to work of the Mechanical and Electrical Installation as described in the Particular Specification, which shall be furnished for each project and shall include:i)
Schedule of related drawings.

ii) iii)
Brief description of the works. Specifications for plant and equipment not included in this document. (These will be issued later where they are Client Supply.) Control System Protocol. (These will be issued later where they are Client Supply.) Schedules showing performance requirements for plant and equipment. Standard details for equipment connections, drainage and control systems. (See the Sketches which are included with this disc)
iv)
v)
vi)
16.2.0 GENERAL 16.2.1 Contract Drawings The schedules of contract drawings will be issued with and form part of the contract. 16.2.2 Safety Precautions The contractor shall take all necessary safety precautions to prevent the possibility of accidents which may be caused mechanically, electrically or otherwise during the course of the works. The works shall include the provision and fixing of detachable guards of approved designed to cover all moving machine parts wherever they may be located and whether they are intended to be permanent or temporary and in such manner as to comply with the appropriate statutory requirements. It shall also include such step-down transformers as to be used for portable electrical tools. 16.2.3 Maintenance of Finishes The Contractor shall cover-up and protect the various works and portions thereof from all damage due to unconsidered or rough treatment, dust, grit, or injury in other ways. All bright parts of fittings shall be covered with transparent polyethylene sheeting and shall be cleaned and polished before being handed over. 16.2.4 Extent of Contract, Site and Inspection a) The Contractor shall provide everything necessary for the full completion of the works and work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with the approved form of modern practice.
b)
The Contractor must inspect the site and will be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the accessibility thereof, the local conditions, the facilities for obtaining the materials or article referred to, the supply of and conditions affecting labour, the carriage, carting, unloading, storage and safe custody of materials, tackle and tools necessary, the supply of light and water and generally to have obtained his own information on all matters affecting the execution of the works and the prices tendered thereof. If the Contractor shall have any doubts as to the meaning of any portion of the contract, or of the Specification, he shall before signing the contract, set forth the particulars thereof and submit them to the Engineer in writing in order that any doubt may be removed. The Contractor must provide, at his own cost and charge, the whole of the materials and transport of same, together with all labour, tools implements, ladders, site offices, stores, workshops and everything necessary for the due performance of the works specified.
c)
d)
16.2.5 Restrictions a) No additional overtime, night or Fridays work will be permitted without the written authority of the Engineer. Such allowance, if any, shall be agreed upon before the work is carried out and shall be based upon the registered rates in force at the time. The Contractor must confine his workmen, materials and plant to the portion of the site as directed by the Engineer and carry out his work at such times as will conform with the general progress schedule of the Builder and thereby enable the Builder to complete his work within the programme The Contractor shall employ none but workmen skilled in their respective trades and must not employ juveniles or unskilled labourers in lieu of skilled workmen. The Engineer reserves the right to dismiss instantly from the work any workman employed by the contractor who may misconduct himself on the site or who may be incompetent in the opinion of the Engineer. The direction of the Engineer as to the manner of executing the various works and the proper mode of conducting them shall, at all times, be strictly adhered to and the work completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor and his employees shall be bound to conform to the rules and regulations in force on the site for the proper conduct of the work and must avoid any complications that might cause disputes or strikes amongst his own or any other workmen.
b)
c)
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 16.2.6 Progress a) A reasonable time (to be agreed) will be allowed by the Engineer for the preparation of details and drawings, but the time for completion will not be permitted to date from the approval of such details, but must date from the order to proceed. Periodical meetings will be held at the site as and when required by the Engineer and the Contractor shall arrange to have an accredited representative present at each of these meetings until the contract is completed. The Contractor shall submit a written report at least 48 hours before the meeting to the Engineer outlining the progress of the work and work completed to date.
b)
c)
16.2.7 Handling of Materials The Contractor shall be fully responsible for taking delivery of materials and apparatus, unloading and distribution them as necessary on site and return all cases and all condemned or surplus goods. Care must be taken in the handling and storing of all materials and manufacturers' recommendations shall be followed.
16.2.8 Protection a) The Contractor must allow for protecting the works and materials from damage by inclement weather throughout the duration of the contract and make good any damage or deterioration that may occur free of cost. Where the protection of materials in position requires builder's work, then such builder's work will be responsibility of and be carried out by the Builder.
b)
16.2.9 Upholding of Public Property The Contractor shall maintain and protect public property and the property of the Water and Electricity Authorities and similar undertakings and make good or pay for all damage thereto. 16.2.10 Drawings and Documents a) The drawings provided with the Specification shall be treated as confidential documents and must not be copied or loaned to any other party without the express permission of the Engineer.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) The drawings are intended as a guide to the firms tendering and give approximate positions of pipes, conduits, cables runs and/or equipment only and in measuring from these drawings, the Tenderer must make due and proper allowance for all necessary diversions from the straight line, rises or falls as may be required for the proper execution of the works. Detail drawings in all cases shall be worked to in preference to those of a more general nature and figured dimensions where indicated shall be followed in preference to scale. Where necessary, the exact positions of plant and/or equipment will be decided by the issue of further drawings, but no claim for extra payment due to insufficient information on this scope will be entertained. In any case of doubt as to the interpretation of either Drawings and/or Specification, the Tenderer must refer the matter to the Engineer prior to the submission of his Tender. It is to be clearly understood that this Tender is to be absolutely inclusive for the proper completion of the whole of the works specified to the true intent and meaning of the Specification and/or Drawings and the description therein contained shall be read conjointly and together and no error, inconsistency, discrepancy in the Drawings and/or Specification will relieve the Contractor of his obligations to include for the hand-over the work in the true meaning and intent of the Specification and/or Drawings, complete in every respect. Should any portion of the Works which would reasonably and obviously be inferred as necessary for the installation as a whole not be expressly specified, the Contractor shall provide and execute such work as part of the contract and shall not be entitled to any extra payment of the account. The contract drawings and such other drawings as may be furnished to the Contractor during the progress of the works shall be considered as illustrating the Specification and if there is any discrepancy between the drawings and the Specification, the contractor shall execute the work in accordance with the decision of the Engineer. If modifications are necessary, the Contractor shall submit modifications to the Engineer for approval before such modifications are executed. All drawings and specifications are the property of the Engineer. The Contractor will be required to give and obtain all necessary site and other particulars and to agree such details with the Engineer. The Contractor must also obtain details of any works affected by his work and shall work in close co-operation with all such firms or persons concerned.
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i) j)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST k) The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused to buildings and contents and works by reason of, arising out of, or incidental, to or in connection with the execution of any work in the contract documents. The Contractor shall permit nothing to be done which may injure the stability of the works, or existing buildings and no cutting through floors or walls will be allowed other than where required by the drawings, without the sanction of the Engineer.
l)
16.2.11 Working Drawings a) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, before the work is commenced, a copy of all working details and installation drawings and shall also supply sufficient copies for the Builder and other interested parties. These drawings must be submitted by the Contractor as soon as possible after the order is placed to give ample time for all parties concerned to study and comment thereon. The work described on any working drawings submitted shall be carefully checked by the Contractor for all clearance, field conditions, maintenance of architectural conditions and proper co-ordination with all trades on the job. To this end, the Contractor, during the production drawing stage, shall ensure that he co-ordinates drawings of all other trades that might interfere with the proper installation of his work. In highly decorated areas co-ordination is particularly essential and working drawings shall include dimensioned elevations showing locations of electrical and electronic accessories, plumbing and drainage fittings, air conditioning and ventillation grilles and difusers. No payment shall be made for any variations or alterations on site due to lack of knowledge of other trades. Any unresolved conflict between trades shall be referred to the Engineer. The equipment layout is to be detailed on the drawings, showing the exact method of installing and clearly illustrating components to be used in making all connections. Pipework drawings must be fully detailed, showing all pipework in double line and indicating the precise size of fittings, valves and equipment, position of hanger supports with reference numbers must be indicated and a large scale detail must be given, showing the type and method of installation of each type of hanger. A schedule is to be included on each drawing, showing details of the type of hanger fixings and reference number for each type. Electrical drawings must be fully detailed, showing all conduit sizes and runs and indicating the precise locations of conduit boxes, switch boards, socket outlet boxes, draw-in boxes, etc.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST g) All general layout drawings shall be drawn to 1/50 scale, unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer. Toilet piping layouts, details and hangers, cleanouts, distribution boards, power and control panels, methods of fixing of all equipment, including pipes and conduits, detailed cross sections of service ducts, etc are to be drawn to 1/20 scale. The Contractor shall provide a detailed programme incorporating works drawing production which can be read in conjunction with the building construction programme. The Contractor shall prepare schedules and drawings showing precise details of holes in concrete, blockworks, etc, bases frames or support required and the like. The schedules shall show in detail the builder's work required to be performed by all other trades for the mechanical and electrical installations. These drawings and schedules, in an approved form, must be submitted to and be properly approved by the Engineer before any structural work requiring holes or other modification is carried out. The Contractor shall submit all drawings for approval in triplicate. After approval, the Engineer will retain up to two prints for his own use. One copy will be returned to the Contractor through the Builder and this shall be retained by the Contractor as the record on site. Signed and approved drawings will be not be departed from unless a signed variation or omission certificate is issued in writing by the Engineer. Drawings returned to the Contractor for alteration or amendment shall be re-submitted to the Engineer for approval. Amended or altered drawings shall show the nature of the amendment or alteration in a revision block on the drawing, together with the revision number of letter and the date of the revision. The Engineer's approval of working details and installation drawings, however, will not relieve the contractor of his responsibility for errors and incorrect setting out. The Engineer's approval is only general and not intended to serve as a check and does not relieve the contractor from furnishing the materials and performing the works as required by the Drawings and Specification. Should the Contractor prove unable to produce satisfactory "Working Drawings" or be unable to produce drawings to conform to the progress of the work, the Engineer reserves the right to take whatever steps are necessary to have drawings undertaken by other and debit the Contractor's account. Any decision taken by the Engineer to have working drawings produced elsewhere will not relieve the Contractor of his contractual obligations and the Contractor must provide to the Engineer all necessary details, physical dimensions, descriptive literature, etc of all equipment to be incorporated on drawings within 10 days of a request from the Engineer.
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
16.2.12 General Specification The Contractor is required to have a current copy of this document at site with the approved working drawings and relevant Omani and British/European standards for reference. 16.2.13 Manufacturers Data a) Manufacturers' performance data, certified factory drawings of apparatus, giving full information as to capacity, dimensions, materials and all information pertinent to the adequacy of the submitted equipment shall be submitted for approval. This data shall be supplied in S.I. units and the English Language. Manufacturer names, sizes, catalogue numbers and/or samples of all materials shall be submitted for approval. Submittals and working drawings should, as far as possible be complementary so that drawings and submittals can be cross checked. Order of equipment submitted for approval must be accompanied by relevant drawings, technical data, catalogues and samples. Where data, certified drawings or other required information is not available until after orders have been placed, the Engineer will give provisional approval until all requested drawings and information have been supplied to the Engineer and approved by him. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all necessary information is supplied to the Engineer in accordance with the progress of the work.
b)
c)
d)
16.2.14 As Built Drawings a) The Contractor shall arrange to keep on site a full set of drawings showing the progress of the works, which must be kept upto date. The Contractor shall keep a record as the work proceeds of any work installed not in accordance with the drawings. On completion of the works the Contractor shall supply one set of clear coloured prints of each applicable drawing, showing the exact position of all apparatus, pipe lines, services, control valves, switchgear, etc, together with diagrams, schedules, etc to the Engineer's requirements and these shall be used as the basis of comparison with the final "AS BUILT DRAWINGS". The words "AS BUILT DRAWINGS" shall be clearly indicated on all drawings adjacent to the title block upon completion of the works.
b)
c)
16.2.15 Builder's Work
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) The expression "Builder's Work" shall mean the work to be carried out by the Builder in connection with the engineering services forming the subject of this Specification. The Builder's Work will be undertaken by the Builder under the direction of the Engineer, but the Contractor must prepare all necessary drawings giving details of his requirements and be responsible for the correctness of these and the cost of any unnecessary work, due to the Contractor failing to comply with this condition, will be charged to the Contractor and will be deducted from his account when making payment. These drawings must be submitted to the Engineer within one month of the contract being placed. The drilling, cutting or welding of any constructional steel work shall be avoided, but where this becomes necessary, the Contractor must obtain the approval of the Engineer before any such work is put in hand. The Tenderer shall include in his tender for all drilling and cutting of steelwork. The Contractor shall ensure that cutting away and general attendance is reduced to the absolute minimum and must not impede or delay the carrying out and completion of this work. The following is a brief summary of the work to be carried out by the Builder:i) The cutting away and forming of holes for pipes, air ducts, conduits, cables and fixing through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, roof and the like and making good after the services are sufficiently advanced, tested and passed by the Engineer. The construction of concrete and/or brick ducts in floors, walls, etc. The excavation construction and backfilling of external trenches. The formation of concrete bases, plinths, etc for plant and equipment. The building of manholes, pits, sumps, etc for pipes and cables, ventilation and cable ducts. Formation of recesses for switchgear, etc. The building-in of brackets and holderbatts or other forms of builtin supports for conduits, cables, pipework and equipment. Where supports are fixed by means of rawl plugs, rawl bolts, toggles and the like, or other form of plugs and screws, then toggles and the like, or other form of plugs and screws, then the Contractor must carry out the drilling, plugging and fixing of the support. All holes must be formed with either an electrically driven drill or
b)
c)
d)
e)
ii) iii) iv)
v)
vi) vii)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST kango hammer, the later only being used with the prior approval of the Engineer. viii) The washing-down, cleaning, priming and painting of all pipes, air ducts, conduits, switchgear, etc, after fixing, except where it is specifically stated in the Specification that this painting shall be carried out by the Contractor. The provision of timber frames for grilles, diffusers, fans and duct connections, etc. In order to progress the building works, the Engineer has prepared certain details in connection with the Builder's Work. The Contractor, when appointed must immediately carefully check these details and if any additional work or alteration are required, the Engineer must be advised immediately and the Contractor shall prepare new working drawings. If, however, the building or preparation work is by then advanced to such an extent that modifications cannot be made, the Contractor must then, in conjunction with the Engineer, adapt the runs of pipework, etc. to suit the Builder's work prepared. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing detailed drawings of all builder's work in connection with the works and the cost of these drawings shall be included in his Tender. 16.2.16 Water Water will be provided by the Builder, but the Contractor must allow for any additional temporary plumbing, keeping the whole in good order and conditions and removing and making good all disturbances on completion. 16.2.17 Setting Out a) The Contractor shall set out the works and be responsible for the accuracy of same and the position of all plant and/or equipment shall be approved by the Engineer. Works in this context is not deemed to include builder's work which will be set out by the Builder to the Contractor's drawings, as provided for in clause "Builder's Works". The Contractor, at his own cost, shall amend any errors arising from his own inaccurate setting out, unless the Engineer shall otherwise direct.
ix)
b)
c)
16.2.18 Check of Details
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) The Contractor shall make a general check of all sizes of plant and equipment required and /or specified for the contract and inform the Engineer of any matter that may come to his notice with which he disagrees. All working and detailed drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval and the distribution of such drawing shall be by the Engineer from copies supplied by the Contractor for that purpose.
b)
16.2.19 Damage to Materials a) In the event of any damage to materials and/or apparatus when in transit to the site, or by the workmen employed by other parties, the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for arranging the necessary compensation for such damages between the parties concerned and shall remedy such damage without charge to the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible, until installation is taken over by the Employer, for the protection of all materials and replace at his own expense any article damaged by him, however such damage may occur. The Engineer will not participate in any discussion or proceedings concerning the fault or liability of any party due to such damage.
b)
c)
16.2.20 Supervision The Contractor shall keep at least one competent agent in charge of the works, who shall be considered to be the duly accredited representative of the Contractor, empowered to take instructions from the Engineer and to execute same and who must be in attendance at the premises until the whole of the works have been completed and passed by the Engineer and shall instruct and give all information regarding the plant and/or equipment to the Engineer. 16.2.21 Materials and Testing of Materials a) The whole of the works shall be executed with the materials indicated in the subsequent sections of this Specification and the Tender shall be based upon the materials specified. When the names of manufacturers are stated, together with a detailed Specification of their products, these are given as an indication of the quality and workmanship required. The Contractor may propose in his tender on the schedules provided the cost of alternative makes provided that such alternatives are equal in the opinion of the Engineer in every respect with regard to quality of materials, workmanship, performance, durability and appearance.
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) Where such exists, the equipment shall comply with the requirements of the appropriate current British Standard Specification and shall be of the best type available. Any proposed alternatives must be indicated in the Schedule provided a the time of tendering, giving details of any increase or decrease to the tender sum. Before placing any orders for materials and/or equipment, the Contractor must satisfy the Engineer that the items are strictly in accordance with the Specification and produce technical data, working drawings and/or samples for their approval. In certain instances specific makes of plant are necessitated to suit the layout of the site, building construction, internal layouts, etc. and no alternative make must be included by the Contractor in his tender unless he obtains special permission from the Engineer in writing before submitting his tender. Permission, however, will only be given if the Contractor can satisfy the Engineer that the alternative make of equipment can be satisfactorily accommodated. All materials shall be new unless otherwise stated. Any materials not accepted by the Engineer shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. In order to obviate any delay caused by the non delivery of materials, the Contractor must place orders immediately instructions have been received by him to proceed with the works. On all orders for special components, the Contractor shall state that this material is to be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All fittings and/or equipment shall be delivered to the Site complete, in proper packing and any damaged in transit will be rejected and replaced by the Contractor without charge to the Employer. If during the progress of the works the Engineer shall decide and notify to the Contractor that the Contractor has executed any unsound and/or imperfect work, or has supplied any material inferior in quality or quantity to those specified, the Contractor, on receiving the notice, shall proceed to alter, reconstruct or remove such work, or supply fresh materials upto the standard of the Specification and in case the Contractor shall fail to do so, the Employer may, on giving the Contractor seven days notice in writing of his intension so to do, proceed to remove the work or materials complained of and at the cost of the Contractor perform all such work or supply all such materials, provided nothing in this clause shall deem to deprive the Employer of or affect any rights under the contract which the employer may otherwise have in respect of such defects or deficiencies. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, one month prior to the date of commencement of the tests, three (3) copies of the complete tests procedure. The procedure, method and points of measurements, as well
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST as the method of carried out. Three (3) copies of the tests results shall be furnished to the Engineer for his approval. m) The Contractor shall supply the skilled staff and all necessary instruments to carry out any test of any kind, on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system, or on a complete system if the Engineer requests such a test for determining specified or guaranteed data as given in the Specification or in the Schedule of Equipment completed by the Contractor. Any damage resulting from the tests shall be repaired and/or damaged material replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
n)
16.2.22 Testing on Completion The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer by means of suitable tests, as detailed hereafter in this Specification, during erection and final tests on completion, that the whole of his work is carried out in accordance with all rules and regulations applicable to the work and shall provide at his own expense all testing instruments, apparatus, etc, and shall provide all labour required. The accuracy of the tests must be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, whose decision will be final. 16.2.23 Marking & Labels a) Labels shall be provided for every electrical unit, i.e. fuse switches, isolators, circuit breakers, starters, busbar chambers and the like, mounted externally by means of nickel screws 2BA, to describe the duty of each unit and/or identify and point of potential danger. These labels shall be ivorine with engraved letter and numbers in black. Embossed techniques will not be acceptable. Each electrical circuit and final circuit shall be clearly labelled in approved method, indicating accurately the equipment, apparatus or area of supply. To this purpose, neatly typed schedules both in Arabic and English, mounted in clear transparent envelopes, indicating the outgoing final subcircuits, their rating and the points they supply, shall be required to be fixed on the inside of the MCBDBs. The Contractor shall provide and fix adjacent to the electrical panels an instruction chart and notice relating to the procedure for dealing with cases of electric shock. Electric shock charts are to be fixed in substations and plant rooms. All plant and equipment shall be provided with brass name plates, bearing the maker's name, shop or reference number, rated capacity, type test and working pressure, speed and any other relevant particulars. Engraved Trafolyte identification labels shall be fitted to all valves and cocks with suitable spring clips or brass chains. These shall be colour coded according to the service they are attached to.
b)
c)
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST i) ii) Dark blue with white lettering Light blue with white lettering Potable water Irrigation water Chilled water Water Features Fire mains Raw sewage Treated effluent
iii) Dark green with white lettering iv) v) vi) White with light blue lettering Red with white lettering Brown with white lettering
vii) Yellow with black lettering f)
A suitable valve chart and diagrammatic layout of plant and pipework, indicating valve positions, shall be provided by the Contractor and these shall be framed, glazed and hung in suitable positions as directed by the Engineer. All notes shall be printed in Arabic and English. The size of the labels shall be no less than 100mm X 50mm and the number shall include the identification of the equipment which the valve or cock serves together with its own number. E.g. The valves on AHU 01 would be numbered from AHU 01 IV01 up.
g)
16.2.24 Alignment of Accessories a) The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the method of fixing all conduit boxes, switch boxes and socket outlet boxes, etc., so that these shall, when completed, be in an exact position relative to the finished plaster to permit all the cover plates being fixed accurately. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the alignment of all such boxes and must ascertain all wall depths of finished plaster and the final finishing of all wall surfaces. For any such faults or inaccuracies in this respect, the Contractor shall be held fully responsible and will be required to carry out any necessary revisions without extra charge.
b)
c)
16.2.25 Oil and Grease The Contractor shall provide all necessary oil and grease for the first filling of starters oil wells on bearings and the like and for the maintenance period specified. 16.2.26 Keys The Contractor shall provide three keys and spanners of each size of all key operated valves, cocks and equipment supplied under his contract, except where specifically stated otherwise in this Specification. The Contractor shall provide
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST suitable racks where directed by the Engineer on which to hang the keys and spanners. 16.2.27 Precommissioning Procedure Before final commissioning of any equipment referred to herein, the Contractor shall check for tightness of all clamps, screwed and bolted connections, regardless of whether the original connections were made before delivery of the equipment to site or not. The Contractor shall also ensure that all fusible links and trip settings are correctly calibrated to give discrimination and protection to the circuits and final sub-circuits forming this installation. 16.2.28 Painting This heading shall be read in conjunction with Section 12 Specialist Painting etc. which shall take precedence. a) All steelwork, steel tubes, tanks, brackets, supports, sheeting castings, and the like not otherwise protected shall be treated on site during erection and after completion of the works. Black mild steel tubing, sheeting, tanks, brackets, supports thoroughly cleaned down to remove all traces of rust, dirt, grease, oil, mill scale and fluxing materials used for soldering, brazing or welding. Special attention must be given to cleaning of all corners, crevices, bolts and rivet heads. When quite dry and clean these surface must be painted immediately with best quality rust inhibiting metallic lead primer. The primer shall be vigorously applied, particularly to crevices, bolts and rivet heads. Edges and corners shall be primed first, allowed to dry, then the whole surface painted. Surface must be thoroughly examined immediately on arrival at Site and any damage to the primer suffered during transit made good by cleaning and re-painting. Galvanised surfaces need not be treated before dispatch, except in special cases where the coating has to be disturbed as part of the manufacturing process. (Generally, galvanishing shall be carried out after manufacture). In such cases, the damaged areas must be thoroughly cleaned before dispatch and treated as specified above, but using a zinc based paint system, both at works and on arrival on site. Aluminium sheeting shall have all surfaces thoroughly cleaned and degreased before dispatch and treated with a patent etching solution, allowed to dry and the surfaces then rinsed thoroughly with clean water, again allowed to dry and primed with one coat of zinc chromate primer. Where pipework, tanks and sheet metal trunking are to be finished with thermal insulation, the surfaces shall be treated and primed before dispatch and primed again on site if found necessary by the Contractor.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
The painting of other surfaces will be carried out by the Builder and the Contractor shall be responsible for the following : i) Ensuring that those parts of the installation required to be left unpainted (e.g. valve pillars, polished brass and copper work) are left unpainted. Advising the Builder of details of any special colour or identification required.
ii)
16.2.29 Foundation Bolts Etc. a) The Contractor shall provide all clips, brackets, foundation bolts, fixing bolts, assembly bolts, including nuts, anchor plates, washers and plugs and the like, for all equipment and materials supplied under this contract. Ferrous bolts and nuts and other fixing devices exposed to atmospheric corrosion must be cadmium plated, sheradised or similarly treated to prevent corrosion. Alternatively, the component may be manufactured from brass or gunmetal, provided it is of sufficient strength for its purpose.
b)
16.2.30 Guards All machinery, motors, fans and the like shall be efficiently guarded, or so constructed, or so positioned as to be as safe as if they were guarded and in such manner that statutory requirements are fully complied with. This applies also to all moving parts which are not within the reach of the ground and included those where no permanent means of access has been provided. 16.2.31 Welding a) All welding work and testing shall be generally in accordance with the conditions, techniques and methods recommended by the Association of Heating, Ventilating and Domestic Engineering Employees (current edition) and BS2640:1982. All welders must be fully qualified and proof of an operator's qualification shall be either the contractor's record of suitable tests passed within the previous six months or tests made before the commencement of the work. If the Contractor wishes to employ welded joints for sections of the work other than particularly specified, then application must be made to the Engineer, in writing, giving the reasons thereof and no additional welding work must be carried out without the written permission of the Engineer. The Contractor shall include in his tender for the cost of removing all such pieces for inspection and re-making joints.
b)
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST e) Care must be exercised by the Contractor to ensure that the welding flux does not project into the bore of the tube. All welds shall be good, clean metal, free from slag inclusions and porosity, of even thickness and regular contour, well fused with the parent metal and finished smooth. Where welding is permitted on copper tubes, this shall be carried out by the sif-bronze or autogenous copper welding process and carried out in accordance with BS 1724:1990. If the Contractor intends to weld plastic pipes(including solvent welding), he must first obtain the permission of the Engineer and he shall prove to the Engineer that he has the facilities and the experience to carry out the work correctly. The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with duplicate copes of manufacturer's recommendations regarding the welding of plastic pipes and the testing procedures to be adopted. Where site welding is carried out in proximity to inflammable materials, the Contractor must take special precautions to protect the materials from risks of fire.
f)
g)
h)
i)
16.2.32 Operation & Maintenance Manuals a) Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall comply with BSRIA Application Guide 01/87 Operating and Maintenance Manuals for Building Services Installations 2nd Edition June 1990 For major works (defined at time of tender) the services of a qualified technical author shall be used and he shall be named and allowed for in the submitted tender. Maintenance Manuals shall include a written description of each system with reference made to the as installed drawings and manufacturers catalogues. The operating principle must be included in the system description together with circuit diagrams of all services. Separately, a written description shall be provided for the Operation and Maintenance functions and these shall be crossed referenced to Manufacturers manuals. A maintenance programme shall be provided outlining Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly and Annual works, in addition to the level of authorization to carry out the works. Manufacturers spare parts programme shall be provided outlining the anticipated spare parts consumption during years one to five of operation. Full spare parts lists shall be provided for each major item of equipment in addition to the five year programme described above. The Employer will not accept responsibility for routine maintenance of the equipment until one month after the O&M manuals containing the described details above are formally handed over. Any defect due to lack of routine maintenance arising from information missed from the manual
b)
c)
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST shall be rectified by the Contractor at his expense if the said information is of specialised nature. f) The Contractor shall provide copies of the Operating and Maintenance Manual and As Built Drawings in accordance with Clause 1.1.13 Sections b, c and d and shall hand them over to the Engineer on completion of the work and before the issue of the Completion Certificate.
16.2.33 Colour Codes For Piping a) The Contractor shall agree with the Engineer a suitable colour code for the painting of piping for all services involved. Generally, this shall conform to British Standard Specification BSS 1710:1984. After the colour code has been agreed, the Contractor shall supply two copies to the Builder who shall be responsible for the caring out of the work.
b)
16.2.34 Spare Parts The Contractor shall include in his Tender for the supply of manufacturers' recommended spare parts for all items of plant involved in the mechanical and electrical services installations to provide maintenance for a period of two years.
16.2.35 Tools The Contractor shall supply, in a tool box, a full set of tools suitable for carrying out routine maintenance of all components of the plant together with those necessary for its installation, including the electrical equipment, all as recommended by the respective manufacturers. This shall include manhole and valve keys. 16.2.36 Tropicalisation The Contractor shall be fully responsible for ensuring that all plant and materials supplied under this contract are suitable for use under local climatic conditions. 16.2.37 Standard and Codes of Practice a) Detailed below are the critical Standards and or Codes of Practice under which the works shall be carried out. Additionally many are listed in the body of this Specification. The Contractor shall keep one copy of each relevant standard on site at all times. The references were current at the date of publication of this Specification and a copy of the summary for each is included on this disc. The
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Contractor is responsible for the subsequent updating where a Standard is superceded. c) The Contractor shall give notice in writing of any deviation from these practices and shall provide a copy of the standards or codes of practice he wishes to adopt at the time of tender. Written approval of such deviations must be obtained at time of tender. Where a Standard or Code of Practice has cross references to other standards, those shall also apply and copies shall be maintained at site. Ministerial Decision No.40/81 Building Regulations issued by Sultanate of Oman Ministry of Land Affairs and Municipalities. Regulations for Septic Tanks and Holding Tanks issued by Sultanate of Oman Ministry of the Environment and Water Resources and CCEPP. Requirements for Sewage Treatment and Disposal issued by Sultanate of Oman CCEPP. BS 6297:1983 - Design and Installation of Small Sewage Treatment Works and Cess pools. BS 6700:1997 - Water Supply CP 342:1974 - Centralised Hot Water Supply BS 5720:1979 - Mechanical Ventilation BS 8301:1985 - Building Drainage BS 5572:1994 - Soil and Waste System BS 5588:1990 Fire Precautions in the Design, Construction and use of Buildings. One or more parts of this standard may apply to any one project. BS 5306-0:1996 Fire Extinguishing Installation and Equipment or Premises. BS 7671:1992 Institution of Electrical Engineers - Wiring Regulations 16th Edition. DW/144 HVA Contractors - Sheet Metal Ductwork Air-conditioning and Ventilation. Manufacturers products shall be certified under an approved quality assurance system providing for an assurance of quality of that product.
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i) j) k) l) m) n)
o) p)
q)
r)
End of Section
17.0.0 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION 17.1.0 GENERAL a) The Air Conditioning and Ventilation installation shall comprise the equipment briefly described in the Particular Specification and Design Drawings. The Installation shall be complete in every respect and include all the accessories to enable it to be calibrated, commissioned and set to work to operate in accordance with the Design Parameters. Where the Contractor considers that the tender documents omit items required to ensure the system operates within the meaning and spirit of above he shall identify these and tender for them in an appendix to his offer. Claims for any such items after a tender has been accepted will not be entertained. These works shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5720:1979 and the cross references referred to therein. Duct risers in builders work or concrete shafts shall be tested at time of installation prior to the shaft being closed.
b)
c)
d)
e)
17.2.0 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 17.2.1 Sheet Metal Trunking a) Where indicated on the Drawings, ductwork shall be in metal constructed from galvanised, cold rolled, close annealed, patent flattened steel sheets, in accordance with HVCA DW/144, suitable for the system pressure involved. Access doors to ductwork shall be of the hinged insulated type, except where otherwise specified. i) Access doors and door openings in the ductwork shall be adequately stiffened. Heavy pattern hinged access doors of adequate size shall be provided on the inlet side of all duct mounted fans, filters, dampers, heaters and humidifiers, complete with rubber or felt jointing ring and quick release handles of approved design and manufacture.
b)
ii)
c)
Transformation pieces shall be constructed such that the angle on any side does not exceed 15 to the axis of the duct. Where this is not possible, the Engineer's approval shall be obtained. Where branch ducts occur at taper or transformation pieces, the length of such pieces in the main ducts shall be symmetrical about the axis of the branch duct. Sharp edges or corners on ductwork, associated equipment, supports, angles, etc will not be permitted. Each sheet steel connection adjacent to special items of equipment shall be fabricated in sections with mild steel angle frames to permit easy removal of the complete plant or of any one component. All rivetted joints shall be sealed with 75mm wide adhesive tape, applied externally and all connections to plant made with felt or asbestos jointing to minimise the transmission of vibration. All bolts shall be bright steel with nuts and washers sheradised. Rivets and self-tapping screws shall be galvanised, sheradised or similarly treated to avoid corrosion. Where steel ducts connect to constructional work, the end of the steel duct shall project into the wall of the constructional duct and a galvanized mild steel angle flange shall be provided for grouting into the brickwork of reinforced concrete and felt or rubber insertion provided to seal the joint. A thermal break shall be provided where necessary.
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Each section of the ducting shall be tested at works before folding and the quality of the sheet shall permit folding without cracking. Any ducts found to have faulty seams or corners shall be condemned and replacement ducts shall be supplied and fixed at the Contractor's own expense. All ducts shall have a smooth internal finish, free from projecting angles, nuts or rivets, etc. A 40mm diameter hole, fitted with hinged airtight cover shall be provided adjacent to all fans and at suitable points along the ranges of ductwork for the insertion of testing instruments this instrument port insertion of testing instruments, this instrument port shall be as supplied by Zest Equipment Co. Ltd., Hendor House, Cray Road, Sidcup, Kent DA14 5DX, telex UK 966237, or other equal and approved. Ductwork shall be manufactured from sheets of the thickness given in relevant table in the latest edition of HVCA DW/144. Where ductwork is external to buildings, inlet cowls, extract gratings, etc, the thickness of the ducts shall be at least two gauges thicker than that given in the table and specially fabricated and finally painted two coats of black bitumastic paint such as 'Evode No. 5Q5H - Appexior', or equal and approved compound. Joints for rectangular ductwork, having a side greater in width than 600mm shall be flanged by means of 40mm x 40mm x 3.2mm galvanized mild steel angles. Angles used as flanges or stiffeners shall be rivetted to the ductwork with 8 swg rivets at 50mm pitch. The joint faces of all flanges shall be drilled for 10mm bolts at 75mm pitch. Except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings, slip joints shall be not less than 150mm long with the spigot carefully swaged circumferentially to act as a stiffener and a register for the socket end. All joints shall be sealed using duct sealants and tape conforming to H.V.C.A. Specification for sealants. Sealant shall be type D.1523FR as supplied by ZEST or equal and approved. Tape shall be 4mm thick sealant tape as supplied by Zest Equipment Co. Ltd., Hendor House, Cray Road, Sidcup, Kent DA14 5DX, telex UK 966237, or other equal and approved. After completion and before the joints are insulated, the ductwork installation shall be tested for leaks. The maximum permitted air loss is 5% of the supply air circulated by each air handling unit.
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
r)
s)
17.2.2 Supports
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) All ductwork shall be adequately supported on purpose-made supports and brackets, adjustable in height, fixed to the building structure with specially designed brackets and cantilevers and spaced to ensure adequate support. Where practicable a support shall be fitted at each joint in the ductwork. All ductwork supports shall conform to HVCA DW/144. Where mild steel sections are used they shall be galvanized. All cuts and drill holes shall be repaired in an approved manner. Felt pads shall be fitted between the ducts and the supports to reduce the transmission of noise and vibration and the supports shall be spaced to prevent distortion and drumming of the ductwork. Where ductwork is insulated a non compressible insulation spacer equal in thickness to the insulation shall be placed between the duct and its support. Sleeves must be fitted to ducts at all points where the they pass through walls, floors and ceilings. Sleeves shall be made from galvanised mild steel. Timber may be used if approved by the Engineer. The gap between the duct and the sleeve shall be filled with fibre glass having a density of 45 kg/cu.m.
b)
c)
d)
17.2.3 Dampers a) The Contractor shall supply and install in the position shown on the Drawing, generally in any position where branches or sub-branches leave the main distribution ducts, adjustable stainless steel aerofoil dampers manufactured in accordance with HVCA DW/144 and generally as specified below. Multi-leaf dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades rigidly fixed to the operating spindle, the end of which shall be housed in synthetic bearings. The respective leaves of multileaf dampers shall be linked by toothed gears housed in a protective casing with a manual geared control and indicator. The set air volumes shall be clearly indicated on a purpose made label located adjacent to each damper. Fire dampers shall be supplied and fixed in ducts, where shown on the Drawings, or detailed elsewhere in this Specification and shall comply in all respects with the relevant British Standards. An access panel shall be provided in the ductwork adjacent to each fire damper. The air leakage past dampers in the fully closed position must not exceed 5%. Dampers shall be as manufactured by Trox or equal and approved.
b)
c)
d)
e)
17.2.4 Splitters and Turning Vanes
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Where changes of direction occur in duct runs and space does not permit large radius bends to be installed, square or short radius bends may be used if they are provided with internal splitters or turning vanes of true aerofoil section as detailed in HVCA DW/144. Turning vanes shall be rigidly fixed to prevent vibration and the edges shall be smooth and free from burrs, etc. to prevent air noise. Turning vanes shall be as supplied by Zest Equipment Co. Ltd., Hendor House, Cray Road, Sidcup, Kent DA 14 5 DX, telex UK 966237, or other equal and approved. The Contractor shall submit general arrangement drawings of splitters and turning vanes to the Engineer before the fabrication work commences.
b)
c)
17.2.5 Grilles and Diffusers a) The Contractor shall provide and install grilles and diffusers as indicated on the Drawings. These grilles and diffusers shall also comply with the Particular Specification in addition to the clauses raised under this heading, particularly in areas covered by Interior Designers. Supply air diffusers and grilles shall be manufactured from extruded aluminium. Each grille shall be fitted with an opposed blade damper for volume control and shall be as manufactured by Waterloo (agent SSB, Tel:793741/793750). Trox Bros Ltd. Caston Way, Thetford, Norfolk P24 3SQ Fax 0842 763051, KMC Anemostat, Qatar, or other equal and approved manufacturer. Return and extract air diffusers and grilles shall be of similar construction as those for supply air, but without dampers, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Fresh air inlet grilles, or any grilles subject to atmospheric corrosion shall be manufactured from robust aluminium alloy extrusions, designed to allow a minimum ingress of rain water. These grilles shall be as manufactured by the firms listed above, or other equal and approved, and finished in anodised colour to the Engineers approval. A external grilles shall be fitted with insect screens supplied by the grille manufacturer. The grille and diffuser dampers shall be manufactured from aluminium or galvanised steel and shall be provided with a removable key so that adjustment can be made from the face on the grille or diffuser. All grilles and diffusers shall be fitted with a rubber sponge gasket or flexible PVC sheeting and an airtight joint must be made to the surround. All supply outlets and extract grilles and diffusers shall have a stove enameled paint finish, in accordance with the Engineers' approved
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST coloured schedule unless otherwise specified to meet particular interior design requirements. 17.2.6 Plenum Boxes Shall be constructed from galvanised sheet steel, acoustically lined internally and thermally insulated externally. The connecting spigot shall be fitted with a volume control damper. For applications requiring NR 25 or below the maximum length shall be 1.5 M. Approved proprietary boxes may be used subject to the required sound levels being achieved. Where locally fabricated boxes are offered, the height of the box shall be 2 x Dia of Neck or 500mm whichever is the greater. 17.2.7 Flexible Connections a) Flexible connections shall be supplied and fitted on all air handling units/fan coil units and shall also be fitted to other components where indicated on the Drawings. Flexible connections shall be manufactured from heavy quality, PVC impregnated, canvas and not less that 200mm length. The canvas shall be securely fixed to air handling units and ducting with galvanised mild steel angle frames to provide perfectly airtight joints. The flexible connections shall be pre-insulated to minimise condensation. Flexible connections shall be as supplied by Zest Equipment Co. Ltd. Hendor House, Cray Road, Sidcup, Kent DA14 5DX, telex UK 966237 or other equal and approved.
b)
17.2.8 Circular Flexible Ducting Flexible ducting shall be installed as shown on the Drawings to the diameter indicated. It shall be pre-insulated Flextract 2008K as manufactured by Flexible Ducting Ltd., Cloberfield, Milngavie, Glasgow G62 telex 778526, or other equal and approved having thermal conductance of 1.305 w/m C 17.2.9 Belt Guards All drivers for fan sets shall be adequately protected by means of robust wiremesh guards, fitted in a secure manner to enclose the drive, but easily removable for maintenance purposes. 17.2.10 Kitchen Extract Canopies a) Where required make-up fresh air shall be introduced into the kitchen via the outer skin of the extract canopy. A filtered fresh air unit, as manufactured by Nuaire, or other equal and approved and as indicated in the Schedules shall be installed to discharge air into the fresh air plenum of the canopy. The unit shall be complete with weathering, automatic shutters, permanent washable type filters and facility for ductwork connection.
b)
c) d)
Elsewhere single skin hoods shall be used. The Contractor shall provide and install an extract hood(s) over kitchen equipment of the size indicated on the Drawings and having the following general construction. The extract hoods shall be manufactured by Al Kharusi or equal and approved. i) The hood shall be constructed with a framework of aluminium or aluminium alloy sections welded or rivetted together in convenient sections. The panels in the hood shall be manufactured from satin polished type 304 stainless steel sheeting set in polished aluminium extrusions, unaffected by the ambient temperature, grease and moisture conditions. All corners and edges shall be free from burrs or sharp edges. The bottom edge of the hood shall be 2000mm above floor level. The canopy shall be located directly over the cooking equipment. directly over the cooking equipment. The hood framework shall be adequately braced and stiffened and the bottom member of the frameworkshal1 be arranged to form a watertight channel to collect condensation. A large cleaning door shall be fitted in the collecting duct. Lighting shall be installed inside the hood and the Contractor shall make the necessary provision in conjunction with the canopy supplier for housing the lighting fittings conduits, etc. The lighting fittings and wiring will be provided and installed by the canopy supplier, but the Contractor shall be responsible for giving all necessary information. Light fittings shall be bulkhead type Thorn OLG1100, or equal and approved. Full details of the hood and construction shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before manufacture proceeds. Before construction of the hood is commenced, all final working dimensions must be taken from site.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v) vi)
vii)
viii)
17.3.0 DRIVES 17.3.1 General a) V-belt drives shall comply with BS 3790 :1995.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) All pulleys shall be accurately aligned and V-belt tension adjusted in accordance with the equipment manufacturers installation instructions before starting the motor. The belt tension shall be ascertained by measuring belt deflection under a given load in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Multiple belt drives shall be provided with belts in matched sets. Motor shall be provided with a means of adjusting their position in order to assemble, adjust or remove drive belts. Holding down bolts shall be fully tightened before starting the motor. Where anti-vibration mounts are fitted the motor and the driven component shall share a common set of anti-vibration mounts.
c)
d)
17.3. 2 Variable Pitch Pulleys a) Variable pitch pulleys shall be permitted on fan drives up to 5 kw maximum input. A table shall be provided showing the pitch diameters and speed change for each half-turn of the outer flange of the pulley and the fan absorbed power at the highest speed possible. The limits of adjustment of variable pitch pulleys shall not permit the power consumption to exceed that of the driving motor capacity.
b)
17.3.3 Safety Guards a) Safety guards shall be provided for all unprotected intakes to and outlets from fans, unless the fan is enclosed by a separate casing to all V-belt drives; to all drive couplings and elsewhere where contact with moving, hot or dangerous plant is possible. Guards shall be manufactured from at least 2.5 mm galvanised steel wire or equivalent to a mesh of not greater than 25 mm holes. The mesh shall be supported on a galvanised framework of at least 10mm thick, stiffened as necessary to produce a rigid enclosure. All guards shall be securely fixed in position with bolts, captive nuts and washers and shall be easily removable for service and maintenance. Access panels shall be provided at the ends of shafts for tachometer readings.
b)
c)
d)
17.4.0 FANS 17.4.1 General a) The performance of fans shall be determined by the manufacturer in accordance with the procedures specified in BS 848-1:1997 and BS 848AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 2:1985 for noise testing and test certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer. b) Fans shall be capable of the duties specified on the Drawings. The Contractor shall check and recalculate the system resistance using the frictional resistance of items of plant offered and actual duct runs as installed and shall be responsible for ensuring that the installed fan is capable of the required duty without exceeding the specified noise levels on driving capacity of the motor and drive.
17.4.2 Fan Drives a) Fans shall be direct or belt driven as indicated on the Drawings and in the Schedules, but direct drive shall not be used on centrifugal fans above 1.0 kw motor input power. The driving motor shall be sized such that it does not become overloaded when accelerating the fan and operating with cold air in addition to the normal operating conditions. The impellers of direct drive fans shall be keyed onto the motor shaft by machined keyways and keys securely fixed into position. Belt driven fans shall be fitted with pulleys for V-belts which shall be of suitable grade and size for transmitting the drive without excessive slip or wear and shall comply with the relevant clause of this Specification. The driving motor shall be mounted on a set of adjustable slide rails. Multiple pulleys and belts shall be used where necessary and the belts and any spares supplied shall be in matched sets.
b)
c)
17.4.3 Centrifugal Fans a) Centrifugal fans shall be of the type specified on the Drawings. i) Forward curved centrifugal fans shall not be run in excess of 1000 r.p.m. No more than two No. centrifugal fans shall be driven on a common shaft. Backward curved centrifugal fans with aerofoil section blades shall be used on all systems incorporating variable speed control or requiring a total fan static pressure in excess of 1.0Kn/m2. Fan impellers shall be both statically and dynamically balanced. Centrifugal fan scrolls shall be constructed of zinc coated or galvanised mild steel with angle stiffeners and base angles to ensure freedom from drumming and the construction shall be suitable for continuous operation at the maximum ratings published by the manufacturer.
ii)
iii)
iv) v)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST vi) Double inlet double width fans shall have a bearing on each side of the fan which shall be pedestal mounted on fans above 200mm diameter impellers. Forward curved centrifugal fan impellers shall be constructed of galvanized mild steel blades welded or rivetted to spiders of robust cast aluminium alloy or welded steel.
vii)
b)
Shaft bearings for all single inlet centrifugal fans shall be twin bearings mounted on a common pedestal. Lubrication of bearings shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and bearings requiring regular lubrication service shall have lubrication nipples extended to a convenient location outside the fan casing and shall incorporate an oil reservoir where applicable. After installation and before running all fans shall be checked for misalignment and for the presence of foreign bodies or matter in the fan casings and any such fault shall be remedied.
c)
d)
17.4.4 Extract Ventilation Units a) The Contractor shall provide and install extract ventilation units where indicated on the Drawings. All wall extract units shall be complete with automatic shutters which eliminate the movement of air when the unit is in the OFF position. All extract units, where available, shall be provided with matched controllers, provided by the manufacturer of the extract units. All electric motors and associated items shall be in accordance with the relevant section of this Specification. Wall extract units shall be as manufactured by Vent Axia, (Agent Al Kahf Trading tel. 798195/751010), or other equal and approved. Duct or roof mounted fan units shall be manufactured by Nuaire, (agent Bahwan Engg. Co. tel.797581), Woods (agent Zubair Electric tel.701271/704306), or other equal and approved. All extract fan units shall be entirely constructed from non corrodible materials.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
17.4.5 Fire Protection The air handling units and fresh air supply units shall be automatically shut-down in the event of fire. All necessary detectors and ancillary equipment shall be provided and where possible, the units should be linked to the fire alarm system.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 17.5.0 AIR FILTERS 17.5.1 General a) Air filters shall be of the types, duties and dust holding capacity specified on the Drawings. They shall be suitable for mounting in the manner shown on the Drawings and shall comply with BS EN 779:1993. Access to filters shall be through removable panels fitted with quick release fasteners and rubber sealing gaskets. Filter performance where stated shall, unless otherwise noted, be taken to mean compliance with the following procedures - Eurovent 4/5 - Din 24 185-ASHRAE Standard 52-76. Additionally for particular filters - Din 24184 shall apply. Disposable filter systems shall be supplied with two complete sets of filter panels to each system in addition to the set fitted to the system. The filter media shall be properly bonded and protected against filter fibre or particle migration. The direction of air flow shall be clearly marked on all filter panels and in installation frames.
b)
c)
d)
Before final acceptance of a services system the Contractor shall supply and fit a complete set of new and unused filters. This shall be at the Contractor's expense. 17.5.2 Fire Precautions a) Where a flameproof filter medium is specified the material shall comply with the following requirements. (i) Duration of Flaming. No test specimen shall continue to flame for more than 8 seconds after the igniting flame has been removed. Extent of after-glow. After-glow shall not spread beyond the area of material damaged by flaming.
e)
(ii)
b)
The filter medium of washable type flameproof filters shall comply with the requirements of the relevant clause both before and after the washing treatment prescribed.
17.5.3 Holding Frames a) The framework for adapting filter installation panels to the ducting air handling plant or packaged unit shall be constructed of sheet mild steel angles of 1.2mm minimum thickness and all joints in the framing and duct connection shall be sealed with non setting mastic compound. Filter media of all types and sizes shall be supported in a rigid peripheral frame with internal or external support of the media to ensure that the media shall not collapse under air flow. The holding frames shall
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST incorporate accurately sized channel to provide a good sliding fit for the filters. 17.5.4 Bag Type Air Filters a) Bag filters shall be of the multi layer media type requiring no prefilters. The filter media shall provide a graduated density inlet layer, a fine secondary layer and a solid cloth anti-migration finish. Each bag shall have a stiffened cuff to provide leakproof attachment to the retaining frame. Bag filter system shall have an air pressure drop when clean not exceeding 60 N/m2 and 180 N/m2 when dirty and the dust holding capacity shall be not less than 20 kg per square metre of cross retaining frame sectional area of the inlet to the filter. The bag filter system shall be of EU7 grade material.
b)
c)
17.5.5 Air Filters - Washable Panel Type a) Washable panel filters shall be manufactured from two layers of differing grades of demembraned polyurethene foam bonded together to a total of 25mm thickness. The medium shall be suitable for operation in air temperatures up to 90C, shall contain a flame retardant in accordance with the relevant clause contained herein and shall be unaffected by oils, solvents and grease at normal operating temperatures. Each filter panel shall be supported on a plastic coated wire frame and shall be installed in a mild steel sub-frame giving side or front withdrawal as indicated on the drawings. The filter panel shall have a face velocity not exceeding 1.6 m/s. Washable filters shall have an air pressure drop when clean not exceeding 33 N/m2 when dirty and the dust holding capacity shall be not less than 7.0 kg per m2 filter face area. Minimum filter grade material EU5.
b)
c)
17.5.6 Grease Filters a) Extract hoods over kitchen equipment and other grease laden discharges shall be fitted with grease eliminators. A front withdrawal holding frame shall be incorporated in the hood design.
b)
17.5.7 Testing and Regulation a) Each plant shall be tested on completion for air volume, static pressure, discharge at grilles, air temperature, etc. and in all cases, the Contractor shall allow for initial setting and locking of dampers, grilles, etc. and for the regulation and balancing of the system.
b)
The Contractor shall also include in his Tender for conducting full scale tests under actual working conditions and instructing the operator in the full working of the system. These tests shall include smoke tests where required by the Engineer. Where provision is made for test holes, they shall be in accordance with the appropriate British Standards and shall be fitted with cover plates or discs which must be airtight. Test sheets for all items of plant must be submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
c)
d)
17.6.0 NOISE AND VIBRATION ELIMINATION 17.6.1 Noise in Rooms a) Noise levels in rooms are defined in this Specification in terms of noise rating (NR) criteria. Noise levels from plant and equipment used in the works when operating at their design conditions shall not result in NR criteria in excess of those defined below. Where attenuation devices are added into the system to produce the required room NR levels the additional resistance to air flow produced by such devices shall be included as part of the system resistance when evaluating the fan performance in accordance with this Specification. When selecting attenuators the sound level difference between each frequency level shall not exceed 4db.
b)
c)
17.6.2 Vibration No vibration from operating plant or machinery shall be transmitted to the building structure or its interior. 17.6.3 Requirements a) Unless more stringent requirements are given in a particular Specification, the following shall be deemed to apply for residential accommodation: NR/NC Rating Bedrooms/ Private Quarters Royal Standard VIP
Majlis/ Reception/ Dining 25 30
Service Areas
20 25
Must not affect other Areas at a lower level 30 - 35
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST General 30 35 35 - 40
For other buildings: Royal Standard - As above General - As CIBSE recommendations
17.6.4 Guidelines a) To achieve these requirements, the equipment, (AHU's and fans) ductwork and pipework shall be fitted with mountings having the following deflection:NR 20 NR 25 NR 30 Spring Deflection 75 mm 50 mm See below (AHU fans may be sprung inside the unit with the motor.) i) Pads of insulating material such as felt, neoprene or rubber inserted below the concrete foundation base on which the component is mounted. Special anti-vibration blocks, as manufactured by Mason Industries (Agent Al Bunyaan Phone 605658/67 )or Metalastick 'Cushyfoot' as manufactured by Metalastick Ltd, Evington Vally Road, Leicester. Fan sets shall be fitted with rubber mountings and special sleeves and washers for fixing bolts. Ductwork connections to fan sets shall be provided with short lengths of canvas or other suitable flexible connections. Flexible connections shall be provided on suction and discharge to all pump sets.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
b)
All condensing units, air handling units and fan coil units shall be provided with anti-vibration mountings manufactured by an approved firm to suit the particular application. For areas requiring stringent control of sound, the details for the construction of the plant rooms will be indicated on the design drawings.
c)
17.6.5 Anti-Vibration Mounts a) All vibration inducting equipment shall be isolated from the building by means of anti-vibration and noise isolators. The degree of isolation shall be such that noise criteria specified above are not exceeded and that no part of the building structure is subjected to vibration amplitudes in excess of the following values:
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST i) Frequency of Vibration (Hertz) 2 5 10 20 50 Amplitude of Vibration (mm) 0.2 0.01 0.008 0.004 0.02 (Mean to Peak) Under no circumstances shall noise generated as a result of vibration cause the NR Criteria specified above to be exceeded. Under no circumstances shall any transmitted vibration cause the human body to be subjected to amplitudes of vibration in excess of the following limits. Extrapolation beyond these limits shall be linear: Frequency of vibration (Hertz) 2 3 5 10 20 Amplitude of Vibration (mm) 0.03 0.02 0.01 0.005 0.004 (Mean to Peak) b) Each anti vibration mounting system shall be specifically selected for the duty it is required to perform. Anti vibration mountings exposed to the weather or any other corrosive element shall be fully protected against possible damage or corrosive action by such elements.
ii)
iii)
c)
17.6.6 Flexible Connections a) All pipework and ducting connections to equipment fitted with anti vibration mountings shall have flexible connections to isolate the vibration from the piping or ducting system. All flexible connections shall be installed with the axis parallel to the connecting pipe or duct and shall not be used to form a pipe or duct offset. All flexible connections shall be capable of withstanding the full operating pressure of the system in which they are installed and shall be tested to a test pressure by the manufacturer of at least 50% higher than the system operating pressure.
b)
17.6.7 Sound Attenuators a) Sound attenuators shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure these are sized to suit the air handling equipment he is installing and the air flow rates which will be achieved through the duct network. Any design information offered with the tender documents is for guidance only. Sound attenuator shall comprise a galvanised sheet steel casing, with a thickness appropriate to its size as described in HVAC DW/144. Baffles shall be constructed from perforated galvanised sheet steel, free from distortion through the length of the attenuator. The lead in noising shall be round for centres baffles and half round for sides. The tails shall be angled to provide even reexpansion of the flow.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) The acoustic fill shall be of odorless, incombustible, vermin and moisture proof in organic sound absorbing material, compressed 10% minimum to meet the required performance. Where the air stream is likely to contain grease, then the fill should be of a type which will not absorb this.
d)
17.6.8 Acoustic Insulation a) Acoustic insulation in the form of sound absorbent lining or purpose built attenuation devices shall be installed in the positions indicated on the Drawings and wherever they are required to reduce the sound level in the rooms to the level specified. Any duct lining or sound absorbent material used shall be of inorganic material; free from odour; proof against migration, rot, damp and vermin. The material shall be securely fixed to the duct surfaces and retaining metal work and adhesives used for securing sound absorbent material shall be compatible with the material and nonflammable. Duct linings and all sound absorbent materials shall have adequate strength, resistance to erosion by air flow (as KIMMCO Clean Liner or equal and approved) and shall not produce dust or any loose particles in the air stream (see section 18 also).
b)
17.6.9 Acoustic Treatment to Plant Rooms a) Where plant rooms are contained within a building requiring noise control they shall incorporate floating floors and acoustically lined walls. The floating floor shall be constructed on the mother slab and shall comprise an air gap of 50mm and an upper or machine slab of 150mm. The air gap shall be achieved by means resilient supports which shall not be liable to deterioration through ageing. The formwork for the machine slab shall be either 18mm water and termite proof plywood or galvanised floor shuttering. The mass resonant frequency of the combined machine slab mass and the resilient pads shall be between 15 and 20Hz. (Any antivibration measures required shall have a frequency exceeding 25Hz). The walls and ceiling shall be lined with materials suitable for absorbing sound or reducing it to levels complying with those specified. One of the following methods shall be used as instructed in the tender documents. i) 50mm of 100kg/m Rockwool between timber battens. Finished with 18g perforated aluminium sheet. 100mm of 50kg/m Rockwool between timber battens. Finished with 15mm gypsum board. 50mm air gap with an approved acoustic plaster 25mm thick sprayed onto stainless steel lathe carried in timber battens or
b)
c)
ii)
iii)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST stainless steel 'Z' form spacers. Where timber is used it shall be impregnated with an approved treatment and cut ends shall be treated on site during erection. All fixings shall not be liable to deterioration due to corrosion or oxidation. 17.6.10 Return Air Paths Where the return air path is through ceiling voids or plenums it will be necessary to provide acoustic treatment. This will be indicated on drawings at time of tender. 17.6.11 External Noise No piece of plant located externally or in a plant room shall have a noise level which is sufficient to impinge on rooms to the extent of producing an NR value greater than that specified above for the room. Any noise produced by equipment outside a room shall be additional to any noise produced by equipment inside or serving that room in terms of NR criteria.
End of Section
18.0.0 PIPED SERVICES 18.0.1 Piping Generally a) All pipe runs shall be carefully marked out by the Contractor before the pipes are installed. Any pipework fitted in an unsightly manner and not to the satisfaction of the Engineer shall be removed and re-fitted as required at the Contractor's expense. All pipes must be kept at least 150mm from lighting and power cables or conduits. Pipes shall be spaced in ducts and below floors in a manner which will permit subsequent access to any pipe for maintenance or removal without disturbance to the remaining pipes.
b)
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST e) Pipes must not be solidly built into walls or plaster and joints will not be allowed within the thickness of walls, floors or any other inaccessible position. All piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be erected to present a neat appearance. Pipes shall be parallel to each other and fixed at right angles to structural members of the building and shall give maximum possible headroom. All pipe drops shall be truly vertical. Pipework shall generally be set around all columns and shall follow the contour of the building whether so indicated on the Drawings, or not. Piping shall not pass in front of doorways or windows and shall be generally arranged so that it is at least 80mm from finished floor level and at least 25mm from finished wall face. Sufficient space is to be allowed for accessibility for servicing and cleaning. Efficient plugs shall be inserted in all open pipe ends during the progress of the work and plugs of wood, paper and the like must not be used. The Contractor will be held responsible for the location and removal of any stoppage (foreign matter or air lock) which is found to impede the circulation/passage of water after the systems have been put into commission, including making good of all pipework concerned. Connections to branch mains shall be made in such a manner as to avoid undue stress being thrown upon them due to expansion and branches shall be prestressed by springing during erection. All pipes must be supported in such a manner as to allow free movement for expansion and contraction and graded to the required levels for air elimination and drainage. Wherever possible hot and cold water supply services shall be installed in such a manner that all air is automatically vented from the equipment. Flanges shall be provided to mate-up to valves, expansion pipes and expansion loops and pairs of flanges or unions shall be fitted at intervals to facilitate erection and dismantling of pipework. Where flanges are used on thermoplastic pipe, steel backing flanges shall be provided. Thrust blocks shall be furnished for all buried external water services operating under pressure unless a written waiver is obtained from the pipework manufacturer indicating his system does not require this provision. The thrust blocks shall be securely anchored in the ground and of sufficient mass to absorb the anticipated forces.
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
18.0.2 Pipe Brackets, Supports and Hangers

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Pipework in ducts and voids shall be supported from specially designed galvanized mild steel brackets and cantilevers with swinging hangers. Roller type supports and 'U' bolt clips shall be used where design does not permit the use of swinging type hangers, but unless indicated on the Drawings, prior permission must be obtained from the Engineer. The brackets shall be provided and fixed by the Contractor to the side walls, beams and ceilings, 'Unistrut' (agent General Electronics and Trading Co., Tel. 602037), or other equal and approved supports shall be provided by the Contractor for suspended hangers and supporting rollers and chairs. The supports shall be designed to allow free expansion to take place in the required direction. All brackets and cantilevers shall be fabricated at works and galvanised before dispatch. If, however, the Contractor can satisfy the Engineer that he has the necessary plant and skilled labour to carry our the work satisfactorily and without causing delay, he may be permitted to fabricate in his own works or on site. Internal pipework, generally, shall be supported from the walls, partitions and floors by means of adjustable brackets and pipe clips. The clips shall be fixed, using expanding rawl bolts after plastering has been carried out, subject to agreement with the Builder that this will not delay the general building programme. If this method of fixing will impede other trades, then subject to the Engineer's approval, clips shall be built-in or screw-on types. Purpose made galvanized mild steel guide brackets and clips shall be fixed on long straight runs. Brackets and hangers fixed in lavatories and bathrooms shall be finished to the Engineers requirements. Pipe supports shall be spaced in accordance with the following schedule and otherwise as directed or found necessary. Where a bracket or support carries more than one pipe of different sizes, the spacing of the brackets or supports shall be that specified for the smallest size of pipe.
NOMINAL SIZE OF PIPE MAXIMUM SPACING OF SUPPORTS STEEL COPPER POLYTHENE P.V.C. M M M M
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 150mm 125mm 100mm 80mm 65mm 50mm 40mm 32mm 25mm 20mm 15mm i) 4.5 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 2.75 2.5 2.5 2.0 3.5 3.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.75 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.25 1.25 0.90 0.90 0.75 0.75 0.50 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.25 1.25 1.25 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.50
Spacing of supports for polythene type 425 should be as follows: Upto25 mm - 12 x outside diameter Over 25mm - 8 x outside diameter
j)
Supports shall be provided for all valves, cocks and expansion joints to take the weight from the adjoining pipework. All supports, anchors and guides shall be designed so that the continuity of the insulation is maintained, unless otherwise directed or indicated on the Drawings. Where steel clips are fitted to copper tubes a special packing sleeve shall be fitted to prevent corrosion.
k)
l)
18.0.3 Pipe Sleeves Sleeves must be fitted to pipes at all points where the pipes pass through walls, floors and ceilings. Sleeves shall be of the approved telescopic type with polished chromium plated ends. Where pipes are concealed, sleeves may be made from galvanised mild steel or plastic tubing if approved by the Engineer. The gap between the pipe and the sleeve shall be filled with fibreglass having a density of 45 kg/cu.m. 18.1. 0 CHILLED WATER PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS 18.1.1 General a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply and installation of all chilled water and condensate drainage pipework as indicated on the Drawings and detailed in this Specification. The Contractor's attention is also drawn to the relevant clauses in the General Section of this Specification.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) All chilled water pipework shall be standard black medium weight quality seamless mild steel tube to BS 3600:1997 together with its cross references. All condensate pipework shall be as materials specified for hot and cold water services and shall incorporate a water seal on the outlet from each unit. Refer to Sketch AIRCOND/039 for depth of seal calculation. Pipework connections to each item of plant shall be installed in such a manner as to allow removal of the item without dismantling the pipework, by means of flanges or unions. Unions shall be used on pipework upto and including 40mm diameter and flanges shall be used on pipework 50mm diameter and above, unless specified otherwise on the Drawings.
d)
e)
18.1.2 Provision for Expansion a) Adequate provision shall be made for expansion and contraction of the pipework. Provision shall be made to take up expansion by means of diversions in the pipe runs and branches shall be taken-off in a manner to allow expansion to take place without unduly stressing the joints or tubulars. Special attention shall be given to pipework crossing building expansion joints. In these cases, purpose made flexible sections, shall be installed either side or across the building movement joint. They shall be supplied and installed in complete accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the particular application and shall be approved by the Engineer, prior to order for the equipment being placed. Supports shall be designed to allow correct expansion of the pipework and where necessary, spring loaded supports shall be provided to accommodate expansion in vertical pipeline. The pipework and hangers shall be arranged so that no undue strain is placed upon any component due to expansion and contraction of the pipework.
b)
c)
d)
e)
18.1.3 Air Vents a) At all high points or elsewhere as directed by the Engineer, an air bottle shall be fitted with an automatic air eliminator, as manufactured by Charles Winn, 70 Warwick Street, Birmingham B12 OWC telex U.K. 338100, type 'B', with lockshield shut-off valve. The discharge connection from the vent valve shall be neatly run in copper tube to discharge in a convenient position over the nearest gully or other approved location. The bottle shall be of the same bore as the pipe to which it is fitted, but not more than 50mm and not less than 150mm high.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 18.1.4 Drains a) Emptying cocks shall be provided at all low points and on the 'dead' side of all isolating valves to facilitate emptying down. These valves shall be gunmetal draining types, with lockshield cover and outlet serrated for hose connection. The size shall be determined from the adjacent system up to a maximum of 65mm. All low points of the system shall be fitted with drain valves to permit the complete drainage of the system. Bottoms of all risers shall have dirt pockets the size of the riser and at least be 300mm long complete with a drain level.
b)
18.1.5 Valves Isolating valves shall be fitted on the distribution mains as indicated on the Drawings, or noted in the Specification and regulating valves shall be provided for permanently proportioning the flow of water to each sub-circuit. 18.1.6 Strainers a) Approved strainers shall be fitted where indicated on the Drawings. All strainers shall be suitable for pressure of the system concerned and are to be inspected and pressure tested at works. All strainers shall be of the 'Y' type, Class 150 and shall be bronze, screwed or flanged, as applicable, upto 50mm diameter and cast iron flanged 65mm and over. All strainers shall be cast iron or bronze bodied of ample strength for the pressure to which they shall be subjected and with suitable flanges or tappings to connect with the piping they serve. Strainer basket screens shall be stainless steel and shall be ample strength to prevent collapsing of the basket under shock loading. Perforations shall be in accordance with the following table: Pipe Size Perforation Size 0.4 mm No. of Perforations per mm2 1.50 0.65
b)
c)
Upto 32mm pipe
40mm to 100mm pipe 0.8 mm 18.1.7 Underground Chilled Water Pipework a)
All underground chilled water lines shall be preinsulated steel as follows: i) Steel pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN253:1995and BS489:1999. Outer casing shall be of hard polyurethene H.D.P.E.
ii)
iii)
Insulation shall be of rigid polyurethene foam with average density of 80-100Kg/m3.
b)
All pipes and fittings shall be as manufactured by I.C. Moeller, 191 Treldevej, DK 7000 Frederica, Denmark, (agent Al Mutawah tel. 591871) or equal and approved. All pipework shall be installed, handled and stored strictly in accordance with Code of Practice BS 7572:1992 and the suppliers' written instructions. Copies of these instructions shall be kept on site at all times. For details of trench bedding backfill see Drainage Section of this Specification. When welding, alu-shields shall be fitted on the pipe ends to avoid flame damage to the polyurethene foam.
c)
d)
e)
18.1.8 Cold Feed and Expansion Tank (for open System) a) The Contractor shall provide and install a feed and expansion tank constructed from GRP plates, as supplied by Horseley Bridge Hydrostar, (agent Delta tel. 702216). or other equal and approved. The Contractor shall provide and fix in the tank one 15mm full bore equilibrium pattern ball valve with brass or bronze body and working parts, and stout copper ball. A 28mm valved quick fill connection shall be provided to by-pass the ball valve. The Contractor shall provide a 32mm bore galvanised overflow pipe from the tank to discharge in a convenient position, together with 22mm drain connection with cock. A 32mm bore feed and expansion pipe shall run from the feed and expansion tank and connected into the chilled water return to the chillers. An isolating valve shall be fitted on the feed pipe adjacent to the connection and fitted with a padlock. The Contractor shall provide and install suitable mild steel bearers for supporting the tank, duly protected against corrosion.
b)
c)
d)
e)
18.1.9 Cold Feed and Pressurization Unit (for closed System) a) The Contractor shall calculate the volume of chilled water contained in the system using his working drawings and supply a sealed system pressurisation set with base mounted or remote expansion vessel(s) all as Holden and Brooke Pressmatic series units or equal and approved.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) The system shall include a fill pump having bronze impellor and casing powered by a squirrel cage motor. An inlet strainer with service isolating valves shall be provided together with a break tank having an air gap and weir type overflow. A control panel shall be furnished which shall incorporate all necessary circuit breakers, starters, selector switches(for multi pump models), power on, high and low pressure alarm lights, volt free contacts and system pressure gauge.
c)
d)
18.1.10 Condensate Drains Condensate drains shall be taken from each air conditioning unit to discharge into soakaway or collection pit as indicated on the Drawings. 18.1.11 Water Treatment The Contractor shall undertake the task of furnishing water treatment in accordance with the following requirements. a) Prior to start up the closed loop chilled water system shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed with clean water and shall then be treated with an approved pre-operational cleaners, all in accordance with BSRIA Application Guides AG1/89 Flushing and Cleaning of Water Systems and AG8/91 Pre-Commission Cleaning of Water Systems. At start-up it shall then be treated with a cocktail of chemicals by way of automatic dosing systems which shall provide the following operational features:i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) Inhibit corrosion. Prevent scale formation. Form a stable film. Maintain pH. Act as a closed system biocide. Compatible with the treatment in existing system to which it will be connected.(Applicable to extensions only)
b)
Where used the Open Recirculating Cooling (Condenser) Water System make up water is a town mains, which is mixed with the condensate return and softened if analysis indicates it is required. This is designed to reduce the volume of blow down water to a minimum and the automatically dosed chemicals are supplied to the individual condenser circuits during the recirculation process. The chemical dosing shall provide the following operational features: i) ii) Prevent corrosion and scale formation. Inhibit algae and fungal growth.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST iii) Legionella Pneumophila Control as recommended by the Health and Safety Commission Code of Practice L8(rev):1995.
c)
The following chemicals or their approved and equivalents shall be utilised for the chilled water system:i) Aquazur CMT-248 DIS or an equivalent ammonium citrate based chemical cleaner for the pre-operational clean up. Aquazur WT 826 DIS Organic Polymer and Corrosion Inhibitor during final dynamic flushing. Houseman Heatreat 502 DIS or an equivalent formulation of tannins, alkalis and polymers, metered into the system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide an effective protection. Nalco 7330 or an equivalent anaerobic broad spectrum non-oxidising biocide.
ii)
iii)
iv)
d)
The water treatment for the open recirculating cooling water systems shall commence from a single make-up tank that is provided with a town mains connection. Based upon a water analysis the water may then required to be softened after which it is supplied to each cooling tower make-up connection. The feed tank, duty and stand-by feed pumps and water softening system shall form part of these works. The water softener shall be of the duplex type and shall supply treated make up water at a rate equivalent to the maximum usage rate plus 15%. Each of the circuits shall then be treated with the following chemicals or their approved equivalents: i) Nalprep 2578 or an equivalent blend of materials which includes inorganic phosphate for mild steel protection, an organic inhibitor for yellow metals and various disperants and sufacants the pre-operational clean up. Nalco Trasar 23218 or an equivalent organic corrosion and scale inhibitor providing cathodic protection. This shall be metered into the system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide an effective protection. Nalco 8514 or an equivalent non-oxidising biocide approved for use with cooling towers. This should control bacteria, algae and fungi and shall be metered into the system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide an effective protection. Nalco Stabrex ST40 or an equivalent blend of liquid bromin biocide and a surfactant possessing powerful bacterial activity
ii)
iii)
iv)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST and biofilm removal against species Legionella including Legionella Pneumophila and its amoebal hosts, metered into the system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide an effective protection. e) The systems offered shall be automatic and shall include any sampling points for the monitoring of the treatments. An adequate number of test kits together with the necessary reagents shall be included as part of the package and shall be fully detailed in the documentation with the tender package.
18.2.0 CHILLED AND CONDENSER WATER PUMPS 18.2.1 General a) The performance of pumps shall be determined by test procedures in accordance with BS 599:1966 and test certificates submitted to the Engineer. Pumps shall be capable of the duties specified on the Drawings except where the hydraulic resistance of the items of plant offered differs from the estimated values indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall check and recalculate the system resistance using the frictional resistance of items of plant offered or actual pipe runs as installed and shall be responsible for ensuring that the installed pump is capable of the required duty. The capacity of the driving motor or drive arrangements shall match the pump requirements. Pump and motor and baseplate assemblies shall be fully flow tested at factory prior to dispatch, at design duty, and test results shall be forwarded by the Contractor for incorporation in the Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals.
b)
c)
18.2.2 Construction Single stage pumps shall be of the end suction centrifugal type with self adjusting dripless type mechanical seals. Casings, seal housings base plates and sub-frames shall be manufactured from high grade cast iron to BS EN 1561:1997. Casing sealing rings shall be manufactured to DIN 24960 and shafts shall be stainless steel to BS970:1996 GR431 or S29 with bearings of the ball or roller type with adequate provision for end thrusts. The impellor shall be manufactured from gunmetal to BSEN 1982:1999 LG2C. Pump casings shall be fitted with a drain plug and a means of air venting. All pump connection shall be flanged to BS 4504-3-1 and -3-3:1989 Table PN 10 and taper pieces shall be provided for connection to the pipework where this is of a different size to the pump connections. 18.2.3 Pump Drives
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST The pumps shall be direct or belt driven by electric motors of the appropriate class and mounting. The driving motor shall be rated at least 10% in excess of the design requirements of the pump. The 10% margin shall be applied after any departing required by the Electrical Specification. The motor shall be coupled by means of correctly aligned flexible couplings or shall be close coupled by means of flange mounting. All pumps shall be factory aligned with the motor and shall be re-checked for alignment on Site before starting the pump. The pump operating speed shall not exceed 1450 RPM. 18.2.4 Special Requirements a) Each chilled water pump shall have a galvanised steel drip tray with welded corner joints (painted with galvafroid or similar, after fabrication) located on the concrete plinth and below the pump baseplate. This drip tray shall be complete with 20mm copper discharge pipe, extending to the nearest floor drain. The drip tray shall be fabricated from 1mm thick sheet steel, and shall extend beyond the concrete base at one end by 100mm to facilitate the outlet connection from the bottom. Pumps shall be fitted with pressure/altitude gauges of bronze casing and 100mm diameter dial, complete with gauge-cocks and anti-syphon tubes, fitted to suction and delivery connections. Pressure/altitude gauges shall be calibrated in both "bar" and "metres water gauge" and the operating point shall be mid-way in the dial range of calibration. (Note: negative reading required for pump suction). The pumps shall be entirely suitable for continuous operation in temperatures of 45C.
b)
c)
d)
18.3.0 HOT AND COLD WATER 18.3.1 General a) The Contractor shall include for the supply and installation of all hot and cold water services as indicated on the Drawings to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer and the materials shall comply with this Specification and all relevant British Standard Specifications described in BS 6700:1997 and CP 342-2:1974. All water services shall comply with British Standard when applicable. The Contractor's attention is also drawn to the General Section of the Mechanical and Electrical Specification which shall also apply to this section.
b)
18.3.2 Incoming Mains The incoming mains shall enter the building by way of a purpose made ducts, installed by the Builder. Immediately inside the building a stop valve shall be fitted and the Contractor shall ensure that this valve will be easily accessible.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Incoming mains may be UPVC class E pipe except from town mains where they shall be ductile iron to MHEW specification. 18.3.3 Tubing and Fittings a) All pipes and fittings shall comply with the BS and CP listed in 17.6.1 a) and may be in copper, polyethylene, or other thermosetting plastic up to 54mm dia. Above this size copper shall be used. Copper pipe fittings shall be capillary type upto and including 54mm diameter and flanged over 54mm diameter. All pipework, fittings, fixings, etc. are to be installed all in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Pipes of different diameter shall be connected by eccentric reducing fittings to allow correct venting and/or draining and bushing shall not be used in any circumstances. All exposed pipework shall be chromium plated, or finished to the requirement of the Engineer.
b)
c)
d)
18.3.4 Provision for Expansion a) Adequate provision shall be made for expansion and contraction of the pipework. Provisions shall be made to take-up expansion by means of diversions in the pipe runs and branches shall be taken-off in a manner to allow expansion to take place without unduly stressing the joints or pipework. Where there is no provision for expansion of hot water venting through an open vent an expansion vessel shall be provided. The Contractor shall calculate the size of this vessel based upon his working drawings.
b)
c)
18.3.5 Drains Emptying cocks shall be provided at all low points and on the 'dead' side of all isolating valves to facilitate emptying down. These valves shall be 15mm bore gunmetal drainage taps with lockshield cover and outlet serrated for hose connection. 18.3.6 Cold Water Tanks a) The Contractor shall supply and install cold water tanks where indicated on the Drawings. Tanks installed externally shall be constructed using 1m2 GRP plates as supplied by Horseley Bridge (Hydrostor), (agent Delta tel. 701116) or other equal and approved.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) Cold water tanks shall be complete with the following fittings and connections. i) Full bore equilibrium pattern ball valves with brass or bronze body and working parts complete with stout copper balls, as manufactured by Blakeborough (agent Al Mutawah tel. 701841/703081) or other equal and approved. Overflow pipe complete with vermin and insect proof filter made from 80 mesh, 39 stainless steel wire. The overflow pipe should be enlarged appropriately to offset the space taken by the filter. Open vent shall be provided from each tank complete with vermin and insect proof filter as specified for overflow. Drain cock with hose union connection and malleable iron key. All necessary pipe connections. 500mm Diameter hinged access manhole. 'I' Section steel support frame shot blasted and painted against corrosion. See relevant section of this Specification for details.
ii)
iii)
iv) v) vi) vii)
18.3.7 Valves and Cocks a) Isolation valves and cocks shall be fitted on the distribution mains, as indicated on the Drawings or noted in the Specification. Isolating valves shall conform to the following schedule and to BS 10102:1973. i) ii) Isolating valves shall be as supplied by an approved Manufacturer. Drain cocks shall be 15mm gunmetal drain taps with hose connections, as manufactured by Yorkshire, (agent MHD-UBM tel. 698961) or other equal and approved.
b)
c)
All lockshield gate valves shall have lockshields secured with hexagonal gland retaining rings, except where otherwise specified. All air valves and test cocks shall be fitted in an accessible position to allow any water discharged on venting to be collected in a suitable container. Supports shall be arranged adjacent to all valves and cocks to take the weight off the adjoining pipework and/or equipment.
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST f) Regulating valves shall be fitted on hot water service return pipes on each branch or sub branch of the circulation net work and otherwise as indicated on the drawings.
18.3.8 Unions A pipework connections to equipment shall be provided with adequate unions or flanges to enable the piece of equipment to be removed for maintenance without disturbing the rest of the system. 18.3.9 Branches to Fittings a) The contractor shall include for making all final connections and all branches to fittings shall be connected direct to the taps, etc. with a union joint being carried out in copper tube. The cold water shall be connected to the right hand side and the hot water to the left hand side of the fitting and all draw-offs shall be correctly marked, indicating the service to which it is connected, as follows: i) ii) iii) c) Cold water down service Hot water service Rising Main - Blue - Red - Green
b)
Where pipe connections to fittings are of a larger size, the reduction shall be made near as possible to the fitting. A stopcock, easy clean pattern, shall be provided on all branches to fittings or range of fittings. Isolating valves shall be provided where possible in shafts, cupboards, bulkheads, or voids. Valves, stop cocks and unions shall not be built into walls and shall be accessible at all times.
d)
e)
18.3.10 Electric Water Heaters a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, delivery and installation of electric water heaters and cylinders where indicated on the Drawings. All electric water heating elements shall be titanium sheathed, or equal. Electrical water heaters shall be as manufactured by A.O. Smith (agent Al Ansari tel. 703231/704393) or other equal and approved. Plain galvanised tanks are not acceptable due to reaction with circulation piping .
b) c)
d) All water heaters shall be fitted with red light for indication of operation. 18.3.11 Jointing Materials
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST The use of PTFE tape or similar jointing materials is not permitted on compression fittings or others incorporating their own washer or sealing system. 18.3.12 Washing Out Before testing and being put into regular service, all installations shall be blown through and washed out with clean water to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Contractor shall include for all necessary disconnections and re-connections of pipework, etc. to enable this to be carried out. 18.3.13 Chlorination of Tanks, Cisterns & Services a) All new pipework and cold water storage tanks and cisterns shall be chlorinated before the system is brought into use for domestic purposes. Before chlorination service pipes, tanks and cisterns shall be flushed out to remove dirty water, debris, etc. No waters shall be used for domestic purposes during this flushing operation nor until chlorination has been completed. The storage tanks and cisterns shall be filled with water and the following proportions of chlorination re-agent added gradually while they are filling. 1 kg. approved bleaching powder (25% available chlorine) per 6000 litres of water. The bleaching powder shall be mixed with water before being added to the water in the tanks and cisterns. After thoroughly mixing in the tanks and cisterns taps on service in each building shall be opened, working progressively away from the tanks and cisterns until chlorinated water is delivered from the taps which shall then be closed for at least three hours. The tanks and cisterns and services shall then be thoroughly flushed out before water is used for domestic purposes.
b)
c)
d)
e)
18.3.14 Test Pressure a) All hot and cold water services shall be tested in sections to a hydraulic pressure of not less than 2 times the normal working pressure.
The test pressure shall be maintained by the pump for a minimum of one hour. When all taps are shut, the services shall be absolutely watertight. Each tap shall be opened and checked for satisfactory rate of flow. 18.3.15 Water Filter The Contractor shall supply and install an IMI filter unit (agent Muna Noor tel. 603251/603935) or other equal and approved at the inlet to drinking water coolers, ice making machines, drinking water taps and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings.
b)
18.4.0 EXTERNAL WATER SERVICES 18.4.1 General a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, delivery, installation and complete testing and commissioning of the main water supply system, complete as indicated on the Drawings and as further detailed in this Specification. This section of the Specification relates to the water services adjacent to the buildings up to and including the associated stop valves guards and surface boxes as indicated on the Drawings. The main external water supply net work is detailed elsewhere in the Specification. The Contractor's attention is also drawn to the relevant clauses of the General Section of this Specification.
b)
c)
18.4.2 Connection to Existing Supply System The Contractor shall connect new water services to existing pipework as indicated on the Drawings, and shall allow for all isolation, draining down and subsequent refilling, excavation/backfilling, and builders work and making good which may arise out of the new connections. All necessary provisions shall be included by the Contractor to make the necessary connections. 18.4.3 Pipework and Fittings a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, delivery and installation of all water supply pipework to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer and in accordance with all applicable British Standards and Codes of Practice. External water supply pipework and fittings shall generally be in Ductile Iron Pipe to MHEW Specification. All pipework joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the working and test pressure involved.
b)
c)
18.4.4 Valves - General a) All valves shall be of the types specially manufactured for water works purposes and shall be as manufactured by Saunders, (agent OUA, tel. 701291) or other equal and approved.
Where valves are installed under ground, they shall be provided with a guard and cast iron surface box. 18.4.5 Bedding and Backfilling
b)
a)
Bedding and backfilling shall be as specified under the Drainage Section of this Specification. Heptape (agent Al Sabag tel. 707558) or other equal and approved warning location tape shall be provided directly over the pipeline, 200mm below ground level. This location tape shall be blue in colour, 150mm wide heavy gauge polythene strip, printed with the words "CAUTION WATER MAIN BELOW" in Arabic and English. After backfilling, suitable pipeline markers shall be installed at strategic positions to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
b)
c)
18.4.6 Test Pressure a) All pipe work shall be tested in sections to a hydraulic pressure of not less than twice the normal working pressure. The test pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of one hour.
b)
18.4.7 Washing-Out and Chlorination All pipework shall be washed-out and chlorinated as specified for hot and cold water services. 18.5.0 DRAINAGE 18.5.1 General a) The Contractor shall include in his Tender for the supply and installation of all drainage pipework as indicated on the Drawings to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer, and the materials shall comply with the Specification. The drainage installation shall comply with the latest edition of British Standard Codes of Practice BS 8301:1985, BS 5572:1994 and BS 6297:1983. At his discretion the Engineer may require samples of foul drainage manholes to be constructed at no additional cost.
b)
c)
18.5.2 Pipework and Fittings (above Ground Floor Level) a) Unless otherwise indicated all above ground drainage pipework shall be UPVC drainage goods to BS 4514-1:1996 and -2:1999, complete with all accessories as required for the complete and proper installation of the works.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Generally waste pipes from fittings shall be PVC as supplied by Key Terrain, (agent Getco tel. 702133) or other equal and approved, but all exposed pipework and traps in toilets shall be chromium plated copper unless otherwise stated. All vent pipework shall be carried-up full bore 450mm above the roof slab level. All pipework shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Pipework shall be so arranged as to prevent the building-in of joints within the structural elements of the building and this arrangement shall also prohibit the building-in of sockets and fittings to provide fixed points. All fixed joints occurring at a distance greater than one metre apart must have a seal ring expansion joint between them.
c)
d)
e)
f)
18.5.3 Pipework and Fittings (Underground) a) Unless otherwise indicated all pipework shall be UPVC to BS 4660:1989 complete with all accessories as required for the complete and proper installation of the works. Where pipes pass under buildings, or under roads, these shall be encased in concrete. All pipework and fittings shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturers' written instructions. Where pipework crosses building expansion joints, purpose made flexible joints shall be installed close together either side of the expansion joint. Similar facilities shall be employed where underground services pass through walls or foundations. Flexible pipe joints shall also be installed immediately outside the building and before the first manhole, although this can be one joint if the manhole is close to the building.. Pipework and fittings from main kitchens shall be vitrified clayware to BS 65:1991 or cast to BS 437:1978.
b)
c)
d)
e)
18.5.4 Pipework and Fittings (Special Requirements) a) Where specified that pipework and fittings shall be cast iron or ductile iron plumbing and drainage goods to BS 416:1990 and 437:1978 as manufactured by Stanton & Staveley (agent MHD-UBM tel. 698961) or other equal and approved, complete with all accessories as required for the complete and proper installation of the work. All pipework shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) d) Vent stacks shall be carried up full bore 450mm, above the roof slab level. Pipework shall be so arranged as to prevent the building-up of joints within the structural elements of the building and this arrangement shall also prohibit the building-in of sockets and fittings to provide fixed points. All fixed points occurring at a distance greater than one metre apart must have a seal ring expansion joint between them.
e)
18.5.5 Floor Drains a) Where indicated on the Drawings, floor drains shall be as supplied by Wade (agent Al Ansari tel.702331) Frost/ ACO (Agent SSB tel. 700983), J.R.Smith Mfg. Co. (agent Al Kahf Trading tel. 704379 fax 700678) or other equal and approved. Floor drains in Royal standard bathrooms shall incorporate a gravity operated bronze backwater valve below the strainer.
b)
18.5.6 Testing a) The Contractor shall ensure that all sections of the drainage system are clear of any obstruction, debris or superfluous matter before any tests are applied. The Contractor shall from time to time as required to suit the progress of the contract conduct air tests in the vertical and horizontal runs of the internal drainage pipework in section as prescribed in BS 5572:1994 all to the satisfaction of the Engineer before any work is covered. The Engineer may also direct that a smoke test or any other test is applied to any part of the internal drainage system at any time if he considers it to be desirable and the arrangements and equipment for the performance of these tests shall be supplied by the Contractor. Following the connection of the appliances and on completion of the works, all internal drainage pipes shall be subjected to a final air test as prescribed in BS 5572:1994 with the exception of such parts of the system located below the lowest sanitary fittings which may be water tested in accordance with BS 5572:1994. On completion and before putting into operation all installations shall be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Underground and external drainage pipework to the first manhole outside the building shall be subject to a water test prior to being covered. On any section of the pipe under test, the head of water applied shall not be less than 1.2 metres and not greater than 2.4 metres. Tests shall be maintained for 30 minutes and any defects shall be rectified and the test re-applied to
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. This test shall be repeated following backfilling. g) Any defects are to be made good by the Contractor at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and immediately before handing over the Contractor shall thoroughly cleanse the whole of the system including sanitary fittings, and prove that it is functioning satisfactorily. Test certificates shall be provided in triplicate for the Engineer's approval.
h)
18.5.7 Bedding a) To avoid possible damage of the pipe, its support by ground in which it is laid should be made as uniform as possible and materials in contact with the pipe must be free from large stones, sharp edged flints or other hard objects. The trench bottom should be carefully examined for irregularities and any hard projections removed. A prepared bed is necessary and should consist of suitable well compacted selected granular material. The ideal material for the trench bed and for compacting is one that will pass through a 15mm sieve, which may impede drainage (pea gravel). The thickness of bed should be a minimum of 100mm. In all cases care should be taken to remove any leveling pegs or temporary packing such as wooden wedges, bricks or stones. Selected granular materials should then be carefully placed and compacted in uniform layers alongside and under the pipe upto a height of 100mm or more above the crown. Any trench sheeting should be partially withdrawn so as to ensure that the spaces between the pipes and all faces of the trench are completely filled with well compacted granular materials in order to provide the necessary side support for the pipes and prevent excessive deformation under load.
b)
c)
d)
18.5.8 Backfilling a) Under roads or verges, or where mechanical plant is to be used for the placing and/or compacting of the backfill, the remainder of the first 300mm depth of fill above the crown of the pipe should be compacted by hand and should consist of selected uniform readily compatible materials, placed and compacted in uniform layers (pea gravel). For the remaining backfill of the trench, the ideal material should be free from large clay lumps (retained on a 75mm sieve) from stones (retained on a 25mm sieve) and sharp edged stones or flints and vegetable matter.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 18.5.9 Pipe Laying If piping is laid in hot weather, precautions should be taken to allow for the contraction of the line which will occur when it cools to its normal working temperature. 18.5.10 Internal Manholes a) These shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as detailed for external drainage except that open channels shall not be used. The manholes shall be airtight with a double seal cover, containing cast iron inspection chamber with airtight seals, as manufactured by Brickhouse Broads (agent OUA tel. 701291), or equal and approved.
b)
18.5.11 External Manholes a) Manholes shall be constructed of 200mm thick solid loadbearing concrete blocks to be jointed in cement mortar on a 150mm bed of concrete. The construction of manholes is detailed in the Standard Sketches numbered MECH/024, 025 and 026. Malleable cast iron step irons for use in manholes shall comply with BS 1247-1:1990. Manhole covers and frames shall be manufactured from ductile iron (Grade 500/7) and shall comply fully with B.S. 7903: 1997 bearing the Kitemark as proof of compliance.
b) c)
d)
18.5.12 Pipeline Marking a) Heptape (agent Al Sabag tel. 707558) or other equal and approved warning location tape shall be provided directly over the pipeline, 200mm below ground level. This location tape shall be red in colour, 150mm wide heavy gauge polythene strip, printed with the works "CAUTION FOUL SEWER BELOW" in Arabic and English. After backfilling suitable pipeline markers shall be installed at strategic positions to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
b)
18.5.13 Grease Trap a) The Contractor shall provide and install grease traps where indicated on the drawings. The grease traps shall be complete with any necessary raising pieces to ensure that the cover is level with the ground. The grease traps shall be of the size and type indicated.
b)
c)
18.6.0 FIRE PROTECTION 18.6.1 Statutory Requirements All fire fighting equipment and systems shall comply with the requirements of the Fire Officer. 18.6.2 Hand Held Fire Fighting Appliances a) The Contractor shall provide and install where indicated on the Drawings, hand held fire fighting appliances as manufactured by Chubb (agent TTC tel. 702079/701067), Dunford (agent Tech Parts tel. 703109), or other equal and approved. Numbers, types and locations of hand held first aid fire fighting appliances shall be approved by the Fire Officer before ordering. Fire fighting stations on each floor shall be provided and installed where indicated on the drawings. Each station shall include two 9 litres water extinguishers and one 2.5 kg. BCF extinguisher. In addition, 2.5 Kg. BCF Extinguisher shall be installed in electrical rooms.
b)
c)
d)
18.6.3 Fire Hydrants a) Fire hydrants shall be provided and installed approximately where indicated on the Drawings. The final location of the hydrants shall be as directed on Site by the Engineer, after final agreement with the Fire Officer. The hydrants shall be manufactured by Blakeborough and Sons (agent Al Mutawah tel. 701841/703081) or other equal and approved, in strict accordance with the relevant British Standard. They shall incorporate cast iron body to BS 750:1984, Class 1, with bronze spindle, 80mm flanged inlet connections and 65mm outlet, complete with brass 54mm outlet piece with cap and chain to match. Each hydrant shall be contained within a concrete housing with a fig. No.9083A surface Box to BS750:1984. The Contractor shall provide two 2490 steel operating hydrant keys which shall be handed to the Employer on completion.
b)
c)
d)
18.6.4 Extinguishing System
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Automatic fixed fire fighting extinguishing shall be provided and installed in the areas indicated on the drawings. Halon is not an acceptable extinguishant. Extinguishing control units to be positioned immediately outside the risk areas providing key operated system functions and visual system status. Alarm bell to be installed within the risk area, giving warning of first zone activate ion, with Banshee Siren (also installed within the risk area) giving warning of imminent gas discharge. Two ionisation smoke detectors per risk area shall be provided and installed, these being split on two separate zones giving the "double knock" facility. Therefore, both detectors have to give alarm condition in order to start gas discharge sequence. Both zones on each system will also indicate back on main control unit.
b) c)
d)
e)
18.6.5 Hose Reels a) The Contractor shall supply and install where indicated on the Drawings, recessed swinging door mounted type automatic hose reels, as manufactured by Dunford (agent Tech Parts tel. 703109), or other equal and approved. Each hose reel shall be complete with the following: i) 30m of 19mm bore braided non kink hydraulic red rubber hose, suitable for a working pressure of not less than 10 bar. The outlet shall have a lever operated control nozzle. The inlet shall be fitted with a 28mm isolating valve for maintenance purposes only, and this shall be of the lockshield type. The hose reel drum shall incorporate an automatic valve to initiate water flow as soon as the hose is run out.
b)
ii)
iii)
c)
All pipework and fittings shall be light gauge copper to BS EN 1057:1996 and the installation shall comply with details for pipework given elsewhere in this Specification. At the highest point of the fire ring main, an air bottle and automatic air eliminator shall be fitted.
d)
18.6.6 Hose Reel Pump Set a) A full automatic Firepack Series package pumping set manufactured to approved standards and of the capacity indicated in the schedule shall be installed where indicated on the drawings.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) The pumpset shall consist of two close coupled vertical multistage pumps, controlled via a pressure control panel, giving automatic change-over from duty to standby pump in the event of failure of the duty pump. The pumpset shall be completed with all necessary interconnecting pipework and Fire Authority approved valves, non return valves, test points, fittings, etc. together with suitable membrane tank. The complete unit shall be supplied wired, assembled and tested at works on a common base frame. Water for the hose reel system shall be provided from the fire main tank on the roof and this tank shall be as specified for hot and cold water services.
c)
d)
e)
18.7.0 IRRIGATION WORKS 18.7.1 General a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, delivery, installation and complete testing and commissioning of the irrigation system, including the mains water supply, complete as shown on the Drawings and as further detailed in this Specification. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for co-ordinating with the Water Authority if necessary and shall pay all fees or charges required by the Authority in connection with the provision of water for this project. The Contractor's attention is also drawn to the relevant clauses of the General Section of this Specification and all sections of BS 7562:1992 and 1993. All pipework shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. A copy of these instructions shall be available on site for the duration of the contract.
b)
c)
d)
18.7.2 Connection to Existing Water Main a) The actual connection to the existing main shall be carried out by the Water Authority, but the Contractor shall be responsible for all negotiations and shall include for all costs involved. A main stop valve shall be fitted on the new connection as near as possible to point of connection.
b)
18.7. 3 Pipework - Irrigation
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) All underground irrigation mains pipework from the pumphouse shall be UPVC Class 'E' to BS3505:1986 with joints and fittings to BS4346 1:1969 for solvent welded joints and -2:1970 for mechanical joints. During storing and laying, UPVC pipes shall be protected from ultraviolet light at all times. Any UPVC pipe not protected may be condemned. Thrust blocks shall be provided at all junctions and changes in direction. All thrust blocks shall be taken back to virgin ground. When partially or completely surrounding UPVC pipe with concrete, the pipe shall be wrapped with a compressible material such as heavy duty polythene. All UPVC pipes shall be as manufactured by Yorkshire Imperial Plastics (agent Muna Noor tel. 603251/603935), or other equal and approved. Pipes shall not be cold bent on site to a radius less than 200 times the maximum outside diameter of the pipe. Any pipes so bent shall be properly supported using concrete supports to avoid any possibility of deflection at the joints. Cold bending of pipes is to be avoided where possible.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
18.7.4 Pipework - Sub-Mains a) All underground irrigation sub-mains lateral pipework shall be Polyethylene (PE) SDR-PRESSURE RATED TUBING (agent Al Ansari tel. 703231/704393) or other equal and approved. All underground pipework between irrigation main and laterals shall be PVC Schedule 80 IPS plastic pipe and PVC Schedule 40 fittings, screwed to American N.P.T., or equal and approved. All emitter supply tubing shall be 14.7mm I.D. Polyethylene type RB-580, as supplied by Rain Bird International (agent Al Ansari tel.703231/704393), or equal and approved. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all pipework and fittings are compatible with the specified equipment. All pipework and fittings shall be suitable for the working and test pressures involved under local climatic conditions.
b)
c)
d)
e)
18.7.5 Pipework - Pumphouse a) All pipework and fittings within the pumphouse shall be copper to BS EN 1057:1996 or ductile iron to BS4772. Flanged joints shall be provided on all connections to equipment and valves to allow removal for maintenance.
b)
18.7.6 Pressurising Unit a) The Contractor shall provide and install in each pumphouse, where indicated on the drawings, packaged water pressurising units capable of serving the duties specified in the schedule. The pressurising units shall be complete with the following: i) ii) iii) Pressure chamber Three pumps, one to act as standby. Control panel incorporating pressure switches, Star Delta starters, pressure gauges, hand/off/auto switches, duty pump selector switch, time clock, motor heater controls, etc. Control panel labeling in both English and Arabic Float switch for low water level cut out. All interconnecting pipework in copper tube to BS EN 1057:1996 and all necessary isolating and non-return valves. Flexible connections on supply and delivery.
b)
iv) v) vi)
vii) c)
All motors shall have IP55 enclosures with anticondensation heaters and Class 'F' insulation and be suitable for use with 415 Volts, 3-phase, 50Hz, 4-wire electric supply. Refer also to the Electrical Section of this Specification. The unit, including steel mounting base, shall be protected against corrosion by means of special Epoxy paint finish, or equal and approved. Pumps shall have cast iron bodies, stainless steel shafts, noryl impellers and be fitted with mechanical seals. The Contractor shall ensure that the unit is installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and final testing and commissioning of the units shall be carried-out by the supplier's Engineer. The pressurising units and all associated equipment as detailed above shall be as manufactured by Oman Water Pumps or equal and approved.
d)
e)
f)
g)
18.7.7 Fertilizer Dispensing Tank

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) The Contractor shall provide and install in each pumphouse, where indicated on the Drawings, one stainless steel fertilizer dispensing tank of the capacity indicated. The dispensing tank shall be suitable for operation utilizing the pressure differential of the system pumps. A meter shall be provided on the discharge connection of the unit. The fertilizer dispensing tank, complete, shall be as supplied by Rain Bird International (agent Al Ansari tel. 703231/704393), or other equal and approved.
b)
c)
18.7.8 Filter Unit a) The Contractor shall provide and install in each pumphouse, where indicated in the Drawings, stainless steel filter units with of the capacity indicated on the drawings. The unit shall be complete with inlet and outlet connections and shall be provided with adapters suitable for connecting to flanged copper tube as specified above. The unit shall be complete with a 'thruflush' valve suitable for manual operation. The unit shall incorporate a 30 mesh stainless steel polymetric screen cartridge. The filter unit complete shall be as supplied by Rain Bird International (agent Al Ansari tel. 703231/704393) or other equal and approved.
b)
c)
d)
e)
18.7.9 Water Meters a) The Contractors shall provide and install, where indicated on the Drawings, water meters capable of passing 45m3/hr with a maximum pressure loss of 2m. The meter shall read in cubic metres. The meter shall be a Helix 2000 as manufactured by Kent Meters Ltd., Pondswick Road, Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3LJ, England (agent SSB tel. 793741/793750) or other equal and approved. The meter and valves shall be housed in a special moulded GRP box with lockable cast iron cover, all as supplied by the meter manufacturer. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Ministry of Electricity & Water before ordering the meters. Isolating valves shall be fitted on the inlet and outlet of the meter.
b)
c)
d)
e)
18.7.10 Pressure Gauges a) Pressure gauges of the direct mounting, bottom connection types shall be provided where indicated and shall be constructed as follows: i) Case ii) Bezel iii) Window iv) Dial v) Pointer vi) Movement - 100mm diameter Bakelite x 5073 - Screw-on type black Bakelite x 5073 - 3mm thick high quality sheet glass - White enameled aluminium alloy to 3693:1992. - Black finished aluminium alloy - Stainless steel/brass
Pressure gauges shall have dials suitable for the pressure range 0 to 10 Bar. b) All gauges shall be as manufactured by Sydeny Smith Denis, Crossgate Drive, Queens Drive Industrial Estate, Nottingham NG2 1LQ, England, or other equal and approved.
18.7.11 Valves a) Valves of the diaphragm type shall be provided where indicated and shall be constructed as follows: i) Body - Cast iron flanged external surfaces protected with alkyd paint or similar corrosion protections. Handwheel - ABS upto 50mm metal over 50mm underground valves shall be provided with square top or similar for key operation. Diaphram - Rubber (manufacturer to be consulted). Valve Body Lining - Hard rubber (manufacturer to be consulted).
ii)
iii) iv)
All valves to be provided with connectors suitable for use with pipework specified above. b) c) Underground valves shall be provided with a valve box. All valves shall be provided with integral indicator plate giving valve reference number. A framed diagram and valve chart shall be provided in the pumphouse, showing the location and function of each valve within the pumphouse. The valve diagram and chart shall be A1 in size and plastic covered.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) Valves shall be type A, as manufactured by Saunders Valve Co. Ltd. Cwmbran Gwent NP44 3XX, United Kingdom (agent OUA tel. 701291) or other equal and approved. Six (6) keys for the operation of the underground valves shall be handed to the Employer on handover of the system. Reservoir float operation inlet valves shall be of the Larner - Johnson type 3078, as supplied by J. Blakeborough & Sons Ltd., P.O. Box 11, Brighouse, West Yorkshire HD6 1NH, England (agent Al Mutawah tel. 701841/703081) or other equal and approved. Stilling tanks shall be provided where the inrush of water is liable to cause erratic operation of the float.
e)
f)
18.7.12 Pressure Regulators a) The Contractor shall provide and install pressure regulators where indicated on the Drawings. Each pressure regulator shall be suitable for underground installation and capable of handling water flow rates indicated elsewhere whilst maintaining an outlet pressure of 1.7 Bar with inlet pressures between 2 and 5.5 Bar. The pressure regulators shall be constructed of highly resistant, glass filled plastic, with 19mm F.N.P.T. inlet and outlet connections. The regulator shall be supplied complete with outlet tee fitting suitable for connection to 25mm polyethylene tubing. The pressure regulators shall be type PS1-HMB-25 as manufactured by Rain Bird International (agent Al Ansari tel. 703231/704393) or other equal and approved.
b)
c)
d)
f)
18.7.13 Emitters Drip irrigation emitters sprinklers and sprays shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings. 18.7.14 Hose Points a) b) Hose points shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings. The hose points shall be type 44, as supplied by Rain Bird International (agent Al Ansari tel. 703231/704393) or other equal and approved. Each hose point shall be located in a purpose made turf box with lockable cover.
c)
18.7.15 Pipe Trench Bedding

a)
The support of pipes by ground in which they are laid shall be made as uniform as possible and materials in contact with the pipes shall be free from large stones, sharp edged flints or other hard objects. The trench bottom shall be carefully examined for irregularities and any hard projections removed. A prepared bed shall be provided as follows: i) Normal Ground: - Bedding material shall have a depth of 100mm or one sixth of the pipe outside diameter which ever is the greater. ii) Rocky Ground: - Bedding material shall have a depth of 200mm or one quarter of the pipe outside diameter whichever is the greater. The bedding shall be packed and compacted over the full width of the trench.
b)
c)
d)
The material for granular bedding shall be of adequate crushing strength and be rounded or cubical in shape. The grading shall be within the limits given in BS882:1992 for 10mm or 14mm nominal single sized aggregate. The material shall be resistant to chemical attack.
18.7.16 Pipe Trench Backfill a) In all cases care shall be taken to ensure that all leveling pegs or temporary packing such as wooden wedges, bricks or stones are removed from the trench. Selected granular material as specified for bedding shall be placed and compacted in uniform layers under, alongside and over the pipe to a height of 100mm or more above the crown. Where pipes run under roads or verges, or where mechanical plant is to be used for the placing and/or compacting of the backfill, the remainder of the first 300mm depth of fill above the crown of the pipe shall be compacted by hand and shall consist of selected uniform readily compatible material, as specified for bedding, placed and compacted in uniform layers. Any trench sheeting shall be partially withdrawn so as to ensure that the space between the pipes and the faces of the trench are completely filled with well compacted granular material in order to provide the necessary side support for the pipes and prevent excessive deformation under load. The remainder of the trench backfill material shall be free from large clay lumps (retained on a 75mm sieve), stones (retained on a 25mm sieve), sharp edged stones or fillings and vegetable matter.
b)
c)
d)
e)
18.7.17 Pipeline Marking a) Heptape (agent Al Sabag tel. 707558) or other equal and approved warning location tape shall be provided directly over the pipelines, 200mm below ground level. This location tape shall be red in colour, 150mm wide heavy gauge polythene strip, printed with the works "CAUTION IRRIGATION MAIN BELOW" in Arabic and English. After backfilling, suitable precast concrete pipeline markers shall be installed at strategic positions to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
b)
18.7.18 Testing a) All pipes and fittings shall be inspected and tested by the manufacturers at their factory, and shall comply with the requirements of the Specification. The pipes and fittings should be inspected on site before laying and any defective items shall be clearly marked as rejected and forthwith removed from the site. After laying, jointing and anchoring, the main shall be slowly and carefully charged with water, so that all air is expelled, allowed to stand full for several days and then tested under pressure. Long mains shall be tested in sections as the work or laying proceeds, and joints shall be left exposed for inspection during the testing. If the section of main tested terminates with a valve, the valve shall not be used to retain the water; instead the valve should be fitted temporarily with a blank flanges and the valve shall be placed in the open position while testing. End support shall be given to the blank flange. The test pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump or, in the case of long mains or mains of large diameter, by a power-driven test pump which shall not be left unattended. In either case precautions shall be taken to ensure that the required pressure is not exceeded. Pressure gauges shall be re-calibrated before the test. The test pressure shall be the maximum working pressure plus 50%.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST h) The test pressure shall be maintained for one hour without any noticeable fall in pressure.
18.8.0 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (BUTANE) INSTALLATIONS 18.8.1 General Storage of gas shall be by means of cylinders. All gas burning appliances shall comply with BS 5258-2:1975 and BS 5386-4:1991 and BS EN30-1-2:1999 and shall be suitable for use with liquefied petroleum gas. The installation generally shall be in accordance with the recommendations of BS 5482-1:1994 "Installations in Permanent Dwellings". 18.8. 2 Gas Pipework a) Fixed line pipes shall conform to BS 1387:1985 Table 3 Heavy Duty, BS 3601:1987 Seamless Steel Grade 320 or American Standards API Schedule 40 or 80. Except where threaded connections are required to regulators or other items of equipment, all joints shall be butt or socket welded in accordance with BS 2633:1987, BS 2971:1991 and API Standards. In cases where screwed joints are required, they shall conform to BS 21. The jointing compounds shall comply with the relevant sections of BS 5292:1980 and shall be applied in accordance with BS 5482:1994. Joints shall not be permitted where gas pipes cross the line or other services. Steel pipe fittings shall be forged or cast steel and shall conform to BS 1256:1986, BS 1740-1:1971 or API Schedule 40 or 80. All fittings to be welded shall be 'welding neck', 'socket weld' or 'slip-on' type. Flanges shall be 'raised-face' type conforming to BS 4504-3.1 and3.3:1989 or API (150 1b). For low pressure equipment the final connections to appliances shall be with stainless steel braided pigtails conforming to BS 669-1:1989, the size of which shall depend on the volumetric requirements of the equipment. High pressure equipment shall be connected with 3/8" nominal bore stainless steel pigtails or 3/8" nominal bore copper pigtails (annealed) if connections are located within a hot zone. Copper tubing shall conform to BS EN 1057:1996. Copper fittings shall conform to BS 864-2:1983. Gas cylinders shall be connected to manifolds using 3/8" nominal bore stainless steel braided cylinder pigtails conforming to BS 6691:1989, with left hand threaded connections to BS 21:1985.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST g) Pipes shall be laid in service ducts wherever possible and protected from water by being fixed to the wall of the duct above invert level. Maximum separation is required between gas and other services. All pipes and fittings, excluding regulators, shall be prepared and coated with two coats red oxide primer with final coating of alkyd gloss paint colour-coded to BS 1710:1984. Where pipelines are buried under floors or otherwise unavoidable built-in they shall be suitably protected using 'Densotape' or similar approved wrapping. In such locations joints shall not be permitted except with the Engineer's approval in circumstances where a joint is unavoidable. 'Densotape' (agent Getco tel.702133) or other equal and approved wrapping shall consist of one layer 'Denso' anti-corrosion tape outer-wrapped with on layer of 'Denso' PVC-backed tape.
h)
i)
18.8.3 Valves and Regulators a) Valves shall be Teflon seated rotary ball valves of the following type or similar approved. i) Worcester Series 44 carbon steel PTFE seats as manufactured by Worcester Engineering Co., Wavington Road Dudley, Worcs WR5 3DG telex U.K. 337193. Truflo Sandwich ball valves Truflo bar stocks ball valves as manufactured by Truflo Ltd., Westwood Road, Witton, Birmingham B6 7JF, telex UK 338840.
ii) iii)
b)
The connections shall be screwed BSP taper to BS 21:1985, socket weld or flanged. The main Isolation valve shall be flanged. Flanges shall be 'raised-face' type conforming to BS 4504-3-1 and -3-3:1989 or API (150 lb). Branch lines serving cooking units or appliances shall include a rotary ball isolating valve, to facilitate maintenance of individual items without affecting the rest of the system. Also a rotary ball valve shall be installed on the main line to the cooking appliances before the manifold to high and low pressure systems. For bulk catering installations an emergency shut-off fire valve shall be installed. This valve shall be located immediately downstream of the main high pressure regulator in the bottle storage cabin. The valve operation shall be either by cable or preferably by an electric actuator where longer cable runs or difficulty of access for maintenance of the cable would be necessary. Where an actuator is used, the motor shall be suitable for use in Zone 2 (type N protection) to BS EN 60079-10 and -14:1997, or mounted externally and be
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST weatherproof. Also, where an actuator is used, the valve must remain open under power failure conditions. This is to be achieved by means of a 24 Volt DC power supply unit, with a 240 Volt mains supply to maintain batteries, or other approved system. e) For gas supplies to mess kitchens two-stage regulation is required. The first stage of regulation (from cylinder to Intermediate pressure) shall be located where the gas main leaves the cylinder manifold. The second stage of regulation (from Intermediate to appropriate equipment operating pressure) shall be located near to the cooking equipment. Sufficient regulator capacity must be installed to ensure that the correct pressure will be maintained at maximum demand (i.e. all appliances in operation at the same time) and all regulators must be adjustable. For gas supplies to domestic cookers, only single-stage regulation is required. The regulators shall be located where the gas main leaves the cylinder manifold and shall be the same type as the second stage regulators for low pressure appliances. Regulators shall be as follows: i) First stage regulator - Rego Red 1584 YL (4.13 bar to 690 mbar) - Rego Red 2403 T4 (690 mbar to 320 mbar) - Vanaz Red 5200.269 - Rego Blue 2503 B4 (690 mbar to 30 mbar) - Vanaz Blue 5200.26B
f)
g)
ii)
Second stage regulator for high pressure appliances
iii)
Second stage regulator for low pressure appliances and domestic installations
18.8.4 Gas Cylinders Gas cylinders shall be stored and used in an upright position and housed in a purpose built well ventilated bottle store as shown on the Drawings. One complete set of cylinders shall be supplied under the contract. LPG cylinders shall be fabricated and certified in accordance with BS 504-2:1989, DOT 4BA 240, or ASME. 18.8.5 Testing and Commissioning a) Prior to connecting gas bottles, cooking equipment and regulators, the piping system shall be pressure tested as detailed in Appendix C of BS 5482-1:1994 with the one exception of test pressure. This shall be set at 125 psl (8.5 bar) and the testing medium shall be compressed air. All welded joints shall be soap tested and those found to be defective shall be cut out and a new section of line prepared, aligned
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST and welded. No regrindling or back-gouging to the existing defective joints nor rewelding will be permitted. The test duration shall be 4 hours at maximum test pressure with no drop in pressure acceptable. b) All regulators shall be adjusted to the manufacturer's recommended initial setting detailed on the pressure/flow performance graphs. The complete system shall be tested to ensure all items of equipment are operating correctly at maximum capacity. The system test time shall be for a minimum of two hours and during this time close visual inspection of the complete installation covering all aspects shall be made. Any defects shall be noted and corrected on completion of the test period. Should a defective item of equipment warrant the immediate shut down of the system, this shall be carried out, the system corrected and the test re-scheduled.
18.9.0 SWIMMING POOLS AND WATER FEATURES 18.9.1 General a) The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission the plant and equipment required to serve the swimming pool(s) and water feature(s) indicated on the Drawing. The relevant Sections of this Specification with respect to pipework of various types and other common components, installation method etc. shall apply equally to this Section. The Particular Specification will provide the details for pumps, filters, and relevant accessories for the scheme.
b)
c)
18.10.0 REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK a) All pipework for refrigeration systems shall be of refrigeration quality copper with flanged brazed of capillary fittings. All refrigeration pipework between condensing units and fan coil units shall be installed strictly in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's printed instructions. The pipework connections shall include all necessary fittings such as strainers, liquid valves, sight glasses, expansion valves,, dryers, etc. required for the complete and proper operation of the plant. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's instructions regarding pressure testing, evacuation and charging of the system. The Contractor shall obtain written confirmation from the manufacturer that the length and lift of refrigeration pipework involved will not interfere with the proper functioning of the equipment.
b)
c)
d)
e)
End of Section
19.0.0 THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION 19.0.1 Scope of Work a) The thermal insulation as specified hereafter shall be applied to the following where applicable: i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) Condensate drains Air conditioning plant Refrigeration pipework Sheet metal ductwork Builder's work ducts Hot and Cold water services Elsewhere as directed by the Engineer and/or as may be expected in accordance with good engineering practice.
b)
Acoustic insulation as specified hereafter shall be applied to the following where applicable (See also Clause 16.6). i) ii) iii) iv) Air Conditioning plant Sheet metal ductwork Builder's work ducts Elsewhere as directed by the Engineer and/or as may be expected in accordance with good engineering practice.
c)
The whole of the insulation shall be carried out by a specialist subcontractor to the Contractor with experience of this type of work. Alternatively, the material shall be manufactured and supplied by a specialist firm and the Contractor may carry out the actual application on site, subject to his satisfying the Engineer that he has the sufficient skilled labour to carry out this work direct and the insulation must be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's method of application. The manufacturer in this case shall provide all the necessary insulation material, wrapping, finishes, fixing bands, etc, pre-formed and moulded to suit the plant and pipework and full installation instructions to enable the Contractor to satisfactorily apply on site. Insulation on bends and tees shall be cut and mitred on site to fit. Special preformed housings shall be provided for valves, strainers, non return valves and flanges constructed from aluminium sheeting with suitable insulation lining for the service in which they are installed and readily removable for maintenance purposes. Samples to be provided for approval prior to installation.
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Chilled water pumps shall be insulated either by using Denso or similar mouldable insulation material neatly moulded to the shape of the pump body or by cutting and forming expanded polystyrene sheets to fit. The insulation thickness shall be to the manufacturers recommendations for the application. 19.0.2 Hot & Cold Pipework in Internal Chases & Voids a) Hot and cold water pipework in internal ducts, floor trenches, false ceilings, vertical ducts, voids, etc. shall be insulated with minimum 6mm thick Armalfex (agent BEC tel. 597510) or other equal and approved. Hot and cold water pipework in wall chases shall be insulated with Denso (agent Getco tel. 702133) or other equal and approved wrap. f)
b)
19.0.3 Low Temperature Pipework a) Chilled water pipework shall be insulated with pre-formed insulation using expanded polystyrene for plant rooms and exposed/non airconditioned areas. Fibre glass may be used on concealed works. Chilled water pipework shall be insulated with the equivalent of the following minimum thickness: Nominal Bore 15 - 25 mm 32 - 40 mm 50 mm and above Plant Rooms, External, and Non Air-conditioned Spaces c) Material Thickness 25 mm 38 mm 50 mm 75mm Polystyrene.
b)
All insulation to refrigeration and condensate pipework shall be Armaflex, (agent BEC tel. 597510) or other equal and approved. This shall be applied in a thickness suitable for the application as recommended by the manufacturers data.
19.0.4 Air Handling Units, Condensing Units & Packaged Units Air handling units shall have thermal and acoustic insulation as provided by the Manufacturer. 19.0.5 Sheet Metal Ductwork a) All air conditioning sheet metal ductwork and accessories installed in airconditioned spaces, including return air voids shall be covered with material which has the thermal and characteristics of 25mm glass fibre rigid insulation, having a density not less than 48 kg/m faced with an aluminium foil/fibre glass reinforced paper laminate with joints sealed, using self-adhesive matching tape provided by the insulation manufacturer. Ductwork in all other spaces shall have 50mm thick
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST polystyrene insulation, or its equivalent in physical strength and thermal efficiency. b) Acoustic insulation shall be applied to the inside surfaces of the ductwork where indicated on the Drawings. This insulation shall comprise at least 25mm thickness of fibrous sound absorbent material with a density of 48kg/m specially manufactured for the purpose and shall be securely fixed to the inside of the ductwork with an adhesive recommended by the suppliers. All acoustic insulation shall be sealed to prevent migration as Kimmco Clean Liner (Kimmco phone 607780)or other equal and approved. The dimensions of the duct work indicated on the drawings shall be the clear internal dimensions of the duct, measured inside the lining and the dimensions of the ductwork shall be increased accordingly.
c)
d)
19.0.6 Fixing Insulation to Metal Surfaces a) Apply a full bed film of Foster Adhesives (agent SFO tel.704400/704459) Ductfas adhesive 81.22 to the metal surface by brush or notched trowel at a rate of up to 5m2 per litre or other equal and approved. Fibrous insulants may be offered up immediately to the adhesive film. In the case of cellular insulants apply ductfar to both surfaces (metal and insulant) at up to 5m2 per litre. Wait until adhesive film is almost touch dry before offering insulation up to metal surface. On large, flat surfaces additional mechanical support shall be achieved by the use of Fosters Adhesives (agent SFO tel.704400/704459) Clipfas nylon pins and washers. Apply by means of Fosters Adhesives (agent SFO tel. 704400/704459) Clipfas neoprene adhesive 13.29 or other equal and approved at the rate of 250 - 300 hangers and washers per 1 litre of adhesive or equal and approved. Apply a thin film of adhesive to base of hanger and to metal surface: leave open for 1-3 minutes and bond firmly. Each hanger will support up to 6.8 kilos of insulation in cantilever configuration. Metal pins and washers and external wire or strap binding are not permitted.
b)
c)
19.0.7 Vapour Sealing of Penetrations Foster Adhesives (agent SFO tel.704400/704459) Foamseal or other equal and approved should also be used as a flashing compound at valves and flanges, and at all protrusions through the insulation to prevent the entry of moisture. Apply a heavy brush or trowel coat of foamseal sealant 30.45 or other equal and approved to completely seal the joint extending over adjacent insulation and metal surfaces at least 75mm. Embed, Foster Adhesives (agent SFO tel. 704400/704459) Expandite No.10, open weave glass cloth or other equal and approved into the wet coating to ensure complete and uniform contact, smoothing out all wrinkles.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Immediately apply a second heavy coat of foamseal sealant 30.45 over the entire membrane surface, leaving a large bead or fillet over the joint.
19.0.8 Vapour Barrier and Protection to Insulation a) All refrigeration pipework and condensate drains, cold water pipework and air conditioning ductwork insulation shall be effectively vapour sealed and/or protected. Apply by brush or spray to the entire insulation surface a tack coat of Foster Adhesives (agent SFO Tel. 704400/704459) Sealfar coating 30.36 at the rate of 1m2 per litre or other equal and approved. Immediately embed No.20 open weave glass cloth into the wet film, allowing a 75mm overlap at longitudinal and butt joints. Smooth out to eliminate any wrinkles. Allow to dry. Apply a second coat of sealfar coating 30.36 to the entire surface by brush or spray at the rate of 1m2/liter. Allow to dry. Where the insulation does not incorporate its own vapour seal this shall be applied after above the coating is thoroughly dry by applying one coat of vapour barrier coating 57.86 by brush or spray at the rate of 4m2 per litre. When dry apply a second coat of vapour barrier coating 57.86 by brush or spray at the rate of 4m2 per litre. To ensure security of the vapour seal apply by means of caulking gun or trowel, at a minimum 3mm wet film thickness, Foster Adhesives (agent SFO tel.704400/704459) Foamseal sealant 30.45 or other equal and approved to all longitudinal and butt joints of insulation sections.
b)
c)
d)
19.0.9 Insulated Builders Work Plenums a) Where return air plenums are formed as indicated on the Drawings, these shall be fully lined using 25mm micro-air duct board, installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Where acoustic insulation is required it shall be as specified for ductwork.
b)
19.0.10 Painting a) Where exposed to view the finish on the insulation shall be painted to a colour schedule which will be prepared by the Engineer in conjunction with the Architect. Armaflex insulation shall be painted with Armafinish H.N. paint (agent SFO tel.704400/704459) or other equal and approved. The contractor shall provide and fix approved identification labels to all pipework, indicating the service and the direction of flow. The colour codes and method of application to be used must be approved by the Engineer, but shall generally be in accordance with BS 1710.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 19.0.11 Installation Work a) It is essential that the whole of the work shall be carried out by operatives skilled in the particular trade, and installed strictly in accordance with the suppliers written instructions. All insulating material shall be in close contract with the surface to which it is applied and all joints shall be sealed. Each pipe shall be insulated separately and adjacent parallel pipes shall not be married together with insulating material. Any insulation not installed neatly and not in accordance with the suppliers instructions shall be condemned and removed from the site and replaced to the Engineers' satisfaction. Sample installations shall be provided for approval. Weatherproofing All external pipework shall be effectively weatherproofed and protected using glass cloth and Fosters sealants as described in 18.8. after which it shall be clad in aluminium hammer clad finish. The contractor shall demonstrate that the any rivets have not punctured the vapour seal or alternatively apply the cladding with suitable banding. Armaflex insulation shall be protected using Armaflex H.N. paint or other equal and approved colour. Ductwork insulation shall be protected using glass cloth and Fosters sealants. The type of sealants and the number of coats shall be as described in 16.7.11 after which aluminium cladding shall be furnished as described in the drawings issued with this specification..
b)
c)
d)
19.0.12 a)
b)
c)
19.0.13 Quality of Materials All insulating materials shall be supplied in accordance with the general requirements of BS 5422:1990 and shall be suitable for the temperature ranges which may be encountered on the hot and cold surfaces. All insulation materials within the building structure shall be subject to approval by the local Fire Officer. 19.0.14 Testing a) Insulation shall be subject to visual examinations. The Engineer reserves the right to open insulation control. These areas shall be made good at the contractors expense. In the event the works examined are not satisfactory the Engineer may condemn the entire insulation which shall then be rectified at the contractors expense.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) The Engineer reserves the right to call for thermal conductivity and thickness tests. These tests shall be carried out in the manner set out in the BS 1334 and 1588.
c)
19.0.15 Information to be Supplied by Specialist The Contractor shall state at the time of submitting his Tender the following information: a) Declared value of thermal conductivity and thickness of thermal insulation proposed on all sections of the works. Details of finishes if at variance with those outlined in this Specification. Name of specialist sub-contractor who will carry out the work or whether the Contractor will apply the insulation. If the Contractor intends to carry out the work, he shall, at the time of tendering, give details of the experience of the insulation installers he intends to use on this contract. Any other information of particular interest relative to the Contractor's proposals.
b) c)
d)
End of Section
20.0.0 ELECTRICAL SERVICES 20.0.1 ELECTRICAL WORKS IN CONNECTION WITH MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT & CONTRACTORS 20.0.1 General a) All electrical work must comply in all respects with the Regulations and Requirements as contained in BS 7671:1992 and the requirements of the Electricity Authority, Sultanate of Oman. The electrical supplies available will be 415 Volts, three-phase, 50 HZ and 230 Volts, one-phase, 50 HZ. Where required for large integrated system the design and control philosophy are given in the Particular Specification. Indicator lamps, including those incorporated in switches and push buttons shall be protected LED as manufactured by Schneider Electric SA or equal and approved. Electrical panels for outdoor mounting shall be rated to IP65 and shall not deteriorate or discolour from the effects of strong ultraviolet light.
b)
c)
d)
e)
20.0.2 Air-conditioning Control Panels a) The air conditioning control panels shall incorporate all necessary equipment, isolator, starters, control circuit fuses, thermal overload. These panels shall be installed within the A.H.U's rooms. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer working drawings incorporating comprehensive details of all control equipment and wiring diagrams for approval prior to placing orders.
b)
20.0.3 Control Gear a) Each motor shall have its own starter. These shall be provided by the Contractor as detailed below unless otherwise specified under the particular clause appertaining thereto. i) Single-phase motors not exceeding 3 HP may be installed provided they are of a type which limits the starting current to three times
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST full load current when thrown directly on the line. Single-phase motors not exceeding 5 HP may be installed provided they are fitted with a suitable starting device to limit the starting current to one and a half times full load current. ii) Three-phase motors upto and including 3 HP may be started direct on line. All three-phase motors above 3 HP must be provided with suitable starters so designed that the starting current does not exceed two and a half times full load current. The Engineer may, however, give consideration to special cases.
b)
The starting gear shall include in general the following: i) Adjustable time-lagged thermal indirectly heated overload release positive acting and ambient temperature compensated. Single phasing preventor. Under voltage protector. Self-contained push buttons for local control and indicating light giving running and tripped indication.
ii) iii) iv)
c)
Trip settings and overcurrent devices shall be calibrated for 125, 150 and 200 percent of full load current, unless otherwise stated in the Specification. All starters provided shall be of the same manufacture unless otherwise stated in this Specification. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the overload trips are correctly set to afford the necessary protection to the motors. Provision shall be made for automatic operation where indicated in the Specification. The power factor for air conditioning system shall not be less than 0.8. Where necessary power factor correction shall be utilised to achieve this. Full details of all motors, switchgear and other Electrical equipment must be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor for final approval before any orders are placed with the manufacturers.
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
20.0.4 Motors a) All motors and switchgear in any position of high ambient temperature shall be suitable for the high temperature working conditions.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) All motors shall be continuously rated and shall be of adequate size to drive the plant efficiently under all conditions of normal services without overload. Non fractional HP motors shall be Class 'F' insulated and shall comply with BS 4999-102,-111and -141:1987 and BS 5000-10:1978 and -15:1980 as applicable.(These references exclude flameproof motors.) All windings shall be insulated from frame and shall be suitably impregnated with insulating varnish after which the end connections shall be further treated with varnish to afford protection against camp and foreign substances. The terminal for the incoming leads and all connections to motors shall be mounted on high grade non inflammable bases with terminals of opposite polarity well insulated and separated from each other. The terminals shall be enclosed in cast iron or sheet steel box of ample dimensions, fitted with cast iron or sheet steel cover which, on removal, will allow free access to the terminals. The terminal box shall be mounted on an accessible part of the motor and provided with screwed inlet connection for conduit and arranged so that the conduit can be coupled-up without having to dismantle the terminals from the frame of the motor. Test certificates shall be submitted in triplicate to the Engineer of motor tests in accordance with the appropriate section of BS 5000.
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
20.0.5 Water Heater Control a) All water heaters upto and including 3 KW shall be controlled by a 20AMP D.P. switch. All water heaters with rating higher than 3 KW shall be controlled by a contactor control unit. The contactor unit shall be housed in sheet steel enclosure comprising contactor/s, rotary isolator, local fuses if required and pilot light in front cover. This shall be as manufactured by the heater supplier.
b)
End of Section
21.0.0 H.V. DISTRIBUTION AND SUBSTATION 21.0.1 General a) The works include for the supply and installation of the 11kV distribution as indicated on the Drawings and described in the Specification. The arrangement of the substations, HV boards, HV ring main units and transformers location shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The electricity supply will be obtained from the existing M.E.W. network. The existing system of the M.E.W. has the following characteristics. System Voltage 11 kV Phases 3 Frequency 50 HZ Method of Earthing Solid Earth All electrical equipment shall be suitable for operating in an ambient temperature of 50C and relative humidity of 95% and, where necessary, derated to suit these conditions. The installation shall be carried out by an MEW approved contractor.
b) c)
d)
e)
21.0.2 Testing on Completion. a) The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer by means of suitable tests as detailed hereafter in this Specification, during erection and final tests on completion that the whole of his work is carried out in accordance with all rules and regulations applicable to the work and shall provide, at his own expense, all testing instruments, apparatus, etc., and shall provide all labour required. The accuracy of the test must be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, whose decision shall be final. In particular the tests to be carried out as the installation progresses, on completion of the works and subsequent to maintenance shall be as detailed in the following clauses. During the commissioning period the Contractor shall give full and practical instruction to the Employer's staff concerning the function, operation, maintenance and security of each and every item of the installation.
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST c) The 11 kV Switchgear and transformer shall be Brush (agent ZTC tel. 562077) or other equal and approved.
21.1.0 11 KV RING MAIN UNITS 21.1.1 General a) These shall be of the metal clad type, suitable for outdoor operation and shall be suitable for use on an 11 kV, 3-phase, 50 HZ system with neutral earth. The switchgear shall have a making or breaking capacity of not less then 350 MVA and the impulse level shall be 95 kVP. These shall be Brush (agent ZTC tel.562077) G.E.C (agent MHD tel. 703421/795760), or Reyrolle (agent Al Mamary tel. 703024), Yorkshire (agent Zubair Electric tel. 701271/704306) or other equal and approved. The unit shall include two ring switches, rated 400A and a feed oil fuse switch rated 400A with a fault level of 350 MVA or as indicated in the specific diagram for the project. A circuit switch shall provide ON/OFF control of the main circuit between its own feeder cable and the busbars whilst the associated earth switch shall apply an earth to the feeder cable when the circuit switch is OFF. Separate ON/OFF and EARTH/OFF switch handle locations shall be employed. The circuit and earth switch mechanism of each ring switch shall be mounted on a unit frame, manually operated and of the independent spring type so that correct speed of operation is guaranteed, irrespective of the operator's effort. Each ring switch shall be provided with test connections such that high voltage and injected current tests can be applied by the insertion of a onepiece three-phase device. This assembly shall be provided and fitted by first placing the main switch to the EARTH/ON position. The test cover can then be unscrewed and raised and the test device can be correctly located in the test orifices. With the earth switch returned to the OFF position, the device is securely trapped, suitable interlocks being arranged to prevent the main switch being moved to the ON position during testing. The oil fuse switch shall comprise an air-insulated fuse chamber and an oil filled switch tank. Access to the fuses shall be by means of a door which shall be fully inter locked to ensure that it can be opened only after the conductors within the fuse chamber have been earthed. The switch shall be a double-break and shall have three positions - ON, OFF and cable EARTH. The mechanism shall have a quick-make-and quick-break feature, the speeds of make-and-break being entirely independent of the operator.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST h) Each fuse shall have a striker pin which is ejected when the fuse blows to initiate the simultaneous opening of all three phases by the trip free mechanism. It shall not be possible to reclose the switch until all blown fuses have been replaced. The ON, OFF and EARTH positions of the three pairs of switches shall be identified by mechanical indicators, visible through window apertures in the relevant compartments. Positive mechanical interlocks shall ensure that no earth switch can be closed to EARTH unless its associated main switch is OFF. Busbars shall be air-insulated of the encapsulated type with shrunk-on PVC insulation sleeving, oil filled. The busbars and connections to all equipment shall be constructed of solid conductor. Single core cable connections will not be acceptable. The resistance of any length of conductor containing a joint shall not be greater than that of an equal length of similar conductor without joint. Oil switches shall have integral busbar and cable earthing facilities without involving loose attachments or separate earthing carriage and they shall be fully interlocked. Testing and shutter locking facilities shall be provided. Labels shall be provided for each unit, mounted externally or internally to describe the duty of, or otherwise identify every instrument, relay, item of control, equipment and any point of potential danger. They shall be finished white with engraved letter and numbers in black. The units shall be finished externally in a semi-matt spray paint of colour shade 632-BS 381C:1996. They shall be suitable for extension so that new units can be positioned and cables made-off whilst the existing busbars are alive.
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
21.2.0 POWER TRANSFORMERS 21.2.1 Continuous Maximum Ratings a) Transformers shall be designed and constructed to operate at the continuous maximum ratings (CMR) stated in the Specification and Drawings, on all tap positions when the voltage on the lower winding is maintained at its nominal voltage and maximum ambient temperature of 50C and relative humidity of 95%. Transformers shall be manufactured by Brush (agent ZTC tel. 562077), Bonar Long (agent BEC tel. 797581), or other equal and approved. Frequency Pattern Voltage Ratio
b)
: 50 HZ : Outdoor : 1100/433 Volts

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Connections : Delta/Star in accordance with Vector Group DY of BS171: 1970.
c)
When operating on the tap position on which the maximum losses occur and when otherwise tested in accordance with BS171:1970 under conditions corresponding to maximum continuous rated output, the oil, winding and core temperature rises are not to exceed the value laid down in BS171:1970. Service conditions include operating at CMR in maximum ambient temperature of 50C and relative humidities of 95%.
21.2.2 Duty Under Fault Conditions Transformers shall be designed to withstand without damage to the thermal and mechanical effects of a short circuit at the terminals of the windings, as detailed under Section 8, Clause 23 and Table II of BS171:1970. 21.2.3 Impedance Value The values of impedance shall be those stated in Appendix 'I', subject to the tolerances specified in BS171-5:1978.
21.2.4 Losses Losses are to be as low as is consistent with reliability and economical use of materials. 21.2.5 Rating Diagram Property and Name Plates Rating and terminal marking plates shall bear the information called for in BS171:1970, except that (a) weights shall be stated in kilograms and pounds and (b) quantities of oil shall be stated in kilolitres and imperial gallons. Name plates for on-load tap changers shall conform to BS 5611:1978. The plates shall be of durable and incorrodible materials and may be combined into a single plate. 21.2.6 Porcelain for Insulators a) Porcelain insulators are to be in accordance with BS4963:1973 where applicable. Porcelain is to be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified and the glaze is not to be depended upon for insulation. The glaze is to be smooth, hard, of uniform shade of brown and is to completely cover all exposed parts of the insulator. Outdoor insulators and fittings are to be unaffected by atmospheric conditions due to weather, acids, alkalis, dust or rapid changes in temperature under working conditions. Porcelain insulators are to be secured in an approved manner, preferably by means of bolts or metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed.
b)
c)
The strength of the insulators, as given by the electromechanical test load, is to be such that the factor of safety when the insulators are supporting their maximum working loads, is not less than two and a half. The design is to be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator and fittings does not lead to the development of defects. The porcelain is not to engage directly with hard metal and, where necessary, an approved water and oil resistant yielding materials is to be interposed between the porcelain and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces are to be accurately ground and free from glaze. All fixing material used is to be of approved quality, applied in an approved manner and is not to enter into chemical action with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in service. Where cement is used as a fixing medium, cement thickness is to be as small and even as possible and proper care is to be taken to centre and locate correctly the individual part during cementing.
d)
21.2.7 Insulating Oil The first filling of insulating oil is to be supplied for all transformers. Oil is to comply with BS148:1998. 21.2.8 Corona Equipment shall be designed so as to minimise corona or other electrical discharge and radio interference. 21.2.9 Noise The transformers will be sited in residential areas, every care is to be taken to ensure that the design and manufacture of all transformers is such as to reduce noise and vibration to the level of that obtained in good modern practice and shall not exceed the level given by the formula - DB=54.7 + 9 LOG MVA. 21.2.10 Suppression of Harmonics The transformers are to be designed with particular attention to the suppression of harmonic voltages, especially the third and fifth. 21.2.11 Magnetic Circuit a) The design of the magnetic circuit is to be such as to avoid static discharges, development of short circuit paths internally, or to the earthed clamping structure and the production of flux components normal to be insulated with a material stable under the action of pressure and hot oil. The winding structure and major insulation is to be designed to permit an unobstructed flow of cooling oil through core cooling ducts to ensure
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST efficient core cooling. The magnetic circuit to be insulated from all structural parts and a link is to be provided for earthing the magnetic circuit to the tank. 21.2.12 Flux Density When the transformer is connected on the principal tapping and operating at the rated voltage and frequency, the flux density at any point in the magnetic circuit shall not exceed 16500 lines/cm2 (i.e. 1.65 TESLA) for transformers of all sizes.
21.2.13 Mechanical Construction of Cores a) The cores, framework, clamping arrangements and general structure of the transformers are to be robust design, capable of withstanding any shocks to which they may be subjected during transportation, installation and service. All structural members of the assembled cores are to be either wrought steel sections, built-up by welding, or are to be of cast steel. All castings and structural steel are to be fettled before being built into the structure. Approved lifting arrangements are to be provided and arranged so that the core structures are not subjected to altered stresses during lifting and handling operations.
b)
c)
21.2.14 Windings and Insulation a) All transformer windings are to be fully insulated. The insulation level is to comply with BS171-3:1987. The impulse withstand voltage is to be 170 KVP for standard voltage of 11 KV. The performance under short circuit conditions and the temperature rise limits shall comply with Sections 6 and 8 of the above mentioned British Standard. The primary and secondary windings shall be located in a manner which will ensure that they remain electrostatically balanced and their magnetic centres shall remain coincident under all conditions of operation. Tertiary windings are not required. Star connections, preferably, shall be made at the lower end of the windings and the direction of the higher and lower voltage windings shall be such that they are of subtractive polarity.
b)
c)
d) e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST f) Tappings shall be arranged at such positions of the windings as will preserve as far as possible the electromagnetic balance of the transformer, at all voltage ratios. All tapping leads when connected to the tapping switch, but disconnected from the windings, shall be capable of withstanding for one minute in oil at 90C a voltage of one half the full line voltage between two leads. The insulation of transformer windings and connections shall be free from insulation composition likely to soften, ouze-out, shrink, or collapse during service. The finished width of any oil duct shall be such and the clamping arrangements shall be so designed, as not to impede the free circulation of oil through the ducts. The windings and leads of all transformers shall be braced to withstand the shocks which may occur through rough handling and vibration during transport, switching and other transient service conditions and also to reduce to a minimum the damage arising from stresses due to internal short circuits. Coil clamping rings, if used, shall be of steel or a suitable insulating material, built-up from flat laminations. Axially laminated material other than bakelised paper is not to be used.
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
21.2.15 Earthing Terminal Transformers shall be provided with a mild steel earthing flag, approximately 63mm2, and of thickness not less than 6mm with a central hole having a 14mm diameter. The flag shall be positioned at right angles to the tankside as follows: i) The Central line of the bolt hole is to be 100mm above the base of the transformer on the tank corner nearest to the neutral terminal. Vertically below the cable box with the central of the bolt hole 200mm above the underside of the said base.
ii)
21.2.16 Transformer Tanks a) Transformers are to be enclosed in steel tanks of welded construction, suitably stiffened by means of rolled steel sections. Tanks shall be sufficiently strong and rigid so as to permit lifting and/or transport of a transformer with oil without permanent deformation or oil leakage. Transformers shall be provided with a substantial skid underbase, securely welded to the tank. Rollers are not required. Haulage holes shall be provided in the skids. The tank bottom and/or under bases shall be
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST reinforced so that the complete transformer with oil may be skidded in any direction. c) All metal work inside the tank and the internal surfaces of the transformer tank, cover conservator tank and cooling tubes shall be shot blasted and treated with an approved oil resistant varnish, or enamel. All exterior surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by shot blasting, shall have one coat of zinc chromate base priming paint (or equivalent) and two coats of durable oil and weather resisting paint of contrasting colours. The final coat shall be colour No.632 of BS 381C:1996. The positions of the fittings on the transformer tanks shall be such as to facilitate exterior repainting on site.
d)
e)
21.2.17 Fittings a) Transformers shall be provided with fittings in accordance with the following: i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) b) Oil level gauge. Drain and filter valve. Lifting fittings (to include lifting eyes on tank covers). Thermometer pocket. Silica gel dehydrating breathers. Jacking lugs.
Thermometer pockets are to be located in the tank wall and valves shall be attached to the transformer by bolted machine flanges. Valves shall be made of gun metal of the sluice type and closed by clockwise rotation of the handle. Provision for padlocking in the closed position shall be provided.
21.2.18 Breathers Silica-gel dehydrating breathers shall be of the oil-seal type and shall be mounted not more than 1370mm above the base of the tank. 21.2.19 Conservators a) Conservator tanks shall be formed of steel plates and arranged above the highest point of the oil circulating system. Connection to the main tank is to be at its highest point. The capacity of each conservator tank is to be adequate for the expansion and contraction of the oil in the whole system in the temperature range of 0C - 90C, with a red line on the oil gauge to mark the correct level at 20C. Each conservator tank shall be provided with a detachable end, removable for cleaning purposes, filling cap, drain valve with captive cap and an oil
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST level gauge. A valve shall be provided to isolate the oil in the conservator from the transformer. 21.2.20 Tappings and Selection Tappings shall be provided on the HV windings and brought up to tap selector boards below oil level where the tapping is selected by a 5-position rotating switch. The switch on each phase shall be connected to a common operating rod for control by a handwheel outside the transformer tank. The design must ensure that the change on all three phases is simultaneous. The handwheel shall be arranged for locking in any position and is to indicate the tap position selected. 21.2.21 Joints and Gaskets All gaskets shall be of the synthetic rubber and cork composition. 21.2.22 11000/11500 Volt Cable Boxes a) The sealing boxes are to comply with the BSS and shall be suitable for a hard setting compound to comply with BS1858:1973, with a softening point over 40C. The contour of the box and the expansion space shall be so designed that voids are not caused either during filling or due to changes of compound level arising from temperature variations. Each cable box shall be provided with a drain plug and the filling orifices shall be accessible when mounted on the equipment and so placed as to permit filling to be carried out in one continuous operation. The outer connectors shall be arranged so as to facilitate cabling and to avoid unnecessary bending of the cable cores.
b)
21.2.23 433/250 Volt Cable Boxes - Unfilled a) Cable box shells shall be open backed and constructed from mild steel. The gland plate is to be removable and is to be drilled to receive compression type glands. Steps shall be taken to minimise the effect of eddy currents. The Construction shall be such that the box is effectively sealed against weather and insects. A four pole cable box shall be provided for use with seven single core PVC/PVC cables up to and including 1000m2 stranded.
b)
21.2.24 Site Tests - Power Transformers The following tests shall be carried out and recorded: i) The insulation resistance of each winding in turn to all other windings, core and frame or tank connected together and to earth.
ii) Insulation resistance measurements of secondary circuits.

iii) Continuity tests on primary and secondary circuits. iv) Check on calibration of oil and winding temperature indicators, including heater current injection. v) Operation of tap changer through ranges and functioning of limit switches. vi) Check on voltage control equipment, including automatic circuits by injected voltage and current. 21.3.0 11 KV CABLES 21.3.1 General a) The cables to connect the ring main units to the existing underground supply cabling shall be 6.35/11KV grade to IEC 502-1, generally as follows: Conductor screening shall be a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound, having a nominal thickness of 0.7mm. Insulation shall consist of cross-linked polyethelene applied by extrusion to form a compact homogeneous layer. The average thickness of the insulation shall be not less than 3.4mm. Core screen shall consist of a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound, a semi-conducting tape and a metallic layer. The metallic part shall be plain copper. Laying-up-the screened cores of multi-core cables shall be laid up with suitable fillers to form a compact circular assembly. A suitable binder shall be applied over the laid up cores. Bedding shall consist of an extruded layer of black PVC compound complying with the requirements of Type 9 to BS 6746:1993. Armour - the cables shall be armoured with galvanised steel wires to give the cable strength and also act as a low resistance earth return conductor. A coating of bitumen or equivalent water-proofing compound shall be applied over the armour in all cases. Oversheath shall consist of an extruded layer of black PVC compound, complying with the requirements of Type 9 to BS6746:1993.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
21.3.2 Installation a) All cables shall be installed in complete conformity with the recommendation of the cable manufacturer and the H.E.W., and as follows:
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Underground cables shall be laid at a minimum depth of 1000mm. They shall be protected by cable warning cover, provided and erected by the Contractor which shall be reinforced concrete slabs 600mm long x 60mm thick. When laid the covers shall overlap the cables on either side by at least 60mm and interlock with each other laterally. The bottom of the trenches shall be cleaned of all rocks, stones and hard objects and covered with 100mm lightly compacted layer of sifted soil, sand or gravel. After laying, the cables shall be covered with a further layer of lightly compacted sifted soil, sand or gravel to a depth of 100mm and this layer shall be covered with the cable covers. Directly over all underground cables, approximately 200mm below ground level, "Heptape" (agent Al Sabag tel. 707558) or other equal and approved warning location tape shall be provided. This location tape shall be yellow in colour, 150mm wide heavy gauge polythene strip, printed with the words (DANGER ELECTRIC CABLES BELOW") in Arabic and English. Where more than one 3-core cable is laid in the same trench, a horizontal inter-axial spacing of 500mm diameter shall be allowed. Where ducts are to be used, their diameter shall be as follows: Up to 60mm external diameter of cable - internal diameter of duct, 100mm. Above 60mm and up to 90mm external diameter of cable - internal diameter of duct, 125mm. Above 90mm external diameter of cable - internal diameter of duct,150mm.
c)
d)
e)
The Contractor shall provide all necessary cable box compound or heat shrink termination jointing and sealing materials, ferrules, binding wires, gland solder, etc., plus 10% spare of expandable materials necessary for jointing and marking all cables supplied under the Contract. Noncorrosive flus shall be used on all soldered joints. Connections between cable bonds and the main earthing system shall be bolted. Where three-phase power cables terminate in cable boxes fitted to switchgear, transformers, etc, phase colours, i.e. read/yellow or blue, shall be painted on the outside of all boxes, indicating the physical arrangement of the internal connections. Alternatively, enamelled discs or plates may be used for this purpose. The particular part of the cable box so painted or marked shall be such that there is no possibility of errors occurring when replacing, after removal for inspection or maintenance.
f)
g)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST h) The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct phasing of all power and multicore cables and for the check testing after connecting up of all such connections. Insulation resistance and pressure tests shall be carried out on each length of cable after laying and jointing in the presence of the Engineer. Triplicate copies of all tests results shall be supplied to the Engineer.
i)
21.3.3 Cable Ducts a) Where the cables are enclosed in ducts, the ducts shall be self-aligning, self glazed earthenware or fibre piped ducts. The ducts shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor where cables pass under roads, paths and other hard standings or enter into the building. Piped ducts which enter buildings shall, unless terminating in a trench, terminate in any easy bend and project 75mm above finished floor level. Other piped ducts shall be laid with a fall in one direction to prevent the collection of water. All piped ducts shall be rodded by the Contractor before installing cables. Cables shall not be strained during installation and if ropes are used for pulling through, they shall be attached to the cable by means of a suitably sized cable sock. After cables have been drawn-in, the higher ends of the piped ducts shall be sealed by the Contractor for at least 100mm of their length with an approved substance, e.g. tarred tow rope with bitumen. Spare piped ducts shall be sealed at each end with tapered wood bushes. Piped ducts which finish in an easy bend and project above floor level shall be plugged with wood or plastic bushes after the cables have been installed and any free space shall be packed firmly with asbestos yarn. Where cables are run in trenches, the forming of concrete trenches and provision of trench covers will be the responsibility of the Contractor to the direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall supply and install all cable supports. Where cables are run on hangers or racks fixed to the sides of the trenches, they shall be installed as described in the appropriate later clause of this Specification. Where the cables are not supported on hangers or racks, they shall be run on purpose made concrete spacer supports. The supports shall be laid on the bottom of the trench at intervals of 750mm. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the minimum internal radii of cables laid down by the I.E.E. Regulations. The Contractor shall ensure that this minimum value is not reduced even when installation is taken place.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST i) Where cables are buried their positions shall be indicated by concrete markers. The markers shall be spaced at intervals of 40M on straight runs and at all changes of direction. The correct positioning of the cable markers shall at all times be responsibility of the Contractor. The cable markers shall be reinforced concrete posts, 600mm long and sunk into the ground to a depth of 300mm. A traffolite plate with engraved lettering shall be fixed to each marker stating the voltage of the cable. The supply and erection of the cable markers shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. A sample item shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to batch manufacture. The cables shall be BICC (agent Abdul Aziz and Bros. tel. 714130) or other equal and approved.
j)
k)
l)
21.4.0 EARTHING SYSTEM 21.4.1 General a) The earthing of all equipment and the provision of earthing systems, electrodes and connections shall be generally in accordance with the recommendations in the British Standard Code of Practice BS 7430:1998. Each earthing point is to consist of four 16mm diameter copper rod electrodes, each 3.5 metres long, driven in undisturbed soil. Each electrode is to be complete with approved non ferrous clamps for the connection of earthing conductors and with a hardened steel tip and cap for driving by means of a power hammer. A drawing showing the proposed arrangement shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Engineer before any work is carried out on Site. Locations for the electrode chamber and the interconnection arrangement shall be settled by the Engineer when the result of the earth test is known. The combined resistance of the earth electrodes to the general mass of earth shall be below 1 ohm under any climatic conditions. Conductors for interconnection between the electrodes in any group shall have a cross-sectional area of 120m2 between groups. This shall comprise the main station earthing also. Earthing conductors shall be of annealed high conductivity copper and shall be in accordance with BS1432:1987. There shall be separate connections between the points of the high voltage systems and the main station earthing and these shall be of high conductivity copper and shall be stranded in accordance with Table 4 of
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST BS6346:1997. They shall be protected with an extruded PVC sheath of 1000 volt grade. g) Earthing conductors shall be buried directly in the ground or laid in the cable trenches, as convenient. All joints in the main earth bar and between the main and auxiliary earth bars shall be tinned, riveted and sweated overall. Alternative methods of making copper to copper joints, e.g. chemical welding, may be submitted, but full details must be included in the Tender. Connections between the main earthing electrode groups and the main earth bars shall terminate with lugs. Except where otherwise approved, they shall be hard soldered to the copper strand and sweated to the earth bars. Interconnections between earthing electrodes shall be made with bolted non-ferrous clamps, arranged for easy connection and disconnections, to facilitate testing at any electrode. Stranded earthing conductors shall be in one continuous length and straight through jointing is prohibited. Main earth bars at substations shall comprise 30mm x 5mm annealed high conductivity bare copper strip. Earth bars shall be fixed to masonry and steelwork with approved standoff cleats. The frames of all electrical equipment shall be connected by copper connections of adequate size to the nearest point on the main earth bar. The Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment for soil resistivity testing and for proving that the earthing systems comply with this Specification. The Contractor shall also be responsible for measuring the resistance of each electrode installation and of each complete earthing system to the general body of the earth without additional charge. The Contractor shall extend the earthing system upto and including the L.V. main switchgear. The Contractor shall provide and fit earthing busbar to each L.V. main switchgear to facilitate earthing of the L.V. installation. The Contractor shall give the additional cost for providing a borehole to 1M below the water table for earthing purposes, should the desired earth loop impedance not be obtained with the normal earthing rods as previously specified.
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
r)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST s) The borehole shall be 100mm diameter, galvanised pipe lining and 50 x 6.3mm annealed copper strip driven to the bottom of the borehole.
End of Section
22.0.0 L.V. DISTRIBUTION 22.0.1 General a) The works include for all external electrical services emanating from the main LV panel and terminating at the panel board and MCBDBs of various areas as indicated on the Drawings. All external LV cables shall be of the XLPE/SWA/PVC type, laid directly in the ground. The routing shall be as indicated on the Drawings, or as described in the Specification. The supply voltage shall be 415/230 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
b)
c)
d)
The internal installation, shall be in accordance with the Requirements for Electrical Installations, BS7671:1992, issued by the British Standards Institute and the Institution of Electrical Engineers, United Kingdom, and shall conform with all Statutory Requirements, together with all Regulations and Codes of Practice applicable to such installations. All equipment shall be suitable for an ambient temperature of 50C and relative humidity of 95%. The Contractor shall, if requested, submit for approval samples or any other information required on any of the materials proposed to be used in the Contract. The extent of the internal work includes the following:
e)
f)
d)
i)
The supply and installation of all LV switchgear panels, busbar risers, electricity meters and interconnecting cables. The supply and installation of the lighting system, including all luminaires, lamps and accessories and emergency lighting luminaires. The supply and installation of socket outlets and other motive power points. The supply and installations of all wiring and control panels to items associated with the mechanical engineering services. The supply and installations of all wiring to the lifts wherever applicable.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
22.0.2 Underground Cables a) Underground cables shall be laid at a minimum depth of 600mm. They shall be protected by cable warning covers, provided and erected by the Contractor, which shall be reinforced concrete slabs 600mm long by 60mm thick. When laid, the covers shall overlap the cable on either side by at least 60mm and interlock with each other laterally. The bottom of the trenches shall be cleaned of all rocks, stones and hard objects, and covered with 100mm of lightly compacted layer of sifted soil, sand or gravel. After laying, the cables shall be covered with a further layer of lightly compacted sifted soil, sand or gravel to a depth of 100mm and this layer shall be covered with the cable overs. Directly over all underground cables, approximately 200mm below ground level, Heptape (agent Al Sabag tel. 707558) or other equal and approved warning location tape shall be provided. This location tape shall be yellow in colour, 150mm wide heavy gauge polythene strip painted with the words 'DANGER ELECTRIC CABLES BELOW" in Arabic and English. For armoured cables, termination with suitable compression glands of the type which provide an anchorage and a cross-joint bonding of the armouring shall be made. The glands shall then be fitted with PVC shrouds which completely encase them. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the minimum internal bending radii of cable laid down by the I.E.E. Wiring Regulations. The Contractor shall ensure that this minimum value is not reduced even when installation is taking place. Underground cables shall run in many cases in common 'services zones', or common trenches with other services. It is essential that in these cases the minimum clearance between other services is kept as indicated on the Drawings. Where more than one cable is installed in the same trench, the
b)
c)
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST minimum spacing between them will be twice the overall diameter of the largest cable. f) Cross-linked polyethelene insulated steel wire and PVC sheathed cables shall be rated at 600/1000 volts to I.E.C. 502. Cables shall all be manufactured by the same manufacturer.
g)
22.1.0 EXTERNAL LIGHTING 22.1.1 General The works include for the supply and installation of security, garden and street lighting, all as indicated on the Drawings. 22.1.2 Security, Garden and Street Lighting a) All the luminaires used for this purpose will be of the type as indicated in detail in the Schedule of Luminaires on the Drawings. These luminaires shall be wired, using XLPE/SWA/PVC cables laid directly in the ground. The method of installation of the XLPE/SWA/PVC cable shall be as described under other sections of this Specification. Security, garden and street lighting shall be controlled by a photoelectric switch or a timer as manufactured by Siemens (agent Waleed Associates tel. 738105) or other equal and approved with variable sensitivity control to enable the "Switch-on" point to be set relative to site conditions. The Installation shall incorporate manual ON/OFF over-ride switches as indicated on the Drawings.
b)
c)
d)
22.1.3 Combined Service Trenches XLPE/SWA/PVC cables laid direct in the ground will run in many cases in common "services zones" or common trenches with other services. It is essential that in these cases the minimum clearance between other services and between cables are maintained. Detailed installation of the above is indicated on the Drawings or described elsewhere in the Specification. 22.2.0 INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 22.2.1 Main LV Distribution Panel a) The main LV distribution panel shall be cubicle type and enclosure shall be of sheet metal of not less than 1.6mm thickness with adequate supports, or bracing. These shall be of approved manufacture.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) All internal wiring shall be carried out before the panels are delivered to Site. The wiring shall be coloured to indicate the different phases. All busbars and conductors shall be of equal cross section and formed from H.C. copper mounted on insulators and coloured for phase identification. The busbar arrangement must be such that the cubicle board can be extended at each end without disturbance of the busbar arrangement and if the busbars require drilling for such an extension, this must be carried out in the first instance. Links shall be provided in all outgoing circuits in which a fixed ammeter is not included to enable portable ammeter to be used for balancing and checking loads. A rust proofed stud of minimum 16mm shall be provided externally for the main earth connection of the cubicle and the whole of the non current carrying metal work of the cubicle shall be effectively bonded to this earth terminal. Every item on the panel shall be clearly labelled and each label shall bear the following information: i) The capacity of the MCCB installed. ii) The destination of the connected cable and its cross section. iii) The phase or phases to which it is connected. iv) The area or particular item of equipment it controls. v) Danger notices where called for by any regulations or this Specification. The cubicle shall be painted inside with three coats of white anti-sulphuric enamel and outside with three coats of grey enamel or other colour as may be specified elsewhere in this Specification. The main LV distribution panels shall incorporate moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) of the types and ratings as indicated on the Drawings. All MCCBs incorporated on Main LV panels shall be capable of breaking short circuit currents upto 30 kA. All labels and identifications shall be provided in Arabic and English. The Contractor shall supply fully detailed drawings of all distribution panels and obtain approval from the Engineer before manufacture is commenced. Each main LV distribution panel shall be complete with the appropriate instruments as specified.
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j) k)
22.2.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Panels Boards a) All sub-main panel boards shall be provided with moulded case circuit breakers which shall be capable of breaking short circuit currents up to 18 kA.
b)
Moulded case circuit breakers shall be enclosed in moulded plastic with the tripping mechanism and arc chambers separated and sealed from the cable terminals and shall incorporate facilities for accommodating auxiliary switches, shunt trip and under voltage release equipment. They shall also be equipped with either front connected or back stud terminals of adequate sizes, as specified. The operating handle shall be trip-free with a positive movement in both make and break position. Clear indication of the position of the handle shall be incorporated. The tripping mechanism shall be of an inverse time characteristic to prevent tripping on temporary overloads and shall not be affected by normal variation in ambient temperature. Where individually mounted, they shall be enclosed in heavy gauge steel surfaces of flush mounting cases with removable undrilled gland plates. These shall be Federal Electric, (agent BEC tel.797581) Square 'D' (agent Delta tel. 708483) or other equal and approved.
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
22.2.3 Distribution Boards a) Distribution board shall be surface or flush mounted as specified. The cases shall be of cast iron or rust proofed sheet steel with external fixing lugs and detachable gland plates. These shall be Federal Electric (agent BEC tel. 797581) or other equal and approved. An external rust proofed bolt or stud shall be provided for earthing purposes. The cover shall be flat, close fitting or gasketted and provided with locking facilities. Ample wiring capacity shall be provided and the fuse or M.C.B. banks shall be easily removed or tilted to give access to the terminals. The neutral bar shall be provided with a separate neutral connection for every fuse or M.C.B. way of each pole. Where boards are surface mounted, additional holes shall be drilled in the gland plates to provide wiring facilities for the spare ways on the boards. All such holes shall be plugged with iron, hexagon head stopping plugs. Where contactors are specified these shall; be incorporated in the distribution boards, or in purpose made enclosures adjacent to the distribution boards.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 22.2.4 Miniature Circuit Breakers a) All MCBDB boards shall be provided with miniature circuit breakers which shall be capable of breaking short circuit currents up to 6 kA. Each miniature circuit breaker shall incorporate a tripping mechanism having an inverse time delay characteristic and shall be enclosed in a moulded all-insulated case. The switch action shall be trip free to inhibit closing under fault conditions. All brass parts shall be electroplated and all steel parts cadmium-plated and all contacts silver-plated. Miniature circuit breakers shall be SP, DP or TP and of the current rating all as specified elsewhere or approved. Each miniature circuit breaker shall be provided with spring-washer at each cable termination. All breakers shall be in accordance with BS EN 60898:1991 The instantaneous magnetic tripping of the miniature circuit breakers shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the I.E.E. Wiring Regulations. The magnetic tripping of miniature circuit breakers supplying socket outlets shall be 2.7 to 4 times their rated current (Type 1). The magnetic tripping of the miniature circuit breakers supplying lighting circuits shall be 7 to 10 times rated current (Type 3).
b)
c)
d)
22.2.5 Fused Switches and Switch Fuses a) Fused switches, switch fuses and isolator switches shall be of the type actuated by a quick-make-and-break movement, the spring being in tension or compression only during the operation of making or breaking contact. Switch contact clips shall be phosphor bronze and mounted on individual procelain bases, enclosed in cases of cast iron or pressed steel with hinged dust tight lids interlocked with the switch section to prevent opening with the switch closed or closing the switch with the lid open, and suitable for conduit entry. Neutral links shall be of the bolted-down switched pattern type and enclosed in the same case as the switchfuse or switch. All connection shall terminate in substantial mechanical clamps. All switch fuses and fuse switches shall be fitted with Asta certified HRC standard cartridge fuse links to comply with BS88.
b)
c) d)
22.2.6 Industrial Isolators Industrial isolators shall be of the surface mounted type and shall comprise rustproofed sheet steel enclosures having conduit knock-outs in top and bottom plates, and an access front plate. They shall incorporate quick-make- quick-break switches suitable for 415V, 50Hz. Facilities shall be provided to lock the isolator in the 'OFF' position where necessary.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 22.2.7 Busbar Riser Trunking a) The busbar riser trunking shall be designed for 500V 3-phase 50Hz system. This shall be manufactured in standard lengths of approximately 3 meters from a 1.6mm zinc coated sheet steel finish stove enamel. The covers shall be fixed to the duct by clamps and shall be in section of 600mm and manufactured in the same ways as the duct. The busbars shall be rated as indicated on the Drawings and shall be manufactured from rectangular HDHC copper. The busbars shall be supported at every 600mm by means of suitable insulator, allowing busbars to expand on normal operation, but restrict excessive movement under fault conditions. Expansion couplings shall be provided to prevent strain due to the expansion and contraction of the busbars. An expansion coupling shall be provided adjacent to the incoming cables so as to prevent any movement being transferred to the incoming cables. Adjacent to the incoming feed there shall be an earthing terminal and a copper earth box shall be mounted on the outside of the trunking duct. The incoming cables entries shall be suitable to accept seven number 1000mm2 PVC/PVC cables. The rising main trunking shall be designed for a high through fault rating 31 MVA minimum and shall comply with BS159:1992. Fire barrier shall be factory fitted into the rising main at each point where the rising main passes through a floor. The busbar riser trunking shall be as manufactured by Federal Electrical (agent BEC tel. 797581) or other equal and approved. The fuse switch take-offs shall be pre-positioned and the duct and busbar manufactured accordingly and the system factory assembled. The fuse switch take-offs shall be suitable for mounting at the righthand or lefthand side of the trunking as directed by the Engineer. The fuse switch take-off shall be in fact be a combination unit, incorporating the electricity meters and, in addition, in a few cases, shall also incorporate the sub-distribution board, as indicated on the Drawings. The kWhr meters shall be supplied by the busbar riser trunking manufacturer.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
22.2.8 Electricity Meters a) The electricity meters shall be single phase or three phase, single rate model , suitable for operating in 415V, 3-phase or 240V 1-phase, 50Hz
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST supply and shall comply with BS5685:1979. The electricity meters shall be of the ratings as indicated on the Drawings. These shall comprise two or three electromagnets, grouped around a single disc rotor, driving a registering mechanism and a break disc for control of the rotational speed. For calibration purpose the upper face of the disc shall be marked with adequate number of divisions around its periphery. This shall be designed for high inherent torque, matched with heavy damping to give an extended load curve characteristic under all conditions of loading. The meter shall be housed in black bakelite case together with sealed moulded window. The terminal block shall be provided with terminal cover with sealing screws. The meter shall incorporate adjustments for full load, power factor, light load and balance. b) The electricity meters shall be as manufactured by GEC (agent MHD tel.703421/795760), or other equal and approved as per the requirements of MEW Authorities.
22.2.9 P.V.C. Insulated P.V.C. (PVC/PVC) a) Where steel wire or flat strand aluminium armoured mains multicore and telephone cables are specified, the armour shall be PVC served (PVC/PVC/W/PVC) and the cables shall be of the X-Flam type. Each cable shall be delivered to Site in one length on a drum. The reference number of the drum shall appear on the manufacturer's test sheet. PVC insulated and sheathed mains cable shall be of the 660/1100V grade with stranded copper X-Flam type. PVC insulated, PVC sheathed multicore control cables shall be of the 600/1000V grade with stranded copper conductors of minimum size 7/0.50mm, each core being clearly numbered at frequent intervals or coloured for identification. The cables shall be BICC, (agent Abdul Aziz & Bros tel.714130) or other equal and approved. Locally manufactured wires (Oman Cables Industry Made in Oman) upto 16mm2 size are recommended for the wiring.
b)
c)
d)
22.2.10 P.V.C. Insulated Cables a) Cable conductors shall be not less than 2.5mm2 in C.S.A. and insulation shall be coloured in accordance with the I.E.E. Regulations. Coloured sleeves shall be delivered to Site with each coil having its seal intact and bearing the name of the manufacturer, classification, size, description of cable, length and grade. No cable joints/connections will be permitted. Live conductors of lighting circuits shall be taken direct to switches and neutral conductors shall be looped at lighting points.
b)
c)
Segregation in accordance with the I.E.E. Regulations shall be strictly adhered to and all bolted connections shall be fitted with shakeproof or spring washers. Cables shall not pass through light fittings unless of the heat resistant type to BS6141:1991 or be connected directly to any lampholder or other appliance where temperatures are likely to exceed the maximum temperatures for the insulation specified in the appropriate British Standard. Where specified, Butyl rubber cables shall be used for final connections to heating appliances and lampholders, etc. The cables shall be BICC (agent Abdul Aziz & Bros. Tel. 714130), or equal and approved.
d)
e)
f)
22.2.11 Silicone Insulated Cables a) Single core silicon insulated cables shall be of the 300/500V grade, as specified, with stranded copper conductors of minimum size 32/0.20mm and glass or terylene braided overall. The cables shall be BICC (agent Abdul Aziz & Bros. tel. 714130) or other equal and approved upto 16mm2 wires made in Oman by Oman Cables Industry are to be used.
b)
22.2.12 P.V.C. Insulated P.V.C. Sheathed Flexible Cords a) PVC insulated, PVC sheathed flexible cords and cables shall be of the 300/500V grade as specified with stranded copper conductors of minimum size 32/0.20mm. The cables shall be BICC, (agent Abdul Aziz & Bros. tel. 714130) or other equal and approved.
b)
22.2.13 Silicone Rubber Insulated Flexible Cords a) Silicon rubber insulated flexible cords shall be of the 300/500V grade with stranded copper conductors of minimum size 32/0.20mm. The cords shall be braided overall with terylene fibre. The cables shall be BICC, (agent Abdul Aziz & Bros. Tel. 714130) or other equal and approved.
b)
22.2.14 Flexible Armoured Flexible Cords and Cables
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) Flexible armoured, flexible cords shall have stranded copper conductors of minimum size 32/0.20mm PVC insulated of the 300/500V grade as specified. The cables shall be enclosed with flexible interlocked galvanised mild steel tape and shall incorporate an additional core for earthing purposes. Where specified, the tape shall be PVC sheathed. The cables shall be BICC (agent Abdul Aziz & Bros. tel. 714130) or other equal and approved.
b)
c)
22.2.15 Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulated Armoured Cables (XLPE/SWA/PVC) Cross-linked polyethylene insulated steel wire and PVC sheathed cable shall be rated at 600/1000V to I.E.C. 502. 22.2.16 Cable Installation (General) a) b) The routes of all cables shall be approved by the Engineer, before the installation is commenced. The cable shall be so arranged that neither they nor their support come into contact with the pipes of any other services. They shall be run in a neat orderly manner, with easy sets and bends. All single core main and sub-main cables used on three phase circuits shall be clamped or bound in trefoil groups throughout their length. All main, sub-main and multicore cables shall be marked with noncorrosive labels, bearing the cable reference given by the Engineer. The labels shall be provided at each cable joint, at each end of ducts, at each termination and at intervals of 30 metres on straight runs. All labels shall be approved, a sample being submitted to the Engineer prior to installation. Cables and flexible cords other than those specially designed for high temperatures shall not be installed in condition where the ambient temperatures attained are likely to exceed those set out in the latest editions of the Regulations for Electrical Installations. The cables may be installed in a number of ways. These may include: i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Direct in the Ground In piped ducts. In concrete trenches. On hangers. On racks with porcelain or die cast cleats. On cable tray, or cable ladder. In trunking. In conduit H Saddled to the building structure.
g)
Table No.1 shows which cables are permitted to be installed in which of the foregoing ways. On no account shall cables be installed in any other way than shown in this Table without reference to the Engineer.
Table Showing Methods of Installing Cables ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Type of Cable (i)* (ii)* (iii)* (v)* (iv)* (vi)* (vii)* (viii)* ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------PVC/PVC Mains No No Yes No No Yes No No Cable PVC/PVC Mains Cable Armoured Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No PVC/PVC Multicore No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes XLPE/PVC Multi core Armoured Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No PVC/PVC Telephone Cable No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes PVC Insulated Single Core No No No No No No Yes Yes Silicone Insulated No No No No No No Yes Yes Co-Axial Cable No No No No No No No Yes ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* i) Direct in ground. ii) In earthen ware ducts. iii) In concrete trenches iv) On hangers. v) On racks with cleats. vi) On cable tray. vii) In trunking. viii) In conduit. Note: All XLPE/SWA/PVC cables running between the sub-main distribution board to the air conditioning control panels and to the condensing units on the roof shall be installed on cable trays or cable ladders. All cable trays and cable ladders shall be BICC (agent Abdul Aziz & Bros tel. 714130) or other equal and approved. 22.2.17 Cables on Hangers or Racks a) The Contractor shall supply and install tier type iron hanger racks with die cast cleats or racks with porcelain cleats together with all fixings, rag bolts, rawl bolts or girder clamps or other specialist fixing as required.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) Where hangers or racks are to be fixed to walls, sides of trenches and other concrete or rock structures, the Contractor shall be responsible for cutting away, fixing and grouting in rag bolts and making good. The hangers and racks shall be spaced at no more than 750mm centres. They shall be designed to give at least 25mm clearance between the cable and the face to which it is fixed and, for multiple runs of cable, 75mm between cables. Multiple hangers shall have two or more fixing holes. Where cables pass through floors, they shall be protected by a section of duct which shall project 75mm above finished floor level. Where the cables pass through a slot formed in the floor a 75mm upstand shall be formed in the floor slot. All the free space in the ducts and slots shall be packed firmly with asbestos yarn, provision being made for preventing the yarn from failing through the duct or slot.
c)
d)
22.2.18 Cables On Tray a) The Contractor shall provide and install all cable trays and supporting steelwork. Cables shall not be installed in more than two layers and 25% spare capacity shall be left on each tray for future development. All cables shall be saddled at not more than 750mm centres. Where cables are routed off the tray they shall be protected from any cut edges by lead flashing or other approved method. Different types of cable run on the same tray shall be kept separate.
b)
c)
d)
22.2.19 Cable in Trunking a) The complete trunking system in any section shall be installed and tested for electrical continuity before cables are drawn-in. All entries to the system shall be so placed as to prevent the ingress of moisture. Cables used for system voltages below 200V shall be run in a separate compartment from cables used for systems exceeding this voltage. Where cables pass through compartment carrying cables at a different voltage, they shall be enclosed in conduit. The number of cables installed in the trunking shall be such that a space factor of 45% is not exceeded. The cables shall be secured by the cable retaining clips provided. When the trunking rises vertically, the cables shall be mechanically secured at intervals of 1800mm. The cable trunking shall be BICC (agent Abdul Aziz & Bros tel. 714130) or other equal and approved.
b)
c)
d)
22.2.20 Cable in Conduit

a)
The complete conduit installation shall be erected and tested for electrical continuity before any cables are drawn-in. Cables of separate systems, e.g. mains, lighting, low voltage lighting, power, auxiliaries, etc., shall be run in separate conduits. The number of cables drawn into any conduit shall be in accordance with the recommendation given in the IEE Regulations with the exception that not more than eight cables shall be drawn into any conduit unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer. The cables shall be installed on the loop-in system, no joints or connections being allowed other than at the designed outlet positions. Cable forming the lead and return of a circuit shall be run in the same conduit.
b)
c)
Under no circumstances shall cables be drawn into conduits until after the conduits have been screeded or buried in the structure, except that this shall not apply to surface conduit installations. Where length of cables pass through draw-in boxes, a sufficient length of slack shall be left in the cable to facilitate inspection or alteration. 22.2.21 Cable Joints and Terminations a) The Contractor shall be responsible for terminating all cables and for checking that such terminations are in accordance with the diagrams provided. He shall provide all materials required for this work. No through joints will be allowed in any cable without the prior approval of the Engineer. PVC insulated PVC sheathed mains cable terminations shall be made with an approved type of compression gland. The gland shall be complete with armour clamp where required and where the armour is PVC sheathed, a PVC shroud which encloses the glands. The cores shall be terminated in sweated cable lugs or an approved type of compression lug. PVC insulated PVC sheathed multicore cable terminations shall be made with compression glands as described for main cable. The cores shall be terminated in sweated lugs or crimped washers. At junction of cables inside buildings, the cables shall be terminated with compression glands in junction boxes. The cables cores shall be connected to a fixed terminal block having stud connectors of not less than 6mm diameter. Not more than one core shall be terminated on each stud, interconnections between studs being made with copper links. Telephone cable terminations shall be made with compression glands as described for mains cable. Where the cables are terminated at items of equipment, tag type terminal blocks shall be provided and the cable cross sweated to the tags. At junction of cables inside buildings, the cables shall be terminated with compression glands in purpose made junction boxes. The cable cores shall be terminated by the use of Ross Courtney washers
d)
b)
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST and connected to a fixed terminal bock. Not more than one core shall be terminated on each stud, interconnections between studs being made with copper links. e) For PVC insulated cables, no joints or connections shall be made in the cables other than at outlet positions where the wiring is connected to flexible lampholders via a heat resisting flexible cable or cord. These connections shall be made in a ceiling rose or in a base fixed connector block with two brass pinching screws for each connection. The connector block shall be enclosed in a conduit box, due regard being given to the Regulations in respect of shrouding live terminals. Where the cable feeds equipment other than lighting fittings, the conduit box shall have a suitable outlet for flexible cable. Silicone insulated cables shall be as PVC insulated above, with the addition that the braiding shall be stripped back for at least 12mm from the end of the insulation at every termination.
f)
No joints or connections shall be made in coaxial cables other than at outlet positions, except where an aerial lead is to be split into two or more branches. 22.2.22 Cable Tray a) Cable trays shall be used on multicore runs of XLPE/SWA/PVC cables, PVC multicore and PVC sheathed telephone cables unless specified otherwise. All cable trays shall be galvanised. The tray shall be manufactured of not less than 18 gauge mild steel unless otherwise stated and each length of cable tray shall be finished with a minimum of 12mm return on both edges. The cable tray shall be of adequate width for disposing the cables at single depth, with a 25% width allowance for spare cables. All cut edges of galvanised cable trays shall be prepared and treated with a zinc rich paint. Site fabrication of accessories shall be kept to a minimum and manufacturer's standard items shall be used where possible. Where special sections are required, the material thickness and finish shall be as adjoining section. A minimum clear space of 20mm shall be left behind all cable trays. Fixings for cable trays shall be disposed at regular intervals not exceeding 1.2 metres and at 225mm from bends and intersections. Fixing brackets shall be fabricated from mild steel flat bar. All fixing brackets shall be galvanised.. All cables shall be fixed to the cable tray by means of suitable fixing saddles or cleats.
g)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST g) All cable trays shall be electrically continuous by means of 25mm x 3mm copper links across each joint in the system.
22.2.23 Steel Conduit Works a) All steel conduit shall be welded heavy gauge screwed and enameled or galvanised with all necessary couplings and malleable iron draw-in and terminal boxes. Each point, switch, or socket shall be provided with a fixed enclosure to British Standard Specification to which a ceiling rose or fitting may be directly attached. Bends, tees or elbows shall not be used and the number and positions of boxes and the sizes of conduits shall be arranged to permit the cables being drawn-in easily after all conduits are fixed. All draw-in and terminal boxes shall be provided with belled or bushed spouts tapped for conduit. Where conduits are connected to distribution boards, trunking or fittings not tapped for conduit entry, connections shall be made by means of male hexagon headed brass bushes and flanged mechined face couplings. Conduits crossing expansion joints in the building shall be fitted with coupling with earthing clip at each side of the coupling, connected by 6mm2 copper wire. Conduits shall be not less than 20mm diameter and not more than six cables shall be run in any 20mm conduit. In no case shall the number of cables installed in any conduit exceed the number specified in BS 7671:1992. All conduits shall be smooth in bore, true in size and all ends where conduits are cut shall be carefully reamed. All joints between lengths of conduit or between conduits and fittings, boxes, etc., shall be threaded home butted. Running thread connectors and locknuts shall be provided in long lengths of surface conduit to permit easy disconnection if required. Sets and bends shall be made without indentation and the bore shall remain full and free throughout. Oil shall not be used when cutting screw threads on conduit. All screw threads shall be lightly painted with metallic lead paint ground in linseed oil before being connected up. All conduit runs, particularly where fixed on the surface of walls and ceilings, shall be symmetrical and evenly spaced and surface conduits shall be fixed by spacer bar saddles of approved make. Conduits and fittings fixed externally or on the surface in plant rooms, switchrooms, tank rooms, and other areas likely to be subject to moisture
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST shall be galvanised. All conduits buried in concrete or other solid building materials shall be painted with two coats of black bituminous paint. Conduits and accessories in ground floor slabs or screeds shall be galvanised. k) Any lighting point boxes connected to conduits concealed in voids above ceiling shall finish flush with the underside of the ceiling and all necessary extension and break joint rings shall be provided and fitted. Where direct conduit entry to equipment is not possible or desirable, as in the case of motors or equipment where adjustment of position may be necessary, the conduit shall terminate at an agreed position adjacent to the equipment and the wiring shall be continued in flexible metallic tubing fitted with brass split clamp adapters and shall be provided with separate earthing wire. Not less than 450mm of flexible conduit shall be installed unless otherwise specified and a separate earth conductor shall be run within or external to the conduit, connected to earth terminals to the conduit, connected to earth terminals on the connection box on the motor, starter, etc., and to the fixed conduit run. The flexible conduit will not be considered as an earth connection. All conduit work shall be erected complete with distribution boards, main switches, etc., connected and shall be inspected and approved before any cables are installed. Prior to drawing-in cables all conduits shall be cleaned through with a swab. Conduits recessed in walls shall be fixed in chases cut in the wall at a depth to permit a full covering of cement and sand before plastering. All conduit drops fixed on wall surfaces shall be truly vertical and horizontal conduits shall be fixed with a slight fall to drainage holes so that any moisture which might collect in sections of conduits which are not sealed is allowed to drain away. Conduit runs on the surface shall be fixed by saddles at 900mm centres for 20mm conducts and at 1200mm centres for 25mm and over. Saddles shall be fixed by rawl plugs and screws. Sunk conduits shall be secured in positions by crampets driven into wood plugs. All conduit and trunking throughout the contract shall be supplied by one manufacturer. Draw-in boxes shall be provided to give access to all conduits for the drawing-in or out of any cable after the installation is completed. Conduit runs rising more than two right angle bends or more than 10 metres long must have draw-in boxes. In all cases the locations shall be approved by the Engineer. The draw in boxes must be of ample size to enable the cables to be neatly diverted from one conduit to another without undue cramping. Joints will not be allowed in draw-in boxes under any circumstances.
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
r)
s)
Where draw-in boxes are required in floors, the boxes must be grouped in positions approved by the Engineer and covered by suitable floor traps. The Contractor shall include in his Tender for the supply, delivery and fixing of these traps. The floor trap covers shall be filled by the Contractor with a material to match the floor surfaces. The conduits shall be Walsall (Agent SSB tel.793741/793750) or other equal and approved.
t)
22.2.24 P.V.C. Conduit Works a) Plastic conduits shall be rigid PVC, super high impact Class 'A' conduits. All paragraphs for steel conduit above shall also apply to this clause where the method of installation is recognised as being similar for both steel and PVC conduits. All conduit, boxes and other conduit fittings, unless stated otherwise in this Specification, or on the Drawings, shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer, Egatube, (agent MHD tel. 703421/795760) or other equal and approved. The conduit shall be solvent welded to all fittings. The wiring shall be continuously and effectively protected along its whole length, with the conduits mechanically continuous throughout. The conduits shall be of sufficient large sections to allow cables to be easily drawn-in or out and shall not be less than 20mm diameter. The conduit work shall be concealed in floors, wall and roof slabs. No surface PVC conduit will be allowed within false ceilings, but steel conduit shall be used instead. All corners shall be turned by easy sets or bends made cold without altering the section of the conduit. Bends shall be formed using bending springs supplied by the conduit manufacturer for the size, class and gauge of conduit. Standard 50mm centre circular boxes with steel insert clips shall be used throughout unless stated otherwise in this Specification or on the Drawings. Where conduits terminate at fusegear, switch and socket outlet boxes, etc., the connection shall be made by means of female threaded adapter welded to the end of the conduit and a smooth bore threaded male bush. All conduits necessarily exposed to the weather during building operations shall be protected against the ingress of moisture by means of conduit and caps or other approved means. A suitably sized green PVC insulated circuit protective conductor shall be drawn-into all conduits, connected to an earthing terminal at all connection boxes and accessories.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
22.2.25 Steel Cable Trunking a) Cable trunking shall be of minimum in gauge 18 s.w.g. steel, zinc coated with a stove enameled finish in interior dry locations. In all situations where galvanised conduit is specified, but where trunking is permitted in lieu, the trunking shall be galvanised. All trunking shall be of the lipped pattern, single or multi compartment as necessary, with a copper earth continuity link mounted on each side of the trunking at all joints. This earth continuity link shall be affixed to the trunking by means of cadmium plated screws with captive shakeproof washers. Copper earthing straps shall be supplied and fitted at all joints including T joints, through joints, right angle joints, etc. The cover to the trunking shall be overlapping and of minimum 18 gauge steel with the same finish as the trunking itself and each length of cover shall be fitted by means of at least two coin actuated buttons complete with retaining spring. In lengths exceeding one metre fixing buttons shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 750mm. In all cases trunking shall be oversized to permit the addition of further cabling with at least 20% free space remaining when the installation is complete. Where joints are made in the trunking the jointing surfaces shall initially be free of enamel to ensure satisfactory earthing continuity and after the joint is made it shall immediately be coated with two coats of grey metallic paint.
b)
c)
d)
e)
22.2.26 Floor Boxes a) Floor boxes shall be multi-compartment galvanised heavy gauge steel, recessed within the floor thickness and provided with a robust steel lid recessed to accept the floor finish of the room in which the box is installed. All boxes shall be fitted with cable separators to segregate the mains and telephone cables and shall be provided with a cast frame and recessed tray to cater for thickness of floor finishes specified. Means of adjustment shall be provided to enable the lid to be accurately levelled. The boxes shall incorporate 13 amp socket outlets and telephone outlets as detailed on the Drawings. These shall; be Walsall (agent SSB tel.793741/793750) or other equal and approved. The cover plate shall be fully closed when the plug is in position.
b)
22.2.27 Wiring Systems a) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, or otherwise specified, the general method of wiring to lighting switch socket outlets, power point,
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST auxiliary switches, etc shall be carried out in one of the following methods. i) PVC insulated cables in high impact grade heavy gauge PVC conduits concealed within walls, floor slabs or screeds for lighting and power. All conduits surface mounted within false ceilings shall be galvanised steel. PVC insulated cables in steel trunking and steel heavy gauge screwed conduits in the plant rooms and similar locations. The installation shall be surfaced mounted. PVC insulated cables within steel conduits concealed in floor slabs or screeds and within walls for Fire Alarm Services. PVC insulated cables in heavy gauge steel conduit generally as installed in (c) above, for Emergency Lighting. High impact grade PVC conduits concealed in floor slabs or screeds above the false ceilings and within walls housing cables for other auxiliary services. PVC insulated cables in heavy gauge galvanised watertight steel conduits in roof areas.
ii)
iii)
iv) v)
vi)
22.2.28 Lables The Contractor shall supply and fix labels to all electrical cupboards. These shall be white traffolite with engraved lettering to the directions of the Engineer. 22.2.29 Earthing and Bonding a) The earthing system shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the BS7671:1992 and BS 7430:1998. Neither the structural steel framework, nor the water pipes, separately or jointly, shall be used as the sole earth electrodes of the installations. Extraneous conductive parts of the installation such as main water pipes, service pipes and ducting risers of air conditioning systems and exposed metallic parts of the building structure shall be connected to the main earthing terminal of the installation. The installation shall be provided with an effective earthing lead connected on one or more earth electrodes such as copper plates or rods as necessary to obtain the required earth fault loop impedance. The construction of earth electrodes and the material used shall be such as to withstand damage due to corrosion and avoid the increase of the resistance of the earth electrodes above the required value when the soil is dry.
b)
c)
d)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST e) The cross sectional area of earthing conductors where buried in the soil shall be in accordance with Tables 54A of BS 7671:1992. The cross sectional area of protective conductors shall be calculated in accordance with Regulation 543-01-03, or selected in accordance with Regulation 543-01-04 of BS 7671:1992.
f)
22.3.0 ACCESSORIES 22.3.1 Light Switches a) Switches shall comply with BS3676-1:1996 and BS EN 60669-1:1996 with terminal holes in excess of 5mm diameter for receiving the cables. The switches shall be rated 5 amps or 15 amps whichever is applicable and shall be of the gridswitch system as manufactured by MK (agent MHD tel.703421/795760) or other equal and approved. For fluorescent lighting or discharge lighting all switches shall be 15 amps rating. The switch interior shall be mounted to the grid which shall have provision for both lateral and vertical adjustment. The grid shall be of 16 s.w.g. mild steel, zinc plated to a minimum of 5 microns thick. The grid shall be complete with fixed earth terminal. Front cover plates, generally, shall be logic moulded flush as manufactured by MK (agent MHD tel. 703421/795760) or other equal and approved. Surface mounted industrial switches in plant rooms and similar areas shall be housed within galvanised industrial pattern steel boxes. All switches in roof areas and other locations subject to moisture shall be galvanised and weatherproof. All multi-phase switches shall incorporate red phased warning face plates, clearly labelled "DANGER 415 VOLTS" and also phase barriers shall be fixed within each box.
b)
c)
d)
e)
22.3.2 General Purpose Socket Outlets a) These shall be switches, complying with BS1363-2:1995 and shall be installed in the position shown on the Drawings and shall be of the 13 amp flat pin type. The socket outlets shall match the chosen lighting switches in that particular room or area. Switched socket outlets shall comply with BS1363-2:1995. The switched socket interior shall be mounted to the grid which shall have provision for both lateral and vertical adjustment. The grid shall be of 16 s.w.g. mild steel, zinc plated to a minimum of 5 microns thick.
b)
c)
d)
The front cover plate shall be secured to the grid plate and switched-socket interior by countersunk screws finished to match the cover plate. For flush installations the cover plate shall overlap the box by 7mm and for surface installations it shall be the same size as the galvanised cast iron boxes which shall be employed in such locations. In plant rooms and similar areas the switch sockets shall be industrial pattern galvanised and on the roof all switch sockets shall be weatherproof.
e)
22.3.3 Spur Units 13 amps switched fused spur units shall be supplied and installed in the positions indicated on the Drawings. The units shall match the chosen lighting switches and socket outlets in that particular room or area. These shall incorporate a neon indicator lamp fitted behind a red plastic dome. 22.3.4 Push Switches a) Push switches are to confirm in every respect with BSEN 60669-1:1996 and be of the a.c. type 250V 5A, flush mounting type. The type and colour shall match the chosen lighting switches and socket outlets in that particular room or area, and shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer.
b)
22.3.5 45A Cooker Control Units a) All cooker control units shall confirm in every respect with BS4177:1992. They shall be of the a.c. 250V type, 45A double pole main switch socket outlet and pilot lights. These shall match the chosen lighting switches in that particular room or area.
b)
22.3.6 Mounting Heights a) For the purpose of this Specification, the following fixed positions taken from the finished floor level shall be assumed, but these shall be confirmed by the Engineer. i) Lighting fittings ceiling mounted or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Lighting brackets 2200mm to the centre. Lighting switches 1350mm to the centre. Local isolators 1350mm to the centre.
ii) iii) iv)

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST v) vi) Local distribution board 1800mm to the underside. Socket outlets: r) 200mm to centre above worktops in kitchens and above desks, counters, etc. 350mm above finished floor level in general areas. However, subject to the approval by the Engineer. 1350mm above finished floor level in plant rooms and similar areas.
s)
t)
vii) viii) ix) x) xi)
Thermostats 1800mm to the centre. Bell pushes 1350mm to the centre. Telephone outlets 380mm to the centre. Bells 2100mm to the centre. Fire Alarm Contacts 1350mm to the centre.
End of Section
23.0.0 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION AND FITTINGS 23.0.1 General a) For all lighting fittings the circuit wiring shall terminate in a plug-in type ceiling rose with high temperature EPR insulated and GSP sheathed flex between the ceiling rose and the lighting fitting terminals. Under no circumstances shall circuit wiring be taken through lighting fittings and where flush mounted lighting fittings are specified, the circuit wiring shall not pass over the top of the fitting. All flush mounted fittings shall be fed via plug in type ceiling roses. Where outlet boxes are required to be flush with the ceiling, break joint rings shall be provided between the ceiling rose and the box. On all circuits which are controlling fluorescent lighting fittings 15/20 amp switches shall be employed. The Contractor shall include for the supply and installation complete of all lighting fittings in accordance with the Schedules. All fittings shall be complete with lamps, lampholders, control gear, glassware, suspensions, diffusers, frames, etc. GLS and diachronic lamps shall be from one of the following branded names : Phillips; Osram or General Electric. Other brands shall only be considered following the receipt of a certified test certificate from an independent laboratory confirming the brand is silent in operation at full load and when dimmed. The Contractor shall first obtain a sample of each type of fitting for the approval of the Engineer before any fittings are placed on order.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
For fluorescent fittings, the control gear shall be suitable for the operation of fluorescent lamps, utilising a switchless start circuit. The chokes shall be manufactured in accordance with the appropriate section of BS4533101:1990 and BS EN 60598-1:1989, and shall incorporate a thermosetting winding polyester/resin fitting. The winding shall be formed of a high conductivity resinous enameled copper wire. The design of the chokes, which shall be enclosed in a sheet steel housing, shall be of the highest standard and with a noise rating not exceeding 28 decibels, for standard applications. Where inductive fittings are used in an area with a general sound level of NR 25 or below, ballast and chokes shall be electronic and shall not generate noise above the design level of the room. The capacitor shall be manufactured to the appropriate section of BS4533 and shall be complete with shrouded terminals and fitted with safety discharge resistor. It shall be capable of continuous operation at a temperature of 70C; power factor correction on lagging circuits shall be 0.85 or better. The recessed type luminaires shall be individually supported from the concrete slab. For this purpose set of galvanised chain suspension shall be used. The general level of illumination in rooms irrespective of type(s) of luminaire shall not be less than: i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) Corridors and Circulation areas Meeting and Dining Rooms Offices and Conference Rooms Dressing Rooms Bedrooms General Bedrooms Bedhead(reading) - 300 Lux - 450 Lux - 450 Lux - 500 Lux - 300 Lux - 400 Lux
i)
j)
k)
23.1.0 CHANDELIERS 23.1.1 General a) The electrical works in connection with the chandeliers shall be in accordance with BS 4533-101:1990 and BS EN 60598-2-7:1997. The chandeliers shall use size E 27 lampholders throughout unless a variation is approved by the Engineer in which case size E14 shall be accepted. In such cases the supplier shall confirm at time of order that 100W lamps will not be required. The chandeliers shall be complete with one set of longlife GLS lamps of 60 watts plus 20% spares, with a minimum of 4 lamps. Halogen lamps may be used subject to an acceptable colour temperature being achieved. The chandelier wiring shall be carried out in heat resistant cables and shall be divided into circuits appropriate to the total wattage. The following minimum requirements are to be observed:AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST Up to and including 3.5 kW From 3.6 kW to 7.2 kW From 7.3 kW to 10.2 kW From10.6 kW to 14.0 kW From14.1 kW to 17.5 kW - 1 circuit - 2 circuits - 3 circuits - 4 circuits - 5 circuits
above 17.6 kW the circuits shall be in multiples of three each with a maximum rating of 3.5 kW. c) Where chandeliers are to be used within bathrooms or toilets they shall conform to IP 45 unless they are within a shower cubicle or similar when they shall be to IP46. Where backplates are fitted these shall have a gold plated trim to the approved design and thickness. The manufacturer shall, at the time of order furnish the fixing details together with methods of dispersing heat generated in the backplate when the chandelier is in operation. At the time of tender the chandelier manufacturer shall furnish the following details: i) ii) iii) iv) Details of fixing methods proposed Approximate weight of the assembled chandeliers No. of electrical circuits and approximate loading of each The number and type of crystals
d)
e)
Within fourteen days of receipt of order, the manufacturer shall furnish certified drawings, detailing the above together with the wiring details The manufacturer or his agent shall be responsible for any additional costs arising from failure to comply with this clause. f) The manufacturer shall ship with the chandeliers a water proof packet containing the following details in triplicate:i) ii) iii) iv) v) vii) Assembly instructions for each chandelier Illustrations and working drawings of each chandelier Electrical Circuit Diagrams Fixing details Instructions for re-lamping each chandelier Any other special instructions covering care and maintenance the manufacturer deems necessary.
g)
Resistive and inductive type lamps shall not be connected to the same circuit. Where it is necessary to use both types of lamp the circuits shall be separated both in the fittings and in the dimmer rack. Where transformers are required they shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Each chandelier shall be assembled completely and tested for the integrity of the electrical circuits prior to connection to the building system/dimmer network. These tests shall be carried out by the Contractor responsible for
h)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST the electrical installation. 23.2.0 DIMMING AND LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 23.2.1 General a) The Contractor shall supply and install dimmer racks in the locations identified on the drawings and suitable for the control of the chandeliers and other light fittings indicated as being controlled by dimmers. The Contractor shall also supply and install the necessary switches in the location indicated on the drawings. These switches shall be of the type indicated, normally having four button control for each major chandelier or group of small chandeliers in any one room. The Contractor shall ensure that the dimmer racks are compatible with the chandelier and other adjustable fittings and shall submit working drawings for approval prior to carrying out the wiring. Unless elsewhere instructed the dimmers shall be balanced to achieve the design lux level in each room on the highest switch point setting. Where practical, dimmer racks shall be located away from areas having a sound level requirement below NR 25 however, any noise generated by the equipment shall not cause break through into areas where the sound levels are controlled. Where inductive and resistive fittings are installed and are to be dimmed together, each type shall be connected to separate modules on the dimmer rack. Combined inductive and resistive loads on a single module will not be accepted however, each module shall be capable of handling all types of load ( inductive, resistive etc.)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
23.2.2 Lighting Control Systems a) Shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified company with a history of more than twenty years of supplying architectural lighting control equipment to ensure credibility of warrantee and continuity of technical support. Five equivalent size project references in the Sultanate of Oman shall be provided for reference and system demonstration. The manufacturer shall have local support available in form of factorytrained Engineers and stocks to provide after sales service. The lighting control system shall comprise of Dimming/Switching racks, DMX512 interfaces and 8 channel Control (scene) Processors and Theatrical Desk Control (when specified).
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 23.2.3 Power Handling Racks a) Racks shall be manufactured from 18swg mild steel and stove enameled in high temperature Alkyde Melamine. All racks shall be fitted with key lockable doors opening either to the left-hand side or right-hand side. The racks shall provide IP30 protection, tested to EN60529 and manufactured to EN60439. Racks shall be in the form of free standing or wall mounting enclosures with segregated termination areas for mains and extra low voltage control wiring. Racks shall have internal removable panels shall be provided to gain access to termination areas. Racks shall be expandable to accept up to ((64 circuits) 32 dimmable / switchable twin plug-in 20 Amp modules, channels or a combination of twin modules with integrated input / output MCB, RCD, ELCB distribution and/or integrated Normal & Essential supply automatic transfer circuitry. Racks shall be supplied fully wired with pressure pad terminals for connection to incoming supplies, final load circuits and external control elements. All terminal blocks shall be suitably referenced by permanently fitted C.A.D. generated labels, which have been produced directly from approved manufacturing drawings. Final load circuits shall be labeled in accordance with the final load designation on the drawings. Panels require front access only for connection and servicing. Removable gland plates shall be provided to enable side, top and bottom cable entry. Be designed to accept stand-alone plug-in dimming and switching modules detailed elsewhere with spare capacity for additional modules where indicated. The system shall be capable of being expanded or the modules changed, should the specified requirements change. All modules shall have MCB protection on the power input side (between mains input and dimmer module) and on the output side (between the dimmer output and load), by means of single pole MCB circuit breakers rated at 9kA for each dimming/switching channel. Common input MCB protection shall not be acceptable. The MCBs shall be readily accessible to enable them to be changed or added to if on-site conditions change. The type of MCB used shall be selected to prevent nuisance tripping due to
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g) h)
i)
j)
k)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST surge currents, when load is switched to full on, whilst at the same time providing adequate protection. l) The Rack Contain one input 4 pole ELCB for every 6 dimming/switching circuits to provide distributed protection to earth leakage fault. Utilise natural convection cooling at any output up to the full rated load and shall maintain the equipment contained therein at a safe operating temperature, in ambient temperatures from 0 to 40 C. Cooling fans shall not be acceptable. The contractor shall be required to provide input feed wiring, load wiring and control wiring which terminate to the rack terminals. No other wiring or assembly by the contractor shall be required. The low voltage power to drive the microprocessor and scene controllers should be derived from all the three phases of incoming mains power supply.
m)
n)
o)
23.2.4 Construction a) MCBs and terminals within the rack shall be labeled according to the circuit number to which they relate or the module or control element being protected. All module locations shall be labeled in a corresponding manner. Internal wire used within the unit shall be to BS 6231 and have a 105C temperature rating. All wiring shall be harnessed in wire ducts with cable ties at sufficient intervals to present a neat orderly appearance. All connections made during installation shall be to clearly labeled terminals. Units shall be capable of single or three-phase operation at 240/415V, 50 Hz.
b) c)
d)
e)
f)
23.2.5 Dimming and Switching Modules a) Dimming and Switching Modules shall be twin 20 amps rated i.e. each module should provide 2 independent 20 amps rated dimming/switching circuits. It should be possible, within a twin module, to assign/program one channel as dimming circuit and another channel as switching circuit. Dimming and Switching Modules shall be of an independent "plug-in standalone" design with all electrical and mechanical components mounted on a single withdrawable aluminium chassis including its
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST dedicated heat sink, utilizing front mounted screws to ensure the integrity of the rack fixing. The module shall include two front mounted hot swappable connection sockets, one for power and other for control. c) Each module shall have all its electronics fully shrouded in an enclosure. Exposed card type modules/racks shall not be acceptable. Systems with common heat sink and components mounted outside of the dimmer modules shall not be acceptable. Dimming and Switching Modules shall incorporate a front mounted manual bypass switch to enable mains power to bypass the control circuitry. Twin modules should have two independent bypass switches, one for each channel. It shall be possible to hot-swap the modules without removing power to the dimmer rack and without the need to re-program the system. Dimming and Switching Modules shall be continuously rated for their designed load up to a maximum of 20Amps, this rating being permanently marked on the unit. The losses inherent in transformers and/or accessory dimming ballasts for fluorescent lighting shall be construed as part of the load. Dimming and Switching Modules shall incorporate protection circuitry to disable the input control voltage and provide a separate relay switched output for installations requiring a separate cathode heater supply. The point at which the protection circuitry operates shall be adjustable, to occur at any level between 0 and 20% output. Fluorescent modules shall also be suitable for operation with approved electronic dimmable ballasts. Allow not less than 2% of the maximum rated load to be connected for stable operation. The dimmers shall however be capable of being operated under no-load conditions without causing any damage to the components. Dimming and Switching Modules shall utilise encapsulated single thyristors in a reverse parallel pair arrangement to control the power applied to the load. They shall be capable of withstanding surges without impairment to performance. Dimming and Switching Modules shall be voltage stabilised such that a +/- 10% change in line voltage shall cause no more than a +/- 0.5% change in output voltage. Dimming and Switching Modules shall provide a smooth and continuous 'square law' dimming characteristic throughout the operating range. Modules shall incorporate 'soft start' circuitry reducing thermal shock to filament lamp loads, thereby extending lamp life. Dimming and Switching Modules shall operate at 98% or greater efficiency at full intensity and full load.
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
Dimming and Switching Modules shall have 'guaranteed hard firing' circuitry that provides gate current to thyristors from the trigger point to the end of the half cycle without any interruption. Units without guaranteed hard firing shall not be acceptable. Dimming and Switching Modules shall incorporate filtering circuits that comply with EN50081-1, EN50014, EN50082-1, IEC1000-2-2. Dimming and Switching Modules shall be capable of single phase operation at 100 / 120 / 240V, 50 or 60 Hz. All switched circuits shall be controlled via configurable solid state modules or switching modules incorporating an output relay or contractor, suitable for controlling the loads as specified. The modules and switching units described elsewhere in this specification shall be controlled by one or more 8 channel distributed processors. Central processors handling more than 8 channels shall not be acceptable, thus limiting a total failure to a maximum of 8 lighting channels.
o)
n)
o)
23.2.6 Scene Processing a) The processor shall be capable of storing and fade processing all scene processing commands generated by the addressable control plates, DMX512 controllers, theatrical desks and other devices on the high speed communications highway. Each scene shall consist of any one of not less than 100 discrete intensity levels plus off, assignable to a set of control channels (of a size up to the maximum number allowed in the system). In addition, a fade time from 0 seconds to 120 minutes (in increments of 1 second up to 2 minutes and thereafter in a maximum of 30 second increments) can be assigned to each scene and other assignable parameters necessary to provide the facilities described in this specification. The scene processor will handle a maximum of 8 output channels, thus limiting a total failure to a maximum of 8 lighting channels. A central rack processor or one connected to multiple racks shall not be acceptable. The assignment of a discrete intensity level for any or all control channels in each scene, a fade time for each scene and all other assignable parameters shall be either by use of an addressable control plate, infra red transmitter or PC (either desk or laptop). The intensity levels, fade times and other parameters assigned shall be retained permanently without external power, up to a period of ten years and shall not be corrupted on power-up or power-down of the equipment
b)
c)
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST f) Fade processing shall allow unrestricted scene initiation from different sources concurrently and independently. Alternative methods limiting the number of fades in progress at any significant moment in the time shall not be acceptable. The processor shall incorporate watchdog circuitry to ensure the data integrity of all components in the system at all times. The processor shall contain LED channel mimics indicating individual output status, as well as bi-colour fault status LED Red: Fault - Green: OK Scene processor shall derive power supply from all the three phases of incoming mains supply.
g)
h)
i)
23.2.7 Regulating Ballast Interface Module (RBI) a) b) The RBI shall provide control of up to 8 groups of 1-10V ballasts. In addition to low voltage control the RBI shall provide a mains relay power switch for each ballast group. The level at which the relay removes mains power to the relay group shall be user settable by potentiometer. More than one RBI unit can be connected to one processor.
c)
23.2.8 Mains Dimmable Ballast for Fluorescent T8 Tubes a) The dimmable ballast should be suitable to accept variable ac supply between 0-240volts fed from a phase controlled dimmer system. The dimmable ballast should provide dimming in the range of 10% 100%. The dimmable ballast should have very low ballast unit drop and power factor of 0.80 The life of ballast must be up to 70,000 hrs at 50 deg. C. The ballast shall have very high luminous efficiency. The ballast shall be unaffected by transient power drop-outs. The ballast should be protected against short circuit and should have thermal protection with automatic restart facility. The ballast should comply with EN 60928 and EN 55015 standard.
b)
c)
d) e) f) g)
h)
23.2.9 Remote Control Plates (RCP) a) RCPs shall be provided with a minimum of 8 scene push buttons and master raise/lower option as specified to enable push button selection of
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST designated lighting scenes, raise/lower functionality and infra red reception. b) The RCPs shall interconnect with the processors and other RCPs via a high speed RS485 communications highway. Each RCP can be configured to provide control for up to: 24-scene selection LED illuminated push buttons. 12 pairs of Raise / Lower buttons. Each Raise / Lower can be programmed to control any group of channels. The minimum being one and the maximum 256. Raise/Lower functionality may also be provided using digital potentiometers. d) When a scene is selected, either at the panel or by remote means, the corresponding LED shall illuminate and all other LEDs shall extinguish. It shall be possible however, for the scenes to be formed into master groups, for the purpose of controlling the LEDs such that in any group only one LED is illuminated at a time. Using this grouping facility, it shall be possible to have several LEDs on the same panel illuminated at any given time. Any group settings can be reconfigured on site. The RCP shall contain means by which the scenes designated on any panel can be changed via external inputs (such as from room partition switches). The RCP shall be available with a wide variety of faceplate finishes and styles to match the aesthetics of the room or area it is contained in. The maximum size for an 8 scene control plate with master raise/lower and infrared receiver shall be 86mm x 86mm and fit a standard UK specification single gang wall box.
c)
e)
f)
g)
23.2.10 Programming Plates (PP) a) All scenes available within the system shall be capable of being selected and set up or modified by a hand held programmer. In order that this can be carried out in full view of the lighting being controlled, dedicated programming plates can be installed as required. The programming plates shall each consist of a single gang plate fitted with a single RJ45 socket suitable for connection of the system programmer. The programming plates shall be connected to the system via the highspeed communications highway. The programming plate shall require a minimum plate area of 86mmx86mm, 46mm deep single gang wall box.
b)
c)
d)
23.2.11 Dimmer Management System a) i. The central computer shall: Be a 32 bit Windows application capable of running under Windows 95, Windows 98 or NT operating systems. Provide the ability to program all information required for the total system. Be controllable via mouse, keyboard or a mixture of both. Provide functionality for saving of all programming information relating to a system via hard disk retrieving or floppy disk. Provide functionality for the printout of all programming information to any Windows printing device. Communicate with the system via an RS485 interface card on the PC running the appropriate software. Be password protected to stop unauthorised access of the system Be capable of remote control via TCP/IP either by dial up connection or via the Internet. Building management system interface (BMS) i. The BMS shall link the system to a Fire Alarm system or BMS system. The unit shall provide facilities for the selection of full on using momentary volt free contacts of 12V / 25mA. If required, feedback of the scene selected can be provided back to the BMS system. The BMS shall be located either in an equipment rack or standalone. The BMS shall optionally provide a load shedding functionality whereby selection of a load shedding condition as a contact closure input shall select all dimmers on the connected data highway to a scene that provides optimum illumination and power usage, based on the installations standby generator capacity. Infra red remote transmitter (IRT)
ii.
iii. iv.
v.
vi.
vii. viii.
b)
ii.
iii.
iv.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST v. The system shall have an accessory infra red remote control unit consisting of a hand held customised transmitter. The transmitter shall have the capability to select up to 24 scenes, master scene raise / lower and program the scenes relating to the RCP at which it is targeted. Data Node Adapter (DNA) i. The DNA shall provide an RS232 gateway to the high-speed data highway that allows third party control systems to seamlessly control either individual channels, groups of channels or the whole system. The command structure for the DNA shall be provided at no cost to third parties. The DNA shall provide two way communications, allowing instantaneous feedback of every channel's lighting level and/or active scene. The DNA shall be either located in a customised dimmer rack or standalone. System to DMX Interface (DMXOUT) i. The DMXOUT interface shall allow up to 24 dimmer channels to provide control of DMX devices by means of conversion of a 010V signal to a proportional control function. The DMXOUT interface shall provide a thumbwheel offset to select the desired DMX address range. The DMXOUT shall be either located in a customised dimmer rack or standalone. Devices that can be controlled in this manner include fibre optic projectors and a wide variety of theatrical control equipment. DMX to system (DMXIN) a) The input DMX interface shall allow up to 24 dimmer power modules to be controlled via DMX and/or the processor. Where two control inputs are present simultaneously the highest takes precedence (HTP). The DMXIN interface shall be used when it is required to control the lighting system both from RCPs and a Lighting Desk. The DMXIN shall be either located in a customised dimmer rack or standalone.
c)
ii.
iii.
iv.
d)
ii.
iii.
iv.
e)
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 23.2.12 Maximum Sizes of Lighting Control Panels: 1. 2. 3. 4. Up to 16 channels - 800mm(w) x 282mm(d) x 540mm (h) Up to 32 channels - 800mm(w) x 282mm(d) x 1020mm (h) Up to 48 channels - 800mm(w) x 282mm(d) x 1500mm (h) Up to 64 channels - 800mm(w) x 282mm(d) x 1980mm (h)
23.3.0 FURNITURE 23.3.1 General a) Where it is required to provide lighting within wardrobes, cupboards, bookshelves, etc., the following requirements shall be observed: i) All wiring shall comply with the relevant sections of this Specification. Terminations and fittings shall be adequately insulated or protected and be safe from accidental or incidental contacts. All wiring shall be properly routed and concealed in mini trunking. Transformers for low voltage lighting shall be accessible for maintenance and shall comply with the relevant parts of this Specification relating to sound levels. Where luminaires and transformers operate within an enclosed space ventilation shall be provided by means of air circulation to ensure heat dissipation. The air may be circulated by convection with appropriate openings being provided above and below the heat source. Alternatively forced circulation may be used, in which case the relevant sections of its Specification relating to sound levels shall apply. Working Drawings indicating routes and sizes of wires and trunking, types of luminaires, switches and transformers together with locations and fixings shall be provided by the furniture manufacturers. The electrical installation associated with furniture shall be carried out by the Contractor in liaison with the furniture manufacturers.
ii)
iii) iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
23.4.0 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 23.4.1 General

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST a) The contractor shall supply and install the complete emergency lighting system as shown on the drawings and in accordance with these guidelines. i) In Royal Areas the use of "EXIT" signs is not permitted and the emergency lighting system shall comprise one or more of the following mentioned fittings, dedicated discreet down lighter or single high wattage bulbs nested in chandeliers. Wiring shall be carried out by means of PVC insulated cables in heavy gauge screwed steel conduits, completely separate from all other wiring except where the wiring of the two systems is taken into " EXIT" sign. The complete installation shall be in accordance with the appropriate section of British Standard Specification No. 52661:1988.
ii)
iii)
End of Section
24.0.0 TELEPHONE SYSTEM 24.0.1 General a) The Works include for the external ducting system, internal conduit, external and internal wiring and distribution cases. The installation shall comply with BS6701:1994 and with the local regulations of the General Telecommunications Organisation (GTO). All the materials, equipment, components, etd., provided shall be suitable for the Sultanate of Oman's weather conditions of 50C ambient temperature and 95% relative humidity. The Contractor shall include for all the necessary works and liaise with the G.T.O. in order to carry out the connection and also the supply and installation of an electrosonic key telephone system 1236E as manufactured by Nitsuko (agent M & J tel. 705751) or other equal and approved.
b)
c)
d)
24.0.2 External Ducting a) This will emanate from the General Telecommunications Organization ducting system and distribute into the site as indicated on the Drawings. The external ducting shall be a combination of UPVC pipes and manholes. The routing and size of the ducting and exact location of manholes shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
b)
c)
All the pipework shall be PVC cable ducting as manufactured by Yorkshire Plastics Ltd. (agent Muna Noor tel. 603251/603935) or other equal and approved, to BS3506:1969, stored and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All pipes shall be laid at a depth of 600mm minimum except where detailed information is given on the Drawings. To avoid possible damage or deformation of the pipe, the ground in which it is laid shall be made as uniform as possible and materials in contact with the pipes shall be free of large stones, sharp edged flints and other hard objects. The trench bottom shall be carefully examined and any projection removed. In areas where rock or variable soil containing large stones, boulders, tree roots or soft pockets, a prepared will compacted bed of 75mm thickness, made of selected granular material shall be necessary. In all cases care should be taken to remove any levelling pegs or temporary packing such as wooden plants and wedges. Selected granular material shall then be carefully placed and compacted alongside the under side of the pipes upto and more than 75mm above the crown. PVC ducts shall be jointed by using the solvent cement method and be made watertight as far as possible. Where PVC ducting crosses under roads, the trench shall be prepared and concrete of at least 100mm be poured to surround the duct. For temporary storage in the field, where racks are not available, care should be taken that the ground is level and free from loose stones; pipes stored thus shall not exceed three layers high and shall be stacked to prevent movement.
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
24.0.3 Internal Conduit a) The installation in general shall be concealed in the walls, roof slab and sub-floor, using PVC conduits. The type of PVC conduit to be used and the method of installation shall be as described elsewhere in the Specification. The Contractor shall supply and install all distribution cases, telephone outlets and draw-in boxes as indicated on the Drawings. If any additional draw-in boxes are required, then these shall be so located as to exclude in any way the possibility of overhearing.
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) The conduit work, distribution cases, etc erected for the telephone system shall be used solely for telephone cables and under no circumstances shall it be used for cables belonging to other services. Full separation of the telephone network from any other electrical circuit and minimum distance allowed by the Regulations shall be maintained.
24.0.4 Cabling a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the works as indicated on the Drawings and described in the Specification. The internal wiring to the various telephone points shall be in accordance with BS 3573:1990, individual 3-core cables; each core shall be 0.8mm diameter diameter tinned copper with minimum 0.4mm thick PVC. The cores shall be uniformly twisted together so that cross-talk in the compete table is negligible. Each core shall have the approved colour code. The external cables shall be of jelly filled construction with the following characteristics to BS 3575:1990: Outer Jacket: High molecular weight low density polyethylene and flooded with the filling compound such as polyethylene modified petrolatum. Case Covering : Non hygroscopic dielectric tape. Conductor Insulation: High density polyethylene or polypropylene. Insulation of conductors to be fully colour coded. Filling Compound: Polyethylene modified petrolatum or other suitable compound approved by G.T.O. Conductor : Solid annealed copper. The insulation resistance between the line conductors should not be less than 50 Megohms, measured at a voltage of 250V a.c. d) The cables shall be BICC (agent Abdul Aziz & Bros. tel. 714130) or other equal and approved.
b)
c)
24.0.5 Distribution & Sub Distribution Cabinets a) The telephone cabinets shall be of the outdoor type, constructed from glass fibre polyester. The unit shall be fully tropicalised and suitable for operation in local conditions (ambient temperature of 50C, relative humidity of 95%).
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) All exposed metal work shall be blast cleaned to BS7079-0:1990 second quality, and given one coat of Lead Zinc primer followed by undercoat and at least two coats of Grey low shine top coat. Internal metalwork with the exception of metal conductors, etc. shall be protected in a similar manner to the external metalwork. Alternatively anti-condensation finish may be applied on a suitable primer. It is essential that pairs of wires shall not be split. The distribution cases shall provide separate terminals for incoming and outgoing cables with cross-connection facilities. Cable conductors shall be wired with approximately 100mm of slack to the soldering tags and the crossconnections terminated on screw-terminals. The ends of two conductors shall not be placed under the same terminal unless the terminal is suitably designed for this purpose. Spare conductors which are not wired to terminal shall be left long enough to reach any terminal. They shall be neatly laced together and stowed at the side of the box so as not to form an obstruction to other wiring. The distribution cabinets shall be Siemens (agent Waleed Associates tel. 738105) or other equal and approved.
c)
d)
e)
End of Section
25.0.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 25.0.1 General a) The works include for the automatic fire detection system to comply in every respect with the requirements of BS5839 1 to 8 and BS5454. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete operational system as indicated on the Drawings and described in the Specification. All fire alarm equipment shall be supplied from one approved manufacturer. The fire alarm equipment shall comprise break glass fire alarm contacts, smoke and heat detectors, bells, control/indicator panels, etc. There shall be one panel in each building as indicated on the drawings and monitoring stations as indicated. The number of zones shall be determined by the layout of the building. The system shall be of the addressable type and shall include volt free contacts (two per panel) for monitoring an alarm or a fault by the BMS. The control/indicator panel shall be provided with audible and visual signals, which shall operate in the event of initiating circuit fault, sounder circuit fault, charger failure, mains failure, DC fuse failure and battery disconnection fault, in addition to a fire alarm.
b)
c)
d)
e)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST 25.0.2 Control/Indicator Panel a) This shall comply with the above referenced standard and the requirements of the local Fire Authority. The control/indicator panel shall comprise the following: i) ii) iii) The number of zones detailed elsewhere. Common fire indication. Zonal fire indication of alarm when an alarm initiated point is actuated. Zones alarm. Fault visual sound indication with fault sounder silencing and continued fault indication. Detector line monitoring for open circuit. External sounder line monitoring for open circuit and short circuit. Charger and battery monitoring. Silence alarm switch and bring-in supervisory buzzer. Reset switch. Fault output for remote indication. Evacuate warning causing all sounders to operate continuously by manual operation of the evacuate switch. Automatic signalling of the system state conditions to a remote manned centre. The panel shall have provision for linking with the air conditioning control panel and ensure its cut-off in the event of fire alarm condition.
b)
iv) v)
vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) xii)
xiii)
xiv)
25.0.3 Battery/Charger Unit a) The control/indicator panel shall have its own battery/charger unit installed next to it. The battery/charger unit shall be connected to the mains supply through a 13A DP fused spur unit and shall be exclusive to the alarm system. The batteries shall be maintained in an adequately charged conditions by the AC mains operated charger. The capacity of the fully charged batteries
b)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST shall be such that it is capable of maintaining the system in full operation for 48 hours and thereafter to operate the alarm continuously for a period of one hour. The charger shall be capable, whilst continuing to supply the standing load, of automatically re-charging the battery sufficiently within 8 hours for it to supply the maximum alarm load for at least half an hour. c) The main feed to the power supply equipment of the fire alarm system shall be segregated from the wiring of all other services.
25.0.4 Alarm Initiating Points a) The alarm initiating points shall be installed at the location indicated on the Drawings. Manual Call Points shall be coloured 'Signal Red' as defined in BS381C over at least 50% of their visible area. A replaceable glass cover shall be incorporated; breaking the glass shall automatically operate the call point. Manual call points shall be flush mounted wherever possible and be key operated in areas where there is a risk of abuse. They shall be mounted at a height of 1350mm above the floor and shall be similar to MK 34000 series addressable call points. Smoke detectors shall be of two types, the ionisation chamber smoke and photo-electrosonic smoke, detecting the presence of smoke in the atmosphere but at the same time avoiding the detection of very small quantities of smoke not indicative of a fire condition. These shall also be suitable to operate under the Sultanate of Oman's weather conditions. Heat Detectors shall be of the solid state type operating on the rate of temperature rise. The detectors will be used in high ambient areas mounted at high level in false ceilings to detect an unusual rate of temperature rise or abnormally high temperatures.
b)
c)
g)
25.0.5 Alarm Sounders The alarm sounders shall be 24V bells, 150mm diameter made of high quality steel, designed to produce a loud penetrating alarm sound. These shall be finished in 'Fire Red' paint. 25.0.6 Conduit Framework All conduits for the fire alarm system shall be black enameled steel conduit and used exclusively for the fire alarm system. The method of installation shall be described in other sections of the Specification. 25.0.7 Cabling a) All wiring must conform to the current edition of the I.E.E. Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings and all materials used must meet the current Specification of the British Standards Institution.
b)
Wiring shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and employing Fire Resistant Cables FP200 or equal, enclosed in steel conduits, separated from all other services. Cables shall be not less than 2.5mm2 cable, and where equipment terminals will not accept 2.5 mm2 cable then flush wiring cable termination boxes shall be installed adjacent, incorporating fixed porcelain base connector blocks. Final connection thence shall be made in 1.5mm2 cable. Two conductors shall be provided for each zone for the trigger circuits and alarms. A small direct current shall be passed through each alarm initiating circuit to monitor the lines and power detectors. When a trigger device operates, the appropriate zone's 'Fire' lamps shall be illuminated (light emitting diode units) and the alarm sounders shall operate. To silence the alarm sounders, the indicator panel switch shall be operated, followed by the 'Cancel Alarm Sounders' push. Operating this push button as well as silencing the audible alarm sounders, shall bring into operation the indicator's internal supervisory sounder. When the emergency has been dealt with and the trigger device returned to the normal, non-operated state, then the zone can be re-set. To re-set the zone the switch shall be operated, followed by the Zone Re-set push. Operation of this push shall extinguish the'Fire' LEDs and silence the supervisory sounder, thus returning the system to normal.
c)
d)
e)
f)
25.0.8 Testing and Commissioning a) Testing and commissioning shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS5839-1:1988. This shall be carried out by an authorised technical representative of the manufacturer and an official certificate shall be provided.
b)
End of Section
26.0.0 TV CENTRAL ANTENNA AND SOUND SYSTEM 26.0.1 General a) The works include for supply and installation of all external ducting and internal conduit framework and also installation of T.V. and sound systems cables supplied by others. The Contractor shall co-operate closely with the systems specialist for any type of special termination boxes.
b)
26.0.2 External Ducting a) The external ducting shall be a combination of UPVC pipes and manholes. The routing and size of the ducting and exact location of manholes shall be as indicated on the Drawings. All the pipework shall be PVC cable ducting as manufactured by Yorkshire Plastics Ltd. (agent Muna Noor tel. 603251/603935) or other equal and approved, to BS3506:1969, stored and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All pipes shall be laid at a depth of 600mm minimum except where detailed information is given on the Drawings.
b)
c)
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST d) To avoid possible damage or deformation of the pipe, the ground in which it is laid shall be made as uniform as possible and materials in contact with the pipes shall be free of large stones, sharp edged flints and other hard objects. The trench bottom shall be carefully examined and any projections removed. In areas where work or variable soil containing large stones, boulders, tree roots or soft pockets, a prepared well compacted bed of 75mm thickness made of selected granular material shall be necessary. In all cases, care should be taken to remove any levelling pegs or temporary packing such as wooden planks and wedges. Selected granular material shall then be carefully placed and compacted alongside the underside of the pipes upto and more than 75mm above the crown. PVC ducts shall be jointed by using the solvent cement method and be made watertight as far as possible. Where PVC ducting crosses under roads, the trench shall be prepared and concrete of at least 100mm be poured to surround the duct. For temporary storage in the field, where racks are not available, care should be taken that the ground is level and free from loose stones; pipe stacks thus shall not exceed three layers high and shall be staked to prevent movement.
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
26.0.3 Internal Conduit a) The installation, in general, shall be concealed in the walls, roof slab and sub-floor, using PVC conduits. The type of PVC conduit to be used and the method of installation shall be as described elsewhere in the Specification. No other cables of the electric system shall be introduced into these conduits.
b)
c)
End of Section
27.0.0 CALL BELL SYSTEM 27.0.1 General a) The call bell system shall be cordless operation activated through an hand held remote or hard-wired push-button transmitter to a concealed receiver. The receivers shall be positioned at strategic locations concealed in the false ceiling or other suitable locations for maximum coverage of the required areas taking into account the normal range of the receiver. There should be a minimum distance between receivers of 5.0m. Hardwiring between the treceivers and the annunciators shall be completed after propergation coverage tests have been carried out. The annunciator panels shall audible and visual and be located as indicated on the drawings, normally in the ADC's office. The system shall brand Pulnix as manufactured bby Takenaka Engineering Co. Ltd. or equal and approved.
b)
c) d)
e)
f)
End of Section
28.0.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 28.0.1 General The Lightning Protection System shall be in full compliance with Code of Practice BS 6651:1992 "THE PROTECTION OF STRUCTURE AGAINST LIGHTNING". All the materials shall be as manufactured by Furse, (agent BEC tel. 797581) or other equal and approved. 28.0.2 Air Termination The number and location of the finials, which shall be 16mm diameter copper or phosphor bronze or naval brass, shall be as indicated on the Drawings. These shall be interconnected by a perimeter roof tape of high conductivity copper of minimum dimensions 25mm x 3mm, securely fixed to the structure by means of non metallic D.C. clips. 28.0.3 Down Conductor a) When a down conductor connects to a finial, the joint shall be readily accessible for inspection. From air termination there shall be a down conductor connected to an earth termination by means of a test link. No other connections shall be made to a down conductor below the test link.
PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST b) The down conductor shall be of high conductivity copper tape 20 x 3 mm section and shall be secured in position by means of special fixing clips for copper tape.
28.0.4 Earth Termination a) The resistance of the earthing network to the general mass of earth shall not in any event exceed the value of 10 0hm. In the event of failure to obtain this value, the Contractor shall either increase the length of the earth electrodes or use more rods in parallel at distance exceeding the length of the longest earthing rod. All earthing rods shall be bonded with tape laid at a depth of 500mm. The Contractor shall ensure that the whole of the system shall be laid in non corrosive soil.
b)
End of Section
29.0.0 THE GENERAL SPECIFICATION DETAILED INDEX

1.0.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 1.1.9 Specifications & Drawings Abbreviations Standard of Workmanship & Materials Proprietary Materials Local Materials Storage of Materials Materials Generally Approval of Materials and Samples Single Source 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
1.1.10 Inspection and Testing 1.1.11 Test Certificates

1.1.12 Name of Manufacturers and Copies of Orders 1.1.13 Spare Parts and As Built Drawings 1.1.14 Fire Protection 2.0.0 DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 3.0.0 Temporary Work and Protection of Works Plant and Equipment Dust Demolition Materials Making Good Services
4 5 5
6 6 6 6 7 7
EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK 3.1.0 General 3.1.1 3.2.0 Nature of the Ground 8
Material 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 Backfill Material Imported Fill Hardcore Stone Pitching / Mortared Rip Rap Crusher Dust Fines Anti Termite Treatment 8 8 10 10 11 11
3.3.0
Workmanship 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 Earthworks Method Correct Widths and Depths of Excavations Method of Excavation Shoring Excavations Moisture Content of Backfilling Material or Imported Fill Compaction of Backfilling Material or Imported Fill 12 12 12 12 13 13
3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9
Trimming of Slope Draining of Excavation Excavation in Rock and Boulder Rock
13 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 16 16
3.3.10 Explosives and Blasting 3.3.11 Unsuitable Material 3.3.12 Disposal of Surplus Excavated Material 3.3.13 Trench Excavation In Existing Roads or Well Used Tracks 3.3.14 Protection of Services 3.3.15 Trenches Not To Be Left Open 3.3.16 Compaction of Hardcore 3.3.17 Anti Termite Spray 4.0.0 CONCRETE WORKS 4.1 General 4.1.1 4.1.2 Description of works Related Standards
18 18
4.1.3 4.1.4
Reference documents for Concrete work. Reference documents for reinforcement work.
18 18
4.1.5
General Approvals 4.1.5.1 Materials 4.1.5.2 Execution 19 20
4.2.0
Material 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 General Cement Aggregate Admixtures Silica Fume 20 21 22 24 26
4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9
Quality Control Water Quality Control Fibres
27 27 28 28 29 30 31 31 32
4.2.10 Quality Control 4.2.11 Materials tests and Frequencies 4.2.12 Reinforcement 4.2.12.1 4.2.12.2 4.3.0 General Quality Control
Workmanship - Concrete 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 General Concrete Types Mix Design Trial Mixes Mixing of Concrete 4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2 4.3.6 Ready-Mixed Concrete Quality Control 32 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 42 42 42 43 Quality Control 44 44 45
Transportation and Placing of Concrete 4.3.6.1 4.3.6.2 4.3.6.3 Quality Control Hot Weather Precautions Compaction
4.3.7
Curing 4.3.7.1
4.3.8 4.3.9 4.4.0
Temperature Control Concrete Tolerances
Workmanship - Reinforcement 4.4.1 General 45


4.4.2 4.4.3 Cutting and Bending Labelling and Storage 4.4.3.1 4.4.4 Quality Control 46 46 47 47 49 49
Fixing of Reinforcement 4.4.4.1 Quality Control
4.4.5 4.5.0
Laps and Joints
Workmanship - Formwork 4.5.1 4.5.2 General Design and Construction 4.5.2.1 4.5.3 Quality Control 49 50 51 52 52 52 53 53 53 53 54 54 54 54 54 55 55 56 56
Re-use of Formwork 4.5.3.1 Quality Control
4.5.4 4.5.5
Stripping of Formwork Construction Joints 4.5.5.1 Quality Control
4.6.0
Worked Finishses on In-situ Concrete 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 Timing Wood Floated Finish Trowelled finish to receive floor finishes Trowelled finish for concrete wearing surfaces Formed Finishes 4.6.5.1 4.6.5.2 4.6.5.3 Basic Finishs Grade I Plain Smooth Finish Grade 2 Fine Smooth Finish Grade 3
4.7.0 4.8.0
Microconcrete Pre-Cast Concrete
5.0.0
BLOCKWORK
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
Scope of Work Related Standards General Approvals Materials 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 Blocks Cement Aggregate Water Lime Admixtures Wall Ties Compressive Joint Filler
57 57 57
58 59 59 59 59 59 59 60
5.5
Execution 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 Storage and handling on site Mortar, batching and mixing Block Walling 5.5.3.1 General Treatment of Junctions Allowance for Services Bedding Frames Movement Joints Protection 60 60 61 61 62 63 63 63 63
5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8 6.0.
PROTECTION OF SUBSTRUCTURE 6.1 6.2 General Materials 6.2.1 6.2.2 General External protection below ground 64 65 65 66

6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 Fibre reinforced bituminous paint Accessories for Tanking Systems Penetrations through Membranes Protection to Vertical Tanking Membrane Damp proof-courses (DPC) between external walls and slab/foundation 66 67 67 67
67
6.3
Applications 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 Membrane application Surface preparation General details Drainage and Pipes Vertical application Inspection Protection Precautions Fibre-reinforced bituminous paint application 68 68 68 68 69 69 69 69 70
7.0.0
ROOFING 7.1.0 Material 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.1.7 7.1.8 7.1.9 Cement and Water Sand Lightweight Concrete Roof Screed Insulation Vapour Barrier Waterproofing Systems Waterproofing Membrane Solar Shield Aluminium Flashings 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 72 72 72
7.1.10 Aluminium Angle Trim

7.1.11 Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets 7.1.12 Hot Dipped Galvanised Corrugated Steel Sheets 7.1.13 Profiled Aluminium Sheets 7.1.14 Profiled Steel Sheets 7.1.15 Steel/Aluminium Roof Sheeting 7.2.0 Workmanship 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9 General Delivery of Materials Storage of Materials Inspection of Surfaces Built-up Roofing System Lightweight Concrete Roof Screed Aluminium Flashing Aluminium Edge Trim Domes
72 72 72 72 72
73 73 73 74 74 74 74 74 75 75 76 76 78 78 78
7.2.10 Asbestos Cement Corrugated Sheets 7.2.11 Hot Dipped Galvanised Corrugated Steel Sheets 7.2.12 Profiled Aluminium Sheets 7.2.13 Testing 7.2.14 Protection 7.2.15 Cleaning 8.0.0 WOODWORK 8.0.1 8.0.2 8.0.3 8.0.4 8.0.5 Standards Materials Moisture Content Preservative Treatment Damp Proof Course
79 80 83 84 85

8.0.6 8.0.7 8.0.8 8.0.9 Manufactured Boards Veneers & Veneering High Pressure Plastic Laminate Adhesives 86 87 89 90 92 92 93 94 94 95 95 96 97 99 105 105 109 109 110
8.0.10 Framing Anchors 8.0.11 Framing Supports 8.0.12 Steel Framework 8.0.13 Nails, Screws, Bolts and Fastenings 8.0.14 Plugging and Screwing 8.0.15 Pelleting 8.0.16 Material Approval Submission (M.A.S.) 8.0.17 Mock-Ups and Samples 8.0.18 Working Drawings 8.0.19 Workmanship 8.0.20 Priming and Sealing 8.0.21 Finishing 8.0.22 Protection 8.0.23 Inspection 8.0.24 Warranty 8.1.0 Carpentry and Joinery 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.2.0 Door & Window Frames Door & Window Leaves Glass & Mirror Timber Entrance Gates Ancillary & Other General Joinery Works Ironmongery Fitting
110 115 121 122 123 123 135

Fitted and Loose Cabinetry
8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7 8.2.8 8.3.0
Chairs, Framed Sofas & Occasional Tables Glass & Mirror Fully Upholstered Sofa Seating Soft Furnishings Ironmongery Fitting
140 145 146 147 148
Specific Parameters for the Requirements of Ironmongery Fitting 149 Beds and Headboards Cane Furniture 155 158
Ironmongery 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8 8.3.9 Standards Materials Door and Window/Screen Ironmongery Hinges Floor Springs Overhead Door Closers Door Stops Lever Action Flush Bolts Floor Bolt Sockets 160 160 162 162 164 165 165 166 167 167 169 171 171 173 174 175 175 176
8.3.10 Lock Cases 8.3.11 Cylinder Locks 8.3.12 Croft Door Bolt 8.3.13 Lever Action Door Furniture 8.3.14 Centre Dead Knob Door Furniture 8.3.15 Pull Handles & Push Plates 8.3.16 Cylinder Roses / Escutcheons 8.3.17 Entrance Gates - Custom Ironmongery 8.3.18 Window / Screen Knobs
8.3.19 Adjustable Roller Catches 8.3.20 Window Locks & Bolts 8.3.21 Neoprene Door & Window/Screen Seals 8.3.22 Automatic Door Bottom Seal 8.3.23 Cabinetry Ironmongery 8.3.24 Cabinet Pivot Sliding Door Fittings 8.3.25 Cabinet Extending TV Turntable 8.3.26 Cabinet Catches 8.3.27 Cabinet Shelf Supports 8.3.28 Cabinet Drawer Runners 8.3.29 Cabinet Door Hinges 8.3.30 Cabinet Knobs & Handles 8.3.31 Wardrobe Hanging Rails 8.3.32 Ancillary Fittings 8.3.33 Scheduling 8.3.34 Material Approval Submission (M.A.S.) 8.3.35 Receiving & Delivery 8.3.36 Warranty
176 177 178 180 181 181 182 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 190 191
9.0.0
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK AND METAL WORK 9.1 Material 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 9.1.4 9.1.5 9.2 Steel Nuts, Bolts and Screws Aluminium Aluminium Windows, Doors and Screens Roller Shutters 192 192 193 193 193
Workmanship

9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.5 9.2.6 9.2.7 9.2.8 9.2.9 General Welding Galvanising Erection of Structural Steelwork Castings Bedding of Column Bases Aluminium Windows, Doors and Screens Finishing Installation 193 194 194 194 195 195 196 197 197 197 198
9.2.10 Storage and Handling 9.2.11 Protection 10.0.0 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHINGS 10.0.1 General 10.0.2 Drawings 10.0.3 Samples 10.1.0 Materials 10.1.1 Cement, Sand and Water 10.1.2 Granolithic 10.1.3 Terrazzo Tiles 10.1.4 Quarry Tiles 10.1.5 Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tiles 10.1.6 PVC Tiles 10.1.7 Glazed Wall Tiles 10.1.8 Skirtings 10.1.9 Floor Hardener 10.1.10 Gypsum Wall Plaster 10.1.11 Wall Render
199 199 199
199 199 199 200 200 200 200 200 201 201 201

10.1.12 Ceiling Render 10.1.13 Textured Paint Finish 10.1.14 Expanded Metal Lathing 10.1.15 Gypsum Works 10.2.0 Workmanship 10.2.1 Surfaces 10.2.2 Floor Screeds 10.2.3 Terrazzo Tiles 10.2.4 Quarry Tiles 10.2.5 Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tiles 10.2.6 PVC Tiles 10.2.7 Glazed Wall Tiles 10.2.8 Suspended Ceilings 10.2.9 Expanded Metal Lathing 10.3.0 Gypsum Works 10.3.1 Manufacture 10.3.2 Installation 10.3.3 Protection 11.0.0 GLAZING 11.1.0 Materials 11.1.1 Clear Float or Polished Plate Glass 11.1.2 Clear Sheet Glass 11.1.3 Cast Glass 11.1.4 Wired Glass 11.1.5 Mirrors 11.1.6 Putty 11.2.0 Workmanship
201 201 201 202
202 202 203 203 203 203 203 203 204
204 204 205
206 206 206 206 206 206 206

11.2.1 Preparation 11.2.2 Glazing 11.2.3 Mirrors 11.2.4 Beads and Wash-Leather 11.2.5 Protection 12.0.0 PAINTING AND DECORATING 12.1.0 Materials 12.1.1 General 12.1.2 Knotting 12.1.3 Primers 12.1.4 Stopping 12.1.5 Bituminous Paint 12.1.6 Cement Based External Paint 12.1.7 Waterproof and Chemical Resistant Paint 12.1.8 Paint Finish(Vandal Resistant) 12.1.9 Clear Finish 12.1.10 Sundries 12.2.0 Workmanship 12.2.1 Generally 12.2.2 Acceptance of Surfaces 12.2.3 Preparation of Surfaces 12.2.4 Quality of Work 13.0.0 SPECIALIST PAINTING, DECORATING & GOLD PLATING 13.1.0 Material 13.1.1 General 13.1.2. Etching Primer 13.1.3 Rust Inhibitors
206 207 208 208 208
209 209 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 210
210 211 212 214
216 216 216


13.1.4 Knotting 13.1.5 Stopping (Woodwork) 13.1.6 Thinners 13.1.7 Stain 13.1.8 Polyurethane Lacquer 13.1.9 Varnish 13.1.10 Linseed Oil 13.1.11 Priming/Undercoating 13.1.12 Finishing Paints 13.1.13 Alkyd Based Paint Systems 13.1.14 Water Based Paint Systems 13.2.0 Workmanship 13.2.1 General 13.2.2 Painting to Concrete, Block work or Plaster 13.2.3 Varnishing 13.2.4 Painting to Woodwork 13.2.5 Painting to Metalwork 13.3.0 Specialist Finishing 13.3.1 Tinted Glazes 13.3.2 Textured Finishes 13.3.3 Protection 13.3.4 Gold Leafing 13.4.0 Gold Plating 13.4.1 All Ironmongery, Sanitary Accessories and Electrical Switch Plates 13.4.2 Light Fittings 14.0 MARBLE & GRANITE WORK 14.0.1 General
216 216 216 216 216 217 217 217 217 218 218
218 219 220 220 221
221 221 222 222
223
223
224

14.0.2 Shop Drawings 14.0.3 Samples 14.0.4 Programme 14.1.0 Material 14.1.1 Marbles/granite 14.2.0 Workmanship 14.2.1 Laying and Fixing 226 225 224 224 225
15.0.0 EXTERNAL WORKS 15.1.0 General 15.1.1 Specification to Other Work Sections 15.2.0 Material 15.2.1 Desert Fill 15.2.2 15.2.3 Precast Concrete Kerbs and Edgings Precast Concrete Paving Slabs 229 229 229 229
15.3.0 Road works 15.3.1 Bituminous Paving 15.3.2 Sub Base 15.3.3 Bituminous Prime Coat 15.3.4 Bituminous Tack Coat 15.3.5 Bituminous Base Course 15.3.6 Bituminous Wearing Course 15.3.7 Bituminous Surface Treatment 15.3.8 Single Surface Treatment 15.3.9 Double Surface Treatment 15.3.10 Chain Link Fencing 15.3.11 Landscaping 15.4.0 Workmanship 15.4.1 Excavation
229 230 230 230 230 230 231 231 231 231 232
232
15.4.2 Sub-Bases and Road Bases 15.4.3 Laying Precast Concrete Kerbs and Edgings 15.4.4 Laying Precast Concrete Paving Slabs 15.4.5 Chain Link Fencing 15.4.6 Backfilling of Excavations other than Sewer Trench 15.4.7 Landscaping 15.4.8 Grass 15.4.9 Preparation for Shrubs and Trees 15.4.10 Staking Trees 15.4.11 Planting Trees 235 15.4.12 Tying Trees 15.4.13 Planters 15.5.0 Maintenance of Grass, Plants, Etc. 16.0.0 BUILDING SERVICES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16.1.0 Notes for Guidance 16.1.1 Purpose 16.1.2 Definition 16.1.3 Scope of Work 16.2.0 General 16.2.1 Contract Drawings 16.2.2 Safety Precautions 16.2.3 Maintenance of Finishes 16.2.4 Extent of Contract, Site and Inspection 16.2.5 Restrictions 16.2.6 Progress 16.2.7 Handling of Materials 16.2.8 Protection
232 233 233 233 234 234 235 235 235
236 236 236
238 238 238
238 239 239 239 239 240 240 241


16.2.9 Upholding of Public Property 16.2.10 Drawings and Documents 16.2.11 Working Drawings 16.2.12 General Specification 16.2.13 Manufacturers Data 16.2.14 As Built Drawings 16.2.15 Builder's Work 16.2.16 Water 16.2.17 Setting Out 16.2.18 Check of Details 16.2.19 Damage to Materials 16.2.20 Supervision 16.2.21 Materials and Testing of Materials 16.2.22 Testing on Completion 16.2.23 Marking & Labels 16.2.24 Alignment of Accessories 16.2.25 Oil and Grease 16.2.26 Keys 16.2.27 Precommissioning Procedure 16.2.28 Painting 16.2.29 Foundation Bolts Etc. 16.2.30 Guards 16.2.31 Welding 16.2.32 Operation & Maintenance Manuals 16.2.33 Colour Codes For Piping 16.2.34 Spare Parts 16.2.35 Tools 16.2.36 Tropicalisation
241 241 242 244 244 245 245 247 247 247 247 247 248 249 249 250 251 251 251 251 252 252 253 253 254 254 255 255
16.2.37 Standard and Codes of Practice 17.0.0 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION 17.1.0 General 17.2.0 Ductwork and Accessories 17.2.1 Sheet Metal Trunking 17.2.2 Supports 17.2.3 Dampers 17.2.4 Splitters and Turning Vanes 17.2.5 Grilles and Diffusers 17.2.6 Plenum Boxes 17.2.7 Flexible Connections 17.2.8 Circular Flexible Ducting 17.2.9 Belt Guards 17.2.10 Kitchen Extract Canopies 17.3.0 Drives 17.3.1 General 17.3. 2 Variable Pitch Pulleys 17.3.3 Safety Guards 17.4.0 Fans 17.4.1 General 17.4.2 Fan Drives 17.4.3 Centrifugal Fans 17.4.4 Extract Ventilation Units 17.4.5 Fire Protection 17.5.0 Air Filters 17.5.1 General 17.5.2 Fire Precautions
255
257
257 259 259 260 260 261 261 261 262 262
263 263 263
264 264 264 265 266
266 266

17.5.3 Holding Frames 17.5.4 Bag Type Air Filters 17.5.5 Air Filters - Washable Panel Type 17.5.6 Grease Filters 17.5.7 Testing and Regulation 17.6.0 Noise and Vibration Elimination 17.6.1 Noise in Rooms 17.6.2 Vibration 17.6.3 Requirements 17.6.4 Guidelines 17.6.5 Anti-Vibration Mounts 17.6.6 Flexible Connections 17.6.7 Sound Attenuators 17.6.8 Acoustic Insulation 17.6.9 Acoustic Treatment to Plant Rooms 17.6.10 Return Air Paths 17.6.11 External Noise 18.0.0 PIPED SERVICES 18.0.1 Piping Generally 18.0.2 Pipe Brackets, Supports and Hangers 18.0.3 Pipe Sleeves 18.1.0 Chilled Water Pipework and Fittings 18.1.1 General 18.1.2 Provision for Expansion 18.1.3 Air Vents 18.1.4 Drains 18.1.5 Valves 18.1.6 Strainers
267 267 267 268 268
268 269 269 269 270 270 271 271 271 272 272
273 274 275 275 275 276 276 277 277 277
18.1.7 Underground Chilled Water Pipework 18.1.8 Cold Feed and Expansion Tank (for open System) 18.1.9 Cold Feed and Pressurization Unit (for closed System) 18.1.10 Condensate Drains 18.1.11 Water Treatment 18.2.0 Chilled and Condenser Water Pumps 18.2.1 General 18.2.2 Construction 18.2.3 Pump Drives 18.2.4 Special Requirements 18.3.0 Hot and Cold Water 18.3.1 General 18.3.2 Incoming Mains 18.3.3 Tubing and Fittings 18.3.4 Provision for Expansion 18.3.5 Drains 18.3.6 Cold Water Tanks 18.3.7 Valves and Cocks 18.3.8 Unions 18.3.9 Branches to Fittings 18.3.10 Electric Water Heaters 18.3.11 Jointing Materials 18.3.12 Washing Out 18.3.13 Chlorination of Tanks, Cisterns & Services 18.3.14 Test Pressure 18.3.15 Water Filter 18.4.0 External Water Services
278 278 279 279 279
281 281 282 282
282 283 283 283 283 283 284 285 285 285 286 286 286 286 286
18.4.1 General 18.4.2 Connection to Existing Supply System 18.4.3 Pipework and Fittings 18.4.4 Valves General 18.4.5 Bedding and Backfilling 18.4.6 Test Pressure 18.4.7 Washing-Out and Chlorination 18.5.0 Drainage 18.5.1 General 18.5.2 Pipework and Fittings (above Ground Floor Level) 18..5.3 Pipework and Fittings (Underground) 18..5.4 Pipework and Fittings (Special Requirements) 18.5.5 Floor Drains 18.5.6 Testing 18.5.7 Bedding 18.5.8 Backfilling 18.5.9 Pipe Laying 18.5.10 Internal Manholes 18.5.11 External Manholes 18.5.12 Pipeline Marking 18.5.13 Grease Trap 18.6.0 Fire Protection 18.6.1 Statutory Requirements 18.6.2 Hand Held Fire Fighting Appliances 18.6.3 Fire Hydrants 18.6.4 Extinguishing System 18.6.5 Hose Reels
287 287 287 287 288 288 288
288 288 289 289 290 290 291 291 292 292 292 292 292
293 293 293 293 294

18.6.6 Hose Reel Pump Set 18.7.0 Irrigation Works 18.7.1 General 18.7.2 Connection to Existing Water Main 18.7.3 Pipework Irrigation 18.7.4 Pipework - Sub-Mains 18.7.5 Pipework Pumphouse 18.7.6 Pressurising Unit 18.7.7 Fertilizer Dispensing Tank 18.7.8 Filter Unit 18.7.9 Water Meters 18.7.10 Pressure Gauges 18.7.11 Valves 18.7.12 Pressure Regulators 18.7.13 Emitters 18.7.14 Hose Points 18.7.15 Pipe Trench Bedding 18.7.16 Pipe Trench Backfill 18.7.17 Pipeline Marking 18.7.18 Testing 18.8.0 Liquefied Petroleum Gas (Butane) Installations 18.8.1 General 18.8. 2 Gas Pipework 18.8.3 Valves and Regulators 18.8.4 Gas Cylinders 18.8.5 Testing and Commissioning 18.9.0 Swimming Pools and Water Features
294
295 295 295 296 296 297 297 298 298 299 299 300 300 300 300 301 302 302
303 303 304 305 305

18.9.1 General 18.10.0 Refrigeration Pipework 19.0.0 THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION 19.0.1 Scope of Work 19.0.2 Hot & Cold Pipework in Internal Chases & Voids 19.0.3 Low Temperature Pipework 19.0.4 Air Handling Units, Condensing Units & Packaged Units 19.0.5 Sheet Metal Ductwork 19.0.6 Fixing Insulation to Metal Surfaces 19.0.7 Vapour Sealing of Penetrations 19.0.8 Vapour Barrier and Protection to Insulation 19.0.9 Insulated Builders Work Plenums 19.0.10 Painting 19.0.11 Installation Work 19.0.12 Weatherproofing 19.0.13 Quality of Materials 19.0.14 Testing 19.0.15 Information to be Supplied by Specialist 20.0.0 ELECTRICAL SERVICES 20.0.1 Electrical Works in Connection with Mechanical Equipment & Contractors 20.0.1 General 20.0.2 Air-conditioning Control Panels 20.0.3 Control Gear 20.0.4 Motors 20.0.5 Water Heater Control 21.0.0 H.V. DISTRIBUTION AND SUBSTATION 21.0.1 General 21.0.2 Testing on Completion.
306 306
307 308 308 308 308 309 309 310 310 310 310 311 311 311 312
313 313 313 314 315
316
21.1.0 11 KV RING MAIN UNITS 21.1.1 General 21.2.0 Power Transformers 21.2.1 Continuous Maximum Ratings 21.2.2 Duty Under Fault Conditions 21.2.3 Impedance Value 21.2.4 Losses 21.2.5 Rating Diagram Property and Name Plates 21.2.6 Porcelain for Insulators 21.2.7 Insulating Oil 21.2.8 Corona 21.2.9 Noise 21.2.10 Suppression of Harmonics 21.2.11 Magnetic Circuit 21.2.12 Flux Density 21.2.13 Mechanical Construction of Cores 21.2.14 Windings and Insulation 21.2.15 Earthing Terminal 21.2.16 Transformer Tanks 21.2.17 Fittings 21.2.18 Breathers 21.2.19 Conservators 21.2.20 Tappings and Selection 21.2.21 Joints and Gaskets 21.2.22 11000/11500 Volt Cable Boxes 21.2.23 433/250 Volt Cable Boxes Unfilled 21.2.24 Site Tests - Power Transformers
316
318 319 319 319 319 319 320 320 320 320 320 320 321 321 322 322 323 323 323 323 323 324 324 324

21.3.0 11 KV Cables 21.3.1 General 21.3.2 Installation 21.3.3 Cable Ducts 21.4.0 Earthing System 21.4.1 General 22.0.0 L.V. DISTRIBUTION 22.0.1 General 22.0.2 Underground Cables 22.1.0 External Lighting 22.1.1 General 22.1.2 Security, Garden and Street Lighting 22.1.3 Combined Service Trenches 22.2.0 Internal Electrical Installation 22.2.1 Main LV Distribution Panel 22.2.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Panels Boards 22.2.3 Distribution Boards 22.2.4 Miniature Circuit Breakers 22.2.5 Fused Switches and Switch Fuses 22.2.6 Industrial Isolators 22.2.7 Busbar Riser Trunking 22.2.8 Electricity Meters 22.2.9 P.V.C. Insulated P.V.C. (PVC/PVC) 22.2.10 P.V.C. Insulated Cables 22.2.11 Silicone Insulated Cables 22.2.12 P.V.C. Insulated P.V.C. Sheathed Flexible Cords 22.2.13 Silicone Rubber Insulated Flexible Cords 22.2.14 Flexible Armoured Flexible Cords and Cables
324 325 326
328
330 330
331 331 332
332 333 334 334 335 335 335 336 337 337 338 338 338 338
22.2.15 Linked Polyethylene Insulated Armoured Cables (XLPE/SWA/PVC) 22.2.16 Cable Installation (General) 22.2.17 Cables on Hangers or Racks 22.2.18 Cables On Tray 22.2.19 Cable in Trunking 22.2.20 Cable in Conduit 22.2.21 Cable Joints and Terminations 22.2.22 Cable Tray 22.2.23 Steel Conduit Works 22.2.24 P.V.C. Conduit Works 22.2.25 Steel Cable Trunking 22.2.26 Floor Boxes 22.2.27 Wiring Systems 22.2.28 Labels 22.2.29 Earthing and Bonding 22.3.0 Accessories 22.3.1 Light Switches 22.3.2 General Purpose Socket Outlets 22.3.3 Spur Units 22.3.4 Push Switches 22.3.5 45A Cooker Control Units 22.3.6 Mounting Heights 23.0.0 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION AND FITTINGS 23.0.1 General 23.1.0 Chandeliers 23.1.1 General
338
338 340 340 341 341 342 343 343 345 346 347 347 348 348
348 349 349 350 350 350
352
353

23.2.0 Dimmer Controls 23.2.1 General 23.2.2 Lighting Control Systems 23.2.3 Power Handling Rack 23.2.4 Construction 23.2.5 Dimming and Switching Modules 23.2.6 Scene Processing 23.2.7 Regulating Balast Interface Module (RBI) 23.2.8 Mains Dimming Balast for Fluorescent T8 Tubes 23.2.9 Remote Control Plates(RCP) 23.2.10 Programming Plates (PP) 23.2.11 Dimmer Management System 23.2.12 Maximum Size of Lighting Control Panels 23.3.0 Furniture 23.3.1 General 23.4.0 Emergency Lighting 23.4.1 General 24.0.0 TELEPHONE SYSTEM 24.0.1 General 24.0.2 External Ducting 24.0.3 Internal Conduit 24.0.4 Cabling 24.0.5 Distribution & Sub Distribution Cabinets 25.0.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 25.0.1 General 25.0.2 Control/Indicator Panel 25.0.3 Battery/Charger Unit
354 355 355 357 357 359 359 360 360 361 361 363
363
364
365 365 366 366 367
368 368 369


25.0.4 Alarm Initiating Points 25.0.5 Alarm Sounders 25.0.6 Conduit Framework 250.7 Cabling 25.0.8 Testing and Commissioning 26.0.0 TV CENTRAL ANTENNA AND SOUND SYSTEM 26.0.1 General 26.0.2 External Ducting 26.0.3 Internal Conduit 27.0.0 CALL BELL SYSTEM 27.0.1 General 28.0.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 28.0.1 General 28.0.2 Air Termination 28.0.3 Down Conductor 28.0.4 Earth Termination 375 375 375 375 374 372 372 373 369 370 370 370 371

Civil Specification PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Civil Specification PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

3.2.2.1 Types of Fill (a) Fill Type A

Location to be used Type of soil

97% One test per 300-400m2 per layer

(b) Fill Type B

One test per 400-500m2 per layer

80% One test per 500-750m2 per layer

max. 2% max. 0.17 0.05% max. 4%

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

BS 4550 BS 3963: 1974

BS 5328: Part 4: 1990

BS 8000 Part 2 BS 8110 a) Part 1: 1997

Code of Practice circumstances.

General Approvals 4.1.5.1Materials

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

: Max, 1.0% by weight and max. 3.0% by volume. : Max. 2.0%

Absorption Magnesium Sulphate soundness Weight loss Organic impurities

: Max. 10% after five cycles

: Colour lighter than reference standard colour

Limits 90 100 -30 60 0 10 --

: Max 1.0% by weight : Max. 1.5% : Max. 25%

: Max. 10% after five cycles

: Expansion less than 0.05%

: Min. 100 kN.

Side Effects Normal side effects Side effects when overdosed

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

ASTM C40 ASTM C128/C127 ASTM C128/C127

Shell content Particle shape

BS 812, Part 106 BS 812, Part 105

Acid soluble chlorides(Cl-)BS 812, Part 117

BS 812 Part III,Part 112 Oven dried

BS 812, Part 120

ASTM C 295 and C289 ASTM C586

ASTM P214 and C227

4.2.12 Reinforcement 4.2.12.1 General

Workmanship Concrete 4.3.1 General

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

PROPOSED COMMERCIAL/RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AT FANJA WEST

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

AL ILHAM ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS